Blog

  • Get to Know the Meaning of Pancasila as the Foundation of the State, Its Functions & Symbols

    Getting to Know the Meaning of Pancasila as the Foundation of the State, Functions of Pancasila, and the symbol of Pancasila – Pancasila is a state foundation of the Republic of Indonesia. In it are the precepts that are used as the way of life of the Indonesian nation. The precepts contained in Pancasila have their own meanings that must be applied to the everyday life of every Indonesian.

    The following is the meaning and significance of the Pancasila symbol and its application to each of the precepts. Check out the following information.

    Pancasila meaning 

    The word Pancasila comes from Sanskrit, namely the word panca which means five and the word sila which has a basic meaning. When combined, Pancasila has the meaning of the five foundations of the Indonesian state.

    Pancasila, which is depicted with the symbol of a Garuda bird, has the meaning of being a source of strength. In addition, the golden color on the Garuda bird has a meaning as a symbol of glory.

     

    Pancasila function

    According to the book Pancasila as an ideology and the Foundation of the State, as a guideline for the Indonesian nation itself, Pancasila has nine functions that can be used by Indonesian people. Here are nine functions of Pancasila.

    • Pancasila is used as the state ideology
    • Pancasila is used as the basis of the state
    • Pancasila is used as the soul of the Indonesian nation
    • Pancasila is used as the personality of the Indonesian nation
    • Pancasila is used as the way of life of the Indonesian nation
    • Pancasila is used as the source of all applicable laws and the source of legal order in the Republic of Indonesia
    • Pancasila which is used as the noble agreement of the Indonesian nation
    • Pancasila is used as the ideals and goals of the Indonesian nation
    • Pancasila is used as a philosophy of life that unites the nation

    The Meaning of the Five Precepts in Pancasila

    As its function as a way of life, Pancasila is divided into five precepts that must be applied by every Indonesian in daily life. The following are the five precepts and their meanings.

    1. Belief in the One and Only God

    Belief in One Almighty God is the first precept in Pancasila which means that we as Indonesian citizens must have faith in and fear God. In this case, of course, adjusting to the religion that we profess and the beliefs that are owned by everyone.

    That way, this precept also has the meaning that we as a society living side by side must be able to respect each other among religious communities so that prosperity and a peaceful environment can be created.

    2. Just and Civilized Humanity

    Just and Civilized Humanity is the second precept in Pancasila which means that we as Indonesian citizens are asked to have an inner understanding of the equality of degrees in every human being, so that we can love and respect one another between individuals.

    Apart from that, in this precept we are also invited to look after and help one another, defend the existing truth and justice, and be able to cooperate with each other in creating peace in the surrounding environment and the Indonesian nation as a whole.

    3. Indonesian Unity

    Unity of Indonesia is the third precept in Pancasila which means that we as Indonesian citizens must always prioritize the goals of unity, unity and the interests of the common country rather than our individual interests.

    Also in this third precept, we are invited to have character and to be individuals who are willing and willing to sacrifice for the sake of achieving the independence of the Indonesian state, to show love for the Indonesian people as the motherland, and to have pride in the Indonesian state.

    4. Democracy Led by Wisdom and Wisdom in Representative Deliberations 

    Democracy Led by Wisdom and Wisdom in Deliberative Representatives is the fourth precept in Pancasila which means that we as citizens of the Indonesian state are invited not to impose personal will or desires, and to always put forward or prioritize common interests or the state.

    In making a decision in various scopes, both work and daily life we ​​are always faced with various choices that must be made. In this precept we are invited to make choices that put forward common goals and resolve existing problems by way of deliberation or discussion.

    5. Social Justice for All Indonesian People

    Social Justice for All Indonesian People is the fifth precept in Pancasila which means that we as Indonesian citizens are invited to be able to always behave fairly in all activities carried out, in making decisions that must be mutually agreed upon by carrying out mutual cooperation.

    In addition, we must also be able to have a balance between rights and obligations as Indonesian citizens by respecting the rights that other people have and continuing to carry out our obligations as Indonesian citizens.

    The Pancasila symbol and its meaning 

    As explained above, the symbol of Pancasila is a Garuda bird which is a picture of a power with a golden color that shows a symbol of glory.

    In addition, the Garuda bird, which is on the Pancasila symbol, consists of seventeen books, eight feathers on the tail, nineteen feathers at the base of the tail, and forty-five feathers on the neck to describe the time when the independence of the Indonesian state was proclaimed on August 17. 1945.

    Also on the Pancasila symbol, we can see a Garuda bird clutching a scroll that reads Bhinneka Tunggal Ika. In this case, Bhinneka Tunggal Ika has the meaning of unity that exists in diversity in Indonesia. Where even though Indonesian society consists of various tribes, races, and different cultures, they are still one unit.

    However, in the Pancasila symbol itself there is a shield, each part of which represents the symbol of the five precepts in Pancasila. The following is the meaning of the symbol that each precept has in Pancasila.

    1. The First Precepts of Pancasila

    The first precept, namely God Almighty is depicted with a star symbol which is given a golden color inside a black shield. This illustrates that every Indonesian is a society that believes in and fears God Almighty.

    The gold color symbolizes the meaning, namely the spiritual light that is owned by every human being. While the black color on the shield means the original color or the color of nature which shows God who is the source of all sources in this world.

    In addition, even with the differences and diversity of religions that are adhered to by everyone, they still respect each other and the beliefs they have.

    2. The Second Precept of Pancasila

    The second precept, namely Just and Civilized Humanity, is depicted by the symbol of a chain numbering seventeen and not breaking. As well as the existing chain, there are two shapes, namely a circle and also a rectangle. The circular shape on the chain represents women, and the rectangular shape on the chain represents men.

    By depicting this unbroken chain, it gives an illustration that every Indonesian society is a hereditary generation that is the successor to Indonesian independence and is interrelated and needs one another.

    3. The Third Precept of Pancasila

    The third precept, namely Indonesian Unity, is described by a banyan tree which is a shelter or shelter for every Indonesian. In addition, the banyan tree is also described as a symbol of the unity and integrity of the Indonesian people, because the banyan tree has a long single root that supports the tree’s growth and development.

    The banyan tree becomes a picture or philosophy that every Indonesian can take shelter and shelter under the auspices of the Indonesian nation because every community has the same degree and is mutually respected.

    4. The Fourth Precept of Pancasila

    The fourth precept, Democracy Led by Wisdom and Wisdom in Representative Deliberations is depicted through the bull’s head symbol, which has the meaning of people’s power in the quote in the RI BPIP. The bull’s head can also be interpreted as a social animal that often gathers like Indonesian people who do everything by deliberation.

    The bull’s head in the fourth precept can also be interpreted as a guide that shapes Indonesian society in discussing and also working together in solving a problem or finding a solution for the common good.

    5. The Fifth Precept of Pancasila

    The fifth precept, namely Social Justice for All Indonesian People, is illustrated by rice and cotton which gives the meaning of prosperity and welfare for the people of Indonesia. Rice can also be used as a symbol of feed, and cotton can be used as a symbol of clothing. Both of these are basic things or needs that must be fulfilled by every Indonesian people.

    This can also be interpreted, Indonesia as a country has the responsibility and obligation to be able to prosper everyone and put forward common interests, especially the Indonesian people.

    Points of Practice on Pancasila

    The first precept, Belief in One God

    • The Indonesian people declare their trust and devotion to God Almighty.
    • The Indonesian people have faith and piety to God Almighty, conform to their respective religions and beliefs on the basis of a just and civilized humanity.
    • Develop an attitude of mutual respect and cooperation for all adherents of religions.
    • Building harmony in an inter-religious environment.
    • Religion and beliefs held in relation to God Almighty are issues related to the personal relationship that a person has with God Almighty.
    • Developing mutual respect and freedom to practice worship in accordance with the religion and beliefs adhered to.
    • Do not force religion or belief on others.

    The second precept, Just and Civilized Humanity

    • Recognize and treat everyone according to their dignity and worth as creatures of God Almighty.
    • Acknowledging that there is no difference in every person, including the degree, rights, basic obligations of every human being, without discriminating.
    • Practice mutual love between each other.
    • Adopt an attitude of mutual consideration.
    • Develop an unselfish attitude towards one another.
    • Uphold existing human values.
    • Have a habit of doing humanitarian activities.
    • Able to defend the existing truth and justice.

    The third precept, Indonesian Unity

    • Able to place unity, integrity and common interests for the nation and state above personal interests.
    • Have the ability and willingness to sacrifice for the benefit of the nation and state.
    • Apply a sense of love for the nation and country.
    • Implementing a sense of pride in the homeland of Indonesia.
    • Developing existing Indonesian unity.
    • Maintaining the prevailing order based on freedom, eternal peace, and social justice.

    The fourth precept, Democracy Led by Wisdom and Wisdom in Representative Deliberations

    • As Indonesian people, we have the same position, rights and obligations.
    • Unable to impose personal desires or wishes on others.
    • Prioritize deliberation in decision making.
    • The deliberations carried out to reach a consensus were followed by a spirit of kinship.
    • Respect all agreed decisions.
    • Have good faith and a sense of responsibility in carrying out the results of decisions.
    • Common interests are always prioritized compared to personal and group interests in deliberations.

    The fifth precept, Social Justice for All Indonesian People

    • Develop actions that can reflect the attitude and atmosphere of kinship and mutual cooperation.
    • Apply fairness to everyone.
    • Able to maintain a balance of rights and obligations that are carried out.
    • Able to respect the rights of others.
    • Want and like to work hard.
    • Appreciate the work of others that can be useful for the progress and prosperity of all.
    • Carry out activities that can be a manifestation of equitable progress and social justice.

    Functions and Examples of Pancasila in Everyday Life

    1. Belief in the One and Only God

    • In life in the scope of learning and the world of work, these precepts can be applied by worshiping and praying according to each religion and belief. In addition, by respecting other people who embrace religions or beliefs that are different from ours.
    • In life in the scope of society, this first precept can be applied by respecting and appreciating neighbors even though they have different religions or beliefs.
    • An example of applying the first precepts is by worshiping according to the religion and beliefs held by everyone.
    • Able to respect and appreciate without discriminating between religions and beliefs that are owned by everyone.

    2. Just and Civilized Humanity

    • This second precept can be applied in a way that does not discriminate against everyone and wants to hang out or be friends with anyone without being limited by various aspects.
    • An example of applying the second precept is being able to be fair to everyone, regardless of gender, both women and men.
    • Have a good and civilized attitude towards everyone around you.

    3. Indonesian Unity

    • We can apply this third precept by loving and also using local or original products made by the Indonesian people as a form of supporting and encouraging the Indonesian people’s economy.
    • With this third precept, we are taught to work together with one another and respect anyone without discriminating against status, ethnicity, race, religion, or class.
    • An example of the application of the third precept is being able to maintain peace and harmony among Indonesian people, by respecting each other’s tribes, cultures, religions and languages.
    • Can maintain unity and establish good relations between one another, so as not to cause division.

    Democracy Led by Wisdom and Wisdom in Representative Deliberations

    • The application of the fourth precept can be done by doing everything by deliberation and discussion to reach a mutual agreement.
    • For example, we can apply it to the school environment, where in making a decision one has to listen to the opinion of each student who shows deliberation.
    • If the submission of his opinion is not agreed upon, then speak properly so that no party is injured at the end of the discussion and reaches a good consensus.

    5. Social Justice for All Indonesian People

    • We can see the application of the fifth precept within the scope of the school through the class picket assignments. Where, we have to carry out the tasks that have been given to us properly without cheating.
    • Apart from that, in social life we ​​can apply the fifth precept by helping neighbors and people around us without discriminating and looking at the social status that person has.
    • Mutual respect for every community that has rights and obligations.
    • Able to fight for justice that must be owned by everyone regardless of social status.
  • Get to know the List of Currencies in the World Complete with the Code

    Currency in the World – Money is the official medium of exchange that has been approved by the government and society. Of course, you also know that every country always has a different type of currency from one country to another.

    It will be easier for you to know the type of currency for each country by looking at a list of currencies in the world. Well, this article will explain more about each type of eye that exists in the world.

    Of course, for those of you who want to know more about the list of world currencies. You can really read reviews about it only in this article.
    Definition of Money in General

    In modern economics, money can be interpreted as something that is available and will generally be accepted as a method or means of payment in the process of purchasing goods or using a service and other valuable assets and can be used to process debt payments.

    Some experts say the function of money is a means of delaying payments. From this explanation, it can be concluded that money is an object that can be generally accepted by society and is used to measure value, exchange and process payments and purchases of goods and services and can be used as a means of hoarding wealth.

    Types of money can be distinguished based on the material it is made of, for example, such as banknotes and coins.

    Definition of Currency

    After previously we have discussed the meaning of money. Next, we will learn together about the meaning of currency.

    Currency is a unit price agreed upon by the government and the people of a country. As previously explained, each country has a different currency.

    Even so, there are some currencies that are the same between one country and another. For example, America, Ecuador, Cambodia, Panama and the British Indian Ocean Region all share the same type of currency.

    Meanwhile, for an example of a different currency, the Indonesian currency, namely the Rupiah, will be different from the Japanese currency, namely Yen.

    Original Function of Money

    In general, money has a function as an intermediary in the process of exchanging goods for goods which is also one of the methods of intermediary barter methods in the trade process. However, in more detail the function of money is divided into two, namely the original function and the derivative function.

    An object can become money when the object meets certain conditions. The first requirement is that the object must be generally accepted. In order to be recognized as a common medium of exchange, the object must have the highest value or at least be guaranteed by the government.

    Materials that can be used as money must also be durable, the quality is more likely to be the same and not easy to do counterfeiting and can have an amount that can meet people’s needs.

    In addition, money must also be easily carried anywhere, portable and easy to share without the need to reduce value and be able to have a stable value over time.
    Then, the original function of money is as follows.

    1. As a medium of exchange

    The original function of the first money is as a medium of exchange which can facilitate the exchange process. The existence of money will make a person do not need to exchange goods for other goods or barter. This is because the existence of money is intended to replace the barter process.

    2. As a Unit of Count

    Money also has a function as a unit of account. This is because money can be used to show the value of various types of goods or services that are traded.
    Money can also show the amount of wealth a person has and money can be used to calculate the size of a loan. Money can also be used to determine the price of goods and services. As a unit of account, money will have an important role in the exchange process so that it can run more smoothly.

    3. As a Store of Value

    Money can be used as a store of value. This is because money can be used for the process of transferring purchasing power from the present to the future. When a seller receives money for the process of selling goods or services, the seller can save the money he earns to buy goods or services in the future.

    Derivative Functions of Money

    Money does not only have original functions. But money also has a derivative function. Now for more details, here is the derivative function of money.

    1. As a Wealth Transferring Tool

    Someone who wants to move to another place can also transfer their wealth, such as land or house buildings, into money. This can be realized by selling the house or land that he owns.

    In a new place, the party concerned can buy a house or land again with the money obtained from the process of selling previous assets such as houses or land. From this it can be concluded that money can be a means of transferring wealth.

    2. As a driving force for economic activity

    If the value of money continues to be stable for a long time, it will usually make people invest. With these investment activities, economic activity will also increase.

    3. As a Legal Instrument of Payment

    Human needs for goods and services will increasingly increase and vary. Where these needs can no longer be met by exchanging goods or bartering.

    In order to facilitate the process of obtaining goods or services, humans need a means of payment that can be accepted by everyone. Therefore, money can be used as legal tender.

    4. As a Debt Payment Instrument

    Money can also be used as a measure of future payments.

    5. As a means of hoarding wealth

    Some people decide not to use their money only for consumption purposes. Where some of the money will be legalized or saved for future needs.

     

     

    List of World Currencies

    According to Euro Change, currently there are more than 100 currencies that have been recognized and are located in various parts of the world. Of these, there are around 66 countries that use the United States dollar as a medium of exchange.

    The list of world currencies in general will provide information in the form of the name of the currency of a country along with its code. Now for more details, here is a list of world currencies.

    List of World Currencies with the Highest Exchange Rates

    As previously explained, each country has a different currency. The amount of the value of the currency used is also influenced by how strong the economic conditions are in that country. Until now there are about more than 100 coins recognized by the United Nations.

    The US Dollar or USD currency is one type of currency that is widely used in global trade processes. This makes the USD a reference for measuring the high and low of the currency of each country.

    Even so, the USD is not the highest currency in the world for now. There are several countries with abundant natural resources, such as oil and gas, which usually rank first.

    So below are some lists of the highest currency values ​​in the world quoted from various sources.

    1. Kuwaiti Dinar (KWD)
    2. Bahraini Dinar (BHD)
    3. Omani rial (OMR)
    4. Jordanian Dinar (JOD)
    5. Cayman Islands Dollar (KYD)
    6. Sterling Pounds (GBP)
    7. Swiss Franc (CHF)
    8. US Dollar (USD)
    9. Euros (EUR)
    10. Canadian Dollar (CAD)

    Closing

    Well , that’s some list of the highest value of money in the world. Thus the discussion about currencies in the world and also the function of money. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for Sinaumed’s.

    If you want to find books about finance, you can get them at sinaumedia.com. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information .

    Author: Hendrik Nuryanto

    Source:

    • List of Currency Names in the World
    • #Money Function
    • List of Currencies in the World Complete with Names and Codes 
    • The Highest Currency in the Fin World
    • Currency
  • Get to know the Landfill Method in the Waste Management System

    Definition of Landfill – Based on Law Number 18 of 2008 concerning Waste Management, the final processing site (TPA) or landfill is the last place for waste management. TPA is a place where trash is isolated safely so as not to cause disturbance to the surrounding environment. This is why it is necessary to provide proper facilities and treatment so that security can be achieved properly.

    Based on data from the 2007 Indonesian Environmental Status (SLHI) regarding the condition of landfills in Indonesia, most of the landfills in Indonesia are open dumping or open landfill sites, giving rise to environmental pollution problems. Data states that 90% of landfills are operated by open dumping and only 9% are operated by controlled landfills and sanitary landfills . Improving the condition of the TPA is very much needed in city-scale waste management.

    Definition of Landfills

    TPA or landfill is a place to dispose of garbage and other waste materials. This site is designed to minimize the impact of waste on human health and the environment. Quoting an explanation on the National Geographic website, the TPA is covered with layers of clay and thin plastic, then backfilled with several meters of soil so that plants can grow on it.

    Some landfills will decompose over time, even if they are designed only to contain waste. The decomposition process in the landfill will produce methane, which is a dangerous and flammable gas. Several studies have found that methane has a negative impact on the environment and health.

    TPA is an important subsystem in waste management. TPA is the place where the process of
    collection, transportation, sorting, recycling and disposal ends. This phase can use a variety of methods, ranging from a simple level to a high-tech level (Wahyono, 2012). TPA is very much needed. If TPA does not exist, waste will accumulate in various places and cause various environmental pollution.

    According to the Indonesian National Standard (SNI) 19-2454-2000, there are several methods of final disposal of waste, namely:

    1. Open Dumping

    This method is considered the simplest final disposal method because there is no special treatment for waste, and the operation is very easy. Garbage that comes in is just piled up without any further processing. This can result in environmental pollution, such as air pollution due to odors, water pollution due to leachate , aesthetics, and others.

    2. Controlled Landfills

    In contrast to the open dumping method , the operations used in this method are slightly more complicated and the operational costs are also quite large. This waste management method includes stockpiling, leveling, and compaction. After the capacity of the land used to accommodate waste is full, the waste pile is covered with a layer of cover for a predetermined period of time.

    3. Sanitary Landfill

    This method is the most complicated method compared to the previous two methods. The costs used are also relatively high, but have a positive impact on the people living around the TPA. In this method, waste is piled up to a certain thickness, compacted, covered with soil, and compacted again. Furthermore, trash can be spread again on the top layer of soil, and so on.

    4. Landfill Mining

    Land disposal or disposal of waste into the ground is the most common method found in waste management. This method of removing waste into the ground is carried out by backfilling or landfilling known as landfilling , which was first applied to municipal waste (Damanhuri, 2010 ) .

    At this time, landfill mining is a new strategy that can be used to recover resources and materials that can be reused. The enhanced landfill mining (ELFM) concept is an updated landfill mining concept which means extended landfill mining .

    The ELFM concept can be defined as safe and integrated conditioning, excavation and valorization of stockpiled waste, which can be used as waste to material or waste to energy by using innovative technology with due regard to social and environmental criteria (Wahyono, 2012 ).

    Gas Formation in Landfills

    Landfill gas is produced from the decomposition process of waste buried in landfills by the activity of microorganisms. The decomposition process takes place anaerobically through several stages, namely:

    • Hydrolysis , namely the breakdown of long carbon chains into simpler carbon chains in the waste degradation process by microorganisms.
    • Acidogenesis , namely compounds with shorter carbon chains are converted into organic acids due to the activity of acidogen microorganisms .
    • Methanogenesis , namely the degradation stage that produces methane gas and other gases due to the activity of methane-forming microorganisms (CH 4 ).

    In general, waste decomposition in landfills takes place anaerobically. Anerobic decomposition process of waste will form gas. The composition of the gas produced is strongly influenced by the microorganisms that decompose the waste and in general the gas produced is closely related to the anerobic decomposition phases of the waste.

    The initial stage of waste decomposition is called the aerobic phase, which occurs at the beginning of landfill waste and oxygen is still in the waste pile. The second and third phases are called the acid transition phase which is closely related to the process of acidogenesis and begins to form carbon dioxide gas (CO2 ) . Furthermore, gas begins to form at the stage of metagonesis, namely the fourth phase which produces CH 4 and CO 2 . The fifth phase is the ripening phase when waste has become a more stable product.

    The characteristics of the gas produced from the waste decomposition process is determined by the characteristics of the waste being stockpiled. The largest composition of the gas produced is methane CH 4 and CO 2 . These gases can be used as a very potential source of energy and if not managed properly will also cause pollution.

    CH 4 and CO 2 are gases that contribute to greenhouse gases (GHG). Based on research data that has been widely carried out, CH 4 has a power 21 times stronger in storing heat compared to CO 2 gas . This condition causes waste management in landfills to be one of the contributors to global warming.

    Based on SLHI data for 2007, it is known that waste management in landfills that do not manage gas properly contributes 3% to the effect of global warming in Indonesia. Related to this, the National Action Plan (RAN) on Climate Change on a national scale includes efforts to manage gas in landfills as one of the mitigation efforts to reduce global warming. Methane gas produced must be managed properly and can be used as an energy source.

    Theoretically based on this chemical reaction, CH 4 and CO 2 are the most dominant gases produced from the anerobic waste degradation process. The amount or production of gas produced depends on several factors, namely:

    • Elements of waste formation such as carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen, and oxygen obtained from waste characteristic analysis, namely ultimate analysis .
    • The speed of waste degradation is divided into waste that decomposes quickly and slowly decomposes. The time for decomposition of easily decomposed organic matter is 5 years, while the time for decomposition of slowly decomposing organic matter is 15 years.

    When gas begins to be produced, the pressure inside the landfill will increase, thus allowing gas movement within the landfill . Gas movement can occur vertically and horizontally if the pressure outside (barometric) is less than the pressure inside. The gas will tend to move vertically and escape, whereas if the outside pressure is greater, the gas tends to stay in the landfill until it reaches pressure balance.

    Gas movement is very difficult to predict. Based on several studies that have been conducted, it is known that the movement of methane gas in a horizontal direction can reach a distance of more than 1,500 feet. The gas produced during the decomposition process must not just escape into the air. This is because the methane gas produced when in contact with air > 5% will cause an explosion, so that control and monitoring of landfill gas is necessary.

    Gas control in general can be done by burning gas or using it as an energy source, especially for methane gas which can be used as a very potential energy source. In general, gas control systems can be distinguished between active and passive.

    Leachate Formation

    Waste that is disposed of in landfills undergoes several physical, chemical and biological changes. Simultaneously, these wastes will produce a liquid called leachate . Leachate is a liquid that is produced from exposure to rainwater in landfills. This liquid is very dangerous and toxic because it contains high concentrations of organic compounds and inorganic compounds, which are formed in landfills due to rainwater that enters them. In addition, the liquid may also contain metal elements, namely zinc (Zn) and mercury (Hg).

    Leachate in everyday life can be analogous to brewing tea which carries suspended and dissolved matter from waste degradation products. The liquid can be processed into biogas and liquid fertilizer. This is because the water contains various kinds of organic matter, namely nitrates and minerals.

    Impact of the Landfill Method

    At first glance, the landfill method is relatively easy to implement and can accommodate large amounts of waste. However, this assumption is not correct because landfills can cause problems related to health and the environment. The main problem that often arises is the smell and contamination of leachate. In addition, methane gas from landfills that is not utilized properly will cause a global warming effect, and can even explode if it is compressed in the ground. This is why it is necessary to have a good leachate and biogas treatment unit in a landfill system .

    Sembiring and Muntalif added that another impact caused by these liquids is contamination of surface water and groundwater in the vicinity, because generally these liquids contain BOD values ​​of 2,000–30,000 mg/L and COD of 3,000–60,000 mg/L. Several cases of leachate pollution in Indonesia that were successfully recorded by Usman and Santosa are dozens of shrimp ponds that failed to harvest in the Cilincing area, North Jakarta, pollution of residents’ wells around the Bantar Gebang TPA, and pollution of the Asem River flow.

    Bibliography

    Book

    • Ali, Munawar (2011). Leachate Seepage: Impact on Food Crops and Health . Surabaya: East Java Veterans National Development University Press. ISBN 978-602-9372-44-1.
    • Arief, Background Muhammad (2016). Industrial Waste Treatment: Knowledge Bases and Workplace Applications . Yogyakarta: Andi. ISBN 978-979-2955-45-3.
    • Artomo (2015). Green Pages: Wise and Smart Ways to Manage the Environment from Home . Jakarta: Agro Media Library. ISBN 978-979-0065-51-2.
    • Hadisuwito, Sukamto (2007). Making Liquid Compost Fertilizer . Jakarta: Agro Media Library. ISBN 978-979-0061-16-3.
    • Hariyanto, Sucipto, et al (2019). Abiotic Environment (Volume 1) . Surabaya: Airlangga University Press. ISBN 978-602-7924-95-6.
    • Ngatimin, Sri Nur Aminah; Syatrawati (2019). Techniques for Overcoming Agricultural Soil Pollution in Cities and Villages . Yogyakarta: Leutika Prio. ISBN 978-602-3717-09-5.
    • Sutanto, Rachman (2002). Application of Organic Agriculture: Popularization and Development . Yogyakarta: Kanisius. ISBN 978-979-2101-86-7.

    Journal

    • Daryat, Fikri, et al (March 2017). “Analysis of Leachate Water Quality from the Pekanbaru City Garbage Final Disposal Site Based on Biological, Physical and Chemical Parameters” . Journal of Riau Biology . 2(1). ISSN 2527-6409.
    • Herison, Ahmad (April 2009). “Prototype Design of Coagulation Installation and Facultative Pond for Leachate Treatment (Case Study of TPA Bakung Bandar Lampung)” . Engineering Journal, Faculty of Engineering, University of Lampung . 13(1). ISSN 0852-7733.
    • Larasati, Andita Intan, et al (April 2015). “Effectiveness of Heavy Metal Adsorption in Leachate Using Activated Carbon, Zeolite, and Silica Gel Media at Tlekung Landfill, Batu” . Journal of Natural Resources and Environment . 2(1). ISSN 2655-9676.
    • Malita, Yosi Apri, et al (April 2015). “Characterization of Leachate Magnetic Minerals (Leachate) Cold Water TPA Padang City Using SEM (Scanning Electron Microscopice)” . Pillars of Physics . 5(3). ISSN 2685-2608.
    • Novianty, Tika Christy, et al (January 2015). “Geospatial Analysis of the Distribution of TPS and TPA in Semarang City Using Geographic Information Systems (TPS Case Studies: Pedurungan District, East Semarang District, Central Semarang District, and West Semarang District)” . Journal of Geodesy, Diponegoro University . 4(1). ISSN 2337-845X.
    • Purwanti, Heny (December 2014). “Study on the Impact of Leachate Canals on the Environment from the Operational Aspect of Galuga Landfill (Case Study: Galuga Landfill, Cibungbulang District, Bogor Regency)” . Journal of Technology, Faculty of Engineering, Pakuan University . 1(25). ISSN 1411-5972.
    • Purwati, Sri; Surachman, Aep (December 2007). “Potential and Influence of Plants in Pulp and Paper Wastewater Treatment with Wetland Systems” . Cellulose Journal . 42(2). ISSN 2527-6662.
    • Ramadhan, Fajri, et al (March 2019). “Estimation of Leachate Distribution with Geoelectrical ERT Method” . Indonesian Geography Magazine . 33(1). ISSN 2540-945X.
    • Rezagama, Arya, et al (December 2016). “Separation of Organic Waste Leachate Water from TPA Jatibarang Using Chemical Coagulation-Flocculation” . Diponegoro University Engineering Journal . 37(2). ISSN 2460-9919.
    • Sari, Resti Nanda; Afdal (January 2017). “Characteristics of Leachate at the Cold Water Waste Disposal Site in Padang City” . Andalas University Physics Journal . 6(1). ISSN 2302-8491.
    • Sartohadi, et al (July 2005). “Distribution of Free Leachate-Contaminated Groundwater Around TPA Piyungan, Bantul Regency, Special Region of Yogyakarta” . Geography Forum . 19(1). ISSN 2460-3945.
    • Sembiring, Elsa Try Julita; Muntalif, Barti Setiani (October 2011). “Optimizing Leachate Processing Efficiency Using Constructed Wetland” . Journal of Environmental Engineering . 17(2). ISSN 0854-9796.
    • Syamsudin, et al (December 2007). “Utilization of a Mixture of Solid Waste with Black Leachate from the Pulp and Paper Industry as a Biobriquette Material” . Cellulose Journal . 42(2). ISSN 2527-6662.
    • Takwanto, Anang, et al (April 2018). “Reducing Pollutant Content in Leachate by Electrocoagulation-Activated Carbon Adsorption Method to Meet Environmental Quality Standards” . Journal of Chemical and Environmental Engineering . 2(1). ISSN 2579-9746.
    • Ulfah, Azrina, et al (July 2017). “Determination of Organic Pollution Levels Based on Concentrations of BOD (Biological Oxygen Demand), COD (Chemical Oxygen Demand), and TOM (Total Organic Matter) in Muara Sungai Lumpur Ogan Komering Ilir” . Maspari Journal: Marine Science Research . 9(2). ISSN 2597-6796.
    • Usman, Sarip; Santosa, Imam (October 2014). “Treatment of Garbage Wastewater (Lachate) from TPA (Final Waste Disposal) Using the Constructed Wetland Method” . Journal of Health Polytechnic of Health, Ministry of Health, Tanjung Karang . 5(2). ISSN 2548-5695.
    • Yenita, Riski Novela; Siprana, Ade Pulasta (November 2015). “The Influence of Leachate Physical and Microbiological Parameters on Environmental Health at the Muara Fajar Rumbai Landfill Pekanbaru” . Journal of Community Health . 3(1). ISSN 2548-8538.
  • Get to know the Inventor of Algebra and How to Calculate Algebra

    Inventor of algebra – Who doesn’t know mathematics? It seems that everyone will know about mathematics because this subject is always synonymous with numbers and calculations (addition, subtraction, multiplication and division). Therefore, in studying mathematics, various kinds of formulas will definitely be presented. In fact, one type of material in mathematics can have more than one formula.

    The many formulas in mathematics make some people, especially students, find it difficult and complicated to understand math problems, so they have difficulty doing mathematics. In fact, for some students there are those who think that math is a scary thing, so they don’t like math.

    Whereas in human life, almost all developments that occur in science and technology use mathematical formulas, such as in the field of astronomy, in the field of architecture, in the field of technology, and so on. In other words, without the science of mathematics, it is very likely that until now there have been no important discoveries in human life.

    Talking about the sciences in mathematics is indeed very much. One of the many mathematics that has an influence on human life is algebra. Some people may already know or understand algebra, a math science that has been around for a long time.

    According to some historical records, there were two inventors of algebra, namely Diophantus and Al-Khwarizmi. Below we will explain more about the inventor of algebra along with how to calculate algebra. So, read this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

    Understanding Algebra

    Algebra is a form of mathematics that discusses a simplification and problem solving by using substitute symbols, namely constants and variables. Therefore, algebra can be said that one of the branches of mathematics in which there is number theory, geometry, formulas, so that algebraic theory can be used to carry out several studies. Algebraic is a mathematician who does research on algebra.

    We can see algebra that can be used to solve problems in everyday life in a trader who wants to find out the profit of the goods he is going to sell. Apart from that, algebra can also be used by parents to give their children pocket money for school. We should study the benefits of algebra that can be applied in everyday life so that when we want to trade, we can calculate maximum profit.

    The word “algebra” comes from Arabic, namely ” al-jabr ” with the meaning of meeting, settlement, or completion. The development of science in Europe which was more advanced at that time made the word “al-jabr “, then absorbed into the European language, namely algebra. The word has become a general term and is widely known by many people and scientists.

    Meanwhile, in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), algebra is a branch of mathematics that uses letter signs to describe or represent numbers (a, b, c, as a substitute for known numbers and x, y, z for unknown number). In short, algebra is arithmetic that has many benefits in life and can make it easier for humans to solve various kinds of problems.

    Usually a branch of mathematics, namely algebra, has begun to be taught to junior high school students (SMP) or more precisely when a grade 7 student. Algebra is taught to grade 7 students, usually in the form of simple algebraic forms, such as algebraic addition, algebraic subtraction. , algebraic multiplication, and algebraic division. By learning this simple algebra, grade 7 students are expected to be able to apply it in everyday life, so that calculating things becomes easier.

     

     

    Algebra Inventor

    1. Diophantus

    Based on other historical records, some say that the inventor of the branch of mathematics, algebra, was Diophantus, he came from Alexandria. Apart from that, algebra is also believed to have existed and been developed since the days of Ancient Babylon. At that time, the Babylonians had already developed quadratic equations, linear equations, and indefinite linear equations.

    Diophantus wrote a book called Arithmetica , the book contains algebraic solutions, resulting in the modern number theory known as the Diophantine equation or infinity. Can be known as Diophantine because some equations already have more than one possible answer. Diophantus, who wrote the book Arithmetica , is thought to have been born between 200 and 215 AD. In addition, the first book written by Diophantus consists of solving more than 100 problems that produce first-order equations.

    In fact, he is also called the “Father of Algebra” because he has provided knowledge about number theory, mathematical notation, and algebra which can be identified through the theory of equations. The algebraic system created by Diophantus does not use symbols and is known as the syncopalet.

    During his lifetime, Diophantus had written more than 10 manuscripts, or to be more precise, written 13 manuscripts. However, of the 13 nasihs, only 6 have been manuscripts and 6 of these manuscripts have been preserved from damage, so that the information in them can be studied.

     

     

    2. Al-Khwarizmi

    The branch of science from mathematics, namely algebra, was discovered or created by Al-Khwarizmi who was born around 780 AD. He is someone who really likes mathematics, so he is very diligent in studying mathematics. He has a full name, Muhammad Ibn Musa Al-Khwarizmi and was born in Bukhara and has lived in Khawarizmi for a long time. Al-Khwarizmi’s birthplace and residence today is known as Khiva or part of the country of Uzbekistan.

    During his lifetime, Al-Khwarizmi had a profession as a teaching staff or as a lecturer at the School of Honor in Baghdad. Algebra science which Al-Khwarizmi also came from the book he first wrote and that book entitled al-jabr . His first book contains systematic solutions from linear and quadratic notation.

    Al-Khwarizmi lived during the leadership of Al-Ma’mun and it was at that time that the development of science was at its peak or at the peak of its glory. Therefore, at that time, there were many researchers who conducted research, including Al-Khwarizmi, who discovered algebra. The development of science is marked by the existence of a large library and scientific research center created by Harun Al-Rashid. In that place, there are lots of translated books in which there is also Al-Khwarizmi’s book.

    The ability possessed by Al-Khwarizmi in making algebra is not without reason, he often reads books, so he has the expertise to master several languages. Thus, Al-Khwarizmi was very happy in the world of research, especially those related to mathematics.

    His love for mathematics made Al-Khwarizmi create many works, such as Al-Kitab Al Mukhtasar Fi Hisab Aljabr W’al-MuqabalaI which discusses the basics of algebra. This work became the starting point for the science of algebra to be known by Europeans and is still known and used today. Thanks to his book and knowledge of algebra, Al-Khwarizmi is often known as the “Father of Algebra”.

    Apart from that, Al-Khwarizmi also made several works related to mathematics which were written in the book Al-Kitab Al-Jam’a Wal-Tafriq Bi-Hisab Al-Hind . This book contains calculations and sums based on the Hindu calculation system and this book is also known as Dixit Algirizmi . Thanks to this book which has been translated into Latin, Al-Khwarizmi is known by many people in Europe under the name Algorizm.

    Today, Algorizm is known as the concept of an algorithm. The concept of algorithms has been used in various types of science, such as things related to computers and the field of engineering .

    Muhammad Ibn Musa Al-Khwarizmi died in 266 Hijri or in 850 AD. Even though he has passed away, thanks to his works and the branch of mathematics he created, it is easier for us to find solutions to problems, especially those related to mathematics.

    Those are the two mathematicians who are credited with discovering algebra for the first time. However, it turns out that the “Father of Algebra” is still being debated by many experts, some believe that algebra was created by Diophantus and there are also those who believe that algebra was created by Muhammad Ibn Musa Al-Khwarizmi.

    In their book entitled The Development of Arabic Mathematics , two scientists named R Rashed and Angela Armstrong say that the algebra created by Al-Khwarizmi has differences when compared to the algebra from Diophantus. According to them both, Al-Khwarizmi’s algebra has a basic form that is easier to apply or use in everyday life. Meanwhile, Diophantus’s algebra is considered to be used as a tool in calculating number theory.

    In other words, it can be said that the science of algebra created by the two inventors has differences, especially in terms of its application. Although it is still debated who the founder of algebra is and who is the real “Father of Algebra”, many scientists believe that the first algebra applied to the discipline of mathematics was the algebra of Muhammad Ibn Musa Al-Khwarizmi or known as algebra Al-Khawarizmi.

    Elements of Algebraic Algebra 

    The algebraic elements that are often used in scientific disciplines have several elements, including:

    1. Equation Formula

    Equation formulas can be said to be one of the techniques in mathematics which is usually used to equate a problem into the simplest and most complex mathematical forms. In other words, this equation serves to form a mathematical formula according to the problem.

    For example, it is known that the number of dolls owned by Putri and Fitri is 15. If Putri has 5 dolls, how many dolls does Fitri have?

    The above questions will be easily solved, if you use algebra. First change the variables to x for Putri and y for Fitri.

    x + y = 15

    x = 5

    After changing the variables, we can only count how many dolls Fitri has:

    x + y = 15

    5 + y = 15

    y = 15-5

    y = 10

    So, the number of dolls owned by Fitri is 10 dolls.

    2. Variables

    A variable is a symbol which is usually a letter which functions as a substitute for a value that is not fixed or can change. This variable property depends on the equation that contains it. Therefore, variables are also referred to as variables. Symbols are letters in variables, such as a, A, b, B, c, C, and so on. However, usually the symbols used are the letters x, X, y, Y, z, Z.

    5x + 7y – z = 0

    In the example above there are 3 variables where the variables are letters, x, y, and z.

    3. Coefficient 

    If a variable is a symbol of a value, then the coefficient is different, which means the value used to multiply a variable. In general, coefficients that only have a value of 1 will not be written down. The following is an example of a coefficient, namely:

    8x + 4y + z = 0

    The example of the equation above can be said that the coefficient of x is 8, the coefficient of y is 4, and z is 1.

    4. Constants

    A constant is a value that exists in an algebraic form that has an invariable or fixed nature. Usually, the characteristic of a constant is that it is not related to a variable. In some formulas, constants can be symbolized using letters (a, b, c, and so on) or can use special symbols, such as (π). For more details, see the example below

    5x + 7 = 10

    K = x2r

    From the two examples of equations above, we can see that the constants in the first equation are 7 and 10. Meanwhile in the second equation, the constants are

    5. Power (Exponent)

    A rank or exponent is a variable that exists in an algebraic form in the form of a rank. In the exponential calculation operation there is a second priority that is parallel to the arithmetic operation after the brackets in the mathematical arithmetic operation.

    x = 5y2

    If the value of y is 6, then the value of x can be found, namely “

    x = 5y2

    x = 5 . 62

    x = 5 . 36

    x = 180

    6. Degrees

    In algebra, degree is a value of the highest rank that already exists in the algebraic form variable, here is an example of algebraic degree:

    7. Tribe

    In algebraic form, term is a total of all elements that already exist in algebraic form. This term is usually used as a way to make algebraic expressions easier to say.

    Algebraic Forms

    In its application, algebra has several forms, each algebraic form must consist of fixed values ​​(constant) and variable values ​​(variables). Algebraic forms can be used in addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and powers. Here are some examples of algebraic forms.

    1. 3b

    2. 4x + 3

    3. 6y – 2

    4. 4a2 + 3a – 6

    5. 1/x + 1/y

    How to Calculate Algebraic Addition and Subtraction

    In algebra, addition and subtraction can only be done based on the same or similar terms.

    An example of algebraic addition:

    4x + 6y + 3y + 2x

    = 4x ​​+ 2x + 3y + 6y

    = (4x + 2x) + (3y + 6y)

    = 6x + 9y

    An example of algebraic subtraction:

    5x – 3x – 4y

    = 2x – 4y

    How to Calculate Algebraic Multiplication

    In algebraic multiplication, each constant can be done by multiplying the coefficients of each variable.

    4xy x 5 = 20xy

    Meanwhile there is also an algebraic multiplication in which the variables are multiplied as a whole, be they coefficients or variables.

    5yz xz = 5yz2

    How to Calculate Algebraic Division

    This division in algebra makes it easier to calculate, it must be converted into a fraction

    Example of dividing a variable by a constant:

    Example of dividing variables by variables:

    An example of dividing a variable by a more complex variable:

    Source: From various sources

  • Get to know the History of Volleyball in the World and in Indonesia

    History of Volleyball – Which of you are part of the sports lovers? For those
    of you who are a part of sports lovers, you must be quite familiar with this one handball sport.
    Yep, that’s right, volleyball. In short, the game or sport of volleyball is a sport
    that is carried out by two opposing teams or groups.

    Even though volleyball is very fun when played with friends, sometimes a question arises that maybe
    ordinary people don’t know about it.
    When talking about volleyball, there will certainly be
    lots of questions, one of the questions that often arises is “what is the history of volleyball?”

    In this article, we will discuss more about the history of volleyball that Sinaumed’s can know.
    So, take a look at this review, until it’s finished, yeah, Sinaumed’s. However, before
    entering the main discussion, a brief description of volleyball as a sport that is played in teams or groups
    will be given.

    In the game of volleyball, it focuses more on using the strength of the hands, feet and proper jumping
    techniques.
    In addition, volleyball also requires the strength of the fingers to hit the ball
    or pass the ball to friends.

    A. Definition of Volleyball Game

    The game of volleyball or what is known in English as volleyball is a type of sports game that
    contains games from two opposing teams or groups.
    A team or group in a volleyball game
    contains six players.

    During its development, volleyball received a variation known as beach volleyball. Different from
    indoor volleyball , beach volleyball only contains two players. In
    addition, the field is not as large as an indoor volleyball court .

    Like other sports, the game or sport of volleyball has a parent organization that oversees it.
    The world volleyball sports organization is overseen by the FIVB ( Fédération Internationale
    de Volleyball ) organization which acts as the parent organization for international coverage.

    Meanwhile, in Indonesia, volleyball sports or games are managed by the PBVSI (All-Indonesian Volleyball
    Association) organization.
    As time goes by, Indonesian volleyball continues to experience
    development, especially men’s volleyball which won the recent SEA Games championship.

    B. Understanding Volleyball According to Experts

    Several experts in Indonesia also expressed their opinion regarding the meaning of the game or sport of
    volleyball.
    The following is an understanding of the game or sport of volleyball from the
    experts.

    1. According to Setiadi

    Setiadi said that volleyball is a team sport or game where the main tool is using the ball.
    The way to play volleyball is to bounce the ball using your arm or you can also use other limbs,
    then the ball will be hit so that it moves across one court.
    The maximum limit for one team to
    play the ball is 3 times the game.

    2. According to Subroto and Yudiana

    According to Subroto and Yudiana, volleyball is a team or group game that prioritizes cooperation and mutual
    understanding between players from each member of the team or group.

    3. According to Sudjana and Somantri

    According to Sudjana and Somantri, the notion of volleyball is a game that uses a ball as its main tool.
    The main tool used must comply with applicable regulations and have been determined by the FIVB
    organization.
    The rule is a ball with a circumference of 65 cm to 67 cm and a mass of 260 cm to
    280 cm.

    C. Volleyball Game

    As you already know, this volleyball game or sport is played by 2 opposing teams or groups. In
    each team or group there are six players who are competing to achieve the goal, namely victory.
    Victory can be achieved by a team or group by collecting or achieving a score of 25 and a
    game will occur if you have experienced the same score of 24.

    In the game or sport of volleyball there are several size provisions, such as provisions for the size of
    the field, ball and net.
    The general size of the volleyball court itself is 9 meters x 18
    meters.
    The size for the boundary line used as the attacker’s place is 3 meters measured from
    the center line.
    The size for the border is 5 meters.

    The size of the ball has been determined by regulations from the FIVB which states the size of a ball with
    a circumference of 65-67 cm.
    The ball is made of leather, both genuine and synthetic.
    The inside of the ball is made of rubber or something similar. The ball weighs about
    260-280 grams.

    As for the size of the net is about 9.5-10 meters long. The net used by male players is about
    2.43 meters high, while the women’s net is about 2.24 meters high.
    Meanwhile, the net has a
    width of about 1 meter.

    D. Role of Volleyball Players

    Like other games or sports, in a volleyball game or sports team there are also players and their respective
    roles.
    In the game or sport of volleyball itself is divided into four roles, namely the
    tosser/setter role, the spiker/smash role, the libero role, and finally the defender role (defender).

    Tossers/Setters

    Players with the tosser role have the role of ball feeder to other players as well as being a regulator of
    the course of a volleyball game.

    Spikers/Smash

    Players with the spike or smash role play the role of hitting the ball with the focus on
    falling in the opponent’s area so that the team gets a score.

    Liberos

    Players with the libero role are also known as defenders who have the privilege of being able to freely enter and
    leave with conditions that are not allowed to produce smash hits across the barrier/net.

    Defend / Defender

    Then the last one is the defender who has a role as a defender in blocking or holding various types of attacks
    launched by the opponent.

    E. History and Developmental Phases of the
    Game of Volleyball

    History or the beginning of the creation of the game or sport of volleyball itself originates from the United
    States until finally the game which became one of the sports at the Olympics developed to all corners of the
    world.

    1. History of the Name of the Game of Volleyball

    Do you know? The volleyball game or sport itself is a form of a combination of four big ball
    games or sports.
    What are the four big ball sports? The four big ball branches
    consist of basketball, tennis,
    baseball and handball.

    In the past, when volleyball was just created, the game was not known as volleyball game. At
    that time, people were more familiar with and called this game or sport as Mintonette.

    Then, who created or invented the game or sport of volleyball is a physical education teacher at the YMCA ( Young
    Men Christian Association ) named Willian G. Morgan.

    2. History of the Creation of the Game of Volleyball

    The creation and discovery of the game or sport of volleyball began with a meeting between the two physical
    education teachers, namely Willian G. Morgan who was the originator of the game or sport of volleyball with one
    of the originators of the game or other sport which contributed to the creation of the game or sport of
    basketball.

    Do you know who is the creator or originator of this big handball game? Yep that’s right, he
    is Dr. Naismith James.

    After meeting with Dr. Naismith James, within four years later, William G. Morgan created and initiated the game
    or sport of Mintonette or what is currently known as the game or sport of volleyball.

    According to historical records, it is said that the beginning of creation and the emergence of this volleyball
    game or sport was only intended for students who were studying at the YMCA (Young Men Christian Association) who
    were adults or were no longer young.

    Because of that reason, Willian G. Morgan created this game or sport of volleyball, which is set at a tempo that
    is not as fast as the tempo of the game of basketball, which was coined by Dr. Naismith James.

    3. History of the First Rules of Volleyball
    Game

    The game rules of volleyball are of course made and determined by the originator of the game or sport,
    namely William G. Morgan.
    He set some initial rules such as the size of the net or what was
    originally created as a net with a height of 1.98 meters, then the net with a height of 1.98 meters was
    installed in the middle of the field.

    Then, for the second rule, namely setting rules or conditions for the size of the field, namely with a
    fixed size, of 7.6 meters x 15.2 meters.
    Then, the last one is the provisions for the rules for
    the duration or length of time of the game.

    In a match there are nine sessions with three chances to hit with serve technique for each team in a match or
    volleyball game.

    4. Changing Mintonette’s Name to Volleyball

    Over time, the game or sport that used to have the name Mintonette has changed its name to volleyball or in
    Indonesian it is defined as volleyball.
    The change in the name of the game or sport occurred in
    1896.

    When Willian G. Morgan changed the name from Mintonette to volleyball, it was marked by the first match
    simulation event held at the YMCA ( Young Men Christian Association ) Training School
    .

    Willian G. Morgan received an invitation from Dr. Luther Halsey Gulick around in early 1896.
    Willian G. Morgan took advantage of this invitation by fulfilling the arrival of an invitation given by Dr.
    Luther Halsey Gulick as a means to demonstrate how the flow and provisions of the game of
    volleyball that he created and sparked.

    Apart from that, Willian G. Morgan also conducted several seminars to explain the various aspects contained in
    the volleyball game or sport he created.
    One aspect that can be learned from Willian G. Morgan’s
    explanation is that the place for the game of volleyball is that it can be done indoors or outdoors.

    The second aspect that can be learned from the explanation that Willian G. Morgan explained is that the
    game of volleyball can be followed by many players.
    Why is that? At that time,
    there was no limit to the number of players in volleyball.

    Then, the last aspect that can be picked up from the explanation that Willian G. Morgan explained is that the
    main goal or achievement of the game of volleyball is to train or defend one’s own area or area from opponent
    ball attacks and score as much as possible by passing the ball through the net or net.

    5. History of the Development of Volleyball in the
    World

    Over time and the development of the era, volleyball games or sports have changed the rules and regulations
    in the game.
    This can be proven by changes in using the smash technique .

    Changes in the use of this technique were first introduced in 1916. Four years later, in 1920 to be exact,
    new rules and regulations were created regarding the three-touch rule in volleyball.
    After
    that, a new regulation was born regarding the number of scores or scores that were previously 15 changed to
    a score of 21.

    It is known that starting in 1900, the game of volleyball began to spread to countries outside the United
    States, namely in Canada.
    After experiencing spread through Canada, the sport or game of
    volleyball has spread and developed to all corners of the world.

    After the game or sport of volleyball spread to all corners of the world, an organization was formed which
    acted as the international parent organization that overshadowed the sport of volleyball.
    The
    name of the international volleyball parent organization is FIVB which stands for
    Federation
    Internationale de Volleyball .

    Two years later, an official world-class volleyball game or sport championship was held. The
    world championship was held precisely in 1949.

    6. History of the Development of Volleyball in
    Indonesia

    In Indonesia itself, the game or sport of volleyball was introduced and became one of the subjects taught
    by physical education teachers at Dutch schools in secondary schools, such as HBS and AMS.
    Do
    you know what HBS and AMS are?

    Hoogere Burgerschool or abbreviated as HBS is a public high school founded in 1863 by the Dutch.
    Whereas AMS itself stands for Algemeene Middelbare School which is a public high school which was
    officially established on July 5, 1919 in Yogyakarta.

    Even though the game and sport of volleyball had been introduced and taught in various schools at that time, the
    sport or game of handball still could not take a place in the hearts of the people of Indonesia.

    The game or sport of volleyball just got a place in the hearts of the Indonesian people when the Indonesian
    state was in the period leading up to independence.
    The sport began to be popular and right in
    1951, the game or sport of volleyball was officially included in the number of matches at PON 2 which was
    held in Jakarta.

    In 1954, IPVOS (Association of Soerabaja Volley Ball Association) decided to form a main organization for
    volleyball in Indonesia.
    Although running slowly but surely, the development of the game or
    sport of volleyball in Indonesia has experienced significant developments.

    It didn’t take long before several volleyball clubs appeared in various regions of Indonesia.
    Due to the good enthusiasm of the people of Indonesia, finally the volleyball parent organization
    in Indonesia sparked by holding a competition with this sport.

    This competition was held on January 22, 1955. The competition was held in the city of Jakarta, which was when
    the first national competition championship was held.

    In establishing the PBVSI organization itself, it was initiated by the IPVOS organization (Surabaya Volleyball
    Association) and Pervid (Djakarta Indonesian Volleyball Association).
    After the formation of the
    PBVSI organization, a leader was also appointed for the organization, namely Wim J. Latumeten.
    After that, the first PBVSI congress was held in May 1955, held in Jakarta.

    In 1955, this organization officially became a member of the FIVB organization. PBVSI also has
    three levels of competition, namely Proliga (annual volleyball game or sport competition in Indonesia),
    Livoli (inter-club volleyball competition or championship in Indonesia), and National Championship (match or
    competition participated by various representatives from PBVSI registered club).

    So, that’s some information about the history of the game or sport of volleyball, both the history of its
    formation and the history of the spread of this game or sport throughout the world, including Indonesia!

    This is a review of the history of volleyball , starting from the definition,
    regulations, naming, to its development in Indonesia.
    Of course volleyball is an
    alternative daily exercise that is worth trying.
    Sinaumed’s can read books related to other
    sports, such as swimming, athletics by visiting sinaumedia.com so you have #MoreWithReading
    information.

  • Get to know the History of the Plate Dance, Its Development, Characteristics, and Movements

    History of the Plate Dance – If you hear the name of West Sumatra Province, what is the
    first thing you think of or remember?
    Is that Rumah Gadang, a traditional house from West
    Sumatra?
    Or is it just rendang, a traditional, distinctive and popular food from the province
    of West Sumatra?

    When discussing traditional arts or regional arts, West Sumatra actually has a lot of art and is full of
    meaning.
    However, there is one regional art that is best known by the public and is the pride
    of the area which is on the northern tip of Sumatra.
    It is an art from the branch of dance,
    plate dance.

    The history of the plate dance is very long and has a deep meaning for the people of West Sumatra.
    This traditional dance originating from Solok, West Sumatra, has become one of the proud provincial
    identities.
    This is because this dance performance is often a regional attraction as a venue
    for the promotion of Indonesian tourism and culture.

    The province which is famous for its wealth of culinary spices, is one of the provinces in Indonesia that
    has a very high level of cultural diversity compared to other regions.
    This is reflected in
    several ways, such as regional languages, traditional houses, to traditional dances and traditional
    dances.

    Being a representation of West Sumatra from the many regional dances that exist, the plate dance is a very
    popular art and is in great demand by the Indonesian people at large.
    The movements and
    properties used in this dance are also very distinctive, so it is not surprising that this has attracted
    attention from various walks of life, from local to international.

    It is said that the history of the plate dance began when Huriah Adam popularized this traditional dance.
    Due to its uniqueness and success in attracting audiences, plate dance is now often performed at
    welcoming guests of honor or opening regional traditional ceremonies.
    Together with dances from
    other provinces, such as the jaipong dance, saman dance, and pendet dance, this plate dance often represents
    Indonesia in the promotion of national tourism and culture.

    The plate dance is actually a traditional dance from Minangkabau which displays the attractions of dancers
    when they move and dance using plate attributes.
    Then, the dancers will start swinging the
    plate in their hands following a pattern of fast and regular movements.

    The dance is performed for a certain time without a single plate being allowed to slip from his hand.
    And for the movements, the dancers will usually take steps in silek or silat
    typical of Minangkabau.
    Of course this is what adds the unique value of a traditional
    dance.

    So, what is the actual history of plate dance? How is the story of this plate dance
    formed, and what are its characteristics, movements, and floor patterns?
    Curious?
    To answer that,
    come on , see the information below. Check this
    out !

    History of Plate Dance

    In ancient times, around the 12th century AD, the Minang people at that time still worshiped God as their
    belief.
    They really believe that it is God who has given people abundant crops and has
    protected them from all kinds of dangers.

    Therefore, the community started the tradition of giving offerings to the Gods by giving their crops.
    The offerings are then placed on plates and delivered by the girls who have been prepared
    beforehand.
    The girls will wear fine traditional clothes and behave gently to face the
    Gods.

    After that, the offerings that had been prepared for the Gods were brought while the plates were being
    moved to and fro.
    This is done with the aim of being a place to show off the abilities that
    every girl has.
    It is from this event 800 years ago that it is alleged to have been the
    beginning of the creation of the plate dance or the history of plate dance.

    As time goes by, this plate dance is also growing. In fact, its development became even more
    rapid during the reign of the Sriwijaya kingdom.
    At that time, the plate dance began to be
    recognized by other regions and became a popular dance throughout West Sumatra.

    However, the popularity of plate dance at that time did not last long. When the Sriwijaya
    kingdom was conquered by the Majapahit kingdom in the 16th century, some of the dancers were forced to move
    to Malay because they were refugees from Sriwijaya.

    Some of them have moved to Malaysia and Brunei Darussalam. These two areas in fact have a
    different cultural background from the culture in Minang.

    Therefore, the plate dance brought by the dancers to the area must also change and follow local customs,
    namely Malay customs.
    This event is also the origin of the emergence of plate dance history in
    the Malay area.

    Meanwhile, in the Minang area itself, it turns out that there has been a very drastic change in the plate
    dance art.
    This was increasingly seen when the Islamic religion was brought by the Majapahit
    Kingdom, making offerings made by the people to the Gods no longer needed.

    Furthermore, this dance actually became an art that was offered or demonstrated to the king and high-ranking
    royal officials as entertainment at certain events in the kingdom.

    The practice of the plate dance as a royal performance, apparently made this dance popular again and liked
    by many people, especially among the Minang people.
    The plate dance began to transform and be
    performed at common people’s events.

    In its development, this plate dance was originally used as a dance offering to entertain the king and
    guests of honor.
    After that, this dance also began to be used as a means of entertainment,
    including filling in someone’s wedding ceremony, with the assumption that the married couple is king and
    queen in a day.

    Development of Plate Dance History

    The development of plate dance culture in the repertoire of today’s Minangkabau society has indeed
    experienced many shifts in functions and values.
    This is because at this time the plate dance
    is not only managed and preserved by the government and residents of the West Sumatra area, but also by some
    Minangkabau people who live overseas.

    The main objective of managing and developing this traditional dance outside the Minang area is none other
    than to maintain the existence of the plate dance.
    Moreover, the plate dance is part of the
    identity and cultural heritage of the Minang people in Sumatra.

    Over time, the values ​​and aspects contained in the plate dance have actually shifted from time to time,
    keeping up with the times.
    This happened in Sumatra or even in overseas lands.

    We can see the development of the history of the plate dance itself from various aspects. One
    of them is the value of the plate dance which was previously used as a complement to traditional ceremonies,
    now its function is also transferred as an entertainment show.

    In fact, currently there are many regional dance studios that have collaborated with entertainment agencies
    to develop and introduce the plate dance more broadly.
    Even so, this development certainly
    cannot kill the existence and role of the plate dance as one of the original identities of Minang
    culture.

    The plate dance, which continues to be popular, has made it experience many developments in new ideas and
    designs.
    This was born from the thoughts of a modern individual choreographer.
    Even so, the Minangkabau people and the Sumatran people in overseas still consider that the essence
    of this traditional dance that has developed in quality is still referred to as the original Minangkabau
    plate dance, a traditional dance that has existed since 800 years ago.

    Characteristics of Plate Dance

    1. The movement

    As previously mentioned, the plate dance was originally a movement used to bring offerings to the Gods.
    Therefore, the people will put a lot of food on the plate for the girls who are also dancers to
    bring it.

    However, after Islam entered, the tradition of delivering offerings was no longer allowed.
    Finally, the plates are empty and not filled with anything. However, there are some
    versions of the plate dance which add burning candles to the surface to make the dance more attractive when
    performed in front of a large audience.

    2. Number of Dancers

    According to the historical origins of the plate dance, this dance can only be danced if the number of
    dancers is odd.
    The number of dancers can start from the numbers one, three, seven, to
    nine.

    In general, this dance will be performed for approximately 10 minutes, or a maximum of 15 minutes.
    The duration of this dance is quite long when compared to other dances. This happens
    because in the plate dance performance, there is a ritual called worship of the king or worship of the bride
    and groom which will be performed before or after the dance ends.

    3. Plate Dance Clothing

    Apart from the number of dancers and the duration, another characteristic of the plate dance is that the
    dancers must wear clothes that look beautiful.
    The clothes used are usually bright red with
    gold patterns which are believed by the community to be the color of luck and wealth.

    4. Accompaniment Music

    As for the musical accompaniment, at the beginning of its appearance, this plate dance was usually only
    accompanied by traditional musical instruments such as gongs and tambourines.
    However, after
    the development of the times which demanded that music be played more beautifully, the saluang, drum, and
    talempong were used as additional musical instruments.

    Saluang is a musical instrument made of bamboo and is played by blowing. While drums and
    talempong are percussion instruments, what distinguishes them is that talempong is made of brass and drums
    are made of animal skin.
    These three musical instruments are added to the accompaniment with
    the aim of adding to the dynamics of the song.

    Plate Dance Show

    At the time of the performance, the dance will begin after the musicians start hitting the gong as a sign
    of the start of the performance.
    After that, the dancers will enter the arena while worshiping
    the king or the bride and groom as a sign of respect.

    Then, the dance begins with the dancers twisting their plates to the right and left according to the beat
    of the music.
    This is done with fast and dynamic movements, provided that the plate that is
    held cannot be separated from the dancer’s grip.
    Because, if the plate is released, then the
    dancer will receive an extraordinary embarrassment, especially from the Minang people directly.

    The movements used in the plate dance usually take from the traditional Minang silat movements.
    Terutana for dances danced by men again. In addition, the plates brought by the
    dancers will also collide with each other so that they will create a beautiful clinking sound.

    However, there are also some dancers who deliberately use a ring on their middle finger to produce that ringing
    sound.

    After that, another distinctive feature of the plate dance is that there are specially arranged plates that
    point towards the bride and groom.
    Then, the dancers will step on the arrangement of the plates
    so that nothing is missed.
    If you have reached the end of the arrangement, the dancer will move
    backwards by stepping back on the previous plate arrangement.

    The dancer must not show his back, that’s why he must walk backwards. If the dancers make it
    past the plate arrangement, they can worship the bride and groom three times as closure.

    In extreme plate dance, the plate held by the dancer will be thrown to the floor to be broken.
    Then, the dancers must continue the dance by dancing on the broken plate without feeling pain or
    injury from the broken plate.

    Plate Dance Movement

    The plate dance is also known as a group dance performed by more than two dancers. The
    distinctive feature of the plate dance performance is that the dancers carry plates in both hands with the
    surface of the plate facing outwards.
    Then, the dancers will dance this dance with movements
    that are agile, energetic, dynamic, and even tend to be acrobatic because they often display difficult
    movements.

    The dancers will move to the music that comes from a combination of the saluang and talempong musical
    instruments.
    The tempo of the music used is initially soft and regular, but over time the tempo
    of the music will change to become faster.
    The dancers also have to follow the beat of this
    musical accompaniment.

    There are many types of plate dance movements. However, most of these movements originate from
    several basic human movements in everyday life.
    This really reflects the history of the plate
    dance as a dance used as an expression of gratitude for the abundance of a given harvest.

    The plate dance movements are in the form of basiang movements, bacamin movements, mangompu suto movements,
    buai anak movements, malunyah movements, bagolek movements, maiinjak piriang movements, and manyemba lalok
    movements.
    Apart from everyday movements, plate dance movements also come from several things.
    Like the reed babega moves, the basic pencak silat moves, the bungo kambang moves, the bagaluik
    squirrel moves, and so on.

    As for some of the movements in this traditional dance, it turns out that it was inspired by the gardening
    movements carried out by the community.
    These movements are the singanjuo negligent movement,
    weeding movement, hoeing movement, throwing garbage, fencing movement, pulling out seeds, sowing movement,
    planting movement, unwinding movement, and pasambahan movement.

    In addition, there are also movements inspired by rice planting activities. The movements
    carried out are the motion of taking rice, the motion of delivering juadah, the motion of picking up rice,
    the motion of aerating rice, the motion of manggampo rice, the motion of morning filing, the motion of
    pounding rice, the motion of carrying rice, the motion of winnowing rice, the motion of stepping on broken
    glass, and the motion of mutual cooperation .

    Conclusion

    The plate dance is a traditional dance originating from the Solok area, West Sumatra. This
    dance, which also comes from Minangkabau custom, is usually performed by an odd number of dancers wearing
    beautiful red or gold colored clothes.

    The history of this plate dance began when the Minangkabau people used to make offerings to the Gods for an
    abundant harvest.
    The offerings were placed on a plate and carried by the girls while twisting
    their bodies to show their abilities before the Gods.

    However, this tradition did not last long. After Islam entered the land of Sumatra and the
    collapse of the Sriwijaya kingdom, the dance offerings to the Gods were no longer used.
    Instead, this dance is used as a dance that is shown to kings and officials as a sign of
    respect.

    Apart from performing in front of the king, this dance is also performed in the ceremony of welcoming
    guests of honor or guests of honor.
    After that, this dance was growing and popular among
    ordinary people.
    The plate dance is also transformed as a means of entertainment in wedding
    ceremonies, where the bride and groom are considered king and queen for a day.

    So , that’s an explanation of the history of plate dance that has been summarized for Sinaumed’s.
    Hopefully the information is useful, yes!

    If you want to find books about dance, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com .
    With sinaumedia books, you can become #MoreWithReading.

  • Get to know the History of the G30S/PKI Event

    Getting to Know the History of G30S/PKI Events – The existence and establishment of a
    country certainly has a very long history, including Indonesia.
    After becoming independent on
    August 17, 1945, it was necessary to struggle for the Indonesian people to exercise sovereignty as a whole.
    The Indonesian state even had to face various upheavals after gaining independence.
    One of them is the event called the September 30th Movement carried out by the Indonesian Communist
    Party in 1965. This event is better known as the G30S/PKI.
    What is G30S/PKI?

    A. Get to know the history of the G30S/PKI

    It could be said that the G30S/PKI or the 30 September 1965/PKI Movement was the biggest betrayal that
    happened to the Indonesian nation.
    The event occurred at night, at the turn of September 30 or
    October 1, to be precise.
    This tragedy involved the Cakrabirawa Troops as well as the
    Indonesian Communist Party or PKI.

    This movement had the goal of overthrowing President Soekarno’s government. Not only that,
    they also wanted the Indonesian government to turn into a communist government.
    G30S/PKI was
    directly led by its chairman at that time named Dipa Aidit.
    The chairman of this movement was
    very aggressive in inciting all Indonesian citizens to support the PKI.
    They gave the promise
    that Indonesia would be more advanced and peaceful if under the rule of the PKI.

    DN Aidit as the central figure of the PKI movement, according to historical experts who existed during
    President Soeharto’s regime, was the main mastermind behind the 30 September 1995/PKI movement.
    In carrying out the treason, this movement was carried out under one command led directly by the
    Commander of Battalion I Tjakrabirawa, namely Lieutenant Colonel Untung Syamsuri.

    The movement started from the city of Jakarta and also Yogyakarta. At first they targeted the
    Higher Officers and Council of Generals.
    The beginning of this movement was only aimed at
    kidnapping and forcibly bringing Generals and Officers to Crocodile Hole.
    However, there were
    several soldiers from Cakrabirawa who decided to kill the High Officers and Generals they brought to Lubanh
    Buaya.

    The generals killed by the PKI included General Karel Satsuit Tubun and General Ahmad Yani.
    The rest of the Generals and High Officers who were not killed eventually died slowly due to
    injuries from torture while in Lubanh Buaya.

    The following are some of the heroes of the Council of Generals as well as High Officers who died because of the
    atrocities of G30S/PKI members at Lubang Buaya:

    1. Posthumous Lieutenant General Ahmad Yani who died at his home, Central Jakarta. Now his
    house has become a museum which is named Sasmita Loka Ahmad Yani.

    2. Major General Mas Tirtodarmo Haryono

    3. Major General Raden Soeprapto

    4. Brigadier General Donald Isaac Panjaitan

    5. Major General Siswondo Parman

    6. Chief Police Brigadier Karel Satsuit Tubun who died at his home

    7. Brigadier General Sutoyo Siswomiharjo

    8. Colonel Katamso Darmokusumo was a victim of the G30S/PKI tragedy in Yogyakarta

    9. Lieutenant Colonel Sugiyono Mangunwiyoto, the victim who died from the G30S / PKI incident in Yogyakarta

    10. Ade Irma Suryani Nasution, namely Putri Abdul Haris Nasution who also died in the G40S/PKI incident

    11. Captain First Lieutenant Pierre Andreas Tendean who died at the house of General Abdul Haris Nasution

    Due to the G30S/PKI incident which left deep wounds for the Indonesian people, the people demanded
    President Soekarno to dissolve the Indonesian Communist Party or PKI.
    With a heavy heart,
    finally the PKI Party, which had become a force for President Soekarno in the Crush Malaysia action, was
    officially disbanded.
    Then, President Soekarno gave a mandate to clean up all of his government
    structures to Major General Suharto, who was known for his letter, namely the Order of March 11,
    1966.

    Below the author will explain some chronology and other facts from the G30S PKI incident as well as a brief
    history after the incident:

    B. A Brief History of the G30S/PKI

    The G30S PKI was a movement that had the goal of overthrowing President Soekarno’s government and turning
    Indonesia into a country that implemented a communist system.
    The movement was led directly by
    DN Aidit, who at that time was the chairman of the PKI or Indonesian Communist Party.
    In the
    early hours of October 1, 1965, Lieutenant Colonel Untung who was a member of the Palace Guard Troop or
    often called Cakrabirawa, led troops who were considered loyal or loyal to the PKI.

    The movement targeted Indonesian Army High Officers. They arrested six of the officers.
    However, 3 of them were immediately killed at his home. While the others were forcibly
    taken to Lubanh Buaya.
    All the bodies of TNI AD officers were found a few days later.

    C. High Officials Who Became Victims

    The following are the six high-ranking TNI Army officers who died in the G30S/PKI tragedy.
    – Lieutenant
    General Posthumous Ahmad Yani

    – Major General Raden Soeprapto
    – Major
    General Mas Tirtodarmo Haryono

    – Major General Siswondo Parman
    – Brigadier
    General Donald Isaac Panjaitan

    – Brigadier General Sutoyo Siswomiharjo

    Meanwhile, the TNI Commander, AH Nasution, who was the main target, managed to escape and escape.
    However, the daughter of AH Nasution named Ade Irma Nasution died from being shot. He
    died along with his aide named First Lieutenant Pierre Andreas Tendean who was kidnapped and shot at
    Crocodile Hole.
    The six generals mentioned above as well as First Lieutenant Pierre Tendean are
    now designated as Heroes of the Revolution.
    Since the promulgation of Law Number 20 of 2009,
    this title has been recognized as a National Hero.

    Not only that, several other people were victims of the murders in Jakarta and Yogyakarta.
    Here is a list of names:

    – Police Brigadier Head Karel Satsuit Tubun
    – Colonel Katamso Darmokusumo
    – Lieutenant
    Colonel Sugiyono Mangunwiyoto

    D. Post-G30S/PKI

    After the G30S/PKI tragedy occurred, Soekarno then ordered Major General Suharto to eliminate and clean all
    elements of the government from the influence of the Indonesian Communist Party.
    This was done
    at the insistence of the Indonesian people because they considered that the incident had deeply injured the
    brand.
    After being ordered by Soekarno, Suharto immediately moved swiftly. After
    that, the PKI was declared to be the driving force behind the coup and then the masterminds behind it were
    hunted down and arrested.
    This includes DN Aidit who had run away and fled to Central Java.
    But then he was caught.

    In addition, members of other organizations deemed to be sympathizers or related to the PKI were also
    arrested.
    These organizations include CGMI, Lekra, People’s Youth, Indonesian Women’s Movement,
    Indonesian Farmers’ Front, and others.
    Various social groups also participated in destroying
    the PKI headquarters in various regions.
    They also attacked various institutions, offices,
    shops, and also universities which were considered to be related to the PKI.

    At the end of 1965, it was estimated that there were around 500,000 to one million members and PKI
    supporters who were suspected of being murdered.
    Meanwhile, hundreds of thousands of others
    were interned in concentration camps.

    E. Commemoration of the G30S/PKI during the New Order
    Era

    In the era of President Soeharto’s government, the 30 September 1965/PKI Movement was always commemorated
    every September 30.
    Not only that, October 1 is also commemorated as Pancasila Sanctity Day.
    This was done as a way to commemorate the services of the seven Revolutionary Heroes who died in
    the tragedy.
    Suharto also had the idea to build the Pancasila Sakti Monument in the Crocodile
    Hole area, East Jakarta.

    F. Enshrined as Propaganda Film

    In 1984, a propaganda docudrama about this tragedy was officially released. The film was
    produced by the National Film Production Center, which at that time was led directly by Brigadier General G.
    Dwipayana who was also a member of Suharto’s presidency.
    Production of the film cost 800
    million.

    Many suspect that the film is intended as political propaganda, given the background of the film’s
    production.
    Moreover, in the era of President Soeharto, the film became a mandatory viewing for
    school children.
    Which is always broadcast on TVRI every September 30th night.
    However, since President Soeharto stepped down from office in 1998, the films directed by Arifin C.
    Noer stopped being shown on TVRI.
    This happened because there was pressure from the public who
    considered that the film was not in accordance with the actual incident.

    Next, sinaumedia.com will provide a selection of reference books that tell the truth about the history of the
    G30S/PKI.
    These books are very suitable to read for the younger generation who wish to know
    about this tragedy in depth.

    1. Sarwo Edhie and the 1965 Events

    Through this book, readers will find an interesting fact about a story related to a political figure who
    played a very important role in 1965 named Sarwo Edhie.
    Like how the names Sarwo Edhie and
    Suharto became popular after the political upheaval in 1965 until Sarwo Edhie’s role in the G30S PKI
    incident.
    Tragedy throughout 1965-1966, starting from the dissolution of the Indonesian
    Communist Party and the replacement of the president, has catapulted his name to become a turning point in
    his life’s journey.
    As commander of the RPKAD and the Army Para Command Regiment, Colonel Sarwo
    Edhie was one of the figures who spearheaded the operation to annihilate the PKI.

    2. Sjam

    Not much different from the first book, this second book which was compiled by the Tempo team will reveal
    about another character who was in the G30S PKI tragedy named Sjam Kamaruzaman.
    Sjam is a man
    who has 5 aliases.
    He comes from Tuban, East Java who is an atheist, but is famous for being
    able to read the holy verses of the Qur’an.

    Then the year after the action in 1965, Sjam Kamaruzaman appeared in public when he became a witness at the
    trial of Sudisman, Secretary General of the Indonesian Communist Party.
    Previously, Sjam had
    not been fully trusted.
    This was because the Special Bureau, known as the secret agency of the
    PKI led by Sjam, was seen as only the army’s imagination to make it easier for Suharto to annihilate the
    communist party.

    However, Sjam admitted that he led the Special Bureau and planned the secret action of the G30S PKI.
    Then he influenced members of the army to support the PKI movement and finally he gained access to
    military circles.
    This book will reveal whether Sjam was a double agent or just a loyal
    follower of the Chairman of the Indonesian Communist Party, DN Aidit?
    The G30S PKI incident is
    a secret mystery and the truth has not been fully revealed.
    Sjam himself was an important
    figure in the chaos of this tragedy.

    3. Njoto

    Apart from all the books about the New Order that might be burdensome for the majority of PKI members,
    Njoto is one of the senior PKI politicians whose name has never been known and has not even been mentioned
    by historians.
    He is an adept at playing the violin and saxophone, enjoys symphonic music and
    watching theatre.
    He also really likes to write poetry which is not always pro-people.
    Actually, Njoto had an important role in the G30S PKI tragedy. His name seems to have
    been forgotten by historians, because they found no evidence of Njoto’s involvement in this revolutionary
    action.
    Another reason was because Njoto had a close relationship with President
    Soekarno.

    4. G30S and Asia

    Various questions arise regarding the truth of whether China was involved in the G30S PKI incident?
    How do other countries such as South Korea and North Korea respond to the G30S PKI tragedy?
    Which countries will benefit the most from this event? And why is Japan one of the
    countries that greatly benefited after the G30S PKI incident?

    All of the above questions Sinaumed’s can find answers in this book. The book G30S and Asia is
    one of the books written by Aiko Kurasawa which is intended to describe or explain the G30S PKI tragedy from
    the perspective of the dynamics of political shifts that occurred in Asia.
    The G30S PKI
    incident turned out to be quite influential in changing the political map in Asian countries in determining
    the influence of capitalist and communist ideology.

    There are nine writings collected in this book. Where the article is divided into two parts.
    The first part is about the response and also the involvement of each government and also the
    community.
    While the second part is about focusing on the news that appears in several media
    from Asian countries.

    Not only that, there were also discussions on eight countries, namely North Korea, Japan, South Korea,
    Taiwan, China, the Philippines, Malaysia and Vietnam.
    This book is the only book that discusses
    the G30S PKI in the political dimension in Asia.

    Knowing and finding out about the truth of the dark history of the Indonesian nation. The
    bloody tragedy of the G30S PKI should not be forgotten and used as a lesson so that it will not be repeated
    in the future.

    Is Sinaumed’s interested in reading the books in the bag? You can check directly on
    sinaumedia.com.

  • Get to know the history of Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis and its discoverers

    Getting to Know the History of Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis and Its Discoverer – Are
    there any Sinaumed’s here who like and are passionate about history subjects?
    Wow, that must be a
    lot considering that history is the most enjoyable subject and is in great demand by students.
    Why is that? Because as Sinaumed’s knows and has experienced himself, in history lessons
    students are invited to get to know and know in detail about the history or maybe the origins of everything
    related to their country.
    That way, of course, history subjects have a lot of knowledge that is
    given to students, especially about the past.

    So for Sinaumed’s who are fond of history subjects, surely they will be familiar with ancient human terms or
    sentences, right?
    Ancient humans themselves were living creatures of the human type, they
    existed for thousands of years or even millions of years ago on the surface of the earth.
    It is
    known according to circulating information that early humans had various races and tribes.
    Early humans had the characteristic of moving around or commonly known as nomadic life.
    They will always move from one place to another in order to find and meet the needs of life in a
    new environment.

    As Sinaumed’s knows, the fact is that ancient humans were spread all over the world, including the country of
    Indonesia, which also became a place for ancient humans to spread.
    In Indonesia itself there
    are many types of ancient humans found in various regions and the discoveries of these ancient humans are
    not only spread in one area.
    As for several areas that are known as areas or locations for the
    discovery of famous ancient human fossils, such as in several areas on the island of Java, for example in
    the Solo area, Trinil area, and even as far as the Flores area.

    The types of ancient humans found also varied based on their level of revolution, such as the ancient human
    types Meganthropus, Pithecanthropus, and the last one was Homo.
    So, in this article, we will
    invite Sinaumed’s to get to know one of the many ancient human species found in Indonesia, namely the
    Pithecanthropus type.

    Did Sinaumed’s know that this Pithecanthropus ancient human type was divided into several more types?
    There are three ancient humans of the Pithecanthropus type found in Indonesia, one of which is a
    type of ancient human named Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis or what is known in Indonesian as a large and
    strong ape-man.
    Apart from these designations or names, Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis also has
    another name or designation, namely Pithecanthropus Robustus.

    That’s it? Oh, of course not, there are many things that Sinaumed’s should know about the
    Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis species so that Sinaumed’s can get to know this ancient human type more deeply.
    So, for this reason, we will explain in detail all things related to the ancient human type
    Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis for Sinaumed’s.

    Before learning about the early humans of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type, we will first invite Sinaumed’s to
    understand and absorb the core definition of the ancient humans themselves.

    A. What is meant by Early Man?

    Early humans were one of the living things with the human kind that lived and reproduced in prehistoric
    times or pre-historic times.
    Prehistoric times are usually also known as prehistoric times.
    According to research from several experts, it is most likely that ancient humans existed, lived,
    and lived on earth about four million years ago.
    Very long isn’t it?

    B. Early Human Life Patterns in Prehistoric Times

    According to research conducted by experts, it was also stated that early humans were thought to have lived
    in groups and depended entirely on the presence of food in their environment.
    Groups of ancient
    humans would usually look for food such as fruits or wild plants that grow in their environment.
    Not only wild fruits and vegetables, they also began to hunt wild animals and eat them as
    food.

    The ancient human way of life was of course very simple. When they entered the era of hunting
    and gathering (food gathering) or what is commonly referred to as the paleolithic (old stone) era, the
    ancient human group naturally developed and made all kinds of tools or tools that could support their lives
    and make it easier for them to hunt for food.
    They usually make these tools or tools from
    animal bones and stones.

    The history of ancient human life is clearly recorded by the existence of various types of discoveries such
    as the discovery of fossils and artifacts which are considered to be relics of ancient times.
    With the existence of fossils and artifacts from ancient times, it can help scientists to be able
    to assemble and compile how life lived and divide the types of early humans in prehistoric times.

    C. Let’s Get to Know Pithecanthropus
    Mojokertensis

    After knowing and understanding the meaning and how early humans lived in prehistoric times, it’s time for us to
    introduce and explain to Sinaumed’s all about one of the ancient human species found in Indonesia, namely the
    ancient human type Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis.

    Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis or who can also be known by the name or designation Pithecanthropus Robustus
    is one of the many ancient human species whose fossils have been found in the territory of the Republic of
    Indonesia.
    It is known that the discovery of ancient human fossils of the Pithecanthropus
    Mojokertensis type was first discovered in the Perning Village area in Mojokerto Regency, East Java
    Province.
    According to history, the name or designation of this ancient human type
    Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis has a meaning which when translated into Indonesian means an upright, large
    and strong ape man originating from Mojokerto.
    Apart from being called an upright, big, and
    strong ape man from Mojokerto, Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis is also considered the oldest ape man in
    Java.

    The mention of Pithecanthropus itself is considered to vary based on the region of the world.
    For example, the mention of Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis for the African continent usually calls
    it Homo Ergaster, for Indonesia it is called Pithecanthropus, for China it is called Sinanthropus
    Pekinensis, and for European countries it is called Neanderthalensis.

    D. History and Discoverer of
    Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis

    After briefly getting to know the meaning of Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis, next we will invite Sinaumed’s to learn
    about the origins or history of the discovery of Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis and who discovered the early
    human fossils of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type in Indonesia.

    As Sinaumed’s knows, there are various early human fossils of the Pithecanthropus type found in the territory
    of the State of Indonesia.
    Various types of ancient human fossils of the Pithecanthropus type
    itself are divided into three types.
    The three types of Pithecanthropus are Pithecanthropus
    Erectus, Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis, and the last is Pithecanthropus Soloensis.
    The
    discovery of ancient human fossils with the Pithecanthropus type began around the 1890s.
    The
    first discovery of ancient humans with the Pithecanthropus type was in the area of ​​Solo City, Central Java
    Province.
    Precisely in Trinil.

    After that, several ancient human fossils were found which were identified as early humans with the type
    Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis.
    The discovery of ancient human fossils was discovered by a
    native who worked for a paleontologist and geologist from Germany, the paleontologist named Gustav Heinrich
    Ralph von Koenigswald or who is familiarly known as von Koenigswald.
    Gustav Heinrich Ralph von
    Koenigswald was also an inventor, he found fossils of early humans of the Meganthropus paleojavanicus type
    around 1941’s.
    The discovery of the Meganthropus Paleojavanicus fossil von Koenigswald found
    himself right in the Sangiran area.

    Now for the discovery of ancient human fossils with the type Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis by someone who
    worked for von Koenigswald, they are indigenous people or native Indonesians who have the name Tjokrohandojo
    or who are familiarly known as Andojo and J. Duyejes.
    Tjokrohandojo or Andojo and J. Duyejes
    found ancient human fossils with the type Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis in the form of a head bone or what
    is often called a skull, it is estimated that the skull belonged to a child with an estimated age of five.
    The discovery of an ancient human skull fossil of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type was found
    around the Kepuh Klagen area, northern Mojokerto City, East Java Province in the 1936s.

    How? Does Sinaumed’s understand sufficiently and clearly about the history, origins, and who
    discovered this early human fossil of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type?
    After Sinaumed’s
    understands and understands the story of how the early human fossils of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis
    type were first found, then we will tell Sinaumed’s what the physical characteristics and special
    characteristics possessed by the ancient human type Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis.

    E. Physical Characteristics of Pithecanthropus
    Mojokertensis

    Quoted from the book History Module for Class X by Hasnawati in 2020, it is explained that there are
    several physical characteristics possessed by early human fossils of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type.
    The book also mentions that Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis is still in the same category as the
    early humans of the Homo erectus type.
    The existence of this statement is because the physical
    characteristics of early humans of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type are not much different from the
    physical characteristics of early humans of the Homo erectus type.

    So, in the
    following, we will describe and explain some of the physical characteristics possessed by ancient human
    fossils of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type.
    Check it out!

    1 Early humans of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type had an almost upright body shape like today’s humans,
    with a height range of about 165 cm to 180 cm.

    2. Early humans of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type had the quality of the nape muscles which were quite
    strong and sturdy.

    3. Early humans of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type had cheekbones, chewing tools or teeth, the majority of
    which were molars, and very strong jaws.

    4. Early humans of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type had a part of the head, especially the forehead that
    looked prominent, thick, and even seemed to widen to the temples.

    5. Early humans of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type had a nose that was wide in size and did not have a
    chin on his head.

    6. Early humans of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type had a backbone that looked more prominent.

    7. Early humans of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type had a volume capacity or brain capacity that was still
    considered imperfect, namely only around 750 cc to 1,300 cc.

    F. Lifestyle of Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis

    After knowing some of the physical characteristics and special characteristics possessed by ancient humans of the
    Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type, now is the time for Sinaumed’s to know about how the pattern of life or daily
    life was lived by ancient humans of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type.

    Early humans of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type are known to usually live in a nomadic way or what
    is usually interpreted as living by moving their place of residence.
    To be able to live by
    moving around, early humans of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type always tried to adapt their places to
    their food supplies.
    Early humans of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type depended heavily on
    the natural environmental conditions they lived in.
    Due to living by way of moving around,
    early humans of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type usually tended to live in groups.

    Even though they live in groups, their group is only a group with a small scale or size. Why
    is that?
    That’s because they have to be able to adjust and see what food supplies they have,
    whether it’s enough for all group members or not.
    Early humans of the Pithecanthropus
    Mojokertensis type had their main food, which was animal meat they obtained from hunting.

    To be able to meet their needs for meat, they hunt using very simple hunting tools. The
    hunting tools are mostly made of stone and bones from the animals they previously hunted.
    There
    are several hunting tools that have names and are quite well-known, maybe Sinaumed’s is no stranger to the
    names of these hunting tools.
    The hunting tools consist of flakes, trimming axes, various tools
    made from animal bones, scraping axes, and many more.

    These hunting tools are used to
    catch animals, to kill animals, and to cut the meat of animals that have been hunted.
    Not
    only that, hunting tools are also very useful as rakes of food that can make it easier for them to find
    food, usually used for food ingredients that are a kind of tubers or other food ingredients that are in
    the ground.

    So, that’s some information about the ancient human type Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis that we can convey
    to Sinaumed’s.
    There are so many things that Sinaumed’s knows now, right? Starting from
    what is the ancient human type Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis, the story about the discovery of the first
    fossil and who discovered it, various physical characteristics and special characteristics possessed by the
    ancient human type Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis, and the last is the pattern of life or daily life
    experienced by early humans of the Pithecanthropus Mojokertensis type.
    In this way, Sinaumed’s’
    curiosity has disappeared and has been replaced by broader knowledge, right?

  • Get to know the history of Google and its products

    History of Google – Who doesn’t know this one website? Google is the largest
    internet search engine in the world.
    Most aspects of knowledge, both natural knowledge,
    countries and even the world are very complete on Google.
    Besides that, Google also has several
    features that can also help us to make it easier to use
    gadgets in our daily activities.

    Google runs to be very necessary for all circles. Even today, school children also need this
    one website to find more information about lessons.
    Not only that, Google also helps provide
    information for people who want to work.
    So what exactly is Google? How did the
    history of Google become the biggest search engine?
    And what are the products produced by
    Google?
    Here’s a further understanding.

    History of Google

    Google is currently a friend of the times. Every day there are billions of people who use
    Google.
    Google is a search engine company founded in 1998. Google is one of the largest and
    most complete sites in the world.
    Not only that, the services provided by Google also vary,
    such as email accounts, web
    browsers , productivity software, cell phones and applications,
    mapping tools,
    e-books, internet advertising, as well as various videos and other social
    networking sites.

    Through Google we can easily search for current and past news or information. We just have to
    find what we want to know by requiring internet power as a support from Google.
    The platform is
    under the auspices of Google LLC, which is a United States multinational company that also specializes in
    producing service products and the internet.

    Google’s mission is to provide the world with information and make it universally accessible and useful.
    So it’s no wonder that Google is the most popular website, because the features provided are varied
    and there are lots of benefits from using Google.

    Larry Page and Sergey Brin founded Google while they were students at Stanford University.
    They are 16% shareholders in the company. Google was incorporated as a private company
    on September 4, 1998. Since then, the company has grown rapidly, resulting in various products,
    acquisitions, and partnerships in the area of ​​Google’s core search engine.

    Google comes from a misspelling of gogol or the mathematical term for the number one followed by one
    hundred zeros in decimal.
    In 2000 Google became popular when it became a search engine, one of
    the popular sites,
    Yahoo! . Then, in 2004 the Yahoo!
    abolished, eventually Google searches increased to 200 million times a day.

    The company offers online or in-network productivity software. In addition, Google also offers
    electronic mail or e-mail, office application packages, and social networking.
    The company also
    includes the development of the Android operating system which is useful for mobile phones.
    Google Chrome OS is also useful for the Chromebook line of netbooks.

    After that Google also turned to communication hardware. Google is also working with various
    major electronics manufacturers to produce its Nexus devices, as well as to acquire Motorola Mobility in May
    2012. In 2012, fiber-optic infrastructure was installed in Kansas which is used as a broadband internet
    service facility for Google Fiber.

    The company is estimated to operate more than one million servers in data centers around the world.
    Not only that, it is also estimated to be able to process more than one billion search queries and
    around twenty-four
    petabytes of user-generated data every day. In December
    2012,
    google.com was named the most visited website in the
    world.

    The sites available on Google are ranked in the top one hundred, as are YouTube and Blogger.
    Google, too, is also ranked second in BrandZ’s brand equity database. But market
    dominance has come under criticism for copyright, censorship and privacy.
    In 2014 Google also
    received an award from
    Business Indeed as the company with the most valuable brand.

    On August 10, 2015, Google announced the formation of a new company called Alphabet which would become the
    holding company to include Google as well as other businesses unrelated to Google’s core business.

    In the restructuring, Larry Page will become CEO of the new company Alphabet. While Sergey
    Brin served as President.
    Sergey Brin was accompanied by Erich Schmidt as Executive Chairman.
    Google’s CEO will be Sindar Pichai.

    Products from Google

    20 plus years this company is useful for every user. Google also has several innovative and
    useful products, such as the following:

    1. Google Search

    Google Search or Google search is a web search owned by Google Inc. Google Search was
    developed in 1997 by Larry Page and Sergey Brin.
    And in 2007 this company became the search
    engine most frequently used by all corners of the world.
    Even today Google has billions of web
    pages.

    The main purpose of Google Search is to search for text in public documents available on web servers or in
    HTML, PDF, etc formats.
    However, it is different from other data that can be searched using
    services such as Google Image Search.

    Google Search provides at least twenty two special features besides word search, but also such as time
    zones, stock movements, weather forecasts, maps, cinema schedules, earthquake data, airports, house listings
    and sports scores.
    Not only that, Google Search also has features for calendars, numbers,
    prices, temperatures, currency conversions, calculations, package tracking, patents, area codes and language
    translation.

    June 2011 Google Search launched Google Voice Search and Search by Image. Both of these
    features make it easy for users to find something easily through sound and images.
    And in
    May 2012 Google Search also introduced a
    Knowledge Graph semantic search feature
    specific to the United States region.

    Through Google Search, users only need to type keywords in the search field, answers will appear from
    various sources to various countries.
    In addition, all Google users can also use sound and
    images to make it easier to find something they need.

    Here are some of the benefits of having Google Search, as follows:

    1. Search for content from a particular site

    The point of Google Search is to find websites. Google Search can be used as a specific search
    for certain sites and can use the site command.

    2. Looking for something with incomplete letters

    Google Search can remember words or phrases that are not quite right in your search. Google
    Search will provide information according to what is needed even with the limitations of the given
    keywords.

    3. Look for similar sites

    4. Look up definitions

    Google Search is a search engine that can show you the definitions of the words you are looking for.
    You only need to type in keywords then Google will give you all the definitions you are looking
    for.

    5. Calculating Conversions

    Google Search can convert many different units of measure. Example you type in the keyword
    “10.5 in inches” it will convert and also recognize the code convention.

    2. Google Chrome

    Google Chrome is a browser that provides a service that is fast, easy and safe to use for all of its users.
    The Google Chrome browser is lightweight and also doesn’t require a lot of memory space on your
    cellphone and computer. Google Chrome as a browser launched by Google because
    experts want to make a browser and build the best elements from Google.

    The creation of Google Chrome also takes a very long time. Google Chrome is not only a browser
    but also a modern platform for web pages and applications.
    Therefore they launched a beta
    version for Microsoft Windows on September 2, 2008, and released it to the public on December 11, 2008. The
    goal is to be wider, more perfect and also faster.
    This browser is available whose application
    is compatible with various websites.

    3. Google Maps

    Google Maps is a special search service for finding locations. Google Maps can be accessed
    using your
    smartphone . Google Maps is different from Google, the difference
    is that Google Maps is in the form of a special application or itself.
    Google Maps can also
    be used directly through a browser on a laptop or computer.

    Through Google Maps every user can see the map easily. Besides that, the directions that
    Google Maps has are very easy, we just type in the address of our destination, Google Maps will tell the
    direction.
    Google Maps is also equipped with sound, images and ratings for tourist attractions.
    You can survey the location you are going to.

    Sinaumed’s, of course, can read books to increase their knowledge and procedures for using Google Maps.

    4. Gmail

    Gmail is an email service owned by Google which has a corporate office in California. Gmail
    was launched in 2004. Gmail is one of the services that is increasingly in demand.
    Gmail is a
    communication tool equipped with spam filtering features and fast email search.

    Gmail was launched with several functions, namely:

    • Send and also receive messages
    • As a useful identity for accessing the internet or registering social media accounts with personal data
    • Email marketing or as a marketing medium
    • Access other products from Google
    • Access to Android devices
    • Can track lost Android accounts

    5. Google Books

    Google Books provides a search service for certain books. With Google Books users can view
    books directly easily and quickly.
    In addition, you can easily see the name of the author of
    the book, the number of book pages, the year the book was published and buy the book.

    6. Google Earth

    Google Earth is a search that focuses on a map of the earth by providing an interactive display and is also
    equipped with an interactive display and is equipped with aerial photography.
    Google Earth can
    provide information about the world through a virtual globe.
    Through Google Earth you can view
    satellite imagery, maps, terrain, 3D buildings and much more.

    7. Google Docs

    Google Docs is a repository of a document file. With Google Docs you can easily create
    documents and save various types of documents.

    Through the use of Google Docs, writing activities or as any notes, can be done anywhere and can be shared
    with anyone.
    Google Docs also provides free services for its users.

    8. Google Drive

    Google Drive is related to Google Docs. Google Docs is included in Google Drive, but they can
    also be used on their own.
    Google Drive was launched on April 24, 2012.

    On Google Drive you can store various types of documents with a large enough storage space.
    And you can also save documents in the form of important photos. Google Drive also
    makes it easier for you to share files with other users.

    Here are some of the functions of Google Drive, namely:

    • Store various types of files that are private
    • Share files with anyone and can also be limited according to your wishes
    • Edit files such as Power Point, Excel, and word.
    • Personal file backup as well as WhatsApp file backup
    • Make notes
    • Save links

    9. Google Adsense

    Google Adsense is a service issued by Google for all web owners. With Google Adsense, site or
    blog owners can make money through writing and posts that can be read by users.

    Ads will appear on your online content according to the writing or content and visitors. Ads
    are paid for by advertisers who want to promote their products.
    These advertisers pay for
    different ads at different prices, the amount earned will also not be the same.

    10. Google Adwords

    Google Adwords is an advertising service product or a promotional media offered to all users who want their
    ads to appear on search pages.
    Google Adwords is almost the same as Google Adsense, that is,
    both can be used to promote something in cyberspace.

    11. Google Meet

    Google Meet is a software or application that can be used to study, work or conduct meetings online.
    Currently, Google Meet is still a mainstay in the online learning process, especially during the
    current Covid-19 pandemic.
    Apart from being easy to use, the amount of internet data released
    from Google products is also not large capacity.

    When used in online learning, Google Meet will usually pair up with Google Classroom as a support for the
    teaching-learning process during a pandemic like today.

    12. Google Videos

    Google Video is a video sharing service or video sharing. Google Video was launched by
    the company in early 2006 with a free system for searching, viewing and sharing video content.
    Through Google Video, blogspot or blogger users do not need to log in to be able to display
    videos.

    The advantage of Google Video is that it has better search capabilities. The results are not
    only from Google, but also from Youtube and other services.

    13. Google Analytics

    Google Analytics is a free service from Google for webmasters who want to analyze their site’s performance.
    Google Analytics can track visitors based on page information, including search engines, ads, pey
    per click networks, email marketing and links contained in PDF documents.

    14. Google Translate

    Google translate was created specifically for users who want to translate from various languages.
    Google translate can be used for free.

    15. Google Play

    Google play or Play Store is a store of applications. With Google Play, we can search for and
    download favorite applications or those that are needed to be stored on your
    smartphone .
    Google Play is filled with review features of the applications that you will
    download.

    16.Google Play Games

    Google Play Games is a service from Google specifically for online games and SKD operated by Google for the
    Android operating system.

    Google function

    Google is not only a search engine, but Google also has various functions. Here are some
    functions of Google, including:

    • Can be used as a calculator and can display the scientific mode calculator.
    • As a reminder, because Google provides a special reminder feature that can be activated via voice command or
      opened directly from the application.
    • Helpful in knowing the current time in a particular city or country.
    • Know the weather or as a weather forecaster. You can find out the weather in any city and
      also the weather from morning to night.
    • Convert currency rates from any country.
    • Can help you remember something by setting an alarm. The trick is to type ‘Set a
      timer’ and enter the desired reminder time.
    • Send notes from mobile.
    • Get up to date news that can be enjoyed by every user.

    If Sinaumed’s wants to find out more about Google’s history, as well as what are Google’s features.
    Sinaumed’s can read books and get them at
    www.sinaumedia.com
    .
    As #FriendsWithoutLimits we try to give our best!

    Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

  • Get to know the history, heyday, and the founder of the Umayyad dynasty

    Founder of the Umayyad Dynasty – When discussing the Umayyad Dynasty, it is no stranger to
    the struggle of Rasulullah SAW in preaching to spread Islam.
    Sinaumed’s certainly knows, after the
    death of the Prophet and his companions, such as Abu Bakr, Umar, Usman, and Ali, a new leadership was
    formed, namely the Umayyad dynasty.
    Initially, the Islamic leadership after the Rashidun
    Khulafaur was handed over to the son of Ali bin Abi Talib, namely Hasan.
    However, because Hasan
    was focused on uniting Muslims, who at that time were in conflict, the leadership was handed over to other
    friends.
    Wow, who is that? Come on, let’s look at the further explanation
    below.

    Founder of the Umayyad dynasty

    The Umayyad dynasty was born in 41 H or 661 AD. The founder of this dynasty was Muawiyyah bin Abi Sufyan.
    Muawiyyah has a well-known nickname, namely Abu Abdurrahman and Al Quraysh Al Umawi Al
    Makki.

    He is a tall male figure with white skin as well as handsome and dignified. In addition,
    Caliph Umar bin Khattab also explained Muawiyyah’s stature, which he called someone who styled like a king
    and liked cleanliness.
    This is reasonable, considering that Muawiyyah was indeed born into a
    respected family in Mecca.

    Muawiyyah himself was the son of Abu Sufyan and Hindun bint Utbah who used to oppose the Prophet’s Islamic
    teachings.
    Place of birth in Khaif, Mina before 15 years before the migration. The
    Muawiyyah family only embraced Islam after the events of Fathu Makkah or the liberation of Mecca by the
    Prophet in 630 AD.

    After embracing Islam, the Prophet appointed Muawiyah as one of the authors of the revelation.
    This is in accordance with the communication between the Prophet and the Angel Gabriel.
    Even though previously, Muawiyyah was someone who strongly opposed the Prophet.

    However, the Prophet’s heart was so soft to those who repented and emigrated to embrace Islam.
    It is recorded that Muawiyah became the scribe of the revelation until Rasulullah SAW died in 632
    AD. Apart from that, he was also believed to be the Islamic military commander in the war under Commander
    Abu Ubaidah bin Jarrah.

    Before establishing the Umayyad dynasty, Muawiyyah himself was a governor of Sham during the time of the caliphs
    Umar bin Khattab and Uthman bin Affan, he succeeded in uniting the entire territory of the country of Sham with
    his ability to lead a country.

    In addition, Muawiyyah has also strengthened his position with good military strength. He even
    spent a lot of his wealth to gather people with good military abilities.
    Muawiyyah also
    encouraged Umar to form a navy, but Umar refused.

    It was only after the leadership of Caliph Uthman that the navy was formed according to Muawiyyah’s advice.
    He was a capable leader in war. His ability was recognized by Rasulullah SAW.

    Muawiyyah himself died in 680 AD After ruling and serving in the Umayyad dynasty for approximately 20
    years.
    He died due to a long illness at the age of 80, then he was buried in Babus Shaghir,
    Damascus.

    Muawiyah Brothers

    Muawiyyah was a child born to the respected Quraysh tribe. He has many siblings, both
    biological and half-siblings.
    Here are the brothers of Muawiyah bin Abu Sufyan:

    1. Yazid bin Abu Sufyan

    Yazid is Muawiyah’s half brother. As for his mother is Zainab bint Naufal. Then
    Yazid served as governor in Jund Al Urdun.

    2. Utbah bin Abu Sufyan

    Utbah was Muawiyah’s first sibling. He served as Governor in Egypt. His ability
    to lead is also recognized by many people.
    He became a brother who was trusted by
    Muawiyyah.

    3. Anbasah bin Abu Sufyan

    He is Muawiyyah’s half-brother who was born to a woman named Atiqa bint Abi Udhayhir.

    4. Ramlah daughter of Abu Sufyan

    Ramlah or Umm Habibah was Muawiyyah’s half sister. Ramlah was born to a mother named Safiyyah
    bint Abi Al Ash.
    She is also the cousin of Caliph Uthman bin Affan as well as being one of the
    wives of the Prophet Muhammad SAW.

    5. Ummul Hakam bint Abu Sufyan

    Ummul Hakam was Muawiyyah’s first biological sister.

    6. Azzah bint Abu Sufyan

    7. Umaimah bint Abu Sufyan

    Umaimah the half-sister of Muawiyyah, her mother was the same as Ramlah’s mother, Safiyyah bint Abi al-Ash.

    8. Muhammad bin Abi Sufyan

    9. Hanzalah bin Abu Sufyan.

    Hanzhalah is Muawiyyah’s third sibling. He took part in the Battle of Badr, and was eventually
    killed.

    10. Amr bin Abu Sufyan

    He is another half-brother of Muawiyyah from a mother named Safiyyah bint Abi Amr.

    Muawiyah’s wives

    The wives who accompanied Muawiyah during his lifetime, both those who had been divorced and died, were as
    follows:

    1. Maisun bint Bahdal al-Kalbiyah

    Maysun is a child who comes from Bani Kalb. Bani Kalb itself is a tribe that controls the
    Syrian steppe.
    Maysun married Muawiyyah purely because of tribal union. Muawiyyah
    divorced Maysun because he was not used to living in a big palace and at the same time preferred to live in
    his cool village.

    2. Katwa bint Qarazhah al-Naufaliyah

    Katwa is part of Bani Naufal. Namely a group of Quraysh whose members are descendants of
    Naufal bin Abdul Manaf.
    Katwa was very loyal to accompany Muawiyyah in the war in
    Cyprus.

    3. Fakhitah bint Qarazhah al-Naufaliyah

    Fakhitah still has a biological relationship with Katwa. He is also part of Bani Naufal.
    Muawiyyah married her after his brother Katwa died.

    4. Na’ilah bint Imarah al-Kalbiyah

    Muawiyah’s wife who is a cousin of his first wife, namely Maysun. However, the marriage did
    not last long, because Muawiyyah rejected her because of some problem.

    Muawiyah’s children

    From his marriages with several of the women above, Muawiyyah was blessed with the following children:

    1. Yazid bin Muawiyyah

    Yazid is the son of Muawiyah and Maisun bint Bahdal. Unfortunately Muawiyyah divorced Maysun
    when Yazid was still small.
    Therefore, he followed his mother to his hometown until his
    childhood was spent in his mother’s village.

    2. Abdurrahman bin Muawiyyah

    Born from Muawiyah’s wife named Fakhitah bint Qarizh. Abdurrahman died when he was still
    small.

    3. Abdullah bin Muawiyah

    Muawiyyah’s second child from Fakhitah bint Qarizh. Abdullah is a mentally retarded and weak
    child.
    Therefore, his father prefers Yazid to be his successor one day.

    4. Ramlah bint Muawiyah

    Muawiyyah’s daughter who, when she was an adult, married Amr bin Uthman bin Affan.

    5. Hindun bint Muawiyah

    Muawiyah’s second daughter who was married to Abdullah bin Amir, cousin of Caliph Uthman bin Affan.

    6. Aisyah bint Muawiyah

    7. Atikah bint Muawiyah

    8. Shafiyyah bint Muawiyah

    Muawiyah’s Contribution to the Rashidun
    Khulafaur Period

    Muawiyyah was very instrumental in several ways after he embraced Islam. Several caliphs in
    his time were greatly assisted by the role of Muawiyah.
    Here is the explanation:

    1. During the Time of Abu Bakr Ash-Shiddiq

    At this time many apostate movements emerged due to the influence of false prophets. This is
    very disturbing internal conditions that occur.
    Muawiyah’s role in this matter was to help
    fight the false prophet, namely Musailamah Al Kadzab.
    After that, he was also sent by Caliph
    Abu Bakr to fight in Syria as a commander.

    2. During the time of Umar bin Khattab

    Several important roles were held directly by Muawiyyah at this time, as follows:

    a. Open Qaisariyah

    Caliph Umar assigned Muawiyyah to liberate the city of Qaisariyah from infidels. It took him
    quite a long time to break through the Qaisariyah stronghold.
    Finally he managed to conquer
    this city.

    b. Liberate the Sham Coast

    The coastal region of Syria became the next target for liberation during the Caliph Umar.
    Muawiyyah also played an important role in this liberation mission, until he finally won.

    c. Appointed Governor of Jordan

    The two previous events made Umar think about appointing Muawiyah as governor in Jordan. He
    also managed to lead this country for decades.

    d. Appointed Governor of
    Damascus

    After his brother died from Tha’un’s illness at that time, he was ordered by Umar to become governor in Damascus.

    e. Gives an Idea Regarding the
    Distribution of Troops

    Caliph Umar at that time had to face attacks from two major regions, namely, Byzantium and Persia.
    Therefore, Muawiyah proposed to divide the army into two parts in order to guard the boundaries of
    the caliphate, namely, hot troops and cold troops.
    He also fought with the ferocious army
    against the Byzantines in 20 H.

    f. Forming the Navy

    Muawiyyah submitted his umpteenth proposal to Caliph Umar regarding the formation of a navy.
    According to him, the dominant Muslim troops were Arabs who were not familiar with the sea.
    This can be a disadvantage if the troops are swallowed up by the ferocious sea waves during
    battle.

    3. During the time of Uthman bin Affan

    During the Caliph Uthman, Muawiyah played many important roles. He also did this because
    Muawiyyah was of the same clan or clan with Uthman, namely the Umayyads.
    Here are some things
    that Muawiyah did at that time:

    a. Appointed Governor of Syam

    As was the case during the Caliph Umar period, Muawiyyah also had the opportunity to rule over a country
    during the Uthman Caliph period.
    He was appointed governor of Syria completely, after the two
    previously appointed leaders died and became ill.
    He ruled Syria, until the death of Caliph
    Uthman.

    b. Cypriot Liberation

    Muawiyyah had great determination in his mission to liberate several borders which were difficult areas.
    After the rejection during the time of Caliph Umar when proposing the liberation of Cyprus, Uthman
    finally allowed him to carry out the mission.
    He also succeeded in occupying Cyprus, besides
    that he also learned that it turned out that Cyprus was only a Byzantine puppet.

    c. Helping Uthman Facing the Test
    Storm

    Uthman experienced many severe tests during his leadership. The exam is present both
    internally and externally.
    For example, the people accused Uthman of embezzling money until he
    appointed his own family to office.
    However, Muawiyyah was always on Uthman’s side.

    Background to the Establishment of the Umayyad
    Dynasty

    The establishment of the Umayyad dynasty dates back to the end of the reign of Khalifaturrasydin.
    After Uthman died because he was killed, finally Ali’s friend replaced him to become the next
    leader.
    But during his reign a lot of chaos that occurred.

    Muawiyah was among those who urged Uthman’s killer to be found immediately. However, for
    Caliph Ali this was not an easy thing to do at this time.
    Until there was a conflict between
    the two that led to the Shiffin War.

    The Shiffin war ends with an agreement or tahkim. Unfortunately, this has split several camps,
    such as the Khawarij, Shiites and Muawiyah.
    Shortly after this incident, Caliph Ali was also
    killed and this was a sign of the end of the Khulafaur Rashidun leadership.

    After Caliph Ali died, the leadership was continued by his son, Hasan. However, to end the
    feud between the camps, Hasan finally chose to step down and hand over leadership to Muawiyah.
    This was the beginning of the formation of the Umayyad dynasty with its first leader
    Muawiyyah.

    The Golden Age of the Umayyad Dynasty

    The Umayyad dynasty had many contributions to the advancement of Islam. Since the end of the
    leadership of
    the Rashidun khulafaur , namely in 41 H or 661 AD, the Ummayah dynasty took
    over the leadership of the Muslims.
    The expansion of Islamic power, construction and
    development of science is proof that this dynasty was once victorious.

    Some of the caliphs of this dynasty have prominent historical records. There are at least four
    known major caliphs, namely Muawiyah bin Abu Sufyan as the founder of the dynasty, Abdul Malik bin Marwan,
    Al-Walid bin Abdul Malik, and Umar bin Abdul Aziz.
    The following are the advances by the four
    caliphs that we managed to compile from historical records.

    1. Muawiyah bin Abu Sufyan

    As the founder of the Umayyad dynasty, Muawiyah is known as Muawiyah I. He ruled this dynasty from 41 H to 60 H
    or 661-680 AD. Some of the major policies he has carried out and are widely known for are as follows:

    • Moved the national capital from Kufa City, Iraq to Damascus, Syria.
    • Replacing the caliphate system of the khulafaur rashidin which appointed the caliph based on the
      deliberations of the Muslim community, became a kingdom that inherited leadership based on
      lineage.
    • Print a means of exchange of payment or money.
    • Establish a postal service to deliver goods. This service is equipped with special
      officials in their positions and horses in certain places as a means of transportation.
    • Ownership of property by the people is transferred to belong to God which will later be used for the benefit
      of the state and the people.
    • Providing space for Christians who are experts in their fields to get involved in economic, scientific
      and pharmaceutical development projects.
      An idea like this had previously been rejected at
      the time of the caliph Umar bin Khattab
      radhiyallahu anhu because of caution.
    • Establish a military intelligence agency to monitor the military strength of other countries.
    • Establish civil registration service posts to make it easier to coordinate the country’s civil affairs.

    2. Abdul Malik bin Marwan

    As the fifth caliph, Abdul Malik bin Marwan led the Umayyad dynasty in 65-86 AH / 684-705 AD The following are
    the major accomplishments he has done:

    • Print your own currency that reads Arabic letters. This step was taken to replace the
      currency printed by the Roman Empire and the Persian Empire in areas that had been controlled by
      Islam.
    • Established a ship factory in the Tunisian region to strengthen the naval power.
    • Established a Special Court to deal with government employees and royal aides who committed wrongdoing.
    • Improving the work system of the postal service by increasing the number of postal expeditions so that the
      work system is more organized and reliable.
    • Established a beautiful magnificent building in the country.

    3. Al-Walid bin Abdul Malik

    As the sixth caliph, Al Walid bin Abdul Malik was nicknamed Al Walid I. He ruled the Umayyad dynasty in 86-96 H /
    705-714 AD. During the time of Al Walid bin Abdul Malik, the Umayyad dynasty recorded its peak of glory.

    The following are the innovations he has made so that he was able to bring his dynasty to the pinnacle of glory:

    • Providing teaching staff for orphans.
    • The elderly who had no friends in life, orphaned children, and travelers received special attention
      during this reign.
      This is because Al Walid I built nursing homes, orphanages, and halfway
      houses.
    • Persons with disabilities are provided with special institutions so that they can develop themselves despite
      their limitations.
    • The travelers built a special lake so they don’t get thirsty.
    • Al-Quran memorizers, scholars, the poor, and weak people get regular subsidies.
    • Provide guides for the blind.
    • Royal officials at the time of Al Walid I were strictly selected. Only those who are
      smart, clever, and have integrity are accepted.
    • Established factories and government buildings.
    • Build a special hospital for lepers.
    • Established free hospitals and clinics for sick people.
    • Renovating the Prophet’s Mosque in Medina and Al Aqsa Mosque in Palestine.
    • Roads are repaired and equipped with markings to make it easier for road users to use the road.

    4. Omar bin Abdul Aziz

    Caliph Umar bin Abdul Aziz was nicknamed Umar II because he was related by blood to the caliph Umar bin
    Khattab.
    From his mother’s path, Umar bin Abdul Aziz was the great-grandson of the main
    companion of the Prophet Muhammad.

    Not only close to blood ties, Umar bin Abdul Aziz’s piety was not much different from his predecessors.
    He is careful of the world, concerned with the propagation of Islam, gentle towards the weak, hard
    against all forms of cheating, and passionate about studying religion.
    It was these reasons
    that raised his rank before Allah so that his name became legendary, even though the peak of the glory of
    the Umayyad dynasty did not occur in his era.

    He was known as a scholar and scholar before being appointed caliph. The people and Islamic
    leaders loved him before he sat in the government chair.
    So when the announcement reached all
    corners of the country, everyone was happy, except for the corrupt officials.

    There are many things he has done for Islam and his dynasty. Some of them are:

    • Returning property to its owner. During the founding of the dynasty, private property
      ownership was not recognized
    • The followers of Islam grew rapidly without having to carry out many invasions of other countries.
      He uses diplomacy a lot.
    • The execution of the punishment must be carried out with the consent of the caliph.
    • Eradicating poverty in an instant to the point that no resident of Medina is entitled to receive zakat.
    • Send preachers all over the country.

    Apart from the five points above, there are still many achievements that have been recorded by Umar bin
    Abdul Aziz.
    The country was really prosperous at that time. Unfortunately, his
    leadership only lasted three years because God took him home before His grace.

    He died from being poisoned by a royal maid. However, after being caught, he released the maid
    and was ordered to isolate himself so as not to be punished by the state.
    He left his family in
    a state of little wealth because he felt he had no right to it all.

    Conclusion

    Sinaumed’s, from the whole story above we can see that Muawiyah was the founder of the Umayyad dynasty.
    In the founding of this dynasty itself, there were many conflicts. However, thanks to
    its ability, this dynasty can stand up to 14 generations of successors.

    Oh yes, did you know that Muawiyah was a capable leader? This was widely acknowledged by
    previous caliphs.
    He also received many orders in very important roles. Until
    finally his glorious period when he founded the Umayyad dynasty after the Rashidun Khulafaur ended.

    Until here first, our discussion this time. Come on, to understand more, we read more books at
    sinaumedia, because sinaumedia is here to be your #Friends Without Limits.

  • Get to know the History and Origin of the Kecak Dance

    Get to know the history and origins of the Kecak dance – Indonesian culture is very
    diverse, even its diversity is well known throughout the world.
    Talking about traditional
    Indonesian dances, all of them have their own history and noble values.
    One of the dance arts
    that is owned and needs to be preserved is the Kecak Dance.
    This dance has a story, history, to
    its distinctive dance philosophy.

    The dance originates from the island of Bali. The island, which is famous for its many tourist
    destinations, has a unique dance called Kecak.
    With its uniqueness, this dance is liked by some
    immigrant communities who are interested in learning it.

    “Cak, Cak, Cak” is the distinctive sound that you usually hear when you see the Balinese Kecak Dance
    performance.
    This Kecak dance is a dance drama art that is played by 50 to 150 dancers.

    As the name implies, this dance consists of dancers, mostly men who sit cross-legged in a circle.
    The clothes he wore were in the form of a sarong and a square cloth which had a black and white
    color like a chessboard which was tied in a circle to the dancer’s waist.

    For those of you who are traveling or living in Bali, of course you are already familiar with the Kecak
    Dance.
    This dance is performed when there are events, guests, or others.
    Apparently attracting the sympathetic audience or visitors who come to see it.
    However, behind the popularity of this dance, there is an origin, history, meaning, and some of the
    properties used in this dance.

    To get to know more about the Kecak Dance. Let’s look at the following discussion.

    Origin of the Kecak Dance

    The Kecak dance is one of the most popular dances on the island of Bali. Not only famous, this
    dance is usually also used as a ceremony to welcome guests, as well as religious ceremonies.

    So, however, do you know how the Kecak Dance originated in ancient times so that it can become quite
    popular today?
    The following is a complete discussion of the origin of the traditional art
    dance called the Kecak Dance.

    Kecak dance is one of the dances originating from Bali. This dance is also known as the Fire
    Dance or Cak Dance.
    This dance is a mass entertainment performance dance. This
    dance is performed by several male dancers, wearing a black and white checkered cloth covering the shape of
    a chessboard.

    This dance is played without using musical accompaniment in the form of a gamelan. By sitting
    in a row to form a circle pattern and accompanied by a rhythmic call that reads “cak, cak, cak” while
    raising both hands.

    This dance is a sacred dance. It can be seen from the dancers who are burned by fire, but they
    do not experience pain and are not burned, instead they become immune to fire.

    Apart from the Fire Dance or Cak Dance, the Kecak Dance is also known as the Sanghyang Dance which is performed
    during religious ceremonies.

    At that time, these dancers were generally possessed by spirits, and could interact with the ancestors or
    gods who had been purified by them.
    He used this dancer as a medium to convey His word.
    When possessed, they also perform actions beyond expectations. For example, doing some
    quite dangerous moves or making sounds that they rarely make.

    Wayan Limbak is a creator figure of the Kecak Dance. In 1930, he introduced this dance to
    various countries, assisted by a painter from Germany named Walter Spies.

    The male dancers who dance this, will shout the word “cak, cak, cak”. It was from this call
    that the name Kecak was created.

    Not only shouting that word, the dancers are also accompanied by music in the form of rattles.
    The sound comes from the ring tied to the feet of the dancers from the Ramayana cast.

    Inside the circle, the dancers then act. By playing a number of dances taken from several
    episodes of the Ramayana story, he tries to save Shinta from the evil hands of Ravana.
    Not a
    few of the Kecak Dance also involve visitors who are watching the dance action.

    History of the Kecak Dance

    Indonesia has a variety of traditional arts that are scattered throughout the region and amaze visitors
    from abroad.
    With one of the arts, namely the Kecak Dance which comes from Bali.

    This dance is quite popular for national and international tourists visiting Bali. Also, it
    feels like something is missing, when you don’t watch the performance of the Kecak Dance.

    However, do you know how the history of the Kecak Dance in ancient times until now has become quite
    popular?
    The following is a complete explanation of the history of this traditional art called
    the Kecak Dance.

    The reason Walter helped Wayan Limbak create this dance was because Walter was very interested in one
    traditional art, namely the Kecak Dance.
    As well as having an interest in a number of
    traditional rituals that are still quite strong.
    Now, while the exclamation of words that exist
    or are heard when the players play the Kecak dance, there is also an exclamation in the form of the word
    “cak cak cak” when you play this dance.

    From the Sanghyang tradition, this dance art was lifted from a number of parts of the Ramayana story.
    Meanwhile, the origin of this dance is created from shouts or exclamations of words that appear
    from his lips which sound and are named “cak cak cak” when he is played or performed.

    As explained above, the Kecak Dance originates from the province of Bali. The sound of the
    strains of this dance becomes distinctive when the dancers tie the bells on each other’s feet.
    The ornaments worn become more complete and beautiful when performing this art.

    Because, this dance is accompanied by music that comes from the rattles of the dancers. That
    distinctive voice is the main attraction for this Kecak Dance.
    As well as giving an impression
    to the audience who saw the show and heard the rattles.

    Walter and Wayan discussed making this dance as attractive and beautiful as possible, then introducing it
    to various countries or foreign countries.
    Not even a few of the local people perform the Kecak
    Dance, when welcoming the big guests.

    Initially, this dance was only performed in a few villages, with one of the villages being Bona Village in
    Gianyar.
    Over time, this performance has grown to all areas on the island of Bali.
    Not only that, this dance is also used as a mainstay show when there are big activities.
    For example, festivals are often carried out by the private sector or the government.

    The Meaning of the Movement

    If you make a visit to travel to the island of Bali. Of course, it won’t be complete if you
    don’t see some of the most beautiful and captivating traditional performances this island has to offer.
    Apart from the Janger Dance and Bangor, there are other stunning performances that you shouldn’t
    miss, namely the Kecak Dance, which is one of the masterpieces of art from Bali in the form of dance and
    musical drama.

    Shows performed in the open with the accompaniment of the wind before sunset. Usually held on
    a cliff overlooking the sea, the story is completely dependent on natural light at that time of day.
    Starting at dusk, the story continues in the dark, when there is only light coming from the
    flickering bamboo torches.

    This dance originating from the island of Bali is not just body movements, but there is a story in every movement
    that is meaningful

    Do you know what are the meanings of this Kecak dance movement. Let’s look at the following
    understanding of the meaning of the Kecak dance movements.

    When the dancers enter the stage, the story begins. Then, it was followed by Ravana bringing
    or kidnapping Shinta.
    Later, Ravana fights against Jatayu and Hanuman to save Shinta.
    During the rescue process, Hanuman disrupted Shinta’s captivity by setting fire to it.

    However, Hanuman was surrounded by Ravana’s soldiers and almost burned. Initially, Rama did
    experience defeat.
    But this did not stop Rama from saving his empress, Shinta.

    King Rama also prayed earnestly and again tried to bring back his queen. Until finally, Rama
    managed to get Shinta in a safe condition.

    From that story, there is a quite deep meaning of the Kecak Dance, namely the belief in God’s power.
    This is reflected in Rama’s actions when asking the Gods for help.

    Things like that teach a lesson that this dance is believed to be a ritual to bring in a goddess who is able to
    drive away all harm, be it disaster or disease that befalls society.

    Meanwhile, there is a moral message in the form of the Kecak dance which reflects Rama’s behavior towards his
    beloved empress, Shinta, and the Garuda bird, which is willing to sacrifice its wings for Shinta.

    In addition to these moral messages, there are several other moral messages. Are as
    follows:

    1. Contains High Artistic Value

    Even though it is not accompanied by music or gamelan strains, the Kecak Dance still looks beautiful and
    compact.
    The movements made by the dancers can remain in tune. That is what makes
    it of high artistic value and favored by tourists.
    Even though the tourists who come to see the
    traditional art performance in the form of the Kecak Dance are not Hindu, they are happy to see the Kecak
    dance performance.
    It feels like something is missing when you go to Bali and don’t watch this
    dance.

    2. Learn to Rely on God’s Strength

    In the Kecak dance, there is a scene where Rama asks the Gods for help. This proves that Rama
    believes in the power of God to help him.
    The Kecak dance is also believed to be one of the
    rituals to summon a goddess who can drive away disease and protect people and evil forces that come.
    The goddess who is generally invoked in this ritual is Dewi Suprabha or also called
    Tilotama.

    3. Lots of Moral Messages

    The Kecak dance has quite a deep story and conveys several moral messages to its viewers. For
    example, Shinta’s loyalty to her husband, Rama.
    As well as the Garuda bird, which is willing to
    sacrifice its wings to save Shinta from Ravana’s clutches.
    From this story, we are all also
    taught that in order not to have bad traits like Ravana who is greedy and likes to take other people’s
    property by force.

    Even though the Kecak Dance is not accompanied by gamelan music, its movements still seem very compact and
    energetic.
    Where every movement made by fellow dancers is very rhythmic and has high artistic
    value.
    This dance is also not only intended for adherents of Hinduism, but all religious people
    can still enjoy it properly.
    So for those of you who want to watch this Kecak dance
    performance, he is welcome or allowed.

    Kecak Dance Property

    You must have often heard about the Kecak Dance. In fact, you’ve probably seen the show live
    before.
    The dance performance performed by several dancers is accompanied by the sound of “cak
    cak cak” from 70 male dancers.
    This show is indeed something that cannot be missed when you
    visit Bali.

    The beauty and uniqueness of the dance is able to become a special attraction for tourists.
    But did you know that in this Kecak Dance there are several properties that need to be prepared
    before performing the Kecak dance.
    Well, what are they? Let’s look at the
    following discussion.

    1. Embers

    Embers are one of the main properties that must be present in the Kecak Dance performance.
    These embers will later be stepped on by each dancer without wearing footwear or just using bare
    feet.

    2. Cambodian Flowers

    The next property of the Kecak dance is frangipani flowers. For the people of Bali, the
    frangipani flower is a natural essence that can bring enlightenment and goodness.
    This
    frangipani flower is also often used in various special ritual ceremonies, one of which is the Kecak Dance.
    This flower is usually tucked into the ears of the dancers.

    3. Rattle Bracelet

    Ring rattle is a property used in the Kecak dance. This bracelet is capable of producing a
    sound loud enough to accompany music.
    In that dance, this bracelet is only worn on the feet of
    the male dancer who becomes the Ramayana.
    Apart from being worn on the feet, rattle bracelets
    are also worn on the wrists.

    4. Black and White Shawl

    The property that must exist for the accompaniment of the Kecak dance is a black and white shawl with a
    checkered pattern.
    This black and white shawl is pinned while dancing. The cloth
    used has a meaning, namely as the concept of Rwa Bhineda which is identical to black and white.

    5. Mask

    The property of the Kecak Dance that must be used next is the mask. This mask is used by the
    main dancers who have the roles of Hanuman, Sugriwa and Ravana.

    6. Place of offerings

    The next property is a place for offerings which are generally placed in several parts of the place.
    It is believed to help bring good luck and repel all bad luck.

    These are all properties that are used before the Kecak dance performance begins. So that the
    appearance that is broadcast can be maximized and be able to attract the attention of the audience.

    Sample image

    Here are some examples of images from the Kecak Dance. Among them are:

    As a cultural heritage in Indonesia, the Kecak Dance is one of the attractions for tourists who come to
    Bali.
    The dance has a history to the meaning it has.

    Above are some discussions about the traditional Indonesian art, namely the Kecak Dance.
    Consists of Origin, History, Meaning of the move, and the Properties it uses.
    Hopefully the above can provide an understanding of insight into culture in Indonesia.

    Recommended Books & Articles Related to the
    Kecak Dance

  • Get to know the game Gobak Sodor and how to play it

    Get to know the game Gobak Sodor – Sinaumed’s , do you still remember this Gobak Sodor game or maybe you know how it’s played but don’t know the name?

    Sinaumed’s surely knows that our country, Indonesia, has a diversity of ethnic groups, so that the cultures passed on to the current generation are also diverse.

    One of the cultures passed on to the younger generation today is traditional games. The existence of traditional games in ancient times became entertainment for people who at that time certainly did not touch the advanced technology as it is today.

    In almost all regions in Indonesia, there must be traditional games that are characteristic of that area. Usually, a traditional game will utilize the natural resources around the area.

    One of the many traditional games in Indonesia, there is a game called Gobak Sodor. This traditional game comes from Central Java. This game is quite respected by many people, both from children to adults.

    So, if Sinaumed’s still doesn’t understand what and how the traditional Gobak Sodor game is played, let’s look at the following explanation!

    Meaning of Gobak Sodor

    What does the word Gobak Sodor mean? Why is this traditional game called that way?

    Well, in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), “gobak” means ‘a traditional game that uses a rectangular, checkered field, where each line is guarded by guards, those who want to enter must cross the line and if they are touched by guards, they have to change into guards. 

    While the word “sodor” means ‘ thrust ‘. In this case, what must be proffered is our body and hands so that we can touch the opponent who is trying to cross the line.

    This traditional game turns out to be quite well known by many people, you know…

    Even in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), this game has been registered as a noun which means ‘ children’s game’ consisting of two groups, one group as the guard of the fort and the other group trying to penetrate the opponent’s fort. 

    In fact, this traditional Gobak Sodor game is often called Galah Asin , Galasin , and Gobag .

     

     

     

    How to play Gobak Sodor

    How do you play Gobak Sodor?

    1. Make guard lines with chalk. Make lines like on a badminton court, only the difference is that in Gobak Sodor there are no duplicate lines.
    2. Divide players into two teams, each team consisting of 3-5 members (optional, adjust to the total number of members). One team will be the “fortress guard” team and the other team will be the party trying to enter the fort.
    3. The team that becomes the “guard for the fort” must guard the field according to the horizontal and vertical lines. The horizontal line “guard” must try to block the opposing team that is moving to enter the boundary line. Meanwhile, for the “guard of the fortress” the vertical line is in charge of maintaining the entire vertical boundary line which is located in the middle of the field.
    4. Then, the opposing team must move across the line and the guards from start to finish.

    As with other games, this traditional Gobak Sodor game also has its own rules, namely:

    1. Players are divided into 2 teams, each team consisting of 3-5 people (optionally, adjusting the number of participants participating in the game).
    2. If 1 team consists of 5 people, then the field to be used must be divided into 4 rectangular boxes with a size of approximately 5m x 3m (adjusting to the size of the field to be used).
    3. For the “fortress keeper” team, the task is to keep the “opposing” team from crossing or heading for the finish line .
    4. For the “opposing” team, they must move towards the finish line provided that they are not touched by the “guard” team and can enter the finish line provided that no members of the “opposing” team are still in the starting area .
    5. The “opposing” team will be declared victorious if one of its members manages to return to the start line safely or is not touched by the “guard” team.
    6. The “opponent” team will be declared defeated if one of its members is touched by the “guard” team or exits past the predetermined boundary line. If this happens, the team position will be replaced.

     

    Benefits of Gobak Sodor Traditional Game

    Without realizing it, this traditional Gobak Sodor game has many benefits, you know…

    These benefits affect children’s development, be it social development, motor, personality, and others.

    What are the benefits of this traditional game? Let’s look at the following reviews!

    Benefits in Social Development

    Indirectly, this traditional Gobak Sodor game trains children so that they are able to socialize well. In addition, it can also improve communication and train cooperation between team members.

    This is because in a team, if they want to win, they must need cooperation by discussing with team members in advance what strategy to use in order to pass the “guard” to the finish line .

    Benefits in Motor Development

    This traditional game of Gobak Sodor certainly has benefits in motor development because it is clearly related to the movement of the human body. The benefits of the traditional Gobak Sodor game in terms of motor development are related to physical endurance and to train coordination between the leg and hand muscles.

    In this case, of course, all players must move their limbs so they can escape from the “guard of the fort” to get to the finish line. Similar to the “guard” team, they also have to move swiftly to reflexes touch the “opponent” players.

    Benefits in Personality Development

    Meanwhile, the traditional Gobak Sodor game certainly has benefits that influence the development of children’s personality, namely increasing children’s self-esteem and self-confidence, fostering a sense of empathy in children, and can foster a child’s sense of sportsmanship.

    In this case, it can happen if there are players who cannot penetrate the guard lines, then their team members must help by trying to outwit the “guard of the fortress” so that their team members can escape.

    Apart from that, this traditional Gobak Sodor game can also teach children to be honest people, you know…

    Of course this can happen when a child is touched by the “guard” team and immediately admits that he was touched. Then, the benefits of growing sportsmanship can be seen when children want to admit that they have lost.

    Benefits in Cognitive Development

    Then, the benefits obtained in the traditional Gobak Sodor game are related to children’s cognitive development. Without realizing it, this traditional game can train children’s concentration, increase children’s creativity in developing game strategies, and train children’s problem solving skills.

    Of course this can happen if in the game the “guard” team is difficult to pass, then the members of the “opposing” team will inevitably rack their brains to think of how to get past the “guard”.

    Benefits in Emotional Development

    The last benefit that is obtained from the traditional Gobak Sodor game is related to the emotional development of children. Indirectly, this traditional game can train children’s patience and self-control, and can control children’s emotions.

    Of course this can happen when the “guard” team is not provoked or influenced by the “opponents” who are trying to outwit them so that their friends can cross the line.

    Traditional Role Play for Children

    The existence of traditional games usually goes hand in hand with the subjects of Physical Education, Sports and Health (Penjasorkes) at school. This is because both of them have the same goal of maintaining the stability of the child’s physical fitness and instilling life values ​​through his movements.

    According to Nugroho (2016), a traditional game must contain positive values ​​which include:

    1. Democracy, which relates to how to choose traditional games, must follow the rules or rules that have been agreed beforehand.
    2. Education, which is related to physical and spiritual aspects.
    3. Personality, related to the use of traditional games as a medium for developing and expressing a child’s identity.
    4. Courage, which relates to the child’s attitude to be brave in making decisions and taking into account certain strategies to win the game.
    5. Health, which can be seen from the agility of his body movements.
    6. Unity, which can be seen from the existence of solidarity in the group.
    7. Moral, which relates to children’s understanding of moral messages.

    In this case, of course the existence of traditional games should be introduced to children so they don’t constantly play gadgets.

    Even according to the opinion of some experts, traditional games are closely related to how children develop at an early age. Through traditional games, a child can optimize their physical, motor, mental, intellectual, creative and social abilities.

    According to Karl Groos, playing has a function to strengthen children’s instincts which will be needed for survival in the future. Moreover, childhood should be filled with playing positive games. These positive games indirectly teach them about motoric, cognitive, language, social, emotional, artistic, moral, and other aspects.

    However, nowadays many children prefer to be in front of gadgets rather than going out to play with their friends. In fact, these traditional games which are the legacy of these ancestors have educational value and are useful for stimulating children’s development.

    Many parents rarely know about the benefits of traditional games so they cannot tell what knowledge is gained from the existence of these traditional games.

    Therefore, we as the younger generation must preserve the existence of traditional games so they don’t become extinct. How to preserve the game can be done in many ways, for example by teaching it to our children, cousins, nephews, younger siblings, or neighbors who are still children; and conduct outreach activities regarding the preservation of traditional games.

    In socialization activities for the preservation of traditional games, it is usually done through a poster distributed on social media. This activity was carried out with the hope that the community would have an understanding of the importance of preserving cultural heritage, especially traditional games which clearly have many benefits for future generations.

    So, Sinaumed’s as a figure of young people in Indonesia, let’s help preserve the existence of this traditional game so that it won’t be consumed by the times! How can Sinaumed’s do this by teaching his younger siblings, nephews and neighbors who are still young to play this traditional game! Of course Sinaumed’s can play it with them!

  • Get to know the function of the prostate gland and how to maintain its health

    Functions of the Prostate Gland – The prostate is the exocrine gland of the reproductive system of most male mammals. Its main function is to secrete and store fluid, which makes up two-thirds of the semen. The prostate varies from species to species in terms of anatomy, chemistry, and physiology.

    Prostate enlargement is a common symptom that affects men over the age of 50. Enlargement occurs in the central part of the prostate gland that surrounds the urinary tract (urethra). Sustained enlargement of the prostate gland in the periphery can lead to a more serious stage, up to prostate cancer.

    Definition of the Prostate Gland

    The prostate is a small, soft-textured organ that is only found in the male reproductive system. This gland is one of the organs in the reproductive system which is located under the bladder and has the function of producing semen.

    This organ is a part of the male sexual or reproductive anatomy, along with other parts, namely the penis, scrotum, and testicles. Its location is in the pelvis, between the penis and bladder. The urethra, the tube that carries urine and semen out of the body, passes through the prostate. This is because this glandular organ surrounds the urethra and problems with this organ can affect the flow of urine.

    This organ has the size of a walnut and weighs 20 to 30 grams and can grow bigger with age. Based on information in the journal Informed Health , the prostate gland is surrounded by connective tissue that contains lots of smooth muscle fibers and elastic connective tissue. This makes this organ feel very elastic to the touch.

    There are also many smooth muscle cells in this glandular organ. During ejaculation, the muscle cells of this organ contract and forcefully push the fluid that has been stored in the prostate into the urethra. This causes fluid and sperm cells, along with fluids from other glands, to combine to form semen, which is then released.

    Prostate Gland Tissue Structure

    The prostate gland tissue is divided into three zones. The following is the order of the network structure from the innermost to the outermost layer.

    1. Transition Zone

    This zone is the deepest and smallest part of this organ, it only fills about 10% of the total weight of this organ. The transition zone surrounds the upper third of the urethra. The transition zone is the only part that will continue to grow for life.

    This is why the transition zone is also often the starting point for benign prostatic hyperplasia (BPH) or benign prostate enlargement.

    2. Central Zone

    This zone, known as the median lobe, surrounds the transition zone and accounts for about a quarter of the total weight of this organ. Several sections consisting of the glandular ducts of this organ, the seminal ducts, and the seminal vesicles are found in the zone. This channel is also called the ejaculatory ducts.

    3. Peripheral Zone

    The peripheral zone makes up about 70% of the total tissue of this organ. The peripheral zone is the outer zone that can be felt during a digital rectal exam (DRE). Most problems such as adenocarcinoma or future cancer of these glandular organs are found in the peripheral zone. This area is also the most common location for chronic prostatitis.

    Function of the Prostate Gland in the Male Reproductive System

    As one of the main male reproductive organs, the function of the prostate gland is to play an important role in fertility.

    The most important main function of the prostate gland is to produce fluid which will later mix with sperm cells from the testicles to form semen. This fluid is stored in tubular glands called seminal vesicles which are located in the central zone.

    During ejaculation, the muscle cells covering the prostate will contract and suppress stored fluid. This process causes the fluid, sperm cells, and fluids from other glands to mix. This mixture forms semen which will come out through the penis or also known as semen.

    This liquid greatly determines the quality of the cement produced. The reason is, this liquid consists of sugar, enzymes, and alkaline chemicals that play an important role in the fertilization process. The sugar released provides nutrition for sperm cells so they can fertilize the egg when it enters the woman’s body.

    The prostate also produces an enzyme called prostate specific antigen (PSA) which helps melt semen after ejaculation so that sperm cells can swim faster towards the egg. Meanwhile, alkaline chemicals will neutralize vaginal acid secretion to maintain sperm viability in a woman’s body.

    Semen also contains antibody components that can protect the urinary tract and sperm cells from bacteria and pathogens that cause various diseases. In addition, the presence of the prostate will prevent retrograde ejaculation, a condition in which semen is pulled backward into the bladder. The prostate muscle will help close the neck of the bladder when a person is experiencing sexual climax.

    The following details the function of the prostate gland, including:

    • Producing fluids that can keep sperm alive;
    • Protects the genetic code carried by sperm;
    • Produces fluids that keep sperm moving;
    • Dilute thickened semen, so that sperm can move more easily and increase the success of fertilization.

    During the ejaculation process, the fluid released by this gland will go to the urinary tract and will be released along with sperm. The combination of these two components is called cement. In addition to these two components, semen also consists of fluid produced by the seminal vesicles.

    About 30 percent of the total fluid that comes out when a man ejaculates is fluid secreted by the prostate. To function properly, the prostate gland requires androgens (male hormones), such as testosterone and dihydrotestosterone.

    Understanding Prostate Gland Anatomy

    The prostate is surrounded by connective tissue consisting of many muscle fibers. These fibers surround the organ like a capsule. That is the reason the prostate feels elastic to the touch. The prostate gland can be divided into four areas and is arranged in layers around the urethra.

    Diseases of the Prostate Gland

    Just like other parts of the body, there are a number of prostate diseases that are at risk of attacking, namely:

    1. Benign Prostate Enlargement

    Benign prostate enlargement is a prostate disorder that usually affects men aged 50 and over. This condition makes the prostate enlarge to trigger symptoms such as difficulty urinating and frequent urination at night.

    2. Prostatitis

    Prostatitis is inflammation that occurs in the prostate gland due to a bacterial infection. This disease is characterized by enlarged prostate size and experience pain. Prostatitis can be experienced by men at any age.

    3. Prostate Cancer

    The prostate gland can also experience cancer, even prostate cancer is the most common type of cancer experienced by men. This disease is also characterized by an enlarged prostate, bloody urine, pain when urinating or ejaculating, and erectile dysfunction.

    How to Maintain Prostate Health

    To maintain prostate health, you need to do regular prostate checks to the doctor. The Prostate Cancer Foundation page explains that examination of the prostate gland is a common procedure and is recommended for men, especially those over the age of 50 and men with a risk of prostate cancer.

    The procedure for examining the prostate gland is called DRE or digital rectal examination. In this procedure, the doctor will insert a finger into the rectum through the anus to examine the prostate gland directly. The examination aims to look for possible enlargement or changes in the shape of the gland which could indicate a disturbance. This examination also needs to be done if you experience problems when urinating, such as difficulty urinating, or if urine comes out without control ( urinary incontinence ).

    In addition, as reported by Harvard Medical School , you are expected to adopt a healthy lifestyle to keep your prostate healthy and functioning properly, including:

    1. Eat Nutritious Foods

    Your daily diet is one of the most important factors that determine your risk for a disease. Begin to set a healthy diet with balanced nutrition to avoid prostate disease.

    Some foods that can help you prevent disease include foods with healthy fats such as avocados, nuts, olive oil, and fish that contain omega-3s. Green vegetables can also be a good first step to starting a healthy eating habit. Vegetables are full of vitamins and antioxidants that will protect you from disease-causing pathogens.

    2. Basking in the Sun

    Vitamin D can actually help you to reduce the risk of getting one of the diseases in the prostate organ, namely prostate cancer. In addition, vitamin D is also known to be good for heart, kidney and pancreatic health. One of the intake of vitamin D can be obtained from sunlight. Therefore, leave a few minutes for sunbathing. Don’t forget to use sunscreen to keep your skin protected.

    3. Sports

    Many studies have shown that obesity, especially with a high amount of abdominal fat, can be one of the triggers for BPH.

    Try to be more active and do regular exercise to prevent this from happening. Exercise will help those of you who are overweight. Exercise can also help prevent other sexual health problems such as erectile dysfunction.

    4. Perform Routine Checks

    The older you are, the risk of prostate disease will increase. In addition, having a family history of prostate disease can also make your risk even higher. If you feel you fall into this group, you should consider screening.

    Screening usually includes a DRE examination and a PSA level test. Later, if you have undergone both and your PSA shows above normal results, you may have to do further tests. This is very important to do so that the disease can be detected earlier.

  • Get to know the Founder of Tokopedia and the Story of His Journey

    Founder of Tokopedia – In this modern era, the development of technology and information has become increasingly sophisticated. To change various lifestyles and sectors of people’s lives, including buying and selling in Indonesia. Maybe the story of this one figure will be one of the changes in the conventional buying and selling system into an online or digital buying and selling system in Indonesia.

    Namely the figure of William Tanuwijaya who is the founder of Tokopedia, a fairly large and well-known online buying and selling platform in Indonesia. Profile William Tanuwijaya now holds the position of CEO of Tokopedia and has contributed greatly to the development of the company. Until now, Tokopedia has succeeded in becoming one of the companies labeled “unicorn” with a company value of more than 1 billion dollars.

    It was previously heard that Wishnutama Kusubandio would become one of the administrators at Tokopedia. But in the end the issue disappeared after Tokopedia listed the latest management composition on Tokopedia.

    Get to know the Founder of Tokopedia: William Tanuwijaya

    Do you know about the biography of William Tanuwijaya? For those of you who like to shop online, of course you are familiar with this name. Where William Tanuwijaya is the founder of the largest online buying and selling site in Indonesia called Tokopedia.

    William Tanuwijaya himself admitted that he did not come from a wealthy and respected family, in fact quite the opposite. In building his business, he only had the blessing of his parents and high enthusiasm to travel for four days and three nights in search of an experience outside North Sumatra.

    After studying at Bina Nusantara University, he then worked for a company engaged in computer software development. Until in the end, he had the idea to build a company engaged in the digital field.

    The figure of William Tanuwijaya is a businessman who was born on November 11, 1981 in the city of Pematang Siantar, North Sumatra. As mentioned above, William comes from a family that has mediocre economic conditions. However, both parents have strong life principles towards the world of education for their children. So that William can get a better life thanks to his parents.

    Willian himself is the husband of Felicia HW, where they married in 2015. In 2009, William has succeeded in establishing a startup company called Tokopedia. Then now Tokopedia has succeeded in becoming one of the largest e-commerce platforms for buying and selling online in Indonesia.

    The Story of William’s College Period in Jakarta

    William Tanuwijaya’s success story begins with his childhood where he grew and developed from elementary to high school in the Permata Siantar area. Then he continued his education at a university in Jakarta.

    Willian went to wander and study in the city of Jakarta, because this was his father’s request and a suggestion from one of his uncles. The capital city of Jakarta was his goal because his father and uncle really believed that in that city he would have better quality learning and also opportunities. The university that William chose was Bina Nusantara University, also known as Binus.

    With prayers and also the blessing of his parents, William Tanuwijaya ventured to live abroad outside the Province of North Sumatra. At that time, William departed using sea transportation services, from the port of Belawan to the port of Tanjung Priok. While still in college, William was just an ordinary cafe keeper. His life journey is very complicated and full of twists and turns. Especially in the midst of his father’s illness, he was forced to work while studying.

    Career Journey of William Tanuwijaya

    The story of William Tanuwijaya as a foreigner begins with his studies at Binus, which is one of the well-known private universities in Jakarta and has affordable tuition fees. In his first year, William conducted lectures like a normal student. However, in his second year, William’s father fell ill to the point that William had to think and rack his brain so that he could still continue his studies. Then he started trying to find a side job so he could pay for college and his daily life.

    In order to make a living in a foreign land, namely in Jakarta, William Tanuwijaya finally got a job as an internet cafe guard or internet cafe. William works as an internet cafe guard from 9 pm to 9 am.

    The internet cafe where he works is not far from his campus in Central Jakarta. His job as an internet cafe keeper makes William spend more and more time with the digital world or the internet. So this made him start to be inspired to become someone who is successful through the internet. This is what later became the forerunner to the birth of Tokopedia.

    Until 2003, William Tanuwijaya successfully graduated from Bina Nusantara University. After that, he became increasingly interested in working in the internet and digital world. At that time, William focused on the success of Facebook and Google. But before starting to build his own business, William had joined a game development company called PT Bisa Net Indonesia for about 4 months.

    Then, he moved to Signet for a period of 9 months and moved again to PT Sqiva Sistem until March 2005. There he served as a software developer or commonly known as an application developer. William’s last career journey was recorded at PT Indocom Mediatama as an IT worker and also a Business Development Manager for approximately two years.

    The Story of William Tanuwijaya’s Hard Times and His Idea in Starting a Tokopedia Business

    By gathering all of his experience working in the IT field, William Tanuwijaya had the idea to build a digital platform built on a concept like an online mall in 2007. Then he named the online mall Tokopedia.

    It’s not an easy thing for people to believe. This is because William felt this before, namely that he was looked down upon by the people around him because he was someone who had no business background or experience. However, his determination and desire that does not give up easily can make him always optimistic to always strive to realize ideas and ideas to build an online mall platform.

    In his journey to build Tokopedia as one of his ideas, William also took part by collaborating with one of his colleagues named Leontinus Alpha Edison. The two of them then built Tokopedia together as a free connecting platform between sellers and buyers in Indonesia.

    They try to build the Tokopedia platform as best they can. One of them is by offering these ideas and concepts to investors and financiers who intend to help in developing a real business.

    Before finally succeeding, they both received a lot of rejection from people. But after two years they tried and worked hard. In the end, one of the top officials or superiors at work is willing to provide some capital to help build their business concept.

    The difficult period for William Tanuwijaya was when he started building an online mall business concept. Where at that time the father got a trial that was sentenced to have cancer. William then became confused and in a dilemma because he could not go home and left the project he was building in Jakarta.

    However, William could not do this, because he was the only breadwinner in the family who was in charge of helping and paying for his father’s treatment. But as time went on, it turned out that William was able to go through this phase slowly.

    Tokopedia’s Success As An Online Shopping Platform

    In the end, on February 6 2009, Tokopedia which was developed by William Tanuwijaya and also Leontinus Alpha Edison was officially launched. When it wasn’t the first time after the inauguration, Tokopedia.com had success in inviting as many as 509 sellers and 4,560 members to join the official website.

    In addition, Tokopedia at that time managed to receive transactions of 3.3 million rupiah. As one of Tokopedia’s CEOs, William Tanuwijaya has succeeded in bringing Tokopedia into a shopping platform that has grown significantly in a relatively short period of time, namely one year.

    The number of sellers or traders who have successfully joined is 4,659 and the number of members who have joined is 44,785. During this period of development, Tokopedia managed to receive transactions worth 5.95 billion rupiah.

    Data on Tokopedia’s growth figures have continued to increase until early 2017. The company that was started by William Tanuwijaya has 40 million products from sellers and 12 million users and turnover that can reach a fantastic figure of around 1 trillion rupiah.

    When the moment of Independence Day of the Republic of Indonesia, namely August 17 2017, the figure of William Tanuwijaya began to be known and popular among the people. At that time, William became a hot topic among Indonesian businessmen.

    This happened because Tokopedia had succeeded in getting investment funds in a fairly fantastic amount, worth 1.1 billion dollars or 14 trillion rupiah. Several companies that have become investors in Tokopedia include East Venture, Softbank, and Cyberagent Venture.

    With this huge disbursement of funds, William Tanuwijaya as the CEO of Tokopedia is also aggressively making developments within his company by means of product discounts, marketing strategies, cashback and free shipping.

    Motivational Words and Business Principles of William Tanuwijaya

    William Tanuwijaya as the founder of Tokopedia who has succeeded in bringing this online shopping platform into an application that really helps many people and has succeeded in helping sellers offer their products easily online. That is what can inspire many people to start a business and try to make dreams come true.

    The following are some words of business motivation and also principles from William Tanuwijaya as the CEO of Tokopedia, including:

    a. “I am grateful, the journey of starting Tokopedia has not only changed my life, but also the lives of millions of other people.”

    b. “I am an entrepreneur by necessity, entrepreneur by necessity.”

    c. “I learned about the courage to start, the persistence to get up every time I fail and to dream with open eyes. When we think about dreams, dreams turn into ideas and plans. When we say these ideas and plans, dreams turn into commitments. When our commitments are carried out seriously and wholeheartedly, dreams turn into reality.”

    The award received by William Tanuwijaya

    As a figure who has successfully brought Tokopedia to become one of the largest shopping platforms in Indonesia, William Tanuwijaya has certainly received a lot of appreciation and awards from many parties. One of the achievements he has achieved is being one of Indonesia’s representatives at the World Economic Forum as a Young Global Leader in 2016.

    Not only that, William also received the Satyalancana Wira Karya award or better known as the Medal of Honor from the President of Indonesia, Joko Widodo. This award was given because of its contribution to economic growth and also the development of digital technology in Indonesia. Then, Tokopedia also received an award as Android Excellent Apps selected by Google on the Playstore.

    Exemplary Success Tips from William Tanuwijaya

    Not a few people who want to live a successful life and have a lot of wealth. William Tanuwijaya is a figure that we can make a role model in life, especially in terms of doing business. The CEO of Tokopedia is now one of the richest people in Indonesia. Here are the full tips.

    1. Growth Mindset

    Having a growth mindset is very important for moving our business forward. William Tanuwijaya revealed that if we want to make the business a success, then the first thing we have to do is change the way of thinking or growth mindset. Here, William Tanuwijaya proves himself through his success story in establishing an online shopping platform, Tokopedia. Therefore, we should imitate William’s way of thinking, by changing the mindset if we want the business to be more successful.

    2. Have Big Dreams

    The next way to build a successful business is that we must also have big dreams to achieve that success. So, don’t just change your mindset. According to the CEO of Tokopedia, this will help you when you experience tough obstacles or failures. Why do you have to have big dreams? Because, by remembering your dream to be able to achieve success when you are down or facing challenges, it will be easier to raise your spirits.

    3. Humble

    William Tanuwijaya revealed that people who have a business venture must have a humble nature. You are required to keep learning, whether from anyone and anywhere. That way, you won’t easily feel oppressed by tough competition in the business world.

    4. Don’t Give Up Easily and Learn to Give Solutions

    You need to understand that in order to create success in the business world, try to provide solutions to people who need it. You can start to think more creatively and make sure that the results you have thought will actually be as useful as you hope. Do not forget also do not give up easily. A business owner is not allowed to put the word give up in his dictionary. Keep holding on even though the challenges are getting tougher. That way, the chances of achieving success will be even greater.

    5. Start With a Simple Idea

    We really need big dreams, but you can also start with simple ideas as initial learning in starting a business. From there you will slowly be able to devise more appropriate strategies for the future. In addition, you can also ask for opinions from other people or relatives and family. From the simple ideas they have, ideas will emerge that can break the next business planning strategy.

  • Get to know the Founder of the Kingdom of Demak and the History of Its Establishment Until Its Collapse

    Founder of the kingdom of Demak – Several kingdoms and sultanates have indeed become an inseparable part of Indonesian history. Currently, maybe what we know about the empire is the sultanate in Yogyakarta. But you need to know that there are still many kingdoms or empires that have developed in Indonesia. One of them is the kingdom of Demak. This kingdom turned out to be the first Islamic kingdom in Java, especially Central Java.

    History of the Establishment of the Kingdom of Demak

    The Kingdom of Demak was the first Islamic kingdom on the north coast of Java. In the past, the Demak region first appeared as a district of the Majapahit Kingdom. The Sultanate or Kingdom of Demak became one of the big pioneers in spreading Islam in the region of Java Island. However, the lifespan of the Demak Kingdom was relatively short compared to other kingdoms. One of the well-known legacies of the Demak Kingdom is the Great Mosque of Demak, which was founded by the Wali Songo.

    In addition, the Kingdom of Demak is also one of the centers for the spread of Islam in Indonesia. Certainly, the Kingdom of Demak has quite a complex history. Starting from the establishment process until the end of the kingdom.

    In the process of its journey, the Kingdom of Demak had very important events or events in it. For more details, here are some discussions regarding the history of the reign of the Demak Kingdom or Sultanate as the first Islamic kingdom in Indonesia.

    Founder of the Kingdom of Demak and its First King

    The founder of the Kingdom of Demak himself was Raden Patah. Apart from the founder, Raden Patah also became the first king of the empire. After he left Majapahit, Raden Patah received support from the regent who ruled around the Demak area. Then, he founded the Kingdom of Demak. Until then the kingdom became an Islamic empire, so that the rules and norms applied were based on Islamic values ​​and teachings.

    Not only that, the founding of the Kingdom of Demak was marked by the presence of condro sengkolo. According to the story that has been circulating until now, when Raden Patah went to visit Glagah Wangi, he met a person known as Nyai Lembah. There Raden Patah was then advised to stay in Glagah Wangi.

    After receiving the suggestion, finally Raden Patah accepted it and started living in the area. Now, the Glagah Wangi area is known as Bintoro Demak. Over time, the Bintoro Demak area turned into the center of the capital for all the activities of the Demak Kingdom.

    Location of the Kingdom of Demak

    In ancient times, the Kingdom of Demak was located by the sea. The place is included in the Kampung Bintara area. For now, the village is included in the Central Java region. When the Demak government was led by Sultan Prawoto, the place began to be moved to Demak Prawata.

    However, when Sultan Prawoto died, the kingdom began to be transferred to Jipang by Arya Penangsang, who at that time held the governmental power of the Demak kingdom. After that, Arya Penangsang died because he was killed by Ki Gede Pamanahan and also Hadiwijaya. For Hadiwijaya himself comes from Pajang. Where after killing Arya Penangsang, he then received full control to manage all things in the Kingdom of Demak. Then after that, the Kingdom of Demak turned into the Kingdom of Pajang.

    Genealogy of the Kings of the Kingdom of Demak

    The kingdom was officially established in 1481 AD, at that time the kingdom was led by kings who were directly supported by religious leaders known as Walisongo. There are several kings who have led the Kingdom of Demak from its inception, the process towards glory, and until the kingdom collapsed. The following is a genealogy of kings from the Kingdom of Demak that needs to be understood:

    1. Raden Patah

    Raden Patah is the son of the leader of the Majapahit Kingdom named Raden Brawijaya from his marriage to a princess of the Campa palace. In the Kingdom of Demak, Raden Patah was the first king and served for 18 years. Starting from 1500 to 1518. During his reign in the Kingdom of Demak, he built many things. Starting from houses of worship including the Great Mosque of Demak which is still standing firmly in the center of Demak City.

    2. Pati Unus

    After Raden Patah became king in the Kingdom of Demak, he then had a son named Pati Unus. Where the son of Raden Patah later ascended the throne after his father’s reign ended in 1518. However, Pati Unus only ruled for three years. Then, Pari Unus was given the title as Prince of Sabrang Lor. This happened thanks to his resistance to the Portuguese in their attempt to seize Malacca. But unfortunately, Pati Unus died in his attempt to invade the Portuguese for the second time to Malacca in 1521.

    3. Sultan Trenggana

    Sultan Trenggana became one of the kings in the genealogy of the Kingdom of Demak, known for his battle in seizing Sunda Kelapa from the hands of the Portuguese colonialists under the leadership of Fatahillah. During the reign of Sultan Trenggana, large kingdoms in Java such as the Kingdoms of Madura, Blambangan, Mataram and Pajang were successfully controlled by the Kingdom of Demak. Then, the reign of Sultan Trenggana ended after he died during the war that took place in Pasuruan in 1546.

    4. Sunan Prawoto

    After King Pati Unus abdicated, turmoil began to arise within the Kingdom of Demak. Because, there are no more descendants who come directly from the empress who was the previous leader. Therefore, Sultan Trenggana became king after the fall of Pati Unus. After Sultan Trenggana left the Kingdom of Demak, he was replaced by Sunan Prawoto, who only ruled for a few years. Because, he was more interested in exploring his life as a cleric who spread Islam throughout Java.

    5. Arya Penangsang

    In its history, it is recorded that Sunan Prawoto died because he was killed by Arya Penangsang’s men who wanted to take power in the Kingdom of Demak. Therefore, Arya Penangsangan became the next king of the Demak Kingdom and transferred the government in it to Jipang. After that, various conflicts began to emerge. Especially after the transfer of the Kingdom of Demak to Pajang in 1586 because Hadiwijaya managed to defeat Arya Penangsang. At that time also the Kingdom of Demak ended or collapsed.

    Community Life During the Heyday of the Kingdom of Demak

    The following are some discussions about people’s lives during the heyday of the Demak Kingdom:

    1. Social Life

    The most fundamental difference in people’s lives in the Islamic Kingdom and also the Hindu Kingdom is the massive access to the religion that is adhered to by the majority of the people. In Islam itself there is no such thing as caste, so it can be embraced by various levels of society. In addition, in Islam there are also no rituals that must be quite expensive, such as offerings to gods or brahmanas, as is done by people from Hinduism.

    The social system that existed in the Islamic empire was egalitarian. As well as the implementation of Friday prayers at the same time as ordinary people. This is certainly a form of novelty that cannot be found in the past.

    Especially in the feudal system, where the system places the position of leader in a very high place. Almost all of the people of Demak, especially the people who are at the center of power, are Muslim. Then it was supported again by da’wah carried out by various scholars who were close to the rulers, namely Walisongo.

    2. Political Life

    When viewed from the perspective of politics and its government system, the Kingdom of Demak was one of the largest powers in Java. The kingdom succeeded in ending the long domination of the Majapahit Kingdom and the existence of Sundanese rulers who had consistently existed since the sixth century AD.

    The Kingdom of Demak itself places the duke as the long arm of the Sultan. Meanwhile, areas such as Tuban, Surabaya and Madiun have quite influential dukes. In the 16th century, the Kingdom of Demak was then continued by the Portuguese position in Malacca. Then in 1527, there was a seizure of Sunda Kelapa with the aim of controlling all the coasts on the north coast and preventing the arrival of the Portuguese on the island of Java.

    3. Economic Life

    As we know that the Kingdom of Demak was on the north coast of Java Island. So that the main source of the economy of the people of Demak is sea trade. The absence of other Islamic kingdoms on the island of Java, this is one of the factors why Demak is very active in trading at sea. Then, the Kingdom of Demak reached its heyday during the reign of Sultan Trenggono.

    Where at that time, they succeeded in expanding their territory and controlling the majority of the main ports such as Madura, Tuban, Surabaya, Semarang, Cirebon, Jepara and Sunda Kelapa. Not only that, the duchies in the interior such as Kediri, Madiun, Malang, Pati and Panjang are also the main sources of agriculture and livestock for trade commodities. In agriculture, Javanese rice is one of the most important commodities in international trade in Indonesia.

    Causes of the Collapse of the Kingdom of Demak

    The following are some discussions regarding the causes of the fall of the Demak kingdom:

    1. There was a civil war

    The tragedy of this civil war began with the rivalry between Prince Surowiyoto or better known as Sekar Seda Lepen and Sultan Trenggana. They are the two sons of the previous leader of the Demak Kingdom, Raden Patah.

    After Raden Patah died, his two sons began to compete for the throne. After this competition, it was finally Sultan Trenggana who succeeded in occupying the king’s throne. Then after Sultan Trenggana died, the king’s position was replaced by his son named Sunan Prawoto.

    However, his position did not go smoothly and was strongly opposed by Sekar Seda Lepen. As a result of Sekar Seda Lepen’s refusal, Sunan Prawoto finally killed Seda Lepen by the river when he was just returning from the mosque after performing Friday prayers.

    In 1561, Arya Penangsang, the son of Sekar Seda Lepen, avenged his father by killing Sunan Prawoto and his family and took the position of the fifth king of Demak. After he succeeded in becoming a king, Arya Penangsang ordered his followers to kill the leader of Jepara, PrinceHadiri. That was what later made the dukes, including Jaka Tingkir Hadiwijaya, hostile to the king.

    2. The existence of disputes within the family

    One of the causes of the subsequent collapse of the Demak Kingdom was the difference in heredity in Raden Patah’s family. He is known to have had many sons, but from different mothers. The first difficulty was experienced after the death of Duke Unus who had no sons.

    Then Prince Surowiyoto or Sekar Seda Lepen and also Raden Trenggana fought for power. The debate occurred because Seda Lepen, who was the eldest son of the king, was born from a third wife. While Raden Trenggana who was younger, was born from his first wife.

    3. Failed Imperial Government

    The failed government of the Demak kingdom was one of the factors that caused the Demak Kingdom to collapse. Various problems that occurred such as differences in sects between the people and the nobility, the government that did not care about its people and was too focused on the Portuguese war and the lack of listening to the aspirations of the people, made the Kingdom of Demak unable to survive.

    Cultural Results from the Kingdom of Demak

    The following are various kinds of cultural products from the Kingdom of Demak, including:

    1. Soko Tatal

    One of the cultural products handed down by the Kingdom of Demak is Soko Guru and Soko Tatal, both of which are located at the Great Mosque of Demak. Soko Guru are three poles made of solid wood and have a diameter of about one meter. Meanwhile, Soko Tatal is made from pieces of wood that came from the remaining wood from the making of the three Soko Guru.

    The uniqueness in one Soko Tatal pillar exists because Sunan Kalijaga can only make three pillars. While the mosque is ready to be built. Therefore, Sunan Kalijaga had the idea to collect the remaining pieces of wood from three Soko Guru and then make them into one pillar. The pillar is the main attraction for lovers of religious tourism.

    2. Pawestren

    The Kingdom of Demak is one of the Islamic kingdoms in Indonesia which has inherited a lot of cultural products. Among them is Pawestren which was built as a holy place and is used for congregational prayers for women. Pawestren has very beautiful walls with carvings made with Majapahit motifs or commonly known as maksurah motifs. The place of worship was built using four main pillars and reinforced with four pillars. The main pillars in Pawestren support beam beams which consist of three layers.

    3. Ablution Pool Site

    The site is very well known by the public and is one of the cultural products of the Kingdom of Demak which is often visited by tourists. This ablution pool site was built with the aim of facilitating travelers or students who take ablution water when visiting the Great Mosque of Demak. However, now the ablution pool site is no longer used.

    4. Great Mosque of Demak

    This mosque is certainly no stranger to our ears. This is because the Great Mosque of Demak has very often been used as a religious tourism destination. The mosque was built during the Demak Kingdom in 1479. The architecture in this mosque is very pleasing to the eye. We can see ornaments and calligraphy which are quite thick with an Islamic atmosphere. This mosque is located in the City of Demak, precisely in Central Java Province.

    This is an explanation of the founder of the Demak Kingdom and the genealogy of its kings, from its inception until the fall of the Demak Kingdom.

    Recommended Books & Articles Related to the Founder of the Kingdom of Demak

  • Get to know the Football Sports Rules, What Are They?

    Soccer Sports Rules – Football is one of the most popular sports in Indonesia and the world. Football has many fans, from children to adults, even many parents who like this sport.

    Association football, in English is referred to as association football or soccer or simply football is a sport that uses a ball. The ball used is usually made of leather called ” soccer “. This football is played with two teams consisting of 11 core players and several other reserve players.

    At the start of the 21st century, the sport was played by more than 250 million people in 200 countries. The goal of soccer is to score as many goals as possible by kicking the ball into the opponent’s goal. Football is played on a rectangular open field of grass or artificial turf.

    In order to be able to present an interesting and sporty match in every sport, there must be a regulation in that sport. This rule will certainly make the match interesting to watch, for players they will also feel fair because of the rules in football.

    On this occasion, sinaumedia will provide an article that discusses the rules in soccer. Maybe most of you already understand what the rules apply to this sport. However, of course there are also many who are just learning the world of football so more knowledge is needed about the rules that exist in soccer. Therefore, to find out what regulations apply, let’s look at the following review.

    Football Match Rules

    Football rules are set by the International Football Association Board (IFAB). These regulations are set by FIFA, the official organization of world soccer, and are also complied with by federations at the national level. The official body for football in Indonesia is the Indonesian Football Association (PSSI). The following are the rules for soccer matches.

    Football Player Rules

    The number of soccer players is 11 core players. This amount applies to both national and international competitions. In a soccer match there is one goalkeeper, 2-5 defenders, 2-5 midfielders and 1-3 attackers. These players have different positions and functions, such as goalkeeper (goalkeeper), 3 or 4 defenders (defender), 3, 4 or 5 midfielders (midfielder), up to 1, 2 or 3 attackers (forwards). If a team has less than 7 players, it will not be able to continue the game.

    Soccer Player Equipment Regulations

    All players in a soccer match (except the goalkeeper) wear a uniform or clothing, ranging from a jersey (sportswear), shorts, socks and a pair of shoes. In addition to clothing, players will also need additional items such as shin guards. In fact, the team leader must also wear the captain’s armband as a marker.

    The goalkeeper’s attributes are different from other players. The goalkeeper or goalkeeper must wear a jersey with a different design from the jersey and protective gloves of other players. Goalkeepers are also allowed to wear long-sleeved jerseys and trousers.

    Football Referee Rules

    The referee is the arbiter with a neutral duty to regulate and decide the course of the match. During the game, the referee’s job is with the assistant referee to control the game, ensure that the ball is in accordance with the rules, ensure that the players are wearing the proper attributes, set the start time of the game. determine when the match needs to be postponed, stopped and ended, and adjudicate if a violation has occurred.

    Football Assistant Referee Rules

    In a soccer match, the referee is also supported by two flag-bearing assistants. The assistant referee, or what is commonly called the lineman , helps the referee supervise the game. The flag of the assistant referee serves as a marker for the ball going out of the field, offside or a corner kick.

    Rules for the Duration of Football Matches

    A soccer match consists of two halves of 45 minutes each. During the game, time will continue even with fouls, substitutions, lost balls and the like. However, at the end of the match, the referee has the right to award the lost extra time. There is a 10-15 minute break between two rounds before moving on to another round.

    Kick Off Rules

    The start and resumption of play is usually marked by a kick-off from the midfield. Kick-offs are used to start the game, to continue play after a goal has been scored, and to start play after a break or after accidental extra time.

    The team that kicks off will be determined based on the results of the two captains’ coin toss according to the direction of the referee. When players start the game, both teams must be on each side of the court.

    Rules for Entering and Exiting the Football Field

    Goal ball is a ball in a state that can be played. While the ball cannot be played is when the ball goes out of the field. The ball is considered active when it is on the ground, even if it bounces off a post, crossbar, or other location.

    As long as the ball returns to the court after bouncing, the ball is still active. When an event occurs such as a violation, the ball leaves the field after the goal line or enters the line, and other events, the ball can be said to be inactive.

    Rules for Scoring Goals

    Goals scored by players can be both legal and illegal. A goal is considered legal or valid when the ball crosses the opposing team’s goal line. Meanwhile, a goal is considered illegal or invalid if a player from the team that scored the goal has committed a foul or if an opposing player commits a foul before the ball has crossed the goal line.

    Throw-in Rules

    If the ball leaves the side line, a throw-in or throw-in occurs. The team taking the throw-in is the last team to touch the ball before it crosses the line. There are two rules regarding throw-ins or throw-ins in soccer.

    First, the player takes the position of throwing the ball. Then he throws it over the line at ball position. Second, players hold the ball using both hands, with the original position from the back of the head. Then, players throw the ball using both hands, with the direction from above the head.

    Free Kick Rules

    Free kicks or free kicks can be divided into two types, namely direct free kicks and indirect free kicks.

    A direct free kick is a free kick that is aimed directly at the goal without touching a team-mate before it. Meanwhile, an indirect free kick is a free kick that requires a player to make the ball hit by a teammate and score with another teammate.

    Penalty Kick Rules

    Free kicks are taken when an opposing player commits a foul in the penalty area. The kicker will kick the ball placed at the penalty spot towards the goal which is only protected by the goalkeeper or the opposing goalkeeper.

    During a free kick, other players must remain outside the penalty area. When the free kick has been taken and a goal is scored, play returns to normal. However, if the penalty kick fails to hit the target and remains in the playing area, then both teams are allowed to control the ball and continue the game.

    Corner Kick Rules

    A corner kick is awarded when the ball last touches the defending team and crosses the goal line. This goal line runs parallel to the goal line, but does not run under the goal. The attacking team is then entitled to a corner kick. This kick is taken in the corner of the field closest to where the ball left the field.

    Goal Kick Rules

    If the ball crosses the goal line, but the attacking player last touched the ball, the defending team is awarded a goal kick. This kick is called a goal kick. For a goal kick, the ball must be kicked from the edge of the goal box, which is the small box inside the penalty area.

    Offsides Rule

    An offside will occur if a player is closer to the goal line than the ball and the last two players on the opposing team. However, offside is not a violation unless the player receives the ball from a cross. A player is considered not offside if he is level with the second last player of the opposing team.

    Football Sports Violation Regulations

    There are several violations that may not be committed in soccer. Some of these rules are also set by FIFA such as the rules in the match. The following are the rules for violations of soccer sports.

    Direct Free Kick Penalty Offense Rules

    Below are the reasons why a player gets a free kick penalty from an opponent.

    • Deliberately kicking an opponent or trying to kick an opponent;
    • Injures the opponent’s eye;
    • Jump dangerously at your opponent;
    • Stealthily attempts to take down opponents;
    • Make your opponent fall by tripping him;
    • Attacking opposing players;
    • Knocks down opponents by crashing into them;
    • Pulling opposing players to the ground;
    • Hold the opposing player by pulling the opponent’s shirt;
    • The player’s hand is hit by the ball;
    • Tackle the opponent without hitting the ball;
    • Make a tackle by hitting the ball, but this action is considered dangerous by the referee.

    Indirect Free Kick Penalty Rules

    • The player performs an action deemed dangerous by the referee. Dangerous in question is dangerous for yourself and other players. For example, someone tries to head the ball when the opposing player wants to kick the ball.
    • Performing an action aimed at preventing the goalkeeper from catching the ball;
    • Obstructing the opponent’s movement;
    • Perform actions that cause the referee to issue a yellow card to a red card;
    • Goalkeeper holds the ball for more than six seconds;
    • The goalkeeper intentionally touches a released ball before it hits another player;
    • The goalkeeper touches the ball from a team player’s kick;

    Yellow Card Offense Rules

    When a player commits a violation in the game, the referee will give a yellow card to the player who violates it as a warning. Here are the things that cause players to get a yellow card.

    • Player repeatedly commits fouls;
    • Player commits cheating or unsportsmanlike conduct;
    • Players block the opponent’s feet roughly;
    • Players knock opponents down violently;
    • The player deliberately does things that delay the match;
    • Deliberately wasting time in a match;
    • The player leaves the field without the permission of the referee;
    • Players enter the field area without the permission of the referee;
    • Players intentionally take actions that aim to incite discord between players;
    • Criticize the referee harshly;
    • Exaggerated goal celebrations.

    Red Card Offense Rules

    A player who commits a serious foul in soccer will be given a red card. If a player receives a red card, that player must automatically leave the field. In football matches, players who receive red cards are usually banned from playing in the next one or two matches.

    • Players commit acts of violence in matches;
    • Players commit serious violations until the opponent is injured;
    • Players other than the goalkeeper deliberately touch the ball with their hands to prevent a goal from the opponent;
    • Provoking the opposing team so that there is commotion;
    • Players insult, say harshly, and humiliate opposing players;
    • The player takes an action that causes the match to be stopped.

    Sinaumed’s, that’s the article regarding the rules of soccer that have been discussed by sinaumedia. For those of you who don’t really understand soccer, you will understand a little with this article.

    However, if you want to learn more deeply, you can buy books about soccer and other sports at sinaumedia. sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits has provided a variety of quality books that you can have. Come on Sinaumed’s, buy the book now!

  • Get to know the flow of painting and various painting techniques

    The Art of Painting – Painting is one of the oldest branches of art among other branches of art. This is evidenced by the tracing of a hand on the cave wall. It is estimated that these hand tracings were made since prehistoric times. Then it was realized that this activity could produce quite beautiful pictures and until now it has developed into a branch of fine art by drawing on a flat surface.

    Along with the development of art, various kinds of art genres began to emerge from time to time. As for what distinguishes the art flow, among others, the visual style, coloring techniques performed by each painter, and the message in it. So, in this article, we will discuss what is the flow of painting and what are the currents of painting in the world. Here is a full explanation:

    Definition of Painting Art Flow

    The flow of painting is a style, genre, and distinctive understanding that is followed by certain individuals or groups to create painting. The flow referred to here is that it can be in the form of main ideas or ideas that were sparked by someone or flow naturally or emerge on their own in line with the development of painting. You need to understand that several schools of painting usually interact with each other. For example, flow C exists because it feels that flow B is no longer relevant to the conditions of the times, or that it has too downplayed certain streams. Then the D flow is present because it feels that if the two are combined it will become more perfect.

    Schools or what is commonly called schools of painting are also often influenced or can be said to be formed by the conditions of society at that time. There are large sects whose influence is just as strong, there are also small sects which do not get too much attention. In the past, naturalism and realism had the strongest influence. Because, both of them have an applicable function as documentation, before there was a camera that replaced them. Today, the flow still exists but is not as strong as it used to be.

    A lot of inspiration, lessons, and also knowledge that can be drawn from the various currents of painting that exist today. Therefore, studying the flow of painting again will open up a lot of new treasures, ranging from simply appreciating well, or just getting into the world of painting.

    The Largest & Most Important Art Flow in History

    The following are some of the greatest types of painting in the world:

    1. Romanticism

    The flow of romanticism is a flow that describes a reality that exists in various ways that seem dramatic and has an atmosphere like in a dream. For example, a ship tossing because of stormy weather, a human figure standing on a hilltop when dusk comes, and so on. Romanticism reveals the beauty of a theme from its theatrical style, not only relying on beautiful subjects.

    Characteristics of Romanticism

    a. Is imaginative, although still realistic or no fantasy in it. In addition, the scene also looks more dramatic than the reality.
    b. Subjectively, namely the creation of art is assessed as an artist’s self-expression.
    c. Using a fairly high emotional intensity.
    d. The atmosphere or imagery has a dreamlike quality.
    e. Describing very strong feelings and not being literal or using similes and symbols.

    Important Figures of Romanticism

    1. Francisco Goya
    2. Caspar David Friedrich
    3. JMW Turner
    4. Theodore Gericault
    5. Henry Fuseli
    6. Jean Auguste Dominique Ingres

    2. Naturalism

    The flow of naturalism is a school that wants to describe nature as similar and as accurate as possible with the references it will paint. Naturalism is a place for artists to appreciate nature. Generally, artists will choose a certain time, for example at dusk or golden hour, to paint a very special and extraordinary scene.

    Characteristics of Naturalism Painting

    a. This flow prioritizes the accuracy and similarity of the image in the painting with the object to be painted according to the reference.
    b. The main weapon of the painters is the technique and ability.
    c. Bringing beautiful painting themes but based on purity.
    d. The flow of naturalism is a form of appreciation of the artists for the beauty of nature.
    e. Always raising the theme of natural beauty or scenery that surrounds the artist.

    Figure of the Art of Painting Naturalism

    1. John Constable
    2. Jean-Baptiste-Camille Corot
    3. Theodore Rousseau
    4. Thomas Cole
    5. Frederic Edwin Church
    6. Ilya Repin
    7. Basuki Abdullah

    3. Realism

    Realism is a school that wants to show an event, a certain model, or an atmosphere in everyday situations, without drama or only the most beautiful conditions are chosen. The genre may not perfectly copy what they see, realistic events, or themes, not just images.

    Characteristics of the flow of Realism Painting

    a. Raising the theme of everyday events that occur and are experienced by most people.
    b. Describes the people who are in a real and unique situation with their daily environment.
    c. Realist works will show human beings of all classes in their natural conditions and situations.
    d. Realism never agrees with exaggerated artistic subjects or romanticist-style dramatizations.
    e. Having detailed images that resemble the original or natural using high techniques mastered by the painters.

    Figures of the flow of Realism Painting

    1. Gustave Courbet
    2. Jean-François millet
    3. Edouard Manet
    4. James Whistler
    5. John Singer Sargent
    6. Thomas Eakins

    4. Impressionism

    Impressionism is a school of painting which only paints a glimpse of the subject to be painted. This flow arose because of the existence of a camera that has been able to take over the function of art as a medium of documentation. Compared to replicating colors that are similar to the human way of seeing, impressionism wanted to depict pure colors based on the process of natural color formation.

    Generally, followers of impressionism will paint in the open in a fairly short period of time. So you have to sacrifice the accuracy of the form. That is the reason why their paintings are only impressions. Because, they did not have time to complete further details. However, from these imperfections, new aesthetic forms emerge that do not exist in other schools such as realism, naturalism, even photography.

    Characteristics of Impressionism Painting

    a. The images in the paintings tend not to be detailed, the paintings will only look similar when viewed from afar
    b. Contrasting and vibrant color palette based on the color circle grouping theory.
    c. Focus on painting the reflection of light on the subject
    d. Using a brush technique called dab, which is an external term for dipping sauce.
    e. Never use black.

    Figure of the School of Impressionism Painting

    1. Claude Monet
    2. Edgar Degas
    3. Pierre-Auguste Renoir
    4. Camille Pissarro
    5. Alfred Sisley

    5. Fauvism

    Fauvism usually uses a style similar to Impressionism. But rejected the basic idea of ​​imitation of nature. This flow of Fauvism is to make color an independent element of art. The color is not only the color of clothes, skin color, or the color of the sky. But being one of the elements that are independent or stand alone without being a physical representation of anything.

    Characteristics of the Fauvism School of Painting

    a. Striking colors that do not show accuracy in the model to be painted.
    b. The shape of the image in the painting is accompanied by a dark line.
    c. Colors are used to express ideas or ideas of artists, not just coloring.
    d. Detailed accuracy in the form of images on the model or subject reference is ignored.
    e. Convey ideas, ideas, or personal messages from the painter.

    Fauvism figure

    1. Henri Matisse
    2. Maurice de Vlaminck
    3. Andre Derain
    4. Kees van Dongen
    5. Raoul Dufy
    6. Georges Braque

    6. Expressionism

    The flow of expressionism is one of the schools that emphasizes the individual expression of the artists themselves on what they remember, see, and feel. It can be said that expressionism is a flow of painting that emphasizes the expression that is in the soul. Expressionism will not impose precision and also the difficulty of painting in his work. Therefore, these streams do not have an accurate level of similarity and even greatly deviate from natural references.

    Characteristics of Expressionism Painting

    1. Will not prioritize the similarity of the objects they paint.
    2. Expressive and bold brush strokes or brush marks are left visible and not covered up.
    3. Painting techniques that look naive or amateur but still have good composition.
    4. Prioritizing the expression of the artist’s individual soul compared to tracing nature.
    5. Using color as a symbol for something, not just as a coloring object.

    Expressionist figure

    1. Ernst Ludwig Kirchner
    2. Wassily Kandinsky
    3. Kathe Kollwitz
    4. Paul Klee
    5. Chaim Soutine
    6. Max Beckmann

    7. Cubism

    The flow of cubism is a flow that contains various points of view of an object in the same picture. So as to produce a deformed and fragmented painting. This flow also simplifies objects to resemble geometric shapes. A painting object can consist of various angles simultaneously to produce an aesthetic discrepancy.

    Characteristics of Cubism

    a. Using multiple perspectives in one image.
    b. Doing deconstruction and deformation of painted objects such as changing the position of the mouth with the position of the eyes.
    c. Simplify the object to be similar to a geometric shape.
    d. Explore open shapes and blend the background with the object in front of it.
    e. In the second phase of cubism, many used everyday objects as either collages or newspaper clippings.

    Cubism figures

    1. Pablo Picasso
    2. Georges Braque
    3. Fernand Leger
    4. Juan Gris
    5. Robert Delaunay
    6. Sonia Delaunay

    8. Dadaism

    Dadaism is a flow that cannot make a beautiful work physically. But it is filled with sharp criticism or social messages by making an indirect allusion, up to a direct statement that is quite provocative to the authorities who are considered to have made a negative decision. The flow of dadaism will emit aesthetic beauty from a side that is rarely contained in beauty.

    The Characteristics of Dadaism

    a. Displays an image that is not beautiful but provocative.
    b. It contains messages that question the meaning of art, the role of artists, and aesthetics in general.
    c. Conveying anti-war appeals through satirical or satirical messages on the atrocities of war.
    d. Contains anti-bourgeois messages at that time considered to have resulted in World War I.
    e. Using “readymade” objects or something that already exists, such as everyday objects such as spoons, glasses, toilets, and so on.

    Dadaist figures

    1. Francis Picabia
    2. Marcel Duchamp
    3. Man Ray
    4. Hannah Hoch
    5. Sophie Taeuber-Arp
    6. Andre Breton

    9. Surrealism

    Surrealism is a school of painting that presents images of real objects in situations that are impossible to occur in the real world. So that the image is like the one in the dream. Pictures that are real but in unreal conditions, such as: pictures of floating humans, melted wall clocks, or portraits of faces with mouths and noses whose positions are swapped. The flow of surrealism usually uses the approach of Freud’s psychological theory. Where the flow explores the subconscious and the image of a human dream as one illustration of a human desire.

    Characteristics of the Surrealism Painting School

    a. Loading an image of a real object in unreal conditions.
    b. Imagery like the one in a dream.
    c. Having a high contrast, that means, there is a large shape next to a small one.
    d. Play the imagination that is in the dream with the real world.
    e. Looks like fantasy but sticks to real world references.

    Figures of the Surrealism Painting School

    1. Salvador Dali
    2. Andre Breton
    3. Hans Arp
    4. Max Ernst
    5. Alberto Giacometti
    6. Joan Miro

    Painting Techniques in General

    You need to understand that there are many kinds of techniques in painting. Material, each person will definitely have the characteristics of a painting technique according to their abilities. The use of painting techniques is one thing that is very important in order to produce a maximum image. So, using technique is very necessary. The following are some techniques that you can use in everyday life.

    1. How to Paint Using the Aquarel Technique

    The aquarel technique is a painting technique that uses watercolor (aquarelle) as a base and uses thin and subtle strokes of color. So, the image or painting that will be produced has a transparent and also light nuance. In order to produce a smooth, thin, and also light strokes. It would be better if you use a slightly thinner paint.

    2. How to Paint with the Plaque Technique

    In contrast to the aquarel technique which seems more transparent. The use of the placard technique is a painting technique that uses watercolors, oil paints, and also acrylic paints with thick strokes and a thicker paint composition. So that this technique will give a more colorful impression in a painting. This painting technique is often used by professional painters to create beautiful paintings that have high economic value.

    3. How to paint with the spray technique

    This spray technique is a painting technique that uses spraying paint onto the painting medium. The purpose of using this technique is to produce a painting that is smoother and looks more real from a visual standpoint. If you ever see graffiti on street walls, that is an example of painting using the spray technique.

  • Get to know the Financial Accounting Standards in Indonesia

    Financial Accounting Standards in Indonesia – In order to regulate or manage finances, there is a certain procedure that a country must have. In the financial accounting standards in Indonesia , there are a number of types of standards, so that it is useful for presenting financial information by certain business entities.

    1. PSAK-IFRS

    The first standard that serves as a benchmark for financial management is PSAK-IFRS. This is an accounting procedure for the company to use in various business activities. To better understand it, here’s a full explanation.

    1.1 Explanation of PSAK-IFRS

    PSAK-IFRS stands for Statement of Financial Accounting Standards ( International Reporting Standards ). This is the management basis issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board in 2012 through an Indonesian Accounting Association (IAI).

    The use of this standard has reasons because Indonesia is a country that is a member of IFAC ( International Federation of Accountants ). A number of benefits from the guidelines include increasing comparability and providing quality information on the capital market.

    1.2 Financial Accounting Standards (SAK)

    SAK is a Financial Accounting Standard that serves as a guideline for carrying out a number of activities. That starts from the process of making, compiling, to the stages of presenting Indonesian financial information.

    The use of a standard follows the times. Until finally the Indonesian state SAK has standard guidelines for determining from following international accounting procedures. This is so that all financial information can be recognized globally.

    1.3 Reasons for Using SAK

    With a guideline, the process of presenting financial information becomes more structured. In general, this standard is useful for a number of parties, such as investors, to know a number of risks and financial conditions. Then, shareholders can monitor the company’s financial condition. 

    SAK is also useful for creditors because it has a function to assess the ability to pay credit or loans. Then, for suppliers this is useful in order to be able to see the credibility of a company whether it is able to pay on time or not. 

    1.4 Types of SAK

    Each country has its own Financial Accounting Standards. In Indonesia alone, the guidelines for presenting this information are divided into four types. Everything is useful to provide quality and accurate data.

    The four types of standards in presenting financial information include Statements of Financial Accounting Standards (PSAK), Sharia Accounting Standards (SAS), PSAK – IFRS (Statements of Financial Accounting Standards – International Reporting Standards), and SAK – ETAP.

    Books Regarding Financial Accounting

    The following are recommendations for best seller books regarding financial accounting books , introductory accounting, and cost accounting.

    2. Explanation of the International Financial Accounting Standard (IFRS)

    IFRS is an international accounting standard that is useful in the preparation and public reporting of company finances.

    The purpose of using this guide is to make it easy to compare high-quality information for each company.

    2.1 Application of IFRS in Indonesia

    As a developing country in all fields, including the economy, it is very important to use an accounting standard. The application of IFRS in Indonesia began in 2012. In its implementation, there are three main stages.

    The initial stage of the first use of IFRS is adoption. This process started from 2008 – 2011. The first activity was to carry out a number of activities to gradually adopt IFRS to PSAK.

    The next stage after adoption is to finalize the infrastructure for various needs. This process took place starting in 2011. All forms of activity focused on all preparations for the implementation of IFRS.

    IFRS implementation or implementation activities in Indonesia are carried out in stages. Then, there are a number of processes to find out what are the benefits and constraints in its implementation. This has continued until now.

    2.2 Advantages of Using IFRS

    The first advantage of using the IFRS standard is that it makes it easier to prepare financial reports. This happens because the method of presenting data related to company funds is very good and systematic.

    By using IFRS, a company will be better able to reduce the cost of financial statements. Based on the experts and the results of use after a long time, it can make investors save even more when making comparisons.

    By using IFRS, it will have an impact on investment flows that are more transparent. As you already understand, transparency is very important to make it easier to access information on benefits and risks.

    3. The difference between SAK and IFRS

    The task of an accountant is very important in carrying out company financial reporting. However, using certain procedures, this process becomes easier. There are two types of references in this activity, namely SAK and IFRS. Here’s the difference between the two.

    The first difference comes from the source. The point is the foundation of the standard issuance. For SAK, it comes from PSAK No. 1 (Revised 1998) concerning Presentation of Financial Statements. Meanwhile, IFRS itself comes from IAS1, Presentation of Financial Statements.

    In SAK, the format for providing information uses certain entities and uses direct methods. While the presentation of financial statement information uses IFRS, using standard headings. However, it has a number of limitations in determining its content. 

    In the SAK procedure, it has rules regarding the recognition of profits and losses from reports on changes in shareholder equity. The IFRS procedure uses financial statement presentations that recognize gains and losses, but in separate notes.

    4. SAK – ETAP

    The next type of accounting standard is SAK – ETAP. This is a reference to entities without public accountability. So it is useful for a company to report finances in general with the aim of external use. 

    4.1 Explanation of SAK – ETAP

    With the existence of standards for financial reports for entities without Public Accountability, it has a beneficial impact on MSMEs. So that its use can bring convenience to small and medium scale businesses.

    SAK ETAP is a financial reporting standard that does not depend on general SAK or it stands alone.

    In practice, the historical cost concept is used, the information presentation rules are simple, and have not changed over the years.

    In the process of financial reporting, SAK ETAP goes through a number of processes. These stages include establishing balance sheets, profits and losses, changes in equity, cash flows, top notes, and so on.

    4.2 Purpose of SAK – ETAP

    The use of SAK – ETAP has the main objective of being able to provide easy access to ETA for the process of providing funds by banks. Because this standard stands alone, the concept of rules for presenting financial data is simpler.

    This standard without Public Accountability has the objective of presenting general or external financial statements only. So in that way, the reference uses fixed assets, which are intangible acquisition prices.

    Another purpose of using SAK – ETAP is to provide convenience in obtaining funds for MSMEs from banks. So, they can develop their business to be better and successful in the future.

    4.3 Example of Accounting Book Based on SAK – ETAP

    To understand more about SAK – ETAP, you can read a number of references. An example is the book by Syaiful Bahri, SE., MSA entitled ‘ Introduction to Accounting Based on SAK ETAP and IFRS ‘. The discussion is very complete and also clear.

    The discussion in this book also includes examples of service, trade, and industrial companies. The purpose of the Syaiful Bahri reference work is to provide an overview of the SAK / Financial Accounting Standards process.

    For those of you who are looking for basic reference material, you can use this book. That way, it will understand more about each stage from SAK to the final process in the form of presentation of financial statements.

    5. Sharia PSAK

    The procedure for making the next financial report is PSAK Syariah. This is a procedure using the basics of presenting industry and business information using sharia principles in Indonesia.

    5.1 Explanation of Sharia PSAK

    The existence of PSAK Syariah is inseparable from the development of Indonesian companies which are increasingly using Islamic principles. Therefore, Indonesian financial accounting standards related to Islamic Financial Institutions were born in 2002.

    The use of PSAK Syariah is able to provide convenience in the formulation of financial reports. The basis for making this standard comes from the Al-Qur’an surah Al-Baqarah verses 282 – 283. It contains financial records according to the principles of fairness, truth and honesty.

    Through the use of PSAK Syariah, this has contributed to the development of the Islamic economy increasing. Not only in the progress of the process in Indonesia, but also in the whole world. That way, it is able to create an environment and market on the basis of Islamic law. 

    5.2 PSAK Syariah Applied in Indonesia

    In Indonesia, the standard for determining financial reporting is the authority of the Sharia Accounting Standards Board (DSAK). This is directly under the auspices of the Indonesian Institute of Accountants (IAI). Its application began when there was the 8th Congress in 1998.

    There are a number of types of implementation forms of PSAK Syariah reporting in Indonesia. In that case, the process of presenting financial information uses the basis of the type of transaction which has been made by the DSAK.

    Some of these reporting forms include PSAK 102 Accounting for Murabahah, PSAK 102 Accounting for Salam, PSAK 103 Accounting for Istishna’, PSAK 106 Accounting for Musyarakah, PSAK 107 Accounting for Ijarah, PSAK 108 Accounting for Sharia Insurance Transactions, and PSAK 109 Accounting for Zakat and Infak/Alms.

    5.3 Latest PSAK Syariah

    The Sharia Accounting Standards Board (DSAK) first issued PSAK using Islamic financial principles in 2002. Then, this continued to experience development and a number of improvements in several types.

    In 2007, there were 6 PSAK Syariah with one basic framework, until in 2019 there were 13 PSAK with one framework and 2 ISAK (Interpretation of Financial Accounting Standards). Meanwhile, 2021 has the newest type.

    In 2021, there are a number of PSAK that are active per January. This includes presentation of financial statements, cash flow reports, interim financial reports, separate financial reports, operating segments, related party statements, events after reporting, changes in foreign exchange rates, to ISAK and PPSAK.

     

    6. SAP

    Presentation of the next financial statements in the form of SAP. This is a form of management and recording of sources of incoming and outgoing funds from the government. Usually it is addressed to related parties, such as BPK, DPR, community, and others.

    6.1 SAP Explanation

    SAP or Government Accounting Standards is a set of references in compiling and presenting reports relating to government finances. It usually consists of Central Government Financial Statements (LKPP) and Regional Government Financial Statements (LKPD).

    In a government, financial reporting is very important in order to get transparency from the flow of these finances. That way, other related parties and the public can find out the accountability of this state accounting administration.

    The standard for using SAP is using a statement with a number of points. That starts from the title, number, and the effective date of the reference. 

    6.2 SAP Implementation Base

    The government in reporting financial flows uses certain principles. This standard was prepared by the independent Government Accounting Standards Committee and went through a number of stages of approval, starting from becoming a Government Regulation to obtaining an opinion from BPK.

    The rule that determines the existence of this SAP is Government Regulation Number 24 of 2005 concerning Government Accounting Standards. The contents are in the form of a cash basis in order to provide recognition of revenue transactions, assets, and many others.

    Recognition of this basis is still provisional. Now, everything refers to the latest rules, namely Article 9 paragraph (1) Government Regulation 71 of 2010 concerning SAP or Government Accounting Standards.

    6.3 Benefits of SAP

    The preparation of financial statements using a number of principles certainly has benefits. Of the two types of reporting, namely LKPP and LPPD, are able to provide up-to-date information on financial flows and data regarding the budget.

    Besides having the benefit of knowing the latest financial statements, SAP also has uses as a medium to see transparency and accountability of accounting in Indonesia.

    Another benefit of government financial reporting is that it enables accounting managers to provide new, more effective strategies. By way of comparison from the next report, it will provide a good method for managing state finances.

    6.4 Advantages of SAP

    The use of accounting standards is one form of making quality reporting. The advantage of this SAP is that it is able to improve the quality of a country’s financial governance.

    Making report presentations with this principle has advantages which the auditor can use to determine whether the presentation of the information is in accordance with the standards or not. Then it will also improve consistency and relevance.

    Another advantage is that it can be used as a reference in compiling financial reports according to existing standards. That way, the results have credibility so they can provide government accounting transparency.

    6.5 Advantages of Becoming a SAP Expert

    The accounting system in the government consists of central and regional. The existence of the principle of presenting financial information is very useful for a country in managing its economy.

    Being an accountant expert in government is certainly a career that has good prospects. However, behind all this, you must master a number of important skills to support the financial reporting process.

    Becoming a SAP expert who works professionally will provide benefits for the country. Through reporting and according to standards, it can have a good impact so that we are able to manage the economy even better.

    6.6 How to Become a SAP Expert

    The job of being an accountant always has a lot of enthusiasts every year. You can see this from the selection of Accounting majors which are still busy. This step is the first step to be able to become a SAP expert.

    There are many ways to become a professional accountant. After obtaining a bachelor’s degree in Accounting, then get a CA ( Chartered Accountant ) certification. Then, make sure you have good work experience from various fields, such as public, corporate, education, etc.

    The verification process to become a public accountant practitioner is at least three (3) years. You can get this for the last 7 years and then you can become a member of the Indonesian Institute of Accountants (IAI).

    Material Related to Financial Accounting Standards

  • Get to know the figure of Uthman Bin Affan as a caliph and friend of the Prophet

    Uthman Bin Affan – Prophet Muhammad SAW is a human figure who is most loved by all his
    people, but not only among his people, his family and friends also love him very much.
    As a
    friend who lived at the same time as the prophet and spent his days with the prophet, of course, the nature
    and character of a friend of the prophet is not much different from the noble character of the prophet
    himself.

    Of the several companions of the prophet that we know, one of them who was once the caliph replacing
    leadership after the departure of the prophet was Uthman Bin Affan.
    He is the figure of the
    third caliph after Abu Bakr and Umar Bin Khattab who rose to continue the just and prosperous
    government.

    Imitating his figure must be very good because he is also known to have a good role model and should be an
    example for the next generation, especially Muslims around the world.

    For this reason, it is good for us to follow his story in this discussion which will summarize his life journey
    as a caliph and companion of the Prophet Muhammad SAW.

    Further discussion regarding Uthman Bin Affan can be seen below!

    Life History of Uthman Bin Affan

    ‘Uthman bin’ Affan 17 June 579 AD was the third Caliph who ruled from 644 AD to 656 AD and was the longest
    reigning Rashidun Caliph.
    Like his two predecessors, ‘Uthman was one of the main companions of
    the Prophet Muhammad.
    His successive marriages to the two daughters of the Prophet Muhammad and
    Khadijah earned him the nickname Dzun Nurain (holder of two lamps).

    During his reign, the Muslim government expanded its territory into Fars (now Iran) in 650 and parts of
    Khorāsān (now Afghanistan) in 651. Armenian conquests had begun in the 640s.
    Uthman bin Affan
    bin Abi Al-Ash bin Umayyah bin Abdu Shams bin Abdu Manaf bin Qushay bin Kilab.

    Uthman was born to a father named Affan bin Abi al-‘As, from the Umayyad tribe, and to a mother named Arwa
    bint Kurayz, from Abd Shams, a wealthy and respected Quraysh tribe in Mecca.
    Uthman had a
    younger sister, Aminah.
    Uthman was born in Ta’if.

    He is listed as one of the 22 Meccans who could write. His father, Affan, died young while
    traveling abroad, leaving Uthman an important legacy.
    He became a merchant like his father, and
    his business thrived, making him one of the wealthiest men among the Quraysh.

    Uthman bin Affan was a friend of the Prophet and also the third Caliph from Rashidun Khulafaur.
    He is known as a rich and reliable businessman in the economic field but very generous.
    He greatly helped the economy of Muslims in the early days of Islamic da’wah. He was
    nicknamed Dzun Nurain which means one with two lights.
    This nickname was obtained because
    Uthman married the second and third daughters of Rasulullah ﷺ Ruqayyah and Umm Kulthum.

    Uthman bin Affan was born in 574 AD from the Umayyads. His mother’s name was Arwa bint Kuriz
    bin Rabiah.
    He converted to Islam at the invitation of Abu Bakr and belonged to the As-Sabiqun
    al-Awwalun group (the first group to convert to Islam).
    Rasulullah ﷺ himself described Uthman
    bin Affan as the most honest and humble Muslim.
    Imam Muslim narrated that Aisyah asked
    Rasulullah ﷺ, “Abu Bakr came in but you were normal and didn’t pay attention to him, then Umar also came to
    you normally and didn’t pay special attention.
    But when Uthman came in, you kept fixing your
    clothes, what’s wrong?”
    Allah’s Messenger replied: “Am I not ashamed of those whom even the
    angels are ashamed of?”

    At the time of the raging Dzatirriqa War and the Ghatfahan War, where Rasulullah ﷺ raised the banner of
    war, Uthman was believed to be the mayor of Medina.
    During the Battle of Tabuk, Uthman donated
    950 camels and 70 horses, plus a personal contribution of 1,000 dirhams for the Battle of Tabuk, which was a
    third of the cost of the war.
    Uthman bin Affan also showed his generosity by buying a spring
    called Rumah from a man from the Ghifar tribe for 35,000 dirhams.

    He dedicates water resources for the benefit of society. During the reign of Abu Bakr, Uthman
    also donated grain which was transported by 1000 camels to help those in need during the dry season.

    He was the first king to expand the Masjid al-Haram in Mecca and the Prophet’s Mosque in Medina as more and
    more Muslims practiced the fifth pillar of Islam (hajj).
    He creates security policy ideas for
    his people;
    construction of a special building for courts and case decisions that were
    previously conducted in mosques;
    developed agriculture, conquered several small areas around
    the border such as Syria, North Africa, Persia, Khurasan, Palestine, Cyprus, Rhodes, and formed a strong
    navy.

    The Beginning of Entering Islam

    When the Prophet Muhammad SAW received revelations and preached Islam, Abu Bakr became the first person to
    convert to Islam.
    After taking a business trip to Syria in 611 AD, Abu Bakr came to Uthman bin
    Affan to invite him to convert to Islam.
    Uthman also decided to convert to Islam and was later
    brought by Abu Bakr to meet the Prophet Muhammad to declare his faith.

    In this way, Uthman became one of the first to convert to Islam, after Ali, Umar, Abu Bakr and several
    others.
    From then on, he remained loyal to the Prophet Muhammad SAW and became one of the
    Prophet’s main companions.
    After receiving an invitation to move to Medina, Uthman became one
    of the people who left and accompanied the Prophet Muhammad SAW in spreading Islam until the end of the
    Prophet’s life.

    Uthman accepted Islam easily, as he had a dreamlike vision when he returned from Syria. As he
    struggled to fall asleep, Uthman heard a voice calling: “O sleeping one, wake up for Muhammad has appeared
    in Mecca,” he said.

    Until he returned, he had never heard of the new religion. Uthman contacted Abu Bakr, who
    informed him that he had sworn allegiance to the Prophet Muhammad and had accepted the new religion.
    Then he brought Uthman to the Prophet Muhammad.

    Uthman listened to the story of the experiences of the Prophet Muhammad and the circumstances under which
    his prophethood was revealed.
    He immediately accepted Islam and then moved with great ease in
    the circle of the Prophet Muhammad’s companions.

    When the message of the Prophet Muhammad reached the public, it threw Makkah into chaos. Many
    leaders are afraid of losing money.
    His God-only message means that the entry of pilgrims to
    the Kaaba to worship its many idols will now slow or even stop.

    Challenges after joining Islam

    As the ranks of the Prophet Muhammad’s followers began to grow, the Quraysh began a campaign of persecution
    and harassment of the new Muslims.
    The Quraysh were ready to fight to protect their idols and
    also to protect their economic and social way of life.
    The campaign quickly escalated into
    violence and abuse and even their family members were not safe.

    Uthman’s acceptance of Islam caused a backlash in his own family. Uthman’s father had died but
    his uncle tried to restrain Uthman.
    He tied her hands and feet and locked her in the
    cupboard.

    His mother and uncle wanted him to stop converting to Islam, but he refused. Uthman also faced
    difficult choices in his marriage.
    His wives refused to accept Islam and although he tried to
    convince them of the beauty of Islam, he eventually had to divorce her.

    Become caliph

    When the Prophet Muhammad SAW died in 632, Abu Bakr became the caliph who ruled over the Muslims.
    At this time, Uthman bin Affan and other friends became the main advisors to the government of Abu
    Bakr.
    After the death of Abu Bakr in 634, Umar bin Khattab succeeded him until his death in
    644.

    After Umar took office as the second Rashidun Khulafaur, Uthman remained in Medina to run his business and
    participate in government.
    He experienced various events, until Umar bin Khattab died because
    he was killed by Abu Lu’luah.

    After that, discussions were held to choose the next caliph. There were six candidates
    proposed, namely Ali bin Abi Talib, Uthman bin Affan, Abdurrahman bin Auf, Sa’ad bin Abi Waqqas, Zubair bin
    Awwam and Talhah bin Ubaidillah.
    However, Abdurrahman bin Auf, Sa’ad bin Abi Waqqas, Zubair bin
    Awwam and Talhah bin Ubaidillah withdrew, leaving Uthman and Ali alone.

    After an opinion poll, the majority wanted Usman to replace Umar as the third king. So in the
    month of Muharram 23 H or 644 AD, Uthman bin Affan became caliph at the age of 70 years.

    The reign of Uthman Bin Affan

    One of the things that Uthman bin Affan did during his time as caliph was to expand his territory and
    establish a naval fleet.
    His government succeeded in controlling Barqah, West Tripoli, the
    southern part of Nubah’s country in Africa, Armenia, Tabaristan, Amu Darya, Balkha, Harah, Kabul, Haznah in
    Turkistan in Asia and Cyprus in Europe.
    Uthman also divided the Muslim empire into ten
    provinces with an emir or governor each.

    Under his reign, the Muslim Ummah experienced the greatest period of prosperity and prosperity.
    That said, people can go on pilgrimage more than once. Uthman also built a police and
    court which always stood in the former mosque.
    Uthman’s most glorious achievement was the
    compilation of the Koran which was then reproduced and sent to Mecca, Syria, Basrah, Kufa and Medina.

    End of Reign

    Uthman bin Affan ruled for two periods, each lasting six years. However, during his second
    reign, there were divisions and rebellions because the Umayyads gave a strategic position in government to
    his family.
    In 35 AH or 655 AD, around 1,500 people came to Medina to protest Uthman’s
    policies.

    The example of Uthman bin Affan

    Here are 5 exemplary examples from Uthman bin Affan:

    1. Care about religion and people

    Uthman bin Affan was mentioned as the third caliph after the death of ‘Umar bin Khattab.
    Uthman bin Affan was chosen because of his noble and sincere attitude and behavior in his efforts
    to develop Islam.

    After becoming Caliph, much was done to advance Islam. One of his services is to establish a
    group of Al-Quran publishers chaired by Zaid bin Thabit.
    This is due to the interest of Muslims
    in how to read the Qur’an because the existing texts are not in order and there are disputes about how to
    read them.

    The first step is to collect Al-Quran mushaf in the community. Because the mushaf of the Koran
    among the people may not be in accordance with the truth.
    The next task is to copy and compile
    the Al-Qur’an manuscripts which are related to the manuscripts kept by Hafsah bint Umar which are still well
    and properly preserved.
    The recorded or published Al-Qur’an is then called “Mushaf Al-Imam” or
    Ottoman Mushaf to be used as a guide in reading the correct Al-Qur’an.

    2. His generosity

    Uthman bin Affan is known as a generous figure. During the time of Caliph Abu Bakr, the city
    of Mecca was hit by famine due to a prolonged dry season.
    When coming from the land of Syam
    Uthman came a trade caravan with 1000 camels carrying food.
    Before entering the city, Uthman’s
    entourage was stopped by Mecca merchants to buy all of Uthman’s luggage in exchange for a large profit.
    But Uthman was not tempted at all because he intended to give all the goods he brought to the
    poor.

    3. Courage

    Caliph Uthman bin Affan was fearless in the face of 120,000 Roman soldiers in North Africa who were fully
    equipped for war.
    When the Islamic territory expanded and many areas were surrounded by seas,
    to protect Muslim areas from enemy attacks, Caliph Uthman established fleets and naval forces. Islam always
    won in naval battles.

    4. Simple and Humble

    Uthman bin Affan was classified as a rich man, but he did not live in luxury. His behavior in
    life is simple and unobtrusive, such as dressing, eating, and living.

    Syurahbil bin Muslimin reported that “Uthman used to eat well as the rulers usually served him, but at home he
    used to eat bread with vinegar or oil.”

    5. Firm in the faith

    After hearing that Uthman bin Affan converted to Islam, his uncle Al Hakam bin Abil Ash was very angry.
    Uthman was bound and beaten many times to return to his ancestral religion. But Uthman
    remained firm in his beliefs and would not leave the religion taught by the Prophet no matter what.
    Year

    Conclusion

    This is a brief discussion of Uthman Bin Affan’s biography.

    Getting to know the figure of Uthman Bin Affan gives us an idea that there was a human figure who was so kind
    after the departure of the Prophet Muhammad SAW who gave us the opportunity to become part of this good person
    and teach good life lessons for the next generation.

    Thus the review about Uthman Bin Affan. For Sinaumed’s who want to know more about the figure of
    Uthman Bin Affan and other knowledge related to Islamic history, you can visit
    sinaumedia.com to get related books.

    As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest
    information for you.
    To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and
    original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Pandu Akram
    Related articles:

    Exemplifying the Wisdom of the Story and Example of Prophet Sulaiman AS

    The story and example of the Prophet Ishaq AS which should be used as a lesson!

    10 Good Models of the Prophet Muhammad SAW to Be Followed!

    Follow the story of the courage of the Prophet David AS

    The story of Abu Bakar As Siddiq with Rasulullah SAW in spreading Islam

  • Get to know the European continent, its astronomical position and history

    The astronomical position of the continent of Europe – Throughout history, there must have been a distinction between Europe as a continent. Most of the continents that are separating can be appreciated clearly through traditional globes or maps. Even so, we sometimes see Europe as part of Asia.

    In fact, Europe is a large peninsula extending westward from the main body of Eurasia, named after the landmass that comprises Asia and Europe.

     

    Location of the Continent of Europe

    So, how is the location of this one continent?

    Astronomical

    The European continent is located at an astronomical location of 35° North Latitude – 71°06′ North Latitude and 9°27′ West Longitude – 66°20′ East Longitude. Because the first meridian is at zero degrees, there is a change in direction from west to east length.

    In the northern hemisphere and the western and eastern regions, that’s where Europe is located. As the second smallest continent in the world, Europe covers an area four times smaller than Asia or America and three times smaller than Africa, which is 10 million square kilometers. Even so, Europe is the richest continent in the world and has 47 countries.

    Geographical

    Europe is considered to be historically important, and this has led to it being considered a continent for many years. One of the most striking features of the European continent is its coastline.

    The European “peninsula” is bounded by many smaller peninsulas, mainly the Iberian peninsula, Scandinavia, the Balkans, to Jutland. In fact, there are many islands that are considered part of the continent even though they are located on the high seas, such as Great Britain, Sicily, Iceland, Ireland, Crete and Corsica.

    The boundaries of the European continent are the Atlantic Ocean to the west, the Mediterranean Sea to the south, and the North Sea to the north. The continent also has an open connection to the Black Sea via the Dardanelles and Istanbul Straits.

    Along the Ural Mountains it forms the eastern border of Europe, along the Kara and Ural rivers and through the Caspian depression to the Caspian Sea.

    The location in Europe was ideal for conquest, trade, movement of goods and people, war and even the spread of ideas. Because, their access and location to major sea and ocean routes, Europeans also explored other parts of the world and colonized. This is why Europe is famous all over the world.

    European Geography Facts

    One thing to note regarding European geography is that some statistics will be found in European Russia even though the mainland is considered part of Asian Russia geographically. Here are some geographical facts on the continent of Europe:

    • The Vatican is the smallest country in Europe, in terms of area and population
    • Germany is the largest country in Europe by population
    • Europe’s highest point is Mount Elbrus in Russia
    • Europe’s lowest point is the Caspian Sea which borders Russia
    • Europe’s highest point is Mt. Blanc in France and Italy
    • Europe’s lowest point is Lammefjord in Denmark

    Traditionally, the Russian landmass lying west of the Ural Mountains is referred to as European Russia in most educational atlases and most geographers. It is so called not because Russia is a separate country, but because of its long-term cultural, political and geographical amalgamation with neighboring European countries.

    77 percent of Russia is included in the Asian continent, while 33 percent is included in the European continent. Even so, nearly 77 percent of the entire Russian population, live in European Russia.

    European Russia alone comprises 3,960,000 square km (1,528,560 square miles) and covers about 40 percent of Europe’s territory. As before, its eastern border depends on the Ural Mountains and its southern border is bounded by the Kazakh border.

    Europe map

    On Earth, Europe is the sixth largest continent and includes 51 independent nations on various islands and territories. Meanwhile, the surface area recognized by Europe includes about 10.5 million square kilometers or 2 percent of the entire surface of the Earth and 6.8 of its total land area.

    Europe, in a precise geographical definition, is not really a continent. It is part of the Eurasian peninsula which includes all parts of Europe and Asia. Even so, Europe is still widely called a continent because of differences, such as cultural differences.

    There are many waters that border the continent of Europe, which is separated from Asia by the Ural Mountains, the Caspian and Black Seas, and Russia. Meanwhile, this continent is separated from Africa by the Mediterranean Sea.

    Influence on European Climatic Conditions

    The astronomical position of the European continent makes it possible to partially explain the behavior of its climate. It is known that areas near the north pole or south pole are very cold because they receive only oblique sunlight, while the zones near the equator are hotter, because the sun shines directly on these surfaces, thus projecting more sunlight per square inch of land.

    The oceans bordering the European continent also condition its climate. The oceans collect and store large amounts of solar energy, especially around the equator, and carry that heat with their currents.

    Ocean currents can move water thousands of miles away. Because of the staggering amount of heat that the oceans can absorb, oceanic climates are often cooler than continental climates, with lower variations in temperature from day to night, and from winter to summer.

    These variables affect not only temperature, but also rainfall patterns over large parts of Europe. Because hot water cools more slowly than on land, the water thus moderates the coastal environment.

    This thermal inertia allows coastal communities to have more moderate climates than would be conceivable for places farther north. Unfortunately inland Europe does not benefit from coastal waters.

    The Gulf Stream transports warmer water from the South Atlantic to the North Atlantic and moderates temperatures in Western Europe. Western Europe mostly has a temperate or moderately rainy climate, type C.

    The Gulf Stream originates in the Gulf of Mexico, where water warms and is transported by strong currents to the East Coast of the United States and then across the Atlantic Ocean and influences the climate of the European region.

    The most dramatic effects of this Gulfstream can be found on the western coastal islands of Scotland, which have a moderately mild climate where several forms of tropical flora are cultivated.

    Norway’s coast is another example. Although most of Norway’s coastal area lies in the Arctic region, it remains free of ice and snow throughout the winter.

    People living closer to Eastern Europe and Russia are in colder climates. The coldest air descends from the Arctic north or from eastern Siberia.

    The Mediterranean Sea moderates temperatures southward, giving it a C climate type around its coast. Type C climates are found with type E climates near the Arctic Circle in Norway and Iceland.

    European history

    Europe, a brief chronological record of key events beginning in prehistoric times with the appearance of Homo sapiens (ancient human), approximately 40,000 years ago.

    Early inhabitants during the Paleolithic Age, in an effort to survive, grouped together into small, herd-like societies, and lived by gathering plants and hunting wild animals.

    The practice of cultivating land, producing crops and raising livestock began in the Neolithic Age around 9,000 years ago, stone tools were used and people began to live in small groups, or villages.

    As humans continued to travel from east to west across Eurasia (a combination of Asia and Europe), knowledge of new tools and methods of organization arrived; civilization thrives as metal axes and arrowheads increase survival.

    Greece began to emerge from the Dark Ages in the 8th century BC. Classical Greek culture also had a strong influence on the Roman empire which eventually brought many versions of that culture to many parts of the Mediterranean region and Northern Europe. In short, Greek culture laid the foundation for modern Western culture.

    Of the great civilizations that flourished in Europe, the Roman Empire mentioned earlier must have had the most enduring influence. During an often tumultuous 500-year period of innovation, he transformed continents and had a deep and enduring influence on the development of modern architecture, language, law, and religion.

    After its fall, the Eastern Roman Empire (285-1450) survived as the Byzantine Empire. In Western Europe, a series of tribes and tribal alliances moved into positions of power in what remained of the former Roman Empire; small kingdoms were established, and the geography of Western Europe was about to change.

    The Frankish empire was the area of ​​southeastern Europe inhabited and ruled by the Franks. They would evolve into the French Empire, and part of it would become the Holy Roman Empire, the forerunner to Germany as we know it today.

    The Anglo-Saxons soon crossed the (present-day) English Channel into southern England and founded a series of kingdoms that would eventually develop into the Kingdom of England in AD 927, 100 years later, the Kingdoms of Poland and Hungary would also form.

    From the late 8th century to the mid-13th century, the Viking Age spanned Northern Europe and Scandinavia. With little interest in land acquisition, Scandinavian (Norse) Vikings aggressively explored Europe for trade and wealth. Not only that, the Vikings also reached Greenland, Iceland, Newfoundland, and Anatolia, aka Turkey.

    The Normans (Vikings) gave their name to Normandy, a region in northern France. Originally appearing in the first half of the 10th century, they had a significant influence in many parts of Europe, from the Norman conquest of England to southern Italy and Sicily.

    In the late 15th century, great powers emerged in Europe, with Britain, France, Holland, Portugal and Spain, and played a dominant role in global affairs from the 15th century onwards, especially after the start of colonialism.

    The European colonial period, from the 1500s to the mid-1900s, was a time when the aforementioned European powers established colonies in Asia, Africa and the Americas. Between the 16th and 20th centuries, European nations controlled the Americas (north and south), large parts of Africa, Oceania, and large parts of Asia at various times.

    As people longed for freedom around the world, the European colonial era began to crumble. In particular, the British Empire, the first truly global empire, began to lose power in Africa, India, and much of the Middle East, and they soon collapsed.

    Another thing that also damaged the continent was World War I and II, because they were mostly focused on Europe. The colossal costs of the two wars contributed greatly to the decline of Western European dominance in world affairs, and some Eastern European countries have not yet fully recovered.

    Europe is said to have changed for the better after the fall of the Berlin Wall on 9 November 1989 and the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1991. European cultures and factions soon integrated, the European Council was formed and the European Union (EU) developed in Western Europe.

    Today, many say that Europe is a major economic and political powerhouse. As for the people who are an innovative, optimistic, and resilient group that changes the world.

    About Astronomy

    After learning about astronomical locations to history in Europe, let’s find out about astronomy itself.

    Coordinate

    The astronomical coordinate system is set in settings to determine the positions of satellites, planets, stars, galaxies, and other celestial objects relative to a physical reference point available to an observer (eg the horizon and cardinal direction north to the observer’s position on the Earth’s surface).

    Coordinate systems in astronomy can determine an object’s position in three-dimensional space or simply plot its direction on the celestial sphere, if the object’s distance is unknown or trivial.

    Spherical coordinates, which are projected onto a celestial sphere, are similar to the geographic coordinate system used on the surface of the Earth. It differs in the choice of a fundamental plane which divides the celestial sphere into two equal hemispheres along a great circle.

    Rectangular coordinates, in appropriate units, have the same fundamental plane (x,y) and primary direction (x-axis) as the axis of rotation. Each coordinate system is given a name according to its choice of fundamental plane.

    Map

    An astronomical map is any cartographic representation of stars, galaxies, or the surfaces of planets and moons. Modern maps of this kind are based on a coordinate system analogous to geographic latitude and longitude. In most cases, modern maps are compiled from photographic observations made, either with Earth-based equipment or with instruments aboard spacecraft.

    Nature and Significance

    Brighter stars and clusters of stars are easy for a trained observer to spot. Much more dim celestial bodies can be found and identified only with the help of astronomical maps, catalogs, and in some cases almanacs.

    The first astronomical charts, globes, and drawings, often decorated with fantastical figures, depicted the constellations, right down to the recognizable groupings of bright stars known by the imaginatively chosen names that for centuries have been a delight to man and instrument. reliable navigational aids.

    Some royal Egyptian tombs from the 2nd millennium BC include paintings of constellation figures, but these cannot be considered accurate maps. The classical Greek astronomers used maps and globes; unfortunately, no examples have survived. Many small metal celestial globes from 11th century Islamic makers onwards remain.

    The first printed planispheres (representations of the celestial sphere on a flat surface) were produced in 1515, and printed celestial spheres appeared at about the same time.

    That’s an article regarding the astronomical location of the European continent according to sinaumedia’s version, which we hope can help Sinaumed’s become #MoreWithReading. Don’t forget to visit the sinaumedia.com site for various useful books filled with other knowledge.

     

    Author: Sevilla Nouval Evanda

  • Get to know the Eurasian Plate and the Boundaries of Tectonic Plates on the Earth’s Surface

    For those of us who live in Indonesia, the threat of natural disasters in the form of earthquakes and volcanic eruptions can become a reality at any time. Because, as Sinaumed’s already knows, Indonesia is located at the confluence of three major tectonic plates, namely the Eurasian Plate, the Pacific Plate, and the Indo-Australian Plate.

    According to historical records, Indonesia was devastated by the eruption of Mount Krakatau in 1883 which erupted 4 times in 4.5 hours and the sound of the eruption was heard as far as Sri Lanka and Australia. Not only that, this eruption caused a large tsunami as high as 36 meters which claimed 36,417 lives.

    In 2004, Aceh was rocked by a massive earthquake measuring 9.3 on the Richter scale which generated a 30 meter high tsunami whose waves bounced off several other countries such as Sri Lanka, Thailand, Maldives, India, Malaysia, Myanmar, Tanzania, Somalia, Bangladesh, Seychelles, to Kenya.

    It was so great that the natural disaster that occurred on December 26, 2004 also had an impact on the Earth’s rotation and shortened the duration of one day by 2.68 microseconds; and shifting the North Pole a few centimeters.

    So, talking about earthquakes and volcanic eruptions, it’s incomplete without discussing plate tectonics. You see, these two natural disasters are closely related to the movement of tectonic plates.

    Plate Tectonics, The Most Advanced Theory of the Formation of the Earth’s Surface

    As we know, planet earth and its present form were not created just like that. It took billions of years for the earth to “form” itself to be habitable by humans.

    In geography, there are several theories that explain the process of formation of the earth’s surface. Starting from the theory of contraction (Descrates, 1596-1650); The theory of two continents (Edward Zuess, 1884); the theory of Continental Shift (Lothar Wagener, 1915); Ocean Floor Expansion Theory (Harry H. Hess, 1962); and finally the theory of plate tectonics (Tozo Wilso, 1968).

    The birth of the theory of plate tectonics brought changes to the human perspective in viewing the structure of the earth, natural wealth, and natural disasters. In fact, some say this theory is as powerful as Einstein’s theory of relativity because of its benefits to earth science.

    In the theory of plate tectonics, it is stated that the planet Earth consists of plates that are constantly moving. These plates can be in the form of oceanic crust, continental crust, or a combination of the two. Well, this movement is caused by convection currents or the transfer of heat energy in the asthenosphere layer (the Earth’s mantle which is a very hot liquid).

    Because all the plates are constantly moving, there is interaction between one plate and another. These interactions occur along plate boundaries. The forms of interaction are divided into three, there are those that collide, move away from each other, and shift. Well, the surface of the earth that exists today is the result of interactions between these plates.

    According to the theory of plate tectonics, there are 13 plates that make up the earth’s crust which are divided into large plates and small plates, namely:

    Big Plate Small Plate
    Pacific Plate Nasca Plate
    Eurasian Plate Arabian Plate
    India-Australia plate Caribbean Plate
    African Plate Philippine Plate
    North American Plate Scotia Plate
    South American Plate Cocos Plate
    Antarctic Plate  

    If compared, the 13 plates are exactly like puzzle pieces that are fused together but the puzzle pieces are “placed” on top of the liquid. So if there is movement in the liquid, the puzzle above it will automatically move too. Well, this is what is called the movement of the earth’s crust plates.

    You can read other explanations of the theory of the formation of the earth’s surface in the book Ips: Geography of SMA/Ma Kls.10/Km , compiled by Yasinto Sindhu Priastomo. This book is designed to help you understand the causal relationship of geosphere phenomena or phenomena on the earth’s surface and events that occur on the earth’s surface.

    Eurasian Plate

    In this article, we will discuss one of the major plates on earth, namely the Eurasian Plate. The Eurasian plate is the third largest plate which is slightly smaller than the Pacific plate and the North American plate.

    The Eurasian Plate includes parts of the Atlantic Ocean, Arctic Ocean, most of mainland Europe, Russia, Asia, and several sub-oceanic basins, such as the Norwegian, Lofoten, South China, Aleut, Western European basins).

    On the east side, the Eurasian plate is bounded by the North American plate and the Philippine Sea plate. While on the south west side, it is bordered by the African plate, in the middle by the Arabian plate, and on the south side east by the Indo-Australian plate.

    To make it easier, try to pay attention to the position of each plate in the following image:

    Based on the picture of the Eurasian plate above, the location of the Eurasian plate in Indonesia includes Sumatra, Java, Bali, Nusa Tenggara, Kalimantan, Sulawesi and Maluku. Indonesia is indeed located at the confluence of three plates, namely the Indo-Australian Plate, the Eurasian Plate, and the Pacific Plate.

    The Movement of the Eurasian Plate And Its Effects

    In general, the Eurasian plate is moving about ¼ to ½ inch per year on average. More specifically, this plate is moving northward by 2 cm each year. Compared to other plates, the Eurasian plate is the third slowest moving plate after the North American and South American plates.

    The movement of the Eurasian plate occurs due to the flow of magma that is under the earth’s surface. When the magma heats up and boils. The hot magma then rises to the top and cools when it comes in contact with seawater so that it creates new rock.

    One of the effects of the movement of the Eurasian plate that we can see clearly today is a series of mountains along the islands of Sumatra, Java and Nusa Tenggara, then the Himalayas and the Tibetan Plateau.

    The series of mountains in Sumatra, Java and Nusa Tenggara emerged as a result of the Pacific plate colliding with the Eurasian plate. Meanwhile, the Himalayas and the Tibetan Plateau emerged after the landmasses of India and Asia collided about 50 million years ago. This phenomenon then causes the Eurasian plate to fold over the Indian plate.

    Tectonic Plate Boundaries

    Because the shape is similar to a puzzle, of course each plate has its own limits. Well, these boundaries can be divided into three, Divergent, Convergent, and Conservative boundaries.

    1. Divergent Boundary

    Divergent movement is the movement of tectonic plates that move away from each other and move slowly and cause cracks. These cracks then become a way out for magma that continues to flow.

    The magma flow will gradually appear a little to the surface of the earth which can cause new volcanic islands to emerge. Meanwhile, if it occurs on the seabed, this will cause what is called the Sea Floor Spreading or the expanse of the seabed.

    It is estimated that the spreading rate in these ocean ridge areas is 2 to 10 cm per year, and averages 6 cm (2 inches) per year. Because the amount of newly formed rock is equal on both sides of the plate that is moving away from each other, the growth rate of the ocean floor is twice the value of the spreading rate.

    One of the most famous examples of divergent boundaries is the Mid Oceanic Ridges which are at the bottom of the Atlantic ocean. Apart from that, there are also other examples such as rifting that occurred between the African continent and the Arabian mainland which then created the red sea.

    2. Convergent Limits

    This is the boundary between plates that collide with each other. This collision can occur between two oceanic plates, one oceanic plate and one continental plate, or two continental plates. Convergent boundaries are divided into two based on their shape, the first is Subduction and the second is Obduction.

    Subduction boundaries are plate boundaries in the form of plate collisions. This means that one plate sinks into the bowels of the earth while the other plate rises to the surface.

    subduction boundary image

    One example of a subduction-type convergent boundary is the Indonesian Archipelago which is part of the Southeast Asian continental plate with the Indian-Australian oceanic plate. The boundary of these two plates is in the form of a subduction zone in the sea with a trough shape that extends from the islands of Sumatra, Java, to East Nusa Tenggara.

    Another example is the Philippine archipelago which is the result of subduction between the Philippine oceanic plate and the Pacific oceanic plate.

    Meanwhile, obduction boundaries are plate boundaries caused by collisions between continental plates and other continents. The results of this collision then form a series of mountains. Like the Himalayan mountain range that emerged as a result of the collision between the Indian continental plate and the Eurasian continent.

    obduction limit image

    3. Transform Boundary

    Finally, there is a transform limit. This is a boundary between plates that pass each other and slide over each other without causing destruction of the lithosphere. This interaction then produces a horizontal fault of the Strike Slip Fault type.

    Most of the transform faults occur in the oceanic crust, but a few occur in continental crust such as the San Andreas fault in the United States. This fault appears due to a shift in the Pacific Ocean plate with the North American continental plate.

    Consequences of Plate Movement

    As previously discussed, the movement of the plates in the earth’s crust can have several consequences, including:

    1. Volcanic eruption

    Volcanic eruptions can occur when hot magma rises to the surface of the earth. This is caused by the melting of rock into magma due to an increase in temperature, a decrease in pressure, or if water enters it. Usually volcanic eruptions occur at convergent plate boundaries and diverging plates.

    At divergent boundaries, the warmer asthenosphere creeps up due to pressure drops which then fill the gaps that appear between two separate plates.

    As a result, parts of the asthenosphere will melt and form large amounts of basaltic magma which then spill out onto the earth’s surface.

    Meanwhile, at convergent plate boundaries, dense oceanic lithosphere will sink into the asthenosphere along with silt and rocks. Well, the plate that goes into the mantle will change its temperature to heat.

    This heat moves water to rise into the hot asthenosphere which is under the opposite plate. After that the water melted the asthenospheric rock and formed magma in large quantities in the subduction zone. Magma that has formed then rises to the lithosphere. Here, some of the hardened magma can enter the lithosphere, some of it is erupted onto the earth’s surface via volcanoes.

    2. Earthquake

    Earthquakes generally occur at three tectonic plate boundaries and are quite rare on the inside of tectonic plates. The reason is because plate boundaries are fracture zones in the lithosphere. In this zone, one plate can slip on another plate and this happens continuously.

    As explained in the book ( Series of Natural Disasters) Earthquakes compiled by the Atlas & Geography Editorial Team, the fracture can be locked for hundreds of years, then when a plate slips a few centimeters or a few meters on another plate, the surface will also vibrate. This vibration is called an earthquake.

    3. The formation of mountains

    There are many mountain ranges that form in subduction zones. Usually this happens because a large volume of magma rises into the crust, then triggers the formation of mountains. In addition, volcanic eruptions can also form a series of volcanoes.

    4. Oceanic trenches

    Trench, briefly, can be defined as the deepest part of the ocean basin. Trenches can appear wherever subduction occurs because they always follow a boundary on the developing ocean floor where subduction feeds into the Earth’s mantle.

    5. Transfer of continents and oceans

    Continental drift can occur on the surface of the earth because the continents themselves are part of the lithospheric plates that are constantly moving. Now, when a continent moves, it creates ocean basins that open and close during geological time.

    6. Supercontinent

    About 2 to 1.8 billion years ago, tectonic plate movements brought together the microcontinents and formed the first supercontinent known as Pangea I. This Pangea I then fractured around 1.3 billion years ago. After that, the fragments of the existing continental crust reassembled and formed the second supercontinent known as Pangea II.

    Pangea II then broke apart again and the continental fragments reassembled into the third supercontinent or Pingea III 300 million years ago.

    Factors That Trigger Tectonic Plate Movement

    The movement of tectonic plates on the earth’s surface certainly requires a large amount of energy. This energy is usually drawn from the earth’s membranes – large lumps that are located under tectonic plates.

    The Earth’s membrane is up to 2,800 km thick and is composed of rocky material in the form of silicate compounds. The materials within the membrane are arranged in complex ways, some of which even melt together. Even so, this membrane couldn’t be said to have a liquid state.

    Experts say the shape of the earth’s membrane is rather soft. very sticky, has a very high temperature and pressure.

    The lower the temperature of the earth’s membrane, the hotter the result. Well, because of the temperature difference between the upper earth’s membrane and the lower earth’s membrane, the earth’s membrane continues to move consistently. This movement then causes the tectonic plates to move.

    The question is, why did this happen?

    The reason is because the earth’s membrane that is at the bottom tries to move its very hot material to the top because the top layer of the earth’s membrane is thicker than the bottom layer. Meanwhile, some parts of the upper membrane layer sink to hotter temperatures. This process continues continuously without ever stopping.

    So, if you want to learn more about the plates on the earth’s surface, the book General Geology from Imam Subekti can be the main reference that is right for you. The problem is this book provides a description of the science of geology in general. Arranged chronologically starting from the process of the formation of the earth, the process of forming the earth’s crust or skin, to the evolution of living things that existed and once existed on earth.

    To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Gilang Oktaviana Putra

  • Get to Know the Different Types of Waste that Are Hard to Decompose and the Time!

    Hard-to-decompose waste and its time – Hello Sinaumed’s friends , did you know? Garbage is a serious problem today, not only in Indonesia but also in most countries in the world. Unfortunately, although the amount of waste continues to increase day by day, public awareness to reduce waste is very low. Not to mention reducing the amount of waste, disposing of waste in its place is still difficult.

    Although it seems trivial, it actually has the potential to damage our planet. Apart from polluting the earth, some types of waste also take a very long time to decompose along with the soil.

    Hundreds to thousands of tons of waste are generated every day. Waste comes from the rest of the business or from household use. With advances in technology, various products were born to meet people’s needs. In fact, we are used to using a lot of single-use products that are practically difficult to recycle. Called plastic, aluminum, glass, etc.

    Each waste or waste has its own decomposition or application period. Even if not recycled, trash lands in landfills, in the nooks and crannies of cities, or piles up in the oceans, taking millions of years to decompose.

    Or even the pieces that don’t rot and can’t decompose forever. How long does it take for the waste we produce every day to decompose? Take a look at the objects in the house, my friends. Is there anything that can be tempered with glass?

    After wearing these clothes, what do you usually do? There are items that can no longer be used and must be thrown away, but there are also items that can be reused, you know.

    Do you know? Currently, our earth is facing the problem of accumulation of too much waste and environmental pollution. This is because various objects that we throw away end up in the sea or on land and do not decompose quickly.

    Objects around us that are immediately thrown away will remain on the surface because it takes a long time to decompose. It would literally destroy the earth. See the explanation below for several types of waste that are difficult to decompose and take a very long time to decompose and even take hundreds of years to do. Here’s the explanation!

    List of types of waste that are difficult to decompose

    Plastic waste

    Plastic dominates all types of waste in society, from plastic bags, plastic cups, plastic straws and others. Plastic is made from petroleum. Plastic products can decompose in the soil for 1000 years, while plastic bags can take 10 to 1000 years. Plastic bottles can decompose in nature in about 450 years. Currently, plastic is the waste that takes the longest time to decompose.

    Quoting the World Wildlife Fund (WWF) Australia, the energy used to produce and transport plastic bottles can power 1.5 million cars per year. For that much energy, 75% of plastic bottles are used only once and end up as waste that pollutes the environment.

    United States Citation According to the National Park Service , candy wrappers take about 20 years to decompose. Meanwhile, cigarette packs take more than 20 years to decompose.

    The General Department of Waste Management at the Ministry of Environment and Forestry said that each plastic waste takes a different amount of time to decompose. Plastic bags will decompose in about 10 to 500 years.

    Meanwhile, plastic straws decompose in about 20 years. Plastic cups decompose in about 50 years. Packaging takes about 50 to 80 years to decompose. Styrofoam is not biodegradable.

    Even though plastic waste can decompose for tens to hundreds of years, it will not disappear completely. Leftover plastic waste turns into microplastics, tiny particles invisible to the naked eye.

    The United Nations Environment Program (UNEP) explains that plastic waste breaks down into microplastics which are eaten by fish or livestock. It is harmful to the health of animals and humans who consume it. Risk of causing disease.

    The time it takes to decompose plastic waste is very dangerous for the environment, because it will continue to accumulate, including being scattered in the oceans. This situation will threaten the destruction of marine ecosystems, quoted from the Marine Garbage website. Plastic scattered in the oceans accounts for around 60-80% of other types of waste.

    According to the records of the People’s Alliance for Fisheries Justice (KIARA), every year in Indonesia, 1.29 million tons of plastic waste are dumped into rivers and seas.

    As a result, many sea creatures die from ingesting plastic waste. A 10-year-old sperm whale was found beached on Luskentyre, Harris Island, Scotland, in November 2019. When the Scotland Marine Projects team performed an autopsy, they found a large amount of plastic waste in the whale’s stomach. Here are some types of plastic waste

    1. Plastic Bag

    Using plastic bags for shopping or storing anything is what we often do today. Apart from being used to accommodate many items, plastic bags are also safer because they are not waterproof.

    It turns out that it’s not only water that has difficulty getting into plastic bags, even our earth has difficulty decomposing the plastic bags we use. It is so difficult that it takes our earth from 10 to 1000 years to destroy this amount of plastic bag waste.

    The bigger and better quality plastic bags, the more difficult it is for the waste to decompose in the soil.

    2. Plastic Bottles

    Apart from soft drinks, drinks in plastic bottles are also a favorite of many people. In fact, just like plastic bags, plastic bottles are also very difficult to decompose by soil. To decompose plastic bottles, soil takes 70 to 450 years to decompose.

    3. Styrofoam

    Lastly, there is Styrofoam foam which is also one of the most hazardous wastes. This is because styrofoam is made of polystyrene, a petroleum-based plastic material, so soil cannot decompose properly. That is, when the styrofoam that we used 20 years ago was still around, the amount of waste from styrofoam was increasing and how long would it take to fill the earth.

    Some of the items above are useful, but on the other hand, this waste is very harmful to the earth. Worse yet, there is no sense in disposing of waste in its place, making this waste not only contaminate the land, but also pollute the oceans and harm other creatures that live there.

    4. Baby Diapers

    Older parents preferred to use cloth diapers for their babies. Over time, plastic and cotton baby diapers began to replace cloth diapers. Even though these diapers can absorb more of your baby’s urine and are easy to use, the diapers currently used are not easily decomposed by the soil.

    Compared to disposable bottles, baby diapers take longer to decompose into the soil, around 500 years to decompose. Even worse, baby diapers also lead to increased pollution and energy wastage because a lot of water is needed to make baby diapers.

    Why does plastic waste experience a very long decomposition process?

    In general, almost all the plastic in the world is made from petroleum. If you are familiar with gasoline and diesel, these materials are often used to make them. Plastic is an organic compound composed of carbon atoms arranged in long chains. These long chains are called polymers and monomers (smallest polymer units).

    Polymers are a group of natural or synthetic substances composed of very large molecules, called macromolecules, which are multiple units of simple chemical units called monomers.

    So the word polymer just means a large number of monomers. Polymers are not limited to monomers having the same chemical composition or structure and the same molecular weight. Some natural polymers consist of only one monomer

    Natural polymers include living and synthetic organisms. Examples of polymers that include living organisms are proteins, cellulose, and nucleic acids. For example, the solid parts of all trees are made of polymers. These include cellulose, lignin and various resins. Cellulose is a polysaccharide, a polymer made up of sugar molecules. (in English) . Cellulose is found in the structure of the cell walls of all plants. Lignin consists of a complex three-dimensional polymer network.

    Wood resin is a polymer of the simple hydrocarbon, isoprene. isoprene can be found in rubber. Natural polymers in the presence of nucleic samples are DNA and RNA. As we all know, DNA carries genetic information in cells.

    This long carbon chain makes it difficult for microorganisms to decompose plastic waste. By using enzymes, bacteria can use them as tools to cut and destroy things. However, it is different when these bacteria meet plastic. The reason is that no bacteria have cutting enzymes capable of cutting polymers.

    The natural decomposition of plastic waste is actually caused by heat, humidity, pressure, and even solar radiation. However, this decomposition takes place over a long period of time.

    If Sinaumed’s friends already know why plastic waste is difficult to decompose, please limit the use of plastic waste from now on. These can be plastic bags and others. So that our earth can be saved from the threat of garbage that can slowly kill our health.

    The Dangers of Plastic Waste to Ecosystems

    Basically, plastic waste is waste which basically has a bad impact if not handled wisely. If you adopt the 3R approach, of course plastic waste can have economic value, but more efforts are needed to educate and spin the wheel of recycling plastic waste in the right and fast way.

    Irregular plastic waste spreads everywhere including in the sea, damaging the ecosystems of several species of plants and animals. The food chain is damaged, especially with plastic pollution which damages the condition of plankton, which are the smallest organisms in the world.

    Plankton itself is a food source for small fish, if plastic waste spreads and decomposes it will cause microplastics to be consumed by fish.

    This condition causes fish for human consumption to contain harmful substances, namely microplastics. Apart from small animals, large fish also have the potential to consume food contaminated with polluting plastic waste.

    It doesn’t stop there, data from the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration shows that millions of birds and fish per 100,000 mammal species have died as a result of the release of plastic waste in many environments.

    Poor waste management is the main cause of the spread of plastic waste and eventually destroys the habitat of thousands of plant and animal species.

    In addition to animals and plants, untreated plastic waste contaminates soil and groundwater. Therefore, special handling is needed to see which plastics are safe to use and which ones are dangerous or at least should be avoided.

    Organic trash

    Organic waste is waste that comes from plants or animals and can be decomposed naturally. Because of this understanding, many people believe that any organic waste that is thrown away will decompose by itself. It’s not easy. Some organic waste is difficult to decompose and even pollutes the environment.

    It is important to understand the importance of properly disposing of organic waste to reduce various environmental problems caused by waste. Taken from the California Department of Resources, Recycling and Recovery (Call Recycle) website, organic waste is divided into four categories, food waste , food soiled paper , non -hazardous wood waste. ) , and green waste (green waste).

    Of the four types, not all of them can decompose quickly and are harmless to the environment. In addition to the four categories above, animal waste, leather factory waste and animal carcasses are also included in organic waste.

    1. Food Waste

    Processed organic waste is different from leftover vegetable and fruit peels that are not processed. While vegetables, fruit peels and fruit scraps can be easily composted and processed in an environmentally friendly manner, processed food waste cannot be easily composted or eco-enzymatically.

    Leftover food such as rice, cooked meat, vegetable soup and other leftovers can pollute the environment. Especially if leftover food gets dumped into the mix with other trash cans and ends up in a heap in a landfill.

    If these leftovers accumulate and lack oxygen, they will produce methane gas which can explode in certain quantities. In addition, these food scraps also attract rodents such as rats, flies, cockroaches and mosquitoes, which have the potential to be a source of dangerous infectious diseases.

    The best way to deal with this organic waste is to consume food, or it can also be used to feed maggots (maggots can eat rotting food scraps).

    2. Food Soiled Paper

    Tissue, paper, packaging, paper cups, cardboard, egg cartons and coffee filters are included in this organic waste. All of these can be broken down naturally, but take a long time to decompose. Paper takes about 2 to 6 weeks to decompose. Undyed brown paper bags may spoil in 6 to 8 weeks. This organic waste will more easily decompose if cut into small pieces, and can be used as brown organic waste in compost.

    3. Non-Hazardous Wood Waste

    Unpainted/coated wood chips, bamboo, coconut shells, twigs and sticks actually fall into the category of biodegradable organic waste. However, there are several things that make organic waste difficult to decompose. One of them is based on quite a long time. For example, a piece of wood from a tree, takes about 50 to 100 years to decompose if intact. If wood scraps are recycled into smaller sizes, the time needed to decompose is around 6 months to 1 year.

    The decomposition time of wood waste is influenced by several factors, such as the type of wood, its size and method of decomposition. If wood, bamboo, or coconut shells are ground into powder or very small pieces, they can be used as additives in compost and the decomposition time will be faster. Aside from being a complement to compost, wood waste that is cut into small pieces can also be used as mulch for plants.

    The Danger of Organic Waste that Can Contaminate the Environment

    Apart from the three types of persistent organic waste, there is green waste which is highly biodegradable. Examples are dry leaves and dead leaves. The decomposition time for this green waste is very fast, only a few weeks. In addition, this green waste can also be used as compost and mulch.

    On the other hand, organic waste which is quite difficult to decompose has the potential to cause environmental pollution if not handled properly. Methane produced from food waste can cause explosions due to lack of oxygen and exposure to sunlight. Leftover food will also create new toxic substances. These fluids can contaminate the water and soil around the pile. Not only food waste, other organic waste that takes a long time to decompose can also be dangerous because it takes up space.

    The way to reduce the impact of this organic waste is to separate the waste. Not only organic and inorganic waste, but also organic waste and reuse.

  • Get to Know the Development of the Metaverse and How It Works!

    Metaverse Is – In an era that is already sophisticated like today, new terms about technology have also developed. Apart from the multiverse, there is also the metaverse which is currently being heralded as being able to facilitate human activities, especially in terms of the digital world, including in the economics of business to marketing.

    Yep, this metaverse concept is considered to be the gateway to the virtual world which of course will be closely related to the digital world in the future. Later, everything in the future will be easy to achieve because the digital world is so closely related to technology, especially technology on our smartphones. So, what is the metaverse that is predicted to be able to revive the digital world in all fields?

    What is the history and how it works that relies on the sophistication of this technology? What’s the difference between the metaverse and the multiverse? How is the relevance of this metaverse concept for human life? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

    What is the Metaverse?

    If the term metaverse is explained linguistically, it will be two things, namely “meta” which means ‘beyond or beyond’, while “verse” is defined as ‘universe’. Both of these words come from Greek which means “outside the universe” or “beyond the universe”. The term metaverse first appeared 30 years ago, in the early 1990s to be precise. At that time, the metaverse was considered as a method that connected humans (society) with the concept of avatars which depended heavily on technology.

    Please note that in this metaverse virtual world, there are 3 main elements, namely:

    1. Virtual Reality (VR) and Artificial Intelligence (AI)
    2. Web 3.0 technologies
    3. Blockchain Technology

    Currently, there are quite a number of well-known companies that involve themselves in the metaverse world. Starting from Samsung, Microsoft, Meta (formerly Facebook), Google, to Adidas. In Indonesia itself, it turns out that the metaverse world has been eyed by a number of companies , some of which are BRI (Bank Rakyat Indonesia) and BNI (Bank Negara Indonesia) which are ready to expand into the virtual world The two banks will later enter the metaverse world with the development carried out by the WIR Group under the name METAVERSE INDONESIA.

    Many experts have defined what the metaverse is according to their understanding. According to Nicely (2022), argues that “Metaverse refers to shared online virtual worlds, similar to video games such as Second Life or Pokémon Go. It (the metaverse) is a realistic three-dimensional environment where people can explore and interact with others in real time.”

    Then according to Weston (2022), the metaverse is “Metaverse refers to shared online virtual worlds, similar to video games like Second Life or Pokémon Go. It (the metaverse) is a realistic three-dimensional environment where people can explore and interact with others in real time . ” Meanwhile, according to Stefanic (2022) reveals that “Metaverse refers to the online 3D world that is accessed via computers, smart devices, augmented reality and virtual reality headsets. Interaction and engagement are at the heart of the metaverse principles, ensuring that users can be fully immersed in the online environment facilitated by metaverse technology.”

    In this case, Metamandrill (2022) also speculates that the metaverse is a concept of merging the online world with the real world (physically) to create something new. The metaverse concept will usually use certain devices, including virtual reality headsets to augmented reality applications. Now, through some of these devices, later we can explore new realities with 3D-based environments, aka 3 Dimensions. That means, the concept of this metaverse is only limited by the human imagination.

    Based on the definition of what metaverse is that has been coined by several experts, it can be concluded that,

    “Metaverse is a concept of space where one can be directly involved in it by using sophisticated devices in the virtual world. In this metaverse, we can socialize, play games, and shop, but only in the virtual world.”

    History of Metaverse Development in the World

    In fact, this metaverse is developing in line with the increasingly sophisticated development of the internet. This is due to the existence of the metaverse together with the virtual world and its contents can only be “reached” through the internet. Even though the term metaverse has been around since the 1990s, real evidence has only arrived in 2021. That was after the owner of Facebook, Mark Zuckerberg, tried to develop this virtual world. So, here is a review of the history of the development of the metaverse concept in the world.

    1989 – The emergence of the Internet

    In 1989, Tim Berners Lee succeeded in creating the internet. The early emergence of the internet became the birth point of the metaverse.

    1992 – The first time the term Metaverse appeared

    In 1992, to be precise, the term metaverse first appeared in one of Neal Stephenson’s novels entitled Snow Crash. In this novel, as a whole, it tells about humans as avatars who can interact with other avatars in a 3D virtual space. This 3D virtual space is considered a metaphor or comparison of the real world. Uniquely, the novel also describes how 3D virtual space exists.

    2003 – Launch of Second Life

    A scientist named Philip Rosedale and his team launched an online virtual world called Second Life at the Linden Lab. Overall, Second Life is similar to a multiplayer online role-playing game, although Linden Lab maintains that their world is not a game. In Second Life, users will call themselves residents and create virtual representations of themselves. This virtual representation is called an avatar. This avatar will be able to interact with places, objects, and even other avatars.

    2006 – Roblox Introduced to the Public

    The existence of this metaverse concept is also applied in the game world. In 2006, one of the online game platforms, Roblox, introduced games that rely on virtual worlds. In the game, players can create and share their game worlds with other players, thereby creating trades. This Roblox game development company also provides various game genres, from role-playing, racing, to obstacle course games.

    2009 – The emergence of Bitcoin

    The existence of bitcoin is of course part of the metaverse concept. This is because bitcoin is one of the cryptocurrencies and blockchain. Later, crypto currency will also become a transaction tool in this metaverse, starting from buying land, buildings, clothes, to other avatars.

    2011 – The Metaverse Concept Reappears

    In 2011, the concept of the metaverse reappeared in the public through a novel entitled Ready Player One by Ernest Cline. Overall, this novel tells that in 2045, reality is a bad place so that the main character will enter the virtual world and study the world. A little trivia, the novel was adapted into a film with the same title in 2018.

    2014 – Production of Oculus

    In 2014, the Facebook company acquired a virtual reality (VR) hardware and platform company, Oculus. The reason why Facebook acquired the company is because VR technology will later become an important tool in the development of the metaverse world. Most head-mounted display devices for displaying virtual worlds are developed by the Oculus brand.

    2015 – Release of Decentraland

    In 2015, one of the metaverse platforms was successfully released under the Decentraland brand. Developed by Esteban Orfano and Ari Meilich where in their virtual world there are many assets which of course are digital. Even NFT (Non-Fungible Token) purchases can also be made through this VR platform.

    2016 – The Emergence of the Game Pokemon Go

    Is Sinaumed’s a fan of this Pokemon Go game? How far has Sinaumed’s been on his way to collect Pokemon Go characters? Well, the game also turns out to carry VR technology, you know . Even though this game has faded, it actually proves that we have “tasted” the concept of the metaverse through the gaming industry.

    2017 – Fortnite

    Similar to Pokemon Go, the game Fortnite also carries the theme of the metaverse world. Unfortunately, you can’t get this game by downloading it through the PlayStore or Appstore, but directly on the website.

    2018 – Axie Infinity

    Apart from Pokemon Go and Fortnite, there is also a game that carries the theme of the metaverse world in 2018, namely Axie Infinity. Did Sinaumed’s ever play it?

    2021 – Metaverse Development Through Two Technology Companies

    In 2021, 2 of the world’s leading technology companies stated that they were developing a metaverse world. Yep, the 2 technology companies are Microsoft and Facebook. Microsoft is releasing a platform called Mesh, which is designed for virtual collaboration on multiple devices. Meanwhile Facebook has changed the parent company name to “Meta” and plans to focus on developing this metaverse virtual world.

    How the Metaverse Works

    Little information, to enter the world of the metaverse is also quite easy. Sinaumed’s only needs to log in and register on the platforms provided, for example Decentraland. If already registered, immediately enter the world of metaverse using existing devices.

    As previously explained, this metaverse virtual world can run if we use special devices, ranging from headphones, virtual reality glasses, to an internet connection. The way it works is also almost the same when we want to play games.

    First, prepare in advance some of these special devices. Don’t forget that the internet network must be smooth , OK , so you don’t get stuck while enjoying the virtual world. Devices in the form of software and hardware will later understand our movements, sounds, and language. If the device is ready, we will only enter the virtual world and do things like in the real world, such as interacting, shopping, and making buying and selling transactions.

    Apart from the 2 devices already mentioned, there are also additional devices such as haptic gloves, robot hands, and VR sunglasses. The price range for these devices is relatively expensive, yes, if they are high-tech and of high quality.

    Difference Between Metaverse and Multiverse

    Actually, there is a sharp difference between the metaverse and the multiverse. However, not everyone understands this, especially since both of them contain the word “verse”. So, what are the differences between the metaverse and the multiverse? Come on, see the following reviews!

    Metaverse Multiverse
    A virtual world that has an avatar for the representation of a human being. An idea that all of us on earth from this universe have copies living in other universes. In short, there are other versions of us in other universes and maybe we are not the only ones in existence.
    The concept of the world ‘outside’ our world now is called the virtual world. Taking the concept of the real world, but in another universe.
    Its existence is within reach of the hand because several companies have succeeded in developing it. Its existence cannot be reached by hand because it is only a theory.

    So, that’s an overview of what the metaverse is and its history of development, how it works, and how it differs from the multiverse. Is Sinaumed’s interested in entering a virtual world using a VR device?

  • Get to know the definition of the median and how to calculate the median

    What is the Median and How to Calculate It – One part of statistics that is quite fun to calculate is the median. Together with the mean and mode , the median enlivens the realm of statistics. This statistical trio is very popular in everyday life.

    Before discussing more about the median, we must first know that the median is a part of the center of the data. What is the measure of the center of the data?

    The measure of data concentration is a descriptive method that shows the center of a data or a representation of a data. There are three sizes of central data that we are familiar with, namely the mean, mode, and median. This paper will discuss the median.

    Is it difficult to determine the median? Relatively difficult or easy, yes, but it does require god-level patience to work out the median. Not only that, accuracy is also needed.

    One calculation can make the next step confusing. One number, all data wrong. It’s like a proverb because a drop of tilapia is damaged by a pot of milk

    The teachers at school are very familiar with statistics, especially when they assess their students. Likewise, the researchers are really soulmate with this. They need to process the data that they have been getting up and down.

    Want to try the fun of calculating the median? Come on, let’s slowly discuss this median.

    A. Definition of Median

    The median is the central number of a set in a measure of the center of the data. Where, arrange the data points from smallest to largest and find the center number. So that’s the median. However, if there are 2 numbers in the middle, the median is the average of the 2 numbers.

    To further animate the median, consider the following illustration:

    Even though the median is the middle value, that doesn’t mean that once we get the data, we immediately determine the data in the middle, it’s the median.

    This illustration is clearly wrong. This is not the middle value rather it is the middle position. if we look at it, it will be wrong if the baby with the lowest weight among the others becomes the middle value, right?

    The median is a datum that is located in the middle of a data set, but what are the conditions? The condition is that the data is sorted from smallest to largest. So once you get the data, you have to sort it first!

    now the children are arranged so that they stand starting from the lowest weight to the highest. Through this illustration, we can immediately determine that the median is a child weighing 24 kg. This data has been sorted so that we can immediately point to the child in the middle weighing 24 kg.

    So, in discussing the median, we can pay attention to the amount of data available, whether the data is odd or even. Finding the median of odd and even data will be different.

    So once again, the main requirement for determining the median is to sort the data. Sort from the smallest value to the largest value.

    Where the median is the middle value in a table list of numbers in ascending or descending order, and can be more descriptive than the mean or average value.

    The median is often used as the opposite of the mean when there are outliers in the sequence that might distort the mean. The median of a data sequence can be less affected by outliers than the mean or average.

     

    B. How to Find the Median

    There are 2 types of data sought for the median, namely single data median and interval data median

    1. Single data median

    Single data is unit data. Single data is divided into 2, single odd data and single even data

    Single data is data that is presented simply and the data has not been arranged or grouped into interval classes.

    a. Odd single data

    For an odd number of data, we can look directly at the data and take the middle number, make that easier? as long as it’s sorted of course.

    If there are odd numbers, the median is the number in the middle, with the same number of numbers below and above.

    Now the steps to determine the median odd value:

    • Sort data data groups from the smallest value to the largest value or vice versa.
    • Determine the middle value.
    • The amount of data on the left and right sides must be the same so that there is one number right in the middle which is the median of the data group.

    The formula for finding the median for single data is as follows:

    Example Question 1:

    Calculate the median from the following data: 9,1,3,7,5

    discussion:
    sort data from smallest to largest
    1,3,5,7,9
    1st data : 1
    2nd data: 3 3rd
    data: 5 4th
    data: 7 5th
    data: 9
    second count the number data(n)
    n = 5

    Third enter in the formula

    Me = X (n+1) / 2
    Me = X ( 5+1) / 2
    Me = X (6)/ 2
    Me = X₃

    the third data is 5, then the median is 5

    Example question 2:

    1, 2, 8, 11, 6, 10, and 16!
    find the median of the data
    . Discussion:

    First , we sort
    the data
    from
    the smallest
    -5:10 data 6:11 data 7:16

    second, calculate the amount of data.
    The amount of data = n = 7

    third plug it into the
    Median formula:
    Me = X ( n+1)/2

    Me = X ( 7+1)/2
    Me = X (8)/2
    Me = X₄

    We see above that the 4th data is 8
    So the median of the data is 8

    Example question 3:

    Find the Median of the data: 7, 8, 8, 9, 4, 3, 7, 9, 5, 7, 6, 5, 6. Let’s
    first sort the data from smallest
    3, 4, 5, 5, 6, 6, 7, 7, 7, 8, 8, 9, 9
    data 1st : 3
    data 2nd: 4
    data 3rd: 5
    data 4th: 5
    data 5th: 6
    data 6th: 6
    data 7th: 7th
    data 8th: 7th
    data 9th: 7th
    10th: 8th data
    11th : 8th
    data 12th: 9
    13th data: 9

    So the total data is 13, yes
    Me = X (13+1)/2
    Me = X (14)/2
    Me = 7th data.
    We can see above that the 7th data is 7
    , so the median data is 7.

    b. Single even data

    Meanwhile, for an even number of data, there will be 2 numbers in the middle. So in order for us to get the median value, we have to use a different formula than determining the median for odd single data.

    If there is an even number of numbers in the list, the middle pair must be determined, added up, and divided by two to find the median.

    The steps for determining the median for even single data are as follows:

    Sort data groups from smallest to largest value or vice versa.
    Determine the middle value. The amount of data The left and right sides must be the same. Leave the two numbers in the middle and then find the average

    The following is the median formula for even data:

    example question 1:

    Calculate the median from the following data: 4,8,6,2

    the first discussion,
    we order the data from the smallest
    data order: 2,4,6,8
    1st data: 2
    2nd data: 4
    3rd data: 6
    4th data: 8

    second, calculate the amount of data.
    The amount of data = n = 4

    third plug it into the
    Median formula:
    Me = X n/2 + X (n/2 + 1 ) / 2
    Me = X 4/2 + X (4/2 + 1 ) / 2
    Me = X 2 + X (2+ 1 ) / 2
    Me = (X ₂ + X₃ )/ 2
    Me = (4 + 6) / 2
    Me = 10/2
    = 5
    so the median of this data is 5

    Example question 2:

    If the following data are known:
    1, 2, 8, 11, 6, 10, 12 and 16,
    find the median of the data

    Discussion:
    first we sort the data from the smallest
    data sequence: 1, 2, 6, 8, 10, 11, 12, 16
    1st data : 1 2nd
    data: 2
    3rd data: 6
    4th data : 8th
    data 5th: 10th
    data 6th: 11th
    data 7th: 12th
    data 8th: 16

    then we enter it into the even data median formula

    Me = (X n/2 + X (n/2 + 1 )) / 2

    Me = (X 12/2 + X (12/2 + 1 )) / 2

    Me = (X ₆+ X (6 + 1 )) / 2
    Me = X ₆+ X₇ / 2
    Me = 11 + 12 / 2
    = 23/2
    = 11.5
    so the median is 11.5

    Example question 3:

    First, we first calculate the sum of all frequencies
    f = 9 + 10+ 12+6+2+1 = 40

    Me = (X n/2 + X (n/2 + 1 )) / 2
    Me = (X 40/2 + X (40/2 + 1 )) / 2
    Me = (X₂₀+ X (20 + 1 )) / 2
    Me = X₂₀+ X₂₁ / 2
    Me = X₂₀+ X₂₁

    Now for the 20th and 21st data it turns out that it is located at the number of frequencies 31 alias the data is at frequency 12
    both the 20th or 21st data are both 7.

    Please have a look at the following table:

    Me = 7+ 7
    2
    = 14
    2
    7
    so the median is 7

    In studying the median or other material, you must master the basic skills first. This Basic Mathematics book can help you to understand the foundation needed to develop your math skills.

     

    2.2. Interval Data Median / Group Data

    Grouped data is data that is usually presented in the form of a frequency table and the data has been arranged or grouped into interval classes
    mathematically.

    The median of interval data is formulated as follows:

    Tb = bottom edge of median class – p
    p = 0.5
    n = sum of frequencies
    f kum = number of frequencies before median class
    fm = frequency before median class
    If values ​​are expressed in integers and p= 0.05 if values ​​are expressed in decimal 1 number behind the comma.

    confused huh? Calm down, let’s try using questions

    A data collection was carried out by a group of researchers to find out the height of the 1st grade students. Calculate the mean from the data for the 1st grade students’ height group at Happy Always Elementary School if the following data is obtained:

    First, we add up all the available frequencies.
    The number of frequencies = 12 + 18 + 10 = 40

    Second, determine the median class:
    the median class is data that contains the n/2th
    , then the media class = 40/2= 20

    Let’s make a table…

    The median class is indicated by the 20th data where it is located in the 2nd group at the 2nd frequency which totals the frequency is 30.
    group: 2nd

    interval: 120-130
    at f before f median class = 12
    frequency before median class (fkum)
    fkum = 12
    while the frequency where the median class is at fm
    fm= 18
    interval distance l = 10

    Because the data is expressed in integers, the lower edge of the median class is as follows.
    the lower value of the 3rd group
    the interval 120 – 130
    is 120
    Tb = 120- p
    because it is an integer then p = 0.5
    Tb = 120 – 0.5 = 119.5

    Thus, the median is formulated as follows.
    Me = Tb+ [ ½ n- fkum] l / fm

    Me = 119.5 + [ ½ 20-12 ]. 10/10

    = 119.5 + [10 – 12 ,] 10 / 10
    = 119.5 + (-2).10 / 10
    = 119.5 – 20 / 10
    = 119.5 – 2
    = 117.5
    So, the median of the data it is 117.5

    Example question 2:

    Determine the median of the following student height data.

    First, because there is a lot more data than before, we take a deep breath first, after that we have counted a lot of data, you
    can see from the frequency gaess
    1st frequency : 6th
    frequency 2nd frequency : 8th
    frequency 3rd : 10th
    frequency 4th : 5th
    frequency 5th : 4th
    frequency 1st : 3rd

    Let’s add up

    Total (n)=6 + 8 + 10 + 5 + 4 + 3 = 36

    So after that, let’s determine the median class, the
    median class is the data that contains n/2
    , so the Median class = 36/2 = 18

    Observe the following table:

    The median class is indicated by the 18th data where it is located at:
    3rd group
    Interval 150-154
    at f before f median class = 8
    frequency before median class (fkum)
    fkum = 14
    while the frequency where the median class is at fm fm
    = 10
    interval distance l = 5

    Because the data is expressed in integers, the lower edge of the median class is as follows.
    the lower value of the 3rd group
    the interval 150 – 154
    is 150
    Tb = 150- p
    because it is an integer then p = 0.5
    Tb = 150 – 0.5 = 149.5

    Thus, the median is formulated as follows.
    Me = Tb+ [ ½ n- fkum] l / 10
    Me = 149.5 + [ ½ 36- 14 ]. 5 / 10
    = 149.5 + [18 – 14 ,] 5 / 10
    = 149.5 + (4).5 / 10
    = 149.5 + 20 / 10
    = 149.5 + 2
    = 151.5
    So, the median of these data is 151.5

    Darmawati’s Sensible Book of SMA/MA Mathematics Questions for Class X, XI and XII can help Sinaumed’s to practice their math skills through various practice questions in it.

    So, what about the median questions given along with the discussion, have you got enlightenment?

    The advantage of the median is that it is easy to calculate if the amount of data is relatively small. So if the amount of data is small, it’s really easy.
    But the title is different if the data provided is a lot. Of course it takes extra effort that makes us sweat from all directions.

    While the drawback of the median is that the median value is relatively unstable even for data in the same population. However, the median is a part of basic statistics that must be understood.

    The function of the median is to measure the concentration of land. In statistics and probability theory, the median is the value that separates the higher half from the lower half of a data sample, population, or probability distribution.

    The advantages of the median are firstly that it is not used for extreme data, secondly it can be used for both quantitative and qualitative data and thirdly it is very suitable for heterogeneous data.

    Meanwhile, the weaknesses are the first that it does not consider all data values, the second is that it cannot describe the average population, and the third is sensitive to the amount of data.

    That’s a brief explanation of the median that you can find out. Hopefully it will be a little enlightenment for those of you who are studying statistics. Hope it is useful.

  • Get to know the definition of concentration of a solution and its units

    Definition of Solution Concentration – To make it easier to understand what is the concentration of a solution, we should know about the meaning of the solution itself. Solution in chemistry has the meaning of a homogeneous mixture with a composition ratio according to its constituent components. One example of a solution in chemistry is H2SO4 (sulfuric acid). If a solution of H2SO4 (sulfuric acid) is electrified, it will conduct electricity.

    In general, a solution consists of one type of solute and one solvent. Solvent (solvent) and solute (substance that is dissolved) are usually often heard and mentioned. Solvent  is a component that physically does not change if a solution is formed, whereas all components present in the solute will dissolve in the solvent.

    Solution Concentration

    Even though the solution is a homogeneous mixture, the composition of each solution can vary. For example, there are two solutions in which each solvent contains one liter, but the amount of salt dissolved is different. From the two salt solutions just now, others couldn’t tell how much salt was contained therein.

    Therefore, to find out information about the relative amount of solute and solvent present in the solution, the term concentration of the solution is used. The concentration of a solution is the amount of substance dissolved in each unit of solution or solvent. In simple terms, the concentration of a solution can provide an overview or information about the ratio of the amount of solute to the amount of solvent.

    The concentrations of solutions commonly used in laboratories are Molarity, Molality, Normality, Mole Fraction, Concentration in Percent, Parts per Million (ppm) and Parts per Billion (ppb), and Formality. In studying solution concentration, Sinaumed’s can read Solution Chemistry books by Rusman, Ratu Fazlia Inda Rahmayani, and Mukhlis which can help you to develop knowledge about solution concentration.

     

    Solution Concentration Formula

    It turns out that the concentration of the solution itself has a formula, so you shouldn’t calculate it arbitrarily. That way, the substance to be dissolved will be maximized. The formula for the concentration of the solution is C = m/V. In this formula,   is the concentration,   is the mass of the solute, and V is the total volume of the solution.

    Solution Concentration Unit

    Below will be explained further about the concentration of the solution along with how to calculate the concentration of the solution.

    1. Molarity ( M )

    Molarity in the concentration of a solution is known as molar concentration or molarity with the symbol it has, namely M. Molarity is used to quantitatively obtain the concentration of a solution. Expressed as the number of moles of a solute in solution divided by the specified volume of solution in liters. The following is the molarity formula for the concentration of a solution.

    Molarity (M) = moles of soluteliters of solution

    or

    Molarity ( M ) = mass of solute g Mr solute 1000volume of solution (mL)

    Problems example

    Question: 2.00 grams of sodium hydroxide, NaOH, is dissolved in water to form a solution with a volume of 200 mL. What is the molarity of NaOH in solution?

    Answer:

    In order to know the amount of molarity, you must look at the ratio between the number of moles of solute and the number of liters of solution. In other words, we know the amount of NaOH in moles and the volume in liters.

    The formula mass of NaOH is 40.0 g/mol, thus:

    2.00 g NaOH 1 mol NaOH40.0 g NaOH = 0.500 mol NaOH

    If expressed in liters, 200 mL becomes 0.200 L

    Molarity (M) = 0.05 mol NaOH0.2 L solution

    = 0.250 mol NaOH/liter

    = 0.250 M NaOH

    So, the concentration of NaOH in the solution is 0.250 M NaOH.

    Why is molarity so important in the concentration of a solution? Because, if we know the molarity of a solution, then we can determine the desired number of moles. To find out the desired number of moles, you must measure the volume precisely.

    2. Molality (m)

    Molality is a concentration of a solution that states the number of moles of a compound or substance per kilogram of solvent ( solvent ).

    If, Mm is the molar mass (g mol-1) then:

    molality m=m (solute) Mm x kg of solvent

    or

    molality m=mass of solute (g)Mr of solute x 1000mass of solvent (g)

    Problems example

    Question: Calculate the molality of a methyl alcohol solution (Mr = 32) by dissolving 37 g of methyl alcohol (CH3OH) in 1750 g of water.

    Answer:

    moles of solute = 37 g32.0 gmol = 1.156 mol

    After getting the mass of the solvent, then find the molality.

    molality = 1.156 mol1.750 kg=0.660 m

    3. Normality (N)

    Normality can be defined as the number of equivalent moles of a substance per liter of solution. So, the normality formula can be written as follows:

    normality = V molecule (liters)

    Meanwhile, the normality formula used to find solids dissolved in water is different from the normality formula for the number of equivalent moles of a substance per liter. The following is the formula for normality of solids dissolved in water.

    normality=grams of solute equivalent mass x liters of solution

    N= m (X)Mm Xx x 1000V (ml) x

    Meanwhile, the equivalent relationship and molecular weight can be formulated as follows:

    gram equivalent= Mrn

    Where n is the number of equivalents per mole of substance X.

    Problems example

    Question: Calculate the normality of a solution containing 36.75 g, H2SO4 in 1.5 liters of solution. Mr H2SO4 = 98.

    Answer:

    Equivalent mass = 49

    normality = 36.7549 x 1.50 = 0.50 n

    4. Mole fraction

    The mole fraction is used to express the moles of a substance per the total number of moles. The following is the mole fraction formula.

    mole fraction A = = N (A)N (total)
    mole fraction of solute = number of moles of solute, number of moles of solute + number of moles of solvent
    mole fraction of solvent = number of moles of solvent, number of moles of solute + number of moles of solvent

    Problems example

    Question: If it is known that Mr. H2O = 18 g/mol. What is the mole fraction of H2SO4 in a solution containing 0.56 moles in 1 kg of H2O?

    Answer:

    number of moles of water = 100018

    = 55.56 moles

    mole fraction of SO 4 = 0.56056+55.56

    = 0.5656,12=0.010

    5. Concentration in percent

    In chemistry, the term percent is often used to express the concentration of a solution. Percent in solution concentration can be expressed in three forms, namely weight percent (%W/W), volume percent (%V/V), and volume weight percent (%W/V). Weight percent is often used because it does not depend on temperature.

    a, Percent by weight (%W/W)

    weight percent (%W/W)=grams of solutegrams of solutionx 100

    Problems example

    Question:

    Calculate how many % by weight of NaCl is made to dissolve 10 grams of NaCl in 50 grams of water.

    Answer:

    Weight % NaCl= 1010+50 x 100

    =16.67%

    b. Percent of volume (%V/V)

    volume percent (%V/V)= mL of solute mL of solution x 100

    Problems example

    Question:

    40 mL of alcohol is mixed with 40 mL of water to give 86.54 mL of solution. What is the volume percent of each component?

    Answer:

    percent by volume of alcohol %VV= 40 mL86.54 mLx 100

    =46.22%

    percent by volume of water %VV=40 mL86.54 mLx 100

    =46.22%

    c. Percent by volume (%W/V)

    weight percent by volume (%W/V)= grams of solutemL solution x 100

    Problems example

    Question: CH3COOH in 5 mL of vinegar at the rate of 1.008 g/mL containing 0.2589 g CH3COOH. What is the volume percent by weight?

    Answer:

    % wt volume = 0.2589 g5 mL x 1.008 gmL x 100

    =5.14%

    6. Parts Per Million (ppm) and Parts per Billion (ppb)

    Both units of solution concentration are commonly used when the solution becomes dilute. The concentration of parts per million is parts per one million and parts per billion is parts per one billion. Both of these units are widely used to analyze trace elements with SSA (Atomic Absorption Spectrometry).

    The ppm unit expresses the number of grams of a substance in 106 grams of solution. Check out the Parts Per Million (ppm) formula.

    ppm= m (substance)m (sample) x 106 ppm

    or

    1 ppm= 1 mg of solute in 1 L of solution

    The ppb unit expresses the number of grams of a substance in 109 grams of solution. Check out the Parts Per Billion (ppb) formula.

    ppb= m (substance)m (sample) x 109 ppb

    or

    1 ppb= 1 μ g solute1 L solution

    Problems example

    Question: There is an acetone in water solution which contains 8.60 mg of acetone in 21.4 liters of solution. If the solubility density is 0.997 g/cm3, then calculate the concentration of acetone in a (ppm) and b (ppb).

    Answer:

    Weight of acetone 8.60 mg = 8.60 x 10-3 g

    Weight of water = 21.4 L x 1000 mL/L x 0.997 g/mL

    = 21.4 x 104 g

    ppm acetone = 8.60 g acetone21.4 x 104 g water x 106 ppm

    = 0.402 ppm

    ppb acetone = 8.60 g acetone21.4 x 109 g water x 109ppb

    = 402 ppb

    7. Formal (F)

    Formality is the ratio between the total mass of the solute formula in each liter of solution. Formality can be referred to as the actual concentration that comes from the solute or dissolved ions present in the solution. Because of this, there are differences as well as similarities between formality and formality. The following is the formal formula.

    formality F= total mass of solute formulaliters of solution

    Problems example

    Question: A solution is prepared to dissolve 1.90 g of Na2SO4 and this solution is in 0.085 liters of solution. How much formality of the solution?

    Answer:

    Molar mass, Na2SO4 : 142 g/mol

    1.90 g= 1.90 g142 gmol=0.0134 formula weight

    After getting the total mass of the formula, then the formality is calculated.

    formality = 0.01340.085 = 0.16 F

    Sinaumed’s can learn more about solution concentrations through the SMA/MA Class 1,2,3 book Tentor’s Chemistry Bimbel Method which is made by summarizing various difficult materials, so it will be easier to understand chemistry and in which there are examples of questions and discussion.

     

     

    SOLUTION CONCENTRATION IN CHEMICAL AND PHYSICS UNITS

    Basically, the units of concentration of solutions that have been mentioned are divided into two groups, namely physical units and chemical units. The following table of physical and chemical units.

    Concentration of Solutions in Chemical Units
    Symbol Name Formula
    M Molarity moles of solute liters of solution
    m Molality moles of solute kg of solvent
    N Normality solute equivalentliters of solution
    X mole fraction moles of solute liters of solution
    F Formality the formula mass of the solute in liters of solution
    M Eq Millequivalent One-thousandth of a mole of charge
    Osm Osmolar osmolsliter of solution
    Concentration of Solutions in Physics
    Symbol Name Formula
    %W/W Weight percent grams of solute grams of solution x 100
    %V/V volume percent mL of solute mL of solution x 100
    %W/V Volume weight percent grams of solute mL of solution x 100
    %mg Percent milligrams mg of solute 100 mL of solution x 100
    Ppm Parts per million 1 mg of solute 1 L of solution
    ppb Parts per billion 1 μg of solute1 L of solution

    How to Make a Solution

    Procedure for preparing a solution in solid form. Check out the steps.

    1. The number of moles required must be calculated in advance so that the solution is in accordance with its volume and concentration.
    2. Determine the molar mass of the compound used to calculate the required mass.
    3. The next step is to place the watch glass on the scales. Then, set the scale at “0”. Weigh it carefully in order to get the required weight from the mass of the substance.
    4. After weighing the substance, transfer the substance into the beaker. Then, add water to dissolve the substance. So that no substance is left behind, clean the watch glass by rinsing it with clean water, then transfer the rinse water to a beaker. Do the rinse at least twice.
    5. Stir using a stir bar until all the substance is dissolved, then transfer the solution into a measuring flask. To clean up residue in the beaker and stir bar, it’s best to use water from a wash bottle.
    6. The next step is to add water to the volumetric flask up to the mark, then add the last drop of water with a dropper to ensure that the base of the meniscus is right at the boundary line.
    7. Close the volumetric flask and shake the volumetric flask several times so that the solution is mixed evenly.
    8. The final step is to label the solution with the name of the solution and the date of manufacture.

    Primary and Secondary Standard Solutions

    In chemistry, every solution has a standard. A standard solution is a solution whose concentration is known with certainty. If, using a standard solution, it will be able to determine the concentration of another solution. Standard solutions have uses that can be utilized when in a chemical laboratory. Following are some of the uses of standard solutions.

    1. Serves to standardize volumetric solutions
    2. Can be used as a reference to determine a solution whose concentration is unknown.
    3. To calibrate the instrument
    4. Prepare standard solution.

    Standard solutions are divided into two types, namely primary standard solutions and secondary standard solutions.

    1. Primary Standard Solution

    Primary standard solution is a solution whose concentration is obtained from the measurement results. The primary standard is used as the primary calibrator.

    The requirements for a primary standard solution are to be stable, anhydrous, not hygroscopic, have high purity, have a high molecular level, when compared to similar molecules, are inexpensive, are not toxic, and are always available and ready to use.

    2. Secondary Standard Solution

    Secondary standard solution is a solution whose concentration is obtained by determining the concentration of a substance using a primary standard solution. Secondary standard solutions are commonly used for calibration purposes of control materials in small laboratories to analyze unknown concentrations of solutions of a substance.

    The requirements for a secondary standard solution, namely the level of purity of the solution is lower when compared to the primary standard solution, the solution has a stable time, determines the level of a substance using a primary standard solution, and has lower stability when compared to a primary standard solution.

    Conclusion

    Solution in chemistry has the meaning of a homogeneous mixture with a composition ratio according to its constituent components. In chemistry, solutions are divided into two types of standards, namely primary standards and secondary standards. The concentration of a solution is the amount of substance dissolved in each unit of solution or solvent.

    In simple terms, the concentration of a solution can provide an overview or information about the ratio of the amount of solute to the amount of solvent. The concentrations of solutions commonly used in laboratories are Molarity, Molality, Normality, Mole Fraction, Concentration in Percent, Parts per Million (ppm) and Parts per Billion (ppb), and Formality.

    So, that’s an explanation of the concentration of a solution, starting from the definition, types, and units that Sinaumed’s needs to know. Sinaumed’s will often find material on the concentration of solutions in chemistry and physics lessons from elementary school. So Sinaumed’s can understand this material better so that it is easier to find out about a wider range of material solutions and can more easily solve questions.

  • Get to know the definition of appetizer, characteristics, and examples of appetizer dishes

    Appetizer is an appetizer that is often served in several restaurants or hotels. Usually this appetizer is a package with the main menu or dessert. However, some people may not know exactly what an appetizer is . To find outmore about appetizers , you can refer to this article, Sinaumed’s.

    Meaning of Appetizers

    Eating is one of the human activities to consume various types of intake to get the benefits in it such as energy, nutrition, vitamins, and delay the feeling of hunger.

    This eating activity can be done at home, places to eat, restaurants and cafes which offer a wide variety of menu choices with appetizing flavors. But did you know that there is actually an arrangement or sequence of meals that is commonly practiced, especially in star-rated restaurants.

    The structure/arrangement of the meal is divided into several stages and it always starts with an appetizer or more familiarly called an “ Appetizer ”. As is well known, in serving food, of course you are no stranger to the term Appetizer .

    You may often hear this term in various cooking shows on television. Or maybe, you often read the term Appetizer in restaurant menu lists that serve a variety of food choices. Appetizers are snacks that are usually served before the main meal.

    Appetizer as an appetizer before the main course is served with the intention of arousing appetite or appetite. Appetizer , in Indonesian terms means ‘appetizer’.

    While the French term says Hors d’oeuvre (starter) . Some references also say that the Appetizer is a delivery person to enjoy a special dish.

    The purpose of the appetizer is to bring up appetite. Therefore, the quantity is small with a sour, salty or spicy taste. In this case, Appetizer is the designation for an appetizer, usually an Appetizer in the form of a snack served before the main meal or consumed between meals.

    These Appetizers can be anything from light and simple to complex meals depending on the time it takes to make Appetizers are foods that are served in small portions with the aim of arousing appetite as an appetizer before the main course with a sour, sweet and or spicy taste.

    This Appetizer dish is always served at every dinner or similar banquet. In fact, often Appetizers are also served as a food dish at weddings. Usually guests will be given appetizers as a banquet when they come to a wedding.

    That way, it can be said that the Appetizer is an important dish that must be present at a banquet. In this case, there are various examples of Appetizer dishes that you need to know. Various dishes

    This appetizer can be made from simple ingredients, processed in such a way as to produce a delicious taste. Serving delicious appetizers will certainly give a good and attractive impression to anyone who is holding a banquet.

    The appetizer also has a small size and is served in an attractive way. Appetizer is a type of food that can be served hot ( canapes , fritters , soup ) or cold ( salad , chilled fruit cocktail , shrimp cocktail ), and sometimes tastes spicy.

    Related to its role as an appetite generator, an attractive appearance is really needed when serving an appetizer . Because an appetizer is an appetizer, of course this will affect the impressions of the next dish.

    Therefore, in order to create an attractive impression, the maker needs neatness, precision and fantasy. In other words, serving an appetizer is a must to serve with perfect performance.

    As previously explained that Appetizers are appetizers or snacks that are usually served or consumed before mealtime. These appetizers are also often called hors d’oeuvres , antipasti, or starters .

    In this case, appetizers can range from simple or light meals to foods made with complex ingredients. This of course depends on the opportunity and time needed to make it. Appetizers are common appetizers served with alcoholic drinks or cocktails that are served before a meal.

    Types of Appetizers

    Although as an appetizer, appetizers are also classified in several ways, starting from the ingredients used to the temperature in the presentation.

    Based on Materials Used

    Sur Asiette Complate

    Sur Asiette Complate , namely an appetizer that uses excess ingredients or ingredients at quite affordable prices.

    Hors D’Oeuvre Royale

    Hors D’Oeuvre Royale , namely an appetizer that uses expensive ingredients and is served without sauce .

    Hors D’Oeuvre Variations

    Hors D’Oeuvre Varies , namely an appetizer that uses a combination of ingredients at expensive and cheap prices.

    Based on the Serving Temperature

    Cold Appetizers

    Cold appetizer (Cold Appetizer): Food served in a variety of salads , shrim , cocktails, or cold , canapes ( small sandwiches served cold). Examples of Cuisine: Canape , Pate , Aspic Jelly .

    Hot Appetizers

    Hot appetizer (hot appetizer): Food served various types of soups , muffins , fritters . Examples of dishes: Galantine , Ballotines , Croquette , Risoles , Quiche Lorraine.

    Characteristics of the Appetizer Menu

    After knowing the meaning, there are several characteristics of the Appetizer dish that you need to know. The first characteristic, Appetizers are appetizers that are often served at dinner parties or similar banquets.

    As an appetizer, the appetizer is served at the beginning of time before meal time. Apart from banquets, appetizers are also often served at weddings or receptions after the wedding is over.

    At a wedding, an appetizer can be said as a welcome dish that is given to guests when attending the event. Even though it’s simple, the appetizer is an important dish that must be served at a banquet or other formal event.

    Apart from formal occasions, Hors d’oeuvres may also be served at long parties which are held after the usual mealtime. Or it could be served at an afternoon party where there is no intention of serving dinner.

    An after-dinner evening party may also feature an Appetizer so guests can have a chance to enjoy a snack. This Appetizer dish is a suitable food served when guests are consuming alcohol to help reduce alcohol absorption.

    In addition, many restaurants serve a variety of pre-meal canapes as a first course for their customers.

    1. Served at the Beginning

    The most important characteristic of the appetizer is to arouse the appetite. Sometimes in an official banquet or in a star-rated restaurant the serving of the appetizer is always at the beginning and the dishes served must be in prime condition both in aroma, taste and appearance.

    2. Has Many Variants

    The variants are very diverse, such as soup, made from seaweed, shark bones, mushrooms, to seafood. In addition, the appetizer dish has a unique color, which is slightly lit, for example yellow or bright red

    3. The Taste Shown is Unique, Warm, Smooth, and Still Gives Freshness

    Appetizers are usually served cold, warm, smooth and still fresh. Usually the freshness uses fruit ingredients.

    4. Fragrant fragrance bursts into the nose

    The appetizer uses a pungent fragrance even if it is a fruity or floral fragrance as well.

    5. Served in small portions

    Appetizers are appetizers that are usually served in small portions, so they are often called finger food. Foods served as appetizers are made in one bite size. This is none other than so that food is easily consumed in one to two bites.

    That way, guests can consume it while relaxing chatting or chatting with other guests without feeling bothered by the dish being enjoyed. This appetizer can be made from a variety of ingredients and processed with various spices to produce a delicious and delicious taste.

    Examples of this Appetizer dish could be a plate of cheese and chips, chopped vegetables served with dips, or small pieces of fruit that can be enjoyed simply.

    Apart from that, other Appetizer choices are quite popular such as canapes, sandwiches, crab cakes, small sausages, dumplings, or dimsum which can be eaten in one or two bites.

     

    6. Unique Seasonings

    Using unique spices, namely spices that stimulate gastric acid production to increase hunger.

    7. Spices can whet your appetite

    Appetizers are deliberately made using selected ingredients and seasonings that can stimulate stomach acid in the stomach, thereby increasing hunger In addition, it is hoped that a delicious appetizer will give the impression that the next dish will be even more delicious.

    8. Served in banquets or various events

    The next characteristic of the appetizer is that the food is served at a banquet or served at a special event. Therefore, the appetizer menu is usually very diverse and certainly not filling.

    9. Appetizer dishes must be adjusted

    The next characteristic in an appetizer is that it must be adapted to other foods. In this case, the host or the person serving the food must be able to adjust the type of appetizer that matches the main food to be served, which is different in taste and attractiveness so that it becomes the perfect complement.

    In addition to the appropriate taste, a good Appetizer menu choice must also be sufficient or not excessive. In addition, the host who serves the appetizer must also try foods that have allergen properties in general.

    For example, if shellfish are one of the ingredients for an appetizer , you should make sure that the shells don’t come into contact with other foods served. Hosts should also avoid common allergens like nuts, and make sure, if they do serve them, they are stored in a separate serving bowl or plate.

    Examples of Appetizers

    Here are some examples of hot and cold appetizers and how to serve them.

    1. Salads

    Salad is a food that is a combination of fresh green vegetables , fruit, meat, poultry and fish served with dressing .

    The salad portion is 40 grams-50 grams, while for the vegetarian salad portion it is 80 grams-125 grams.

    Salad Composition

    Salad also has a composition that makes this dish taste even more delicious.

    1. Underliner (base) : as the basic part of the salad, usually the ingredients used are green vegetables with the aim that the salad looks fresher .
    2. Body (Content) : as a special part of the salad, the naming of the salad is generally taken from this important side.
    3. Dressing Salad : as a dressing to complement salads, in appetizer sauces are called dressings. Dressing is the side that will determine the taste of the salad. There are many important things to pay attention to when giving dressings to salads.
    4. Garnish : generally taken from the contents, but can also use other foodstuffs. The principle of garnish should not only be consumed but also have a taste that suits the body.

    Salad Temperature

    The temperature of the salad is divided into two, namely:

    1. Cold salad: served at 10°C – 15°C
    2. Hot salad: served at 50°C – 60°C

    2. Canapes

    Canape is an appetizer that is divided into various kinds of plant, animal, fruit and nuts ingredients.

    Various kinds of toppings are usually placed on pieces of toast or biscuits as a canape base .

    Structure of Canapes

    Canape base : made from toasted/cooked bread in the form of rectangles, rounds, triangles, which are spread with butter.

    Spread (spread) : is a soft/thick food ingredient that is spread on the surface of bread/biscuits which functions as an adhesive, adding flavor and nutritional value. The spread should be soft, easy to spread and not runny.

    Toppings : food ingredients that are placed on bread/biscuits that have been spread. Several kinds of toppings, among others; sliced ​​cheese, boiled eggs, fish, shrimp, meat, vegetables, fruit and nuts.

    Toppings can be used with only one type or as a combination of several ingredients. In general, the toppings used determine the name of the canape , for example: cheese canape , shrimp canape .

    Garnishes : The role of garnishes is twofold, adding food performance and at the same time adding nutritional value. The criteria for garnishes in canapes are simple, can be consumed and have a taste that matches the contents.

    How to Make Canapes

    1. Some of the ingredients used are in good condition and fresh
    2. The bread is cut first then baked
    3. The biscuits used have a crunchy taste, have a small shape and have a combination of colors.
    4. Give toppings as desired.

    3. Aspic jelly

    The role of aspic jelly as a cold appetizer, coating the appetizer to make it more attractive. As an appetizer made from clarified stock with a combination of meat, egg whites. With cold stock added gelatin solution, then simmering for 2 hours, stranning , then chilling.

    Aspic Jelly Arrangement

    1. The basic material used is clarified stock.
    2. The filling material used is animal and vegetable food.
    3. Garnish has a role to improve performance and can enrich the names of aspic .

    4. Pates

    Pate is a cold appetizer menu made from chicken, beef, fish, liver which is finely chopped and seasoned and then molded like pie dough .

    Pate arrangement

    1. The special ingredients in question, such as chicken, beef, fish, liver mixed with vegetables to make it more attractive and have a variety of colors.
    2. The wrapping material plays a role in wrapping special materials, but some are printed.

    How to Make Pate

    1. The basic ingredients must be finely chopped.
    2. Soft and dense structure
    3. Processed with baked techniques
    4. Finished with aspic jelly
    5. Served chilled whole/chopped.

    To make a delicious and delicious appetizer , you need quality ingredients and they have to be fresh . The ingredients for making an appetizer can consist of a combination of foods such as meat, seafood , poultry, vegetables and fruits.

    All of these materials must be stored in the refrigerator so that the temperature is maintained and reduces damage. In addition, the ingredients for the appetizer should not be stored for too long and must be handled immediately to maintain the taste and aroma.

    Sinaumed’s can get more appetizer recipes by reading books available at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information .

    Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

    • Food Substances As Energy Sources
    • Staple Foods in Indonesia
    • Alternatives to Rice
    • Salt Making Process
    • Tofu Making Process
  • Get to Know the Definition of Ambivert & the Advantages of This Personality!

    Definition of Ambivert – Usually, people only recognize two personalities, namely extroverts and introverts, even though there are also combined personalities of extroverts and introverts known as ambiverts.

    The ambivert personality is often said to be a mix of extrovert and introvert. However, is that really the case? So, what are the characteristics of people who have this personality type? Come on, find out the answer through the following article regarding the meaning of ambivert.

    What Is an Ambivert Personality?

    The terms extrovert and introvert personality were first coined in the 1900s by the Swiss psychiatrist Carl G. Jung.

    He said that someone who has an introverted personality tends to prefer to be alone. Meanwhile, someone who has an extroverted personality tends to prefer socializing with other people or can be said to be easy going .

    After reading the information in the previous point, which personality does Sinaumed’s have? Apparently, there are people who have opinions or think that they are neither extroverts nor introverts. If Sinaumed’s has the same thoughts, it could be that Sinaumed’s is an ambivert.

    The definition of ambivert is a personality that can lead to extrovert or introvert, depending on the situation at hand. Someone who has an ambivert personality, in general, will easily mingle like an extrovert, but also likes to be alone and there is a phase where he doesn’t talk much like an introvert.

    To find out about Sinaumed’s personality types ; extrovert, introvert, or even ambivert, Sinaumed’s can take various free online tests on the internet. Usually, Sinaumed’s will be asked to fill out a questionnaire similar to when Sinaumed’s is undergoing a general psychological test.

    Traits of an Ambivert

    As previously explained, not everyone can be categorized as an extrovert or introvert. Between the two personalities, there is one personality, namely the ambivert.

    Many people think that an ambivert is a person with a wishy-washy personality. In fact, if you pay close attention to its characteristics, this is not the case.

    The following are signs that are generally shown by an ambivert.

    1. Can be social as well as a loner

    One sign of an ambivert personality is being good at socializing but also likes to be alone in certain situations. They can communicate flexibly with the people around them, but also like to be alone at certain times when necessary.

    2. Good listener and speaker

    Happy to talk about various things, usually a characteristic of someone who has an extrovert character. Conversely, someone who has an introverted character generally tends to be more reserved, even though introverts are actually very different from shy ones. So, what kind of person who has an ambivert character? Well, it turns out that an ambivert person can be a listener as well as a good speaker.

    If he really needs to express an opinion, he will not be ashamed to express it. On the other hand, he can also be a good listener if he is in the right situation.

    3. Have high empathy

    One more characteristic of an ambivert personality that Sinaumed’s needs to know about is a high level of empathy. Empathy itself means understanding what other people feel, seeing from that person’s point of view, while being able to imagine themselves in someone else’s position.

    People who have high empathy levels generally care and are good at understanding the feelings of others. High empathy can also make them good listeners. Therefore, people who have an ambivert personality are generally often used as a place to express complaints for those around them.

    Knowing this personality can help Sinaumed’s to recognize one’s own personality. This can also help develop yourself to become a more flexible person because basically personality can change. In addition, Sinaumed’s can also recognize more deeply if he has an ambiverted partner, or a family member with this personality.

    Advantages of an Ambivert

    People who have an ambivert character, have a position in the middle, namely between extroverts and introverts. Therefore, they have unique traits and can take advantage of both personalities to apply to certain situations.

    Here are some of the advantages possessed by an ambivert.

    1. Have a healthier and more stable relationship

    One of the advantages of someone who has an ambivert character is that they have a more stable relationship, both in the circle of friends and their partners.

    This is because they can become listeners as well as socialize well in the general public. In addition, people who have an ambivert character are more flexible and emotionally stable, so that when facing a problem in a relationship, they can be used as a mediator.

    2. Have a good management system

    The next advantage for someone who has an ambivert character is having good management skills.

    The truth is, both extroverts and introverts make good bosses, but in definitely different ways. This means that both will have different styles and results depending on what kind of personality they have when working with employees.

    This is proven through the results of a study conducted by the Harvard Business Review which examined which type of boss is better, a boss with an introverted character or an extroverted character.

    For bosses who have extroverted personalities, company profits will tend to be high when they lead passive employees. That is, bosses with this model prefer to give instructions and direct.

    On the other hand, when extroverted bosses work with active employees, the company’s profits decrease because these workers prefer to work with their own methods.

    Therefore, active workers will usually be more able to develop when they have bosses who are introverted. Bosses with introverted characters will generally prefer to listen and help their employees to recognize and understand their potential.

    If Sinaumed’s has a boss with an ambivert character, they will usually be able to bring out their extroverted and introverted traits according to the needs of their employees. Whether they will put out a listener or be a good director depends on the personality of their own employees.

    3. Can read the situation well

    In 2013, there was a study that made observations about the relationship between extroverted personality and talent in marketing . While many people believe that when it comes to offering goods, extroverts tend to be good at it. However, in reality, ambiverts are more skilled.

    This is because ambiverts can speak well, as well as being good listeners too. Therefore, when it comes to marketing , ambiverts are better able to listen to what customers want without appearing too eager.

    So, what are the drawbacks of being an ambivert?

    People with an ambivert personality have the following disadvantages:

    • Although an ambivert is a person who tends to be flexible, his personality is considered inconsistent because it is always changing
    • Understanding Ambivert is someone who is moody , so it’s not surprising if they behave according to their feelings
    • The feelings of an ambivert can change even in a relatively short period of time
    • Even though they have a special personality, people with an ambivert personality are sometimes confused about the personality they have
    • Easily feel tired caused by too much socializing
    • An ambivert figure is very difficult to organize a plan
    • The definition of ambiverts, even though they can act like extroverts, sometimes they seem ambiguous when they are in the middle of a conversation
    • The character of an ambivert is very difficult to predict, so it’s no wonder that the decisions made are sometimes surprising and don’t match the expectations of others
    • An ambivert is someone who gives up when faced with a choice
    • An ambivert figure sometimes finds it difficult when making a decision

    How Do Ambiverts Adjust?

    Ambivert figures who are considered inconsistent, they are also often distracted by their environment. So, if the ambivert work environment is conducive then they can work truly productively. However, on the contrary, if they are in an environment that has a lot of disturbances or is not conducive, then they can also follow the pattern of their environment.

    Because they have the ability to adapt and read the atmosphere well, ambiverts need to hone their ability to understand the conditions around them. For example, when you are hanging out with new people.

    As an ambivert, Sinaumed’s may enjoy being the center of attention, but don’t forget to embrace introverted friends so they can feel accepted and comfortable.

    Also maximize the potential to express opinions and listen to other people so that you better understand the right time to speak and also listen.

    Tips for Developing an Ambivert Personality

    If Sinaumed’s has an ambivert personality, Sinaumed’s can still develop it further so that he is able to gain abilities that will further support Sinaumed’s in the world of work and education.

    1. Focus on activities or things you like

    An ambivert generally likes various types of social activities. However, sometimes these activities do not give them pleasure, but instead drain energy and cause fatigue.

    To develop your personality, try to start now focusing on activities that really make you happy and meaningful for life. For example, going on vacation with close friends or just taking a vacation to relieve fatigue.

    2. Try to be more free to communicate feelings

    Communicating thoughts or feelings can help Sinaumed’s develop ambivert traits. If Sinaumed’s really needs time for himself, don’t hesitate to communicate this to the people around him. Give understanding to the people around you that Sinaumed’s is feeling tired and needs time to calm down.

    3. Try to maintain flexibility

    An ambivert is known for his nature which tends to be flexible. This is a good thing, keep it up, and develop this trait. Because this trait is actually so useful especially for the world of work. This characteristic allows Sinaumed’s to be accepted by the environment in any situation. That way, Sinaumed’s can quickly mingle with superiors and colleagues.

    Jobs That Are Suitable For Ambiverts

    People with an ambivert personality can adapt well to various situations in a professional environment, therefore, there is actually no problem finding a job. Here are some job options suitable for ambiverts.

    1. Human Resources Department (HRD)

    As we all know, HRD has a duty to recruit employees. As an ambivert, Sinaumed’s can be said to be smart enough to read someone’s character, as well as being able to lure them into opening up and having a good conversation. This ability is very necessary for an HRD to be able to find the most appropriate candidate for the position needed.

    2. Psychologist or therapist

    By having high empathy that Sinaumed’s has, the job of being a psychologist is perfect for ambiverts. Sinaumed’s can be a good listener for patients who share their complaints, as well as being a solution provider like a friend.

    3. Journalist

    Being a journalist is also suitable for ambiverts. With his flexible nature and being able to lighten the mood, Sinaumed’s was able to get various kinds of information from sources. In addition, Sinaumed’s can also read and adjust speech style, personality, and conditions in the interview session.

    4. Sales

    Being a salesperson is not an easy job, Sinaumed’s needs to adapt and familiarize himself with potential buyers. In addition, Sinaumed’s is also required to listen to what is the need of potential customers in order to be able to sell the goods that Sinaumed’s offers. Well, this job is perfect for an ambivert, who is able to break the ice and be able to make observations.

    In fact, a study in the journal Psychological Science says that ambiverts tend to be more suited to work in marketing or as sales than extroverts or introverts.

    5. Lawyer

    Good emotional control by an ambivert makes him suitable for working as a lawyer. This calm and controlled emotion will be a powerful weapon to win various arguments from the case that Sinaumed’s is handling.

     

    6. Teacher

    Not only being able to teach in front of the class, a teacher must be able to understand the personalities of all his students. This is to find out what their opinions and difficulties are facing. This job is very suitable for people with ambivert characters, this is because the understanding of ambiverts has a flexible personality when dealing with various types of students from various backgrounds.

    7. Interior designer

    An interior designer must be able to persuade his client so that the design suggestions offered are acceptable, but he must also be able to listen to what the client wants. Well, both of these things can be done by someone who has an ambivert personality.

    That’s a review of what is personality and the meaning of ambivert and all of it. Is Sinaumed’s also an ambivert? No matter what your personality is, keep fighting hard and never give up in life, OK?

    Check out various other information related to the meaning of ambiverts and other personalities through various recommendations for psychology books and related articles below!

  • Get to know the definition, benefits, and types of immunization

    Types of Immunizations – To avoid the severity of life-threatening illnesses, children must be immunized. The types of child immunizations given, preferably as recommended by IDAI, are designed to protect your little one early in life. As a parent, you should understand the importance and variety of immunizations.

    This is because babies and children are vulnerable to contracting dangerous diseases. Has Sinaumed’s checked the basic and advanced immunization schedule for your little one? Come on, look at the following types of immunization.

    Definition of Immunization

    Immunization is a process to make someone immune or immune to a disease. This process is carried out by injecting a vaccine that aims to form the body’s resistance to certain diseases. By routinely carrying out immunizations, it can prevent the spread of disease.

    After being born into the world, children need vaccines or immunizations to protect themselves who are still vulnerable to exposure to viruses and bacteria. There are various types of immunizations that your little one should get according to his age.

    Immunization recommendations have also been widely conveyed by experts and health organizations. However, unfortunately there are still many parents who are not aware of the importance of immunization for their children.

    Immunization goals

    Immunization aims to protect yourself from various diseases that are dangerous or at risk of causing death. Immunization can also be a way to form herd immunity.

    This is important to prevent the spread of disease in people who cannot undergo immunization. In other words, the more people who get immunized, the fewer people who are infected with the disease.

    It should be remembered that someone who has had a severe allergic reaction to a previous immunization or is allergic to the ingredients contained in the vaccine, should not get immunized. Patients with cancer or autoimmune diseases who have low immune systems should also not undergo immunization.

    Immunization Program Benefits

    Immunization prevents a great deal of suffering and death of infants and children from infectious disease outbreaks. Infectious diseases have existed since ancient times. If left unchecked, this can be potentially life-threatening.

    By immunizing, it can stop the disease outbreak in the future. Babies should be immunized during their first 2 years of life. Your little one may need several doses of vaccines to be fully protected.

    The Ministry of Health and IDAI reminded that giving complete basic immunization alone is not enough. So, a complete follow-up immunization schedule must be carried out.

    Baby Age For Immunizations

    The following is the recommended age for infants to receive basic immunization types:

    • Age <24 hours: Hepatitis B (HB-0).
    • Age 0 – 1 month: BCG and Polio 1.
    • Age 2 months: DPT – HB – Hib-1, Polio 2, Rotavirus.
    • Age 3 months: DPT – HB – Hib – 2, Polio 3.
    • Age 4 months: DPT – HB – Hib – 3, Polio 4, IPV, Rotavirus.
    • Age 9 months: Measles or MR.

     

     

    Complete IDAI 2020 Immunization Types

    Unhealthy environmental conditions often have the potential to carry diseases that can attack anyone. Actually, all immunizations are important. However, there are indeed some that are considered mandatory or basic immunization types that have been provided by the government.

    The following is an explanation of the types of basic to advanced immunizations, as well as the schedule according to the age of the baby, including:

    1. BCG

    According to the 2020 Indonesian Pediatrician Association (IDAI), giving the BCG vaccine is recommended before the baby is 3 months old. If the baby is more than 3 months old, it is recommended to do a tuberculin test first.

    These basic types of immunization protect against tuberculosis, also known as TB. TB is a serious infection that attacks the lungs and sometimes other parts of the body, such as the bones, joints and kidneys. It can also cause meningitis. BCG immunization can be given if the tuberculin test shows a negative result. The recommended place for the BCG immunization injection is on the upper right arm.

    2. DPT

    The basic types of DPT immunization function to protect against diphtheria, pertussis and tetanus. DPT vaccination is recommended to be given 5 times, each at the age of:

    • Age 2 months or the fastest at the age of 6 weeks.
    • Age 4, 6, 18 months.
    • 5 years old.

    Furthermore, booster immunizations for children need to be repeated every 10 years.

    3. MR/MMR

    According to the immunization schedule of the Ministry of Health and IDAI, this includes the types of basic immunizations that your little one needs. The MMR vaccine is responsible for preventing children from experiencing mumps, measles and rubella / German measles.

    The first dose is given when the child is 9 months old. After that, give the MMR vaccine when the child is 15 months old, with a minimum distance of 6 months from the measles vaccine.

    4. Hepatitis B (HB)

    This new type of hepatitis B immunization is given before the baby is 6 months old, as many as 3 doses:

    • The first dose is given when the baby is born. Precisely before the baby is 24 hours old.
    • The second dose is given when the baby is 1-2 months old.
    • The third dose is given when the baby is 6-18 months old.

    This type of hepatitis B vaccine coincides with DPT, so administration can be done when the baby is 2.3 and 4 months old. In addition, babies born to mothers with hepatitis B need to get the first dose of hepatitis B vaccine before they are 24 hours old.

    Coupled with hepatitis B immunoglobulin at the same time in different parts of the thigh, this is done after receiving a vitamin K1 injection. Giving the next type of immunization can be given according to the schedule. When they are 9–18 months old, babies born to mothers with hepatitis B need to be tested for anti-HBs and HbsAg.

    5. Hemophilus influenza B (Hib)

    The Hib vaccine is a type of immunization used to prevent infection with Haemophilus influenza type b (Hib). In countries that include it as a routine vaccine the rate of severe Hib infection has fallen by more than 90%.

    The Hib vaccine is recommended to be given when the baby is 2, 3, 4 months old. Then, the Ministry of Health’s immunization schedule will be repeated at the age of 12-15 months with doses depending on the baby’s age (3 or 4 doses). This vaccine is often combined with other types of immunization or is called DPT-HB-Hib.

    6. Flu or influenza

    Influenza or flu viruses cause acute respiratory infections. This results in considerable morbidity and mortality worldwide. So, it’s important for your little one to get the flu immunization.

    The flu vaccine can be given annually when the child is 6 months to 8 years old in 2 basic or initial doses. Advanced influenza immunization for children can be done once a year.

     

     

    7. Pneumococcal (PCV)

    Pneumococcal vaccine is a type of immunization against Streptococcus pheumoniae bacteria. Its use can prevent some cases of pneumonia, meningitis and sepsis. The PCV vaccine is used 4 times according to the age group, namely when your little one is 2, 4 and 6 months old.

    There are two types of pneumococcal vaccines, namely conjugate vaccines and polysaccharide vaccines. Administering the fourth dose of the PCV vaccine to infants aged 12–15 months.

    8. IPV (Polio)

    The polio vaccine is IDAI’s basic type of immunization used to prevent poliomyelitis (polio). There are 2 types of vaccines used, namely inactivated polio virus by injection (IPV) and by mouth (OPV).

    The World Health Organization (WHO) recommends that all children be vaccinated against polio completely. The first administration of the polio vaccine immediately after the baby is born. After that, the vaccine was given to babies aged 2, 3 and 4 months. At the age of 18 months, children can get advanced polio immunization to get perfect immunity.

    9. Rotavirus

    Rotavirus immunization serves to prevent children from contracting infectious diseases due to rotavirus such as diarrhea. There are 2 types of vaccines for rotavirus that are considered important. The first is the monovalent rotavirus vaccine, which consists of one type of virus administered twice.

    This rotavirus vaccine is given at babies aged 6–14 weeks and 4 weeks after the first purchase. Meanwhile, the pentavalent rotavirus vaccine, which consists of several types of viruses, was administered three times at the ages of 2, 4 and 6 months.

    10. Varicella

    To prevent chicken pox, children need to get the varicella vaccine according to IDAI’s schedule. This varicella immunization schedule is given after the child is 1 year old. Based on records from the Center for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), the varicella vaccine can provide 90–97% protection for 7–10 years. If a child has ever received the varicella vaccine, the chances of getting chickenpox are even smaller.

    11. Hepatitis A

    The next immunization that children need to get is hepatitis A. This immunization is useful for preventing hepatitis virus infection through food and feces of sufferers. Children receive hepatitis A immunization 2 times with a gap of 6–12 months after the first injection.

    It is not mandatory, but this is an IDAI immunization schedule that can be followed. The first gift was when the child was 2 years old, Sinaumed’s.

    12. Typhoid

    Typhoid immunization works to prevent infection with the Salmonella typhi bacteria, which causes typhus. The child will receive the typhoid vaccine for the first time when he is 2 years old. Children can get advanced typhoid immunization once every 3 years.

    This IDAI immunization schedule can protect children from typhus by around 50-80%. Therefore, parents still have to maintain their child’s diet so they don’t catch this disease.

    13. Japanese Encephalitis (JE)

    Disease transmission through mosquitoes is not only in dengue fever, but also Japanese Encephalitis (JE). As the name suggests, this disease first appeared in Japan in 1871 as summer encephalitis.

    Classified as the Ministry of Health’s immunization schedule, this can be obtained at the age of 12 months. Meanwhile, JE immunization is continued in the next 1-2 years. If a child has missed a vaccination for up to 2 years, there is no need to repeat the vaccine. This can be given directly to the missed vaccine dose. Give a gap of about 1 month between vaccines to catch up, Sinaumed’s.

    14. Dengue (DHF)

    Dengue (DHF) is a type of child immunization that is classified as advanced or supporting. This immunization is used to prevent dengue fever in children. Dengue vaccine is given to children aged 9–16 years who are seropositive for dengue.

    This means that a history of being treated with a diagnosis of dengue has been proven. This requires testing for NS-1 antigen and/or a positive anti-dengue lgM/lgG serological test. Alternatively, your little one can take a positive anti-dengue IgG serological examination.

    15. Immunization against measles

    This immunization is to prevent measles virus attack which causes high fever, rashes on the skin, eyes, mouth, pneumonia (pneumonia), diarrhea and inflammation of the brain or can even result in death. This measles vaccine is injected from the age of 9 months and 6 years.

    Immunization Side Effects

    According to IDAI, several types of basic and advanced immunizations sometimes trigger mild side effects. The side effects of immunization according to the Ministry of Health are classified as mild, including:

    • Mild to high fever
    • Swelling at the injection area
    • Reddish skin
    • Fussy baby

    This right is a common reaction and is called a post-immunization adverse event (AEFI). In general, AEFI will disappear in 3-4 days although sometimes it can take longer.

    When to See a Doctor

    Before undergoing immunization, tell the doctor if your child has a history of allergies, autoimmune diseases or cancer. In addition, do a child’s examination to the doctor if severe symptoms appear or if the complaint worsens after immunization, such as:

    • AEFI symptoms that are getting worse or don’t go away
    • Fever more than 2 days
    • Breathing problems such as shortness of breath or loss of sense of smell (anosmia)
    • Chest pain
    • fast heartbeat (tachycardia)
    • seizures
    • Loss of consciousness

    Management of Immunization Side Effects

    Immunizations have been confirmed to be safe, but it is possible that side effects or AEFIs will appear as mentioned above. However, Sinaumed’s need not worry because AEFI can be handled independently according to the symptoms.

    Some ways to treat the side effects of immunization in children are:

    • Give warm compresses and febrifuge according to the doctor’s prescription
    • Give more drink
    • Replace children’s clothes with thin fabrics and do not cover children
    • Breastfeed more often
    • Provide nutritious food

    Child immunization is in the form of a catch-up program that lasts until the age of 18 years. However, that does not mean that all types of vaccines can be included in the catch-up immunization program. There are several immunizations that once missed the schedule are not necessary because their effectiveness has decreased.

    Catch-up immunization must still pay attention to the time limit and type of vaccine. Provision of catch-up immunization can be through routine immunization programs at the nearest health care facility such as posyandu, midwife, health center or hospital.

    Therefore, parents need to consult with a pediatrician about administering follow-up vaccines related to delays in child immunization. This is because the vaccine dose varies depending on the age of the child.

     

     

    Closing

    So, those are the types of immunizations that can be used as a reference for your kids, OK, so don’t be late, Sinaumed’s! By providing complete basic immunization on time, it means that Sinaumed’s has provided additional protection for your beloved baby.

    With good immunization, your little one will be able to grow healthily without obstacles and avoid serious illnesses. So, don’t hesitate to consult this matter with a pediatrician or midwife in the environment where we live. With a healthy and strong body, children can definitely achieve a bright future. I hope this article inspires you!

    If Sinaumed’s is still confused, still needs references related to the complete types of immunization, you can visit the sinaumedia book collection at sinaumedia.com .

    As #FriendsWithoutLimits, we will always provide the best and most complete information for Sinaumed’s. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

  • Get to Know the Definition and Phenomenon of Post Volcanism

    Volcanism – Indonesia is one of the countries with the most volcanoes in the world. Of the 127 active volcanoes, only 69 have been monitored with tools, especially seismic equipment which is a minimum standard and is supervised by PVMBG. The pacific ring of fire where many volcanoes are located, the mountains of Indonesia are in the region.

    Geologically, Indonesia is located between four tectonic plate collisions, which makes it overgrown with volcanoes. Volcanoes can erupt and release magma, volcanic ash and tephra. Apart from having an impact on volcanic eruptions, volcanic activity also fertilizes the soil, so that it can be used as forest areas, plantations, and tourism areas. Indonesia has three types of volcanoes, type A, B and C volcanoes.

    In addition to volcanoes on land, Indonesia also has underwater volcanoes. These underwater volcanoes are invisible to the naked eye on the surface and hidden deep beneath the sea or ocean, and can cause natural disasters. Undersea volcano research is still very rarely done.

    In history, several volcanoes in Indonesia erupted violently and caused many fatalities and even changed the lives around them. The volcano is known to be active and often erupts. In Indonesia, there are active volcanoes with an average of 100 years, 50 years and under 10 years. Mount Galunggung is an example of a volcanic eruption with an average rhythm of about once every 100 years. A volcano that erupts once every 50 years is an example of Mount Agung. While under 10 years, for example Mount Merapi, Mother, Dukono.

    One of the most active volcanoes in Indonesia is Merapi. The eruption cycle of Mount Merapi is fairly routine, occurring every 2 and 5 years. Recorded since 1548, Mount Merapi has erupted 68 times. The 2010 eruption was an explosive eruption accompanied by explosions and rumbling sounds that could be heard up to 20-30 km away.

    Within a period of 800 years, Indonesia produced three giant calderas, namely the Rinjani Volcano Caldera in 1257, the Tambora Volcano in 1815, and the Krakatau Volcano in 1883. In addition, the famous volcanic eruptions are Kelud, Galunggung, Toba , and Papandayan.

    Among others, the explosive eruption of Toba about 73 thousand years ago was larger than Tambora in 1815, and had a Volcano Exploitation Index of 8. The magnitude of this super-eruption and the widespread distribution of the Youngest Toba Tuff (YTT) in the sea core of the Indian Ocean, the The Arabian and South China Seas have sparked ongoing debates about their global and regional impacts on prehistoric climates, ecosystems and human populations.

    The following is a complete review of volcanism, see the information!

    Definition of Volcanism

    Volcanism is all events associated with the release of magma to the earth’s surface. Volcanic events are related to the formation of volcanoes, namely the movement of magma from within the lithosphere that infiltrates the upper layers or reaches the earth’s surface. Inside the lithosphere, magma occupies a pocket called a magma chamber (Batholit).

    The depth and size of the magma chamber varies greatly. There are magma chambers that are located very deep and some are close to the surface of the earth. This difference in location is the cause of the difference in the strength of the eruption that occurred. In general, deep magma chambers cause more violent eruptions than shallow ones.

    Magma can be interpreted as incandescent silicate material consisting of solid rock), liquid, and gas that is in the earth’s crust (lithosphere). Various kinds of gases contained in magma include water vapor, sulfur oxides (SO2), Hydrocarbon Gases or Hydrochloric Acid (HCL), Hydrosulfuric Gases or Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Magma activity is caused by the high temperature of the magma and the amount of gas it contains.

    There are two forms of magma movement associated with volcanism, namely magma intrusion and extrusion.

    1. Magma Intrusion

    Magma intrusion is the breakthrough of magma into the layers of the lithosphere, but does not reach the earth’s surface. Magma intrusion can be divided into five, including:

    • Batholit, namely magma chamber.
    • Flat intrusion (sill or intrusion plate), namely magma that infiltrates between two layers of rock, horizontally and parallel to the layers of rock.
    • Lakolit, namely magma that breaks through between the top layers of the earth. It looks like a convex lens or a muffin.
    • Alleys (coroks), which are rocks resulting from magma intrusion that infiltrates and freezes between the folds (coroks).
    • Diatrema is a hole (pipe) between the magma chamber and the volcanic crater which looks like an elongated cylinder.

    Formation resulting from magma intrusion is a very important mineral resource economically. Because in the intrusion area, various minerals such as diamonds, copper, iron, gold, silver and
    other metallic and non-metallic minerals are often found.

    2. Magma Extrusion

    Magma extrusion, namely the process of releasing magma from inside the earth to above to the earth’s surface. The extruded magma material can be:

    • Lava, namely magma that comes out to the surface of the earth and flows to the surface of the earth.
    • Lahar, which is a mixture of lava and materials on the surface of the earth in the form of sand, gravel, dust, etc., and water, forming mud.
    • Eflata and pyroclastics, namely solid materials in the form of bombs, lapilli, gravel, and volcanic ash.
    • Echalation (gas) is material in the form of carbonic acid gas such as fumarole (a source of water vapor and limp substances), solfatar (a source of sulfur gas), and mofet (a source of carbonic acid gas).

    Extrusion is synonymous with volcanic eruptions or eruptions which can be divided into two, namely effusive eruptions and explosive eruptions.

    1. Effusive eruptions, namely eruptions in the form of molten lava through cracks or fissures or crater holes of a volcano.
    2. Explosive eruptions, namely eruptions in the form of explosions by releasing solid materials (Eflata / Pyroclastics) in the form of bombs, lapilli, gravel, and volcanic ash together with gas and fluids.

    According to the place where magma comes out, eruptions can be divided into three, namely:

    1. Linear eruption, namely the event of magma ejection through gaps or cracks that extend, thus forming a series of volcanoes.
    2. Areal eruptions, namely eruptions that occur when magma is close to the earth’s surface, then the magma burns and melts the rock layer above it, thus forming a large hole on the earth’s surface.
    3. Central eruption, if the eruption occurs out through a hole that forms separate volcanoes.

    Central eruptions produce three forms of volcanoes, which are as follows:

    1. Shield volcanoes ( Shield Volcanoes ), which are volcanoes with wide bases and gentle slopes, are the result of effusive eruptions of molten magma. For example, the volcanoes that spread across the Hawaiian Islands.
    2. Maar volcano, is the result of an explosive eruption that is not too strong and only once. For example, Mount Lamongan, East Java, with its Klakah crater.
    3. Strato volcanoes, or cones, are the result of repeated, effusive and explosive mixtures. This volcano is conical in shape and its body is layered. As a result of eruptions that move from center to place, cones of volcanoes form here and there, so that the shape of the volcano is irregular. Most of the volcanoes in Sumatra, Java, Bali, Nusa Tenggara and Maluku are cone volcanoes. Examples of Strato Volcanoes are Mount Kerinci, Merapi, Ciremai, Semeru, Batur, Tangkuban Perahu, and Mount Fujiyama in Japan.

    Eruption Type

    After understanding the meaning of volcanism, there are also types of area. Based on the viscosity of the magma, gas pressure, depth of the magma chamber, and the material it ejects, volcanic eruptions are divided into several types, namely:

    1. Hawaiian Type Eruption

    The Hawaiian type occurs because the lava that comes out of the crater is very liquid, so it easily flows in all directions. This very fluid nature of lava results in a shape like a shield or shield. Examples: Mount Maona Loa, Maona Kea, and Kilauea in Hawaii.

    2. Stromboli Type Eruption

    This type of eruption is specific, that is, the eruptions occur at almost the same intervals or intervals. The Stromboli volcano in the Lipari Islands has an eruption period of ± 12 minutes. So, every ±12 minutes there is an eruption that spews material, bombs, lapilli, and ash. Examples of volcanoes with the Stromboli type are Mount Vesuvius (Italy) and Mount Raung (Java).

    3. Volcano Type Eruption

    This type of eruption ejects solid material, such as bombs, ash, lapilli, as well as solid and liquid materials or lava. This type of eruption is based on the strength of the eruption and the depth of the magma chamber. Example: Mount Vesuvius and Etna in Italy, and Mount Semeru in East Java.

    4. Merapi Type Eruption

    This type of eruption releases viscous lava that clogs the mouth of the crater. As a result, the gas pressure becomes increasingly strong and breaks the lava plug. The broken blockage was pushed up and finally thrown out. This material flows down the mountainside as ladu or gloedlawine . In addition, hot clouds ( gloedwolk ) or often called wedhus gembel occur Merapi-type eruptions are very dangerous for residents in the vicinity.

    5. Perret or Plinian type eruptions

    This type of eruption is very dangerous and very damaging to the environment. The material ejected in this type of eruption reaches a height of about 80 km. This type of eruption can throw a rock or break into the top of the mountain, causing the crater walls to sag. Example: Mount Krakatoa which erupted in 1883 and St. Helens which erupted on May 18, 1980.

    6. Pelee Type Eruption

    This type of eruption usually occurs when there is a blockage of the crater at the top of the volcano which is shaped like a needle, causing the gas pressure to increase. If the crater blockage is not strong, the volcano erupts.

    7. Sint Vincent Type Eruption

    This type of eruption causes the crater lake water to spill over with the lava. This eruption caused the area around the mountain to be hit by hot lava which was very dangerous. Example: Mount Kelud which erupted in 1919 and Mount Sint Vincent which erupted in 1902.

    Other Phenomena After Volcanism

    Apart from volcanoes resulting from magma extrusion activity, there are several other natural phenomena that are formed from advanced or post-volcanism processes. These features include calderas, caldera lakes, lava plateaus, geysers, and mud pools.

    1. Lava Plugs

    The first post-volcanism phenomenon was the Lava Plug. This feature occurs when the solidified lava in a volcanic pipe collapses into a resistant mass.

    Over time, the part of the volcanic cone composed of less resistant material weathered and eroded away, leaving only a plug of lava. The size of this lava plug can be very large to resemble a hill. One example is the Devil’s Tower in Wyoming, USA.

    2. Caldera and Caldera Lake

    A caldera is a large depression at the top of a mountain. This appearance occurred due to a very powerful eruption and left a large hole. If this hole is then filled with water it will form a caldera lake.

    3. Plato Lava

    This appearance occurs because the magma that comes out is runny, so it can spread and form a wide expanse of lava and over time this lava slowly freezes to form a plateau called a plateau.

    4. Geysers and Hot Springs

    In volcanic areas, groundwater can be heated by magma. This heated water can appear to the surface with explosive force, this is what is called a geyser. If this water comes out through the flow of water in the rock crevices, hot springs are formed. Geysers are hot water that emits periodically.

     

    Positive and Negative Impacts of Volcanoes

    The existence of volcanoes in an area, in addition to causing negative impacts in the form of disasters, such as eruptions, toxic gases and landslides which always threaten the surrounding population, in fact can also bring positive impacts in the form of enormous benefits for life, including the following:

    1. Positive Impact

    Volcanoes form a giant cone which affects the weather conditions and the surrounding climate, thus making the soil very fertile due to the rocks and minerals that make up the soil composition which is needed by plants. In addition, water is the source of life for all living things on the surface of the earth. When water seeps and flows into the ground in contact with a heat source from magma, a hot spring will form, while in the lower part of the ground it is an ordinary spring.

    With lots of springs around the volcano and thick forests and other vegetation, it will form a cool and beneficial environment for the people who live around it. Forming plantations and rice fields, will add to the beautiful scenery and fresh air around it.

    The existence of a volcano will produce natural forests, thus producing abundant forest products, and with all its contents in the form of living things as a resource for flora and fauna, as well as minerals that form the volcano.

    The positive impacts of volcanoes can be broken down as follows:

    • As an energy source, because the heat source from volcanoes can be used as Geothermal Power Plants (PLTPB) such as those on Mount Kamojang in West Java and Mount Dieng in Central Java.
    • As a source of minerals and minerals, such as diamonds, tin, copper, sulfur and pumice.
    • As a tourist and sports object, for example hiking, climbing, hang gliding, and mountain biking.
    • As a fertile agricultural area, this is because the material released by the volcano contains many elements and minerals that can make the surrounding soil fertile and experience rejuvenation.
    • As an orographic rain area, namely rain that occurs because of a barrier in the form of a mountain or mountains, so that the volcanic area is a place that has a hydrological function for the surrounding area.
    • As a source of germplasm, because the vertical variation in the height of a volcano can cause living germplasm to vary greatly as well.

    2. Negative Impact

    In addition to having a positive effect, volcanic eruptions can also have a negative impact on life and the environment. Thousands of people died and several livestock died and thousands of hectares of gardens and rice fields were destroyed by volcanic eruptions. Disasters and the danger of volcanic eruptions affect directly and indirectly and can damage life.

    The direct hazard is the hazard caused by the material released directly by the volcano. The disaster-prone areas that will be hit by this direct influence include the area around the peak (inside the crater) and develop into other areas around the crater, with a range that can reach more than 10 km.

    If a crater filled with water forms a crater lake and the water is neutral with an acidity of 7 or is acidic with an acidity of less than 7 and mixed with river water, river water cannot be used for irrigation purposes, livestock drinks, especially for humans to drink. because it can damage the teeth of the residents.

    This is due to the consumption of water containing very high fluorine (F) and a lack of iodine will result in goiter, while the ejection of volcanic ash during an eruption also threatens flight safety because the eruption ash disturbs the vision of the aircraft. The spread of this volcanic eruption will be very wide from a few meters to hundreds of kilometers.

    Well, that’s an explanation of volcanism. The following is a recommendation of books from sinaumedia that Sinaumed’s can read to learn about volcanism so they can fully understand it. Happy reading.

    Find other interesting things at www.sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

    • 5 Causes of Water Pollution, Prevent and Make the Water Environment Better!
    • Benefits of Saving Energy for the Environment, Economy, and Health
    • Geographical Research: Research Methods and Steps
    • Definition of Reforestation: Benefits and Preparation for the Reforestation Movement
    • River Flow Patterns: Definition, Types, and the Formation Process
  • Get to know the Complete Yogyakarta Regional Songs with the Lyrics and Their Meanings

    Yogyakarta Regional Song – Hello Sinaumed’s friends. Do you know? Indonesia is a country rich in diversity. Starting from the tribe, culture, flora, fauna and others. Even though there are many differences in Indonesia, because of that, Indonesian people can unite and respect each other. One of the cultures that has a lot of diversity is folk songs.

    Each region has its own variety of regional songs. Just as in Yogyakarta there are several folk songs, the existence of regional songs in Yogyakarta can also be used as an identity. This article will discuss Yogyakarta regional songs and their meanings.

    Yogyakarta Regional Song

    Have you ever heard a song called Caping Gunung, Suwe Ora Jamu or Kidang Talun? If not, the following titles are some of the most popular Yogyakarta Regional Song lists. In this article, sinaumedia will explain it one by one for you.

    The Special Region of Yogyakarta is a province on the island of Java with Yogyakarta as its capital. You can visit this city by Yogyakarta Tours. This province is a fusion of the Sultanate of Yogyakarta and the Kingdom of Paku Alamein.

    It has jurisdiction over 4 districts, with a total area of ​​approximately 3,185.80 square kilometers and a population of approximately 3,842,952 people (2019). The ethnic groups in this province are mainly Javanese, and the rest are Sundanese, Malay, Chinese, Madurese and so on.

    In terms of belief, all religions recognized by Indonesia are also present in this province, even though 90% of these religions are Muslim. In terms of tourism and cultural destinations, Yogyakarta is without a doubt one of the most visited provinces every year.

    I will not discuss them one by one because in this article, sinaumedia will only review a collection of Yogyakarta songs along with their lyrics, meanings and understanding of folk songs and their functions. Okay, see the review below, hopefully it can add to your knowledge and understanding.

    1. The song Suwe Ora Jamu

    Lyrics:

    Suwe no jamu,

    Jamu godhong telo,

    Suwe can’t find

    Meet very atine gelo…

    Suwe no jamu,

    Jamu sogo thunteng,

    Suwe can’t find

    Very happy meeting…

    Suwe no jamu,

    Jamu godhong bunder,

    Suwe can’t find

    Meet really smarter…

    The first meaning is happiness, where distant friends are finally reunited. The second meaning is disappointment, because there are people who become arrogant because they are smart/rich.

    2. Song of Kidang Talun

    Lyrics:

    Kidang … Talun,

    Mung bean,

    Mile kethemil mile kethemil,

    The deer is manganese..

    Mice… pithi,

    Siji’s two sons,

    tweet tweet,

    tweet tweet,

    Forward the war of the dead…

    Kidang… Talun,

    Mung bean,

    Mile kethemil mile kethemil,

    The mauve deer…

    Elephants… striped,

    Soko mlembang land,

    Nuk legunuk, nuk legunuk,

    Gedhene meh podho gunung…

    The song tells about the advice of parents to their children to always love the animals around them, especially those that are already rare like deer and elephants which are hinted at in the lyrics. In addition, they are also introduced to the types of animals.

    3. The song “Pitik Tukung”

    Lyrics:

    I’m two pitik pitik tukung,

    Every day I don’t eat corn,

    Petok go petok petok nendok pitu…

    Don’t make netes telu,

    Kabeh trondol trondol tapa wulu,

    Mondol mondol do work guys…

    I’m a little pithik wulune Brintik,

    The yellow shoot of the Jegger Abang Fight must win,

    Sopo Wani Karo I’m the enemy of my pithik…

    This traditional DI Yogyakarta song was later named Pitik Tukung which is a very popular song among children. The song has deep advice for generations to be able to act and act wisely.

    On the other hand, the song also tells about the beauty and beauty of the village of Yogyakarta. Then describe a leader who must be able to act honestly and intelligently, despite his flaws.

    4. Song “Caping Gunung”

    Lyrics:

    Dhek is struggling,

    Njur little boy,

    Mbiyen not open

    Ning saiki ana ngendi…

    Jarena will win

    The longed-for succession,

    Mbiyen left his promise,

    What’s wrong with Ning now…

    Ning the mountain doesn’t eat corn,

    Yen is cloudy without successive mountain hats,

    Sokur can live,

    mount ndesa dadi reja,

    Dene don’t miss nggone padha lara lapa…

    The fourth song is titled “Caping Gunung”, created by Gesang. This song has a deep and painful meaning about a father who lost his child abroad and has no news after a long time of separation.

    This song describes the emotional feelings of a mother who misses her child coming back from abroad. A deep desire often makes mothers daydream, preparing corn rice to welcome their child back.

    5. Song “Sinom”

    Lyrics:

    Amening the crazy times,

    Ewuh aja ing pambudi,

    Melu is crazy can’t stand it,

    Jen tan melu anglakoni…

    Boya kaduman melik kaliren,

    Wekasanipun dilalah karsa Allah,

    Begjane kang lali,

    Luwih begja kang engling lan alert…

    In Javanese, Sinom (Sinoman) is a group of young people. As the title suggests, this song is very spicy about the lives of children who are entering their teens/puberty, in the sense that they are looking for identity.

    So this song describes advice for all young people to be able to take care of themselves, behave and be more mature in facing life’s journey. In fact, you have to be wise in weighing something.

    6. The song “Gethuk”

    Lyrics:

    Afternoon padhang month, come on kanca padha dolanan,

    Rene-rene together, together, e dha gegojegan,

    Kae-kae rembulane, you can’t see why you’re acting so cute,

    It’s like they like it, all of them just go to sleep in the afternoon…

    Gethuk, asale saka tela,

    Sleepy eyes, iku tambane what,

    Ah ala gethuk, asale saka tela,

    yèn ra pethuk, atine is a bit dark…

    Don’t talk about it, bro, don’t talk about it,

    Kadhung I promise,

    I’m how dark

    Gek Kepriye…

    Duh, I feel like this,

    Anake wong or duwe,

    Disgusting, tansah diece,

    Karo kanca kancane…

    Pye pye pye pye ya ben rasakna,

    Pye pye pye pye feel dewe,

    Pye pye pye pye ya ben rasakna,

    Pye pye pye pye feel dewe…

    Tomorrow when I can

    Urip kang luwih mulya,

    Melu honors the nation’s Drajat,

    Indonesia bro…

    Pye pye pye pye mbuh ra weruh,

    Pye pye pye pye mbuh ra understand,

    Pye pye pye pye mbuh ra weruh,

    Pye pye pye pye mbuh ra understand…

    “Gethuk” is often heard as an accompaniment in several regional performances, and was also popularized by Waldjinah, a keroncong singer in Solo, Central Java. Waldjinah is a 75-year-old keroncong singer who is nicknamed the Queen of Keroncong. He has won various singing competitions in several shows.

    The song “Gethuk” was composed by the late Manthous, a legendary campursari artist. The lyrics of the song “Gethuk” come from the word “gethuk”, a Yogyakarta specialty. Gethuk itself is made from mashed tapioca and has a unique taste.

    7. The song “Walang Kekek”

    Lyrics:

    E… yes ye…, yes ye… yes

    E ya… yae yai, e yaiyo yaiyo

    Manuk sriti kemplung banyu

    I dreamed that the clouds would meet

    Walang Abang clicked on Koro

    Blue walang.. white walange

    You’re a bachelor, man, don’t be lazy

    Sing wis duwe putu, ra tau mulih

    E… yes ye…, yes ye… yes

    E ya… yae yai, e yaiyo yaiyo

    You can’t mince, bro, you can’t flute

    Biso Nyang, ora Biso nyanding

    Walang ireng, mabur bastard

    Walang ireng, dowo suthange

    Yen podo is happy, bro, ojo may just stagnate

    Golek ono ngendi omahe

    E… yes ye…, yes ye… yes

    E ya… yae yai, e yaiyo yaiyo

    You can’t mince, bro, you can’t just ndemung

    Biso hung, ora wani nembung

    Walang snickers, walange wood

    Walang kayu, tibo neng is weak

    Yen want yo mas, arep melu

    Yen is just a trimo, don’t try to have fun

    E… yes ye…, yes ye… yes

    E ya… yae yai, e yaiyo yaiyo

    Andeng-andeng, ono choices

    Ojo stares, looks confused

    Walang snickers are striking

    Mabrur mrene, tick wit pete

    Sumengkemo mring God

    Nindakake dawuh-dwuhe

    E… yes ye…, yes ye… yes

    E ya… yae yai, e yaiyo yaiyo

    Walang snickers pinched the rope

    Limang time ojo change lali

    E… yes ye…, yes ye… yes

    E ya… yae yai, e yaiyo yaiyo

    Walang snickers, walange overdone

    Walang kekek until finished

    Genggong Cricket

    Kendal Kaline Wungu, teach me to get to know you

    Lelene was beaten to death, slapped in the face of walesane

    Suwe doesn’t care, his heart is crushed, he is desperate for suwarane

    e yes e yes e..e yae yae yae yae

    Barking crickets, barking crickets, luwih babbling nonsense

    Semarang kaline is flooded, so sumelang, I think

    Cricket upa saba ning heap, malumpat ning in the middle of jogan

    Priya’s character, he admits that he is loyal, presses him in the wrong way

    e yes e yes e..e yae yae yae yae

    Ganggong crickets, ganggong crickets, wani glances at the lonely nunwong

    Yèn ngetan bali ngulon, tiwas crazy no joke,

    Yèn nrujak nrujaka pineapple, just add kwèni,

    Kene died thinking, you are adhem hot,

    jebul ana sing nduweni…

    e yes e yes e..e yae yae yae yae

    Ganggong crickets, Ganggong crickets, Sampun pretty much the prey of wholesalers.

    The next Yogyakarta regional song is entitled Walang Kekek, this very legendary song created and popularized by Waldjinah. The theme of this song is to express the feelings of female singers who are often referred to as artists.

    Through this song, Waldjinah intends to change the public’s view of singers so they don’t look down on them. Apart from devoting himself to many people, the job of a singer is not easy.

    8. The song “Ta Kate Dipanah”

    Lyrics:

    Te kate arrow,

    Arched by reeds,

    Ana manuk konde-onde,

    Mbok sirbombok, mbok sirkate,

    Mbok sirbombok mbok sirkate…

    The next Yogyakarta regional song is titled Te Kate Dipanah. This song is very familiar to children and until now it is often sung at gatherings or games in everyday life. Its popularity cannot be separated from the meaning contained in this song.

    The song Te Kate Dipanah tells about teachings and advice for children, always instilling positive values ​​and good morals in them, to become useful people in the future, environment, religion and country.

    9. The song “Kupu Kui”

    Lyrics:

    The butterfly is not choking (incupe),

    Mung abure ngewuhake,

    sleepy,

    Ngetan back ngelan…

    Mrana mrene ing paran breakfast,

    Mencok bleber blubber (Who can use it),

    Mentas poked a fist,

    Banjur (nuli) mabur bleber…

    The next title is named Butterfly Kui, this Yogyakarta children’s game is also very popular and phenomenal. The author takes the subject of a butterfly because it has beautiful wings and can fly wherever it wants.

    Therefore, for humans, everyone has special abilities within, but not everyone can realize it. Even though these benefits can make a person have a better life.

    10. The song “Jamuran” 

    Lyrics:

    Mushroom, mushroom, yo ge ge thok

    What mushrooms, what mushrooms, yo ge ge thok

    Toadstool ngrembuyung like mauve

    Sira badhe what mushroom?

    Not much different from Cublak-Cublak Suweng, Mushroom is also a song sung in the game called Mushroom. This game can be played by 4 to 12 children which is usually played in the afternoon or at night during the full moon.

    The game Mushroom can be played by both boys and girls, generally between the ages of 6 and 13. This game also does not require tools, only a large field.

    11. The song “Menthok-Menthok”

    Lyrics:

    Menthok, menthok tak kandhani,

    Maybe your behavior is windy,

    Mbok ya wrote knocking ana kandhang wae…

    It’s good to snore or not to do work,

    Menthok, menthok is just your behavior,

    Megal megol gawe guy…

    Javanese singing is a cultural treasure of ancestral heritage, which has meaning and wealth values ​​that are passed on to the descendants of the Javanese people, one of which is a Javanese song called Menthok-Menthok, some write it MENTOK-MENTOK or MENTOG-MENTOG or MENTHOG-MENTHOG.

    This Javanese Agung song has a very subtle irony, like the character of Javanese elders who advocate the use of wise language that is not painful but touches the heart. Mentok-mentok ironic phrase of this song is intended for those who are lazy and just sleeping, and gives advice that humans must be productive, creative and must work hard.

    Menthok-menthok songs are usually sung in Javanese children’s games by forming a circle while walking like mint, with the right hand in front and the left hand on the hip while walking.

    These games are fun entertainment especially for kids, making us look forward to watching. This game also trains children in their ability to cooperate and get along with their peers.

    Definition of Regional Songs

    Furthermore, according to Ali (2010: 75) , regional songs, or regional songs as they are commonly called, are songs from an area that will be favored by the community and other people in that area. In general, the creators of these regional songs are not known, alias noname .

    Regional songs are songs whose creative ideas are based on the culture and customs of certain regions. The song contains meaning, a message to the community and the atmosphere or situation of the local community, the language used is the regional language, Arts Subject Teacher Consultation (2010:11).

    Then Setyobudi et al (2007:47) said that although there are some special songs whose rules are fixed and have magical powers for religious traditions and ceremonies, most of the folk songs are used as a means of public entertainment and are close to civil society. Therefore, folk songs are also often called folk songs.

    Regional Song Function

    After knowing examples of regional songs from Maluku, the next step is to find out what functions they have. As a cultural product, it generally has several functions.

    Accompaniment of traditional ceremonies 

    Traditional ceremonies and traditional music are always related. In Indonesia, this can be seen in many local cultures in Indonesia. Traditional rituals use musical accompaniment to convey a sense of harmony and sympathy with nature. Usually this is done to celebrate certain rituals or festivals.

    accompaniment  

    In addition to traditional ceremonies, traditional music is also used to accompany performances. Each region must have traditional dances and a clear connection with music. The most interesting thing is that each word in traditional music has its own meaning. The philosophy of each lyric is also often incorporated into certain performances, such as dances.

    Media playing music 

    In addition to sacred activities, cultural products in the form of folk songs can also be used as a means of playing music. A very popular example is the song Rasa Sayang-Sayange from eastern Indonesia, namely Maluku. The song is often used as a background to play when playing music.

    Communication tool 

    In the past, folk songs were often used as a means of communication. The lyrics contain a certain meaning that is passed on to the next generation. Regarding the meaning of folk songs, it is not surprising that many experts also believe that this cultural product is used as a messenger.

    News Media 

    The purpose of the media is to convey certain messages, be it messages in the context of religion or humanity. An example is Lir-Ilir which is used as a means of preaching.

  • Get to know the complete drama structure with its characteristics and types

    Drama Structure – Drama is one of the oldest literary works and has survived to this day.
    While other literary works are becoming extinct, dramas are still being staged in many countries
    around the world.
    In various senses, drama is a literary work that describes human life in
    their daily life.

    Discussing drama is incomplete if we don’t discuss its history. Actually there are several
    opinions about when and where drama was first invented.
    The first opinion states that drama was
    first discovered and staged in the era of Ancient Egyptian civilization around 4000 BC.

    The second opinion, as well as the strongest opinion, states that drama first appeared in the era of
    Ancient Greek civilization around 5 BC.
    Back then, the Ancient Greeks sang verses in praise of
    the gods at Greek festivals.
    Gradually, these poems and songs then turned into performances
    that performed plays with various characters.

    Since then, drama shows have become popular and have been staged everywhere. Initially, drama
    was just a way for people to worship the gods they worshiped.
    Over time, drama has become a
    favorite form of entertainment that is always eagerly awaited.

    Besides being increasingly popular, drama has also experienced many developments. If in the
    past the story was only limited to the worship of gods, now the stories that are staged are becoming
    increasingly diverse.
    Check out the explanation about the drama structure below!

    Dramatic Structure

    Drama structure is very important in a performance. The structure of the drama itself consists
    of certain aspects.

    1. Prologue

    If a book has a preface, a play has a prologue. The structure of the drama prologue is at the
    beginning of the play, and briefly describes the story in the play.
    In addition to a brief
    story about the drama that will be played, the prologue also provides an overview of the characters,
    setting, and several other aspects.

    2. Dialogue

    The next drama structure is dialogue. A drama won’t be drama if it doesn’t have dialogue.
    You could say dialogue is everything in a performance, not just drama but literary and artistic
    performances.

    In drama, the existence of dialogue becomes even more important because with dialogue, the characters can
    describe the story in the drama, starting from the prologue, problems, conflicts, to the epilogue.
    The dialogue will also introduce us to the various characters in the drama, complete with their
    respective characters.

    The dialogue itself is broken down into several parts, namely an introduction that introduces the
    characters, situations, and events that were happening at that time.
    Complications that tell
    about the conflicts that arise between the characters in the drama.
    Lastly is the resolution,
    or the solution to the conflict that appears as well as being the end of a show.

    3. Episodes

    Episodes are identical to soap operas that air on television. Actually, it’s not just soap
    operas that have episodes, dramas too.
    Basically, episodes are part of a drama’s script or
    script, and are aired sequentially.

    Even so, the drama episodes are not as long as the episodes we usually see in Indonesian soap operas.
    Usually dramas only consist of a few episodes, and the number doesn’t reach dozens, let alone
    thousands.

    4. Scene

    Even though the episodes are not as long as soap operas, a drama, no matter how short it is, must consist
    of many scenes.
    The scene itself is a change of events in a play.

    Usually marked by changes in settings and screens, as well as the players. The changes were
    deliberately made so that the drama performance would be interesting and not bore the audience present.
    A drama starts from the prologue scene, then goes into the core story and ends at the
    epilogue.

    5. Epilogue

    If the prologue is the introduction, then the epilogue is the closing word in a play. Given
    its function, the epilogue is placed at the end of a story.
    The epilogue itself contains the
    ending story in a play and the conclusion of the story in the play itself.

    Although it doesn’t seem important at first glance, the epilogue is actually very important.
    After all, every story needs an ending and the audience also needs an explanation. The
    ending of the story usually determines whether the drama is good enough or not.

    There are dramas that have a good plot but a disappointing epilogue. Conversely, many dramas
    that may feel confusing at the beginning, but the plot gets better, then ends very well and makes the
    audience feel satisfied.

    4 Characteristics of Drama You Need to Know

    By knowing the structure of drama, we also need to understand that there are many kinds of literary works,
    and sometimes they are similar to one another.
    In order for you to be able to tell which is a
    drama and which is another literary work, you must know their characteristics.

    Here are 4 characteristics of drama that you need to know!

    1. Having Dialogue

    At the beginning of its appearance, drama was the chanting of verses sung to worship the gods of the
    Ancient Greeks.
    Over time, people started replying to each other’s verses until it finally
    turned into a complete storytelling with different plays and characters.
    This story then
    attracted a lot of interest, and finally it was shown to the public.

    In the past, people flocked to the theater to watch plays. Currently, drama performances can
    not only be watched on the theater stage, but also watched on television screens and won millions of viewers
    from various countries.

    2. Have a Moral Message Conveyed

    One of the main characteristics of a drama is the dialogue between the players. These
    dialogues then form a story.
    It’s not arbitrary, a dialogue writer not only has to make a story
    that is interesting and worthy of being staged, but also has a moral message to be conveyed to the thousands
    of people who watch it.

    This moral message is usually inserted between dialogues or becomes a conclusion that can be drawn by the
    audience.
    In addition to dialogue writers, drama actors must also be able to convey a moral
    message to the audience through the acting they display.
    If it’s only acting, then the story of
    the drama will only be interesting but doesn’t have any lessons that can be taken by the audience.

    3. Presenting Conflict

    Not only giving a moral message, a good drama must also have conflict. Conflict is very
    important to make drama look interesting and not boring.
    The more complicated the conflict that
    arises, the better the drama.
    On the other hand, the conflict must also be clear.

    Apart from being a playwright, the actors also have an important task of conveying the conflict to the
    audience.
    To do so, the players must not only be good at acting, but also understand the script
    so they can master the roles entrusted to them.

    4. Language style

    Finally, there is a style of language that is no less important than other characteristics.
    Language style can also be a way to show a period, social class in roles, to conditions.
    For example, a drama about a kingdom in the past. The players definitely have a
    different style of language.
    Players who play the role of the king certainly have a different
    language style from ordinary people.

    Elements in a Drama

    In addition to characteristics, drama also has several elements that cannot be changed. What
    elements?
    Here are the answers and full explanations!

    1. Theme

    The theme becomes the first element in making a drama story. A drama must have a clear theme.
    With a definite theme, we at least have a clear picture of the storyline, how many characters are
    playing, what is the character of each character, to the background of the story in the drama.

    From all of the above, in the end the production team can estimate how much it will cost and the creative team
    can imagine what kind of decoration to make for each scene, plus the costumes that must be used by the
    characters.

    2. Storyline

    After determining the theme, we can create a storyline in the play. Starting from the initial
    story, the conflict, until the end story.
    The story line is very important because it
    determines how interesting the play will be.

    Apart from quality, the storyline will also determine the drama’s popularity. If the storyline
    is boring, the audience will also get bored, even going home while the show is still going on and never
    coming back.
    However, an interesting storyline will not attract more people to watch, but also
    make other people fail to move on, and come back to watch it.
    In fact, it’s so good, it’s not
    uncommon for someone to watch a drama many times.

    3. Figures

    A drama will not run without characters in it. The name of a drama, usually played by many
    characters.
    Whether it’s the main character, or a minor character who only appears
    intermittently.

    In the past, drama characters were chosen just like that. Now, the players have to go through
    a number of castings to be able to act as a character.
    In addition to an appropriate
    appearance, drama actors must also have good acting skills so that the drama performance looks more
    convincing and the moral message that the story writer wants to convey is conveyed to the audience.

    4. Character

    In a drama, each character certainly has a different character or behavior. Imagine if all the
    characters in the drama you are watching have the same or almost similar characters, it is guaranteed that
    the drama will run very boring.

    A drama usually consists of two characters, namely the protagonist alias good behavior as well as antagonist or
    bad behavior and makes the audience annoyed and even angry with him.

    5. Background

    Besides having a clear theme, plot, characters, and characters, a good drama also has a clear background.
    If the actors and actresses have to portray the characters well, then the setting will be the job
    of the creative team.

    It is the people on the creative team who have to think about what kind of setting is appropriate to
    describe the situation, time and conditions in each scene.
    The appropriate setting will make
    the plot of the drama even more interesting.

    6. Conveyed Messages

    As previously discussed, a drama must not only have an interesting story and plot, but also a moral message
    to convey.
    Without a moral message, a drama will only be interesting but does not teach
    anything.

    Usually, a moral message is inserted in the dialogue of the players. It can also be mentioned
    at the end of the story.

    Types of Drama You Need to Know

    So far, most of us only know about romance genre dramas. Indeed, compared to a certain type or
    gender, romance dramas are indeed interesting.
    But besides that, drama is also divided into
    several types.
    Anything?

    1. Tragedy

    From the name alone, you can probably guess how sad this drama is. Yup, dramas with this type
    of tragedy usually have sad or heartbreaking storylines.
    Even if the plot is not sad, this type
    of drama usually has a tragic ending that will make you feel sad for days because of the story of the main
    character who is so unlucky.

    2. Opera

    Those of you who like singing or music might really like this type of drama. Opera is a type
    of drama in which the dialogue is replaced by singing and musical accompaniment.

    In a way, this opera is the type of drama that is most similar to the drama at the beginning of its
    appearance.
    In Indonesia, opera is less popular. But abroad, opera-type dramas
    still have many fans.

    3. Comedy

    If tragedy has a sad plot, then comedy is just the opposite. You know, if anything related to
    comedy is very funny.

    In contrast to tragedy dramas, comedy genre dramas are actually very fun to watch and really keep you
    entertained.
    This one drama made the audience laugh out loud throughout its performance.

    4. Tragecomedy

    “ Laughing at the suffering of others ” might be the right sentence to describe the situation in a
    tragicomedy drama.
    For those of you who are confused, tragicomedy is a type of drama that
    combines tragedy and comedy.

    So, the storyline of this type of drama is actually quite tragic, but instead of bringing it with sadness,
    the actors actually act very witty.
    The story is sad, but instead of crying, you’ll be laughing
    the whole way through.

    5. Melodrama

    Melodrama is actually very similar to opera. The difference is, if dialogue operas are
    performed with singing and musical accompaniment, melodramas still use ordinary dialogue.

    However, as the name implies, so that the audience can feel the story more deeply, this dialogue is
    accompanied by music.
    Usually melodramas have sad storylines, almost as sad as tragedy
    dramas.

    6. Tableau

    Okay, among all the types of drama that have been mentioned, tableau is probably the most foreign type of
    drama to all of us.
    In fact, this type of drama is rarely staged, even in European or American
    countries.
    Tableau is also very different from other types of drama. Where’s the
    difference?

    You see, if opera is performed with singing, and melodrama is performed with musical accompaniment, at
    least the two types of drama still have dialogue.
    Tableau? This type of drama
    actually has no dialogue at all.

    Now, because it does not have dialogue, tableau dramas only rely on movements or what is known as
    pantomime.
    Usually, tableau dramas have a funny and entertaining storyline.

    7. Farces

    Apart from tableau, farce is also quite foreign to Indonesian ears. Understandably, in our
    country, the popular dramas are tragedies, comedies, and a combination of the two.

    For those of you who don’t know, ferce is a type of drama where the characters act funny and make the audience
    laugh.

    At first glance, bringing a drama performance looks easy. But what we see, will not always be
    the same as the reality.
    What you see is easy, not necessarily easy for others.

    So even with a drama show. Behind a cool show, there is a lot of effort that is done.
    Starting from the writers who try to make an interesting story, the creative team who makes the
    setting according to the story, and the actors who practice to master their roles.
    All of that
    requires hard work, right?

    For Sinaumed’s who want to learn about the structure of drama and all things drama, you can
    visit
    sinaumedia.com so you have #MoreWithReading information.

  • Get to Know the Companions of the Prophet Muhammad Who Can Be Used as Role Models!

    Companions of the Prophet Muhammad SAW – Prophet Muhammad SAW is a human figure who is
    most loved by all his people, but not only among his people, his family and friends also love him very much.
    As a friend who lived at the same time as the prophet and spent his days with the prophet, of
    course, the nature and character of a friend of the prophet is not much different from the noble character
    of the prophet himself.

    Imitating the figures of the companions of the prophet must be very good because they are also known to have good
    and exemplary role models for the next generation, especially Muslims around the world.

    The figures of the companions of the prophet who may be widely known are the first four caliphs who led
    after the Prophet Muhammad died.
    However, in fact there are many more figures of the Prophet’s
    companions who may not be as popular as the first four caliphs.
    Even so, their personality and
    morals can still be used as good examples for generations of Muslims in the present and the future.

    For this reason, Sinaumed’s friends who want to know who are the companions of the prophet who deserve to be role
    models in living this life, in this discussion we have summarized various information related to the figures of
    the companions of the prophet Muhammad SAW so that they can also have a positive impact and inspire humanity
    throughout the world in do good.

    You can see further discussion regarding the companions of the prophet Muhammad SAW below!

    Get to know the figure of the Companion of the
    Prophet Muhammad

    Companions of the Prophet (Arabic:احبل النبي, transl. aṣḥāb al-nabī) is an Islamic idiom for those who knew and
    saw the Prophet Muhammad in person, helped him in his battles and died as a Muslim.

    Terminologically, the word ṣahabat (صحابة) is the plural of ṣahabi (صحابي), which means following,
    accompanying, and direct interaction.
    The most important companions had a very close
    relationship with Muhammad, for they were his assistants and students and followers.

    The Companions of the Prophet hold a very important role in the Islamic world today, namely as a bridge in
    passing down the Hadith and Sunnah of Muhammad which were narrated by them.
    Most scholars
    generally define the Companions of the Prophet as those who knew the Prophet Muhammad, believed in his
    teachings and died in a state of Islam.

    In his book al-Iṣābah fī Tamyīz al-Ṣaḥābah, Ibn Hajar al-Asqalani (d. 852 H/1449 AD) says:

    “A Companion (صحابي, ash-shahabi) is one who meets the Prophet, believes in him and dies in a state of Islam.”

    There is a stricter definition whereby only close relatives of the Prophet Muhammad are worthy of being
    called Companions of the Prophet.
    In the book “Muqaddimah” by Ibn ash-Salah (died 643 H/1245
    AD)

    It was said to Anas: You are the Messenger of Allah’s Apostle and the last living. Anas
    replied, “The Arabs (Bedouin) are still there, while his friend, I am the last person alive.”

    In line with that, the scholar Tabi’in Said bin al-Musayyab (d. 94 H/715 AD) argued:

    “The Companions of the Prophet were those who stayed with the Prophet for at least a year and participated in
    several wars with him.”

    Although Imam an-Nawawi (died 676 H/1277 AD) also stated that:

    “Some scholars of hadith believe that this honor (as a friend of the Prophet) is limited to those who lived
    with him (the Prophet Muhammad) for a long time, donated (property for his cause) and those who (to Medina)
    and emigrants actively helped him;
    and not those whom he met only occasionally, for example the
    Arab Bedouin envoys, and not those who were with him after the liberation of Mecca when Islam was
    introduced.”

    The Companions of the Prophet Muhammad Who
    Are Guaranteed to Enter Heaven

    The names of the Prophet’s companions are based on the hadith narrated by the Prophet Muhammad from Abdurrahman
    bin Auf.

    Allah promised heaven to the Prophet’s companions because of the many special deeds he did during his life
    on earth.
    Here are 10 names of the apostle’s friends who are guaranteed to go to heaven.

    • Abu Bakr As-Siddiq

    The first Companion of the Apostle who is guaranteed to enter Heaven is Abu Bakr Ash-Shiddiq.
    Abu Bakar Ash-Shiddiq was one of the Assabiqunal Awwalun or the first people to convert to
    Islam.

    He always followed the Prophet in preaching Islam and emigration. After the death of the
    Prophet Muhammad, Abu Bakr continued to rule in Medina from 632-634 AD.

    • Umar bin Khattab

    The closest companion of the Prophet who was promised Heaven by Allah was Umar bin Khattab.
    Umar bin Khattab was the Rashidun Khulafaur and the most influential Muslim figure.

    Umar was appointed as the second caliph after Abu Bakr who continued to build the spread of Islam so that it grew
    rapidly throughout the country.

    The figure of Umar bin Khattab is also known by his title, namely Al-Faruq, which means the difference
    between right and wrong.
    Umar was not only a close friend of the Prophet, but also the father
    of Hafsha, the wife of the Prophet Muhammad.

    • Uthman bin Affan

    Uthman bin Affan is one of the companions of the Prophet Muhammad who is guaranteed to enter heaven.
    He continued to lead after the death of Umar bin Khattab.

    Uthman was a very wealthy merchant in Mecca during his lifetime, but generous when he gave most of his wealth to
    zakat, alms and infaq.

    Under Uthman’s leadership, Islam saw a great development and expansion of Islam and built a lot of
    infrastructure.

    • Ali bin Abi Talib

    Ali bin Abi Talib was the second person after Khadijah to embrace Islam, making him one of the Companions of the
    Prophet who was guaranteed to enter Heaven.

    Ali studied Islam from childhood, directly from the Prophet. Except that his loyalty to Islam
    was shown by his participation in the war which was then carried out to defend Islam.

    • Talha bin Ubaidillah

    Talhah bin Ubaidillah was a friend of the Prophet Muhammad who fought with the Prophet Muhammad, who at
    that time was already in a state of urgency.
    He was later killed in the Battle of Uhud and
    martyred.

    • Zubair bin Awwam

    Zubair bin Awwam is a friend who is also the cousin of the Prophet Muhammad SAW. He was among
    the first to convert to Islam or as-Sabiqun al-Awwalun, who is guaranteed to enter heaven.

    • Abdurrahman bin Auf

    Abdurrahman bin Auf is a friend of the Prophet Muhammad who is good at business. Throughout
    his life he struggled with wealth and his life in the way of Allah SWT.

    • Sa’ad bin Abi Waqqash

    Sa’ad bin Abi Waqqash was a friend who always participated in the war with the Quraysh. He
    even managed to become a military leader against Iran.
    In addition, Sa’ad is also a friend who
    converted to Islam at the young age of 17 years.

    • Sa’id bin Zaid bin Amru bin Naufal Al-Adawi

    Sa’in bin Zaid bin Amru bin Naufal Al-Adawi was a friend of the Prophet who was also a cousin of another
    Rashidun Khulafauri, Umar bin Khattab.
    He never fought except the Badr war because he was
    ordered by Rasulullah SAW at that time.

    • Abu Ubaidillah bin Jarrah

    Abu Ubaidillah bin Jarrah was a companion of Prophet Muhammad SAW who had served as a military commander
    against the Roman Empire.
    He is a Muhajirin from the Meccan Quraysh tribe who had emigrated
    with the Prophet SAW

    The Story of the Companions of the Prophet
    Muhammad Who Should Be a Role Model

    • Abu Bakr Ash-Shiddiq, the first companion
      of the Prophet

    The first story of a friend of the Prophet Muhammad who is guaranteed to enter Heaven is Abu Bakr
    Ash-Shiddiq.
    He is one of Assabiqunal Awwalun, ie. the first to convert to Islam.
    Friends who always follow the preaching of the Prophet and spread Islam.

    Abu Bakr was known as a gentle, patient and generous person who freed 70 slaves. The Prophet
    gave Abu Bakr the title “As-Shiddiq” which means “True”.
    Abu Bakr also followed the journey of
    the Prophet from Mecca to Medina.
    Despite being threatened by the Quraysh believers, Abu Bakr
    remained loyal to the Prophet.
    When the Prophet was sick, the Prophet Muhammad appointed Abu
    Bakr to replace him as the prayer priest.

    When the Prophet died, many friends did not believe in the death of the Prophet, but only Abu Bakr reminded him
    that the Prophet was also human like them.

    Abu Bakr continued the leadership of the Prophet as the Caliph of the Muslims. When he became
    caliph, Abu Bakr stayed on the straight path, stood firm in defending Islam and fought against
    apostates.

    • Umar bin Khattab, the brave
      companion of the Prophet Muhammad

    The next companion of the Prophet who is guaranteed to enter heaven is Umar bin Khattab.
    Umar’s adherence to Islam was very high during his lifetime. When Islam first arrived
    in Mecca, Umar intended to kill the Prophet Muhammad.
    However, after hearing his younger
    brother recite Allah’s verses, Umar, who was smart and sensible, was able to judge that the sentence his
    brother was reading was not man-made.
    Instead of killing the Prophet Muhammad, Umar bin Khattab
    even approached him to consciously embrace Islam.

    After converting to Islam, Umar became a very brave person and did not hesitate to take up the sword to
    defend the truth of Islamic teachings.
    Umar was also the person who dared to give ideas and
    criticism to the Prophet.
    Prophet Muhammad gave the title “Al-Faruq” which means “the
    difference between right and wrong”.
    The leadership of Caliph Umar increasingly guaranteed his
    entry into heaven.

    After the death of Abu Bakr, ‘Umar remained caliph. As the leader of the Muslim community,
    Umar bin Khattab always played his role to the fullest.
    Creation of various new systems for the
    development of Islamic society and the welfare of its people.
    Even when the plague hit, Umar
    refused to eat and made eating a priority for his people.
    Umar’s leadership may have resulted
    in the spread of Islam to a third of the world’s population.

    • Uthman bin Affan, the predecessor of the
      Al-Quran Mushaf

    Uthman bin Affan is included in the category of Companions of the Prophet Muhammad SAW who are guaranteed
    to enter Heaven.
    He is also a member of the Assabiqunal Awwalun group or the first group of
    people to convert to Islam.
    He became the third caliph after the death of Umar bin
    Khattab.

    Uthman is known as a very rich merchant in Mecca. Even though he was rich, Uthman was very
    generous, articulate and spent much of his wealth on zakat, alms and infaq.

    Islam continued to develop under Uthman’s leadership. Among other things, Uthman built the
    first Islamic navy and expanded the reach of Islamic symbols.
    Collected various manuscripts of
    the Qur’an and then compiled the manuscripts for collective use to date.

    Then Uthman is a figure who has high social awareness. One of them is donating wells so that
    people can drink and use water during the dry season.
    The fountain is still there and working.
    Incredibly true!

    • Ali bin Abi Talib, loyal to the
      Prophet since childhood

    The second person to embrace Islam after Khadijah was Ali bin Abi Talib. Allah made Ali one of
    the companions of the Prophet who was guaranteed to enter heaven.
    This was because Ali had
    studied Islam from a relatively young age.
    Learn directly from the Prophet. There
    is no doubt about his loyalty to Islam, Ali was never absent from the wars that were fought to defend
    Islam.

    When the Prophet migrated, Ali disguised himself as the Prophet Muhammad while sleeping in his bed.
    Until the Quraysh infidels thought that the Prophet Muhammad was still in his house.

    When the believers of Quraysh went to attack Prophet Muhammad, they found Ali bin Abi Talib in bed.
    In vain did they wait at night to kill Prophet Muhammad.

    Finally they left Ali. Three days later, Ali followed him to Medina alone. Hide
    during the day and move on at night.
    How loyal Ali was to the Prophet so that he carried out
    his duties sincerely.

    After Uthman’s death, there was a vacuum of Islamic leadership for a while, then Ali was proposed as the
    next caliph.
    During his leadership he faced many challenges because there were many rebellions
    by groups that were divided by their own ideas.
    Ali bin Abi Talib was the last person in
    Khulafaur Ar-Rasyidin.

    • Talhah bin
      Ubaidillah, the guardian of the Prophet who wanted to give waqf

    The name Talha bin Ubaidillah was not as famous as Abu Bakr or Umar bin Khattab, but the Prophet Muhammad named
    Talhah after Ali as a friend of the Prophet who was guaranteed to enter Heaven.

    When Islam arrived in Mecca, Talha did not hesitate to accept the teachings of the Prophet. He
    immediately converted to Islam.
    As long as the preaching of Islam was carried out, Talha fought
    and fulfilled the task assigned to him by the Prophet.

    The Prophet called Talhah the Good, the Generous Talhah, the Gracious Talhah. During the time
    of Uhud, the Muslims were careless and almost endangered the Prophet’s life.
    When the Quraysh
    were about to attack the Prophet, Talha immediately protected the Prophet until he lost his finger.

    the prophet said:

    “Whoever wants to see a martyr walking on earth should see Talha bin ‘Ubaidillah.” (HR
    Tirmidhi 3672)

    • Zubair bin Awwam, Protector of the
      Prophet Muhammad SAW

    Zubair bin Awwam, Protector of the Prophet and Assabiqunal Awwalun

    Zubair bin Awwam is the cousin of the Prophet Muhammad who was also one of the first people to convert to
    Islam or Assabiqunal Awwalun.
    He converted to Islam from the age of 15, he was very loyal to
    the Prophet and always tried to protect the Prophet from harm.

    The Prophet mentioned Zubair bin Awwam as one of the Companions of the Prophet who was guaranteed to enter
    Heaven.

    “Every Prophet has a helper (protector), and my protector is Zubair bin Awwam.” (Muslim
    HR)

    • Abdurrahman bin Auf, humble
      friend and philanthropist

    Abdurrahman bin Auf, a friend of the Prophet, wants to make waqf and be guaranteed entry to Heaven.

    One of the companions of the Prophet Muhammad who was very generous was Abdurrahman bin Auf.
    Even though Abdurrahman bin Auf was a wealthy merchant, he used much of his wealth to help Muslims.
    Abdurrahman bin Auf is also part of Assabiqunal Awwalun or the first 10 people to convert to
    Islam.

    When he heard the Messenger of Allah mention the name Abdurrahman bin Auf who was one of the Companions of
    the Prophet who entered heaven, it made him not arrogant but nervous.
    He was worried about
    going to heaven and felt that no one was worthy.
    Even though Abdurrahman bin Auf’s contribution
    to the development of Islam was enormous, he was guaranteed to enter heaven.

    • Sa’ad bin Abi Waqash, Faithful
      Fighting in the Way of Allah

    Saad bin Abi Waqqash, a friend of the Prophet who is skilled at archery

    Sa’ad bin Abi Waqqash was the maternal uncle of Prophet Muhammad. Sa’ad’s father was Aminah’s
    uncle.
    As soon as he heard that Islam was present in Mecca, Sa’ad immediately approached the
    Prophet to say the shahada.
    Sa’ad knew the Prophet very well, so he believed in the religion of
    God.

    What made Sa’ad join the companions of the Prophet who were guaranteed to enter heaven was his loyalty,
    which always accompanied the Prophet in battle.
    Sa’ad was very skilled in archery and he was
    the first to shoot an arrow in defense of Islam.

    Besides being obedient to Islam, Sa’ad also loved his mother very much. He is a dutiful son to
    both parents.
    Even though his mother was against it from the beginning Sa’ad converted to
    Islam, Sa’ad still maintained his religion and was polite to his mother who had a different faith.

    Conclusion

    So a brief discussion about the figure of the companions of the prophet Muhammad SAW. Not only
    discussing the biography of the companions of the prophet Muhammad SAW, but further discussing the exemplary
    stories of those who deserve to be used as examples.

    Getting to know the figure of a friend of the prophet Muhammad SAW gives us an idea that there is a human figure
    who was so kind after the departure of the prophet Muhammad SAW who gave us the opportunity to become part of
    these good people and teach good life lessons for the next generation.

    Thus a review of the figure of the companions of the prophet Muhammad SAW. For Sinaumed’s who
    want to get to know more about the figure of a friend of the prophet Muhammad SAW and knowledge related to
    other Islamic history, you can visit
    sinaumedia.com to get related books.

    As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest
    information for you.
    To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and
    original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Pandu Akram

    Related article:

    Get to know the figure of Uthman Bin Affan as a caliph and friend of the Prophet

    Exemplifying the Wisdom of the Story and Example of Prophet Sulaiman AS

    The story and example of the Prophet Ishaq AS which should be used as a lesson!

    10 Good Models of the Prophet Muhammad SAW to Be Followed!

    The story of Abu Bakar As Siddiq with Rasulullah SAW in spreading Islam

  • Get to know the Chief Executive Officer (CEO), Role, and Salary Range

    Chief Executive Officer (CEO) is the highest position in the management of a company, both large and medium-sized companies. Behind the success of a company, of course there is the contribution of an extraordinary leader who has talent and of course is able to develop good responsibility for running a company.

    The CEO has his own responsibilities, duties. Usually, the CEO has a higher salary than other positions, of course because the CEO position is the highest position in a company. The position of a CEO can be obtained by ownership of shares, competence, social ties or by direct official appointment.

    The CEO will act as a decision maker in the top management of the company. What roles should the CEO have? And how much is the salary of a CEO? Check out the following explanation!

    Definition of Chief Executive Officer (CEO)

    Chief Executive Officer or CEO is the highest position of a company and has responsibility for the success of the business being run. In general, the CEO is selected by the board of directors as well as the shareholders.

    In business activities, a CEO is entrusted with managing the entire company, making important decisions and acting as the main point of communication with the board of directors as well as shareholders.

    In addition, the CEO has a role that varies from one company to another and depends on the size of the company, culture and structure of the company.

    Generally in large companies, the CEO only has business with high-level strategic decisions and all matters related to the overall growth of the company.

    For example, the CEO will plan the business strategy and determine the operational decisions of top management. Meanwhile in smaller companies, the CEO often has a more active role and is involved with the day-to-day functioning of the company. For example, the CEO will be involved in recruiting staff and helping with relatively small business projects.

    However, basically, the CEO is more involved in strategic matters such as meetings with the board of directors or other important meetings. According to a study from Harvard Business School, as much as 72% of CEO work time is spent on meetings.

    Usually, these meetings will produce various plans and strategies to be able to develop the company’s business. Apart from carrying out tasks related to work and business, a CEO is also considered the face of the company he leads.

    This makes most CEOs definitely have a large social circle and are recognized by many people. An example is Elon Musk, who is currently synonymous with Tesla.

    If Sinaumed’s often sees in the media, Elon Musk often conducts interviews and appears on TV and radio shows and attends various events. This shows that a CEO does not only work within the scope of his company, but also must build a good image in the public about his company.

    Difference between CEO and Director

    In some companies, there are those who equate the position of CEO with managing director. However, there are also companies that have a CEO and also a managing director. In this case, the director has a role as executor of the running of the company and must report to the CEO.

    So, a company may have several directors, but only one CEO. Then, what is the difference between a CEO and a director? Basically, a director is someone who heads up several departments headed by a manager.

    The Director has an obligation to report back on these matters to the CEO and ensure that every plan has been implemented properly. The director also has the duty to manage different departments.

    Meanwhile, the CEO is someone who has full responsibility for the running of a company that he leads. So it can be concluded, that the CEO is the owner of the plan for a business trip from the company, while the director is someone who implements the company’s strategy.

    The role of the CEO in the Company

    After knowing what a CEO is and who a CEO really is, did Sinaumed’s know that CEOs do not only have a big responsibility, but also have a big role in the development of the company. To be clearer, here are some of the roles of a Chief Executive Officer or CEO.

    1. Designing business objectives

    The first role of a CEO is to develop a company’s business plan and evaluate the profitability of the business plan. In addition, the CEO also has an important responsibility for monitoring the performance of the departments and divisions that report to him to ensure that his performance is in line with the company’s vision and mission.

    2. The CEO acts as a company representative

    Being a CEO means he becomes the main face of a company that is led. So, it can be said that the CEO is the main face of the company. Therefore, the presence of a CEO in the public eye has a considerable impact on the public’s perception of the products or brands and companies that the CEO leads.

    3. Build a solid team

    Even though the CEO has an important role to play in building and advancing companies and businesses, of course the CEO cannot do the job alone. For this reason, CEOs have directors or positions that are below.

    The people who are under the CEO will then be formed as a team. In order to carry out the task properly, the team must also be solid. However, a solid team does not just appear.

    Therefore, the CEO has a role to bridge employees with company directors. The CEO must also be able to build a comfortable work environment, so that solidarity will be formed in the team.

    4. Allocating a spending plan budget

    A company certainly requires a certain amount of funds and capital to keep the business running well. These funds need to be planned in the spending plan budget.

    The CEO and other executives have a role in preparing the budget. Budget spending plans cannot be planned haphazardly, but require a long process of analysis and evaluation.

    The goal is to make the budget allocation more focused. Furthermore, the risk of profit or loss from a company will be the responsibility of a CEO.

    CEO Duties and Responsibilities

    In addition to these four roles, the CEO also has duties and responsibilities. However, the duties and responsibilities of a CEO do not have standard boundaries. But in general, here are some of the duties and responsibilities of a CEO:

    1. Communicate on behalf of the company with the government, shareholders and the public.
    2. Lead the development of short and long term strategies for the company.
    3. Creating and implementing the vision and mission of the company and organization.
    4. Evaluate the work of other executive leaders in the company, including the president, vice president and directors.
    5. Maintain company performance in competitive market situations, industry developments, expansion opportunities and others.
    6. Ensuring that the company can maintain high social responsibility.
    7. Assess the risks in the company’s planning and ensure the company is properly monitored.
    8. Establish long-term strategic business goals for the company.

    Skills a CEO Must Have

    Does Sinaumed’s have aspirations to become a CEO? Anyone can become a CEO, as long as they have the competence and ability to lead a company. In order for a company to run well and continue to grow, the CEO must have the following abilities.

    1. Leadership

    Leadership is a basic ability that must be owned by every CEO, even for the manager class though. There is also this leadership ability that is very closely related to the CEO’s position as a company leader.

    With leadership traits, a CEO will look convincing when making a decision that is important for the continuity of the company. In addition, the CEO must also have the ability to handle conflict management well, as a form of representation of the leadership spirit of a CEO. so, this will certainly affect the trust of employees and also stakeholders.

    2. Be assertive and able to make decisions quickly

    According to the Harvard Business Review, a high-performing CEO usually doesn’t always stand out, because they have to make big decisions all the time.

    Conversely, if there is a CEO who stands out, the CEO usually has a firm attitude. A CEO also has to do it consistently, even in the midst of ambiguity with complete information and even in an unfamiliar environment.

    A CEO must also be prepared to accept the risks of the decisions he makes. So, people with a firm decision-making attitude are generally more likely to become a good performing CEO.

    3. Good communication skills

    A CEO must have good communication skills. This is of course inseparable from the activities of a CEO who will often meet with many people.

    The communication that exists between a CEO and these people is not solely to convey a good message, but the communication that is established must also have context with the interlocutor.

    For example, when a CEO talks to employees, he must be able to use language that is concise and easy to understand. With this, employees will easily understand the reasons for the CEO when making certain decisions.

    4. Creativity and innovation

    As Sinaumed’s knows, it will be difficult for a business to survive long if the company cannot innovate. Therefore, as the first person and the most important position holder in the company, a CEO must have creativity and be able to innovate.

    The goal is for companies to adapt to the latest trends. A CEO must have the ability to think creatively and welcome new, innovative ideas.

    That way, he can keep the business relevant as well as progressive. A CEO who values ​​change with an open mind, then he will easily determine the business direction for his company.

    5. Ethics

    A CEO is not only responsible for the internal affairs of his company, but also has responsibility for the public’s view of him.

    The more successful the business he runs, the higher the public attention he gets. This shows that it is important for company leaders to have good ethics, to be responsible when something goes wrong involving their company.

    The inculcation of this honest and responsible culture will also affect the performance of the company he leads. If a CEO is known for his good ethics, then the public will also put their trust in the company he leads.

    6. Collaborate

    A CEO of course will not be separated from the name of interaction. To manage a company, a CEO can work with various parties. This collaboration can be established between the CEO and the board of directors, heads of departments, managers and colleagues.

    For this reason, a CEO must have a variety of good plans and ideas in order to advance his company. By working with employees and colleagues, of course a CEO will get various creative ideas and solutions.

    According to Stacey Hanke of Forbes, if a CEO allows his employees to be involved in various decisions by collaborating, then various kinds of ids can emerge and an employee will feel that he owns the company.

    This of course will encourage employees to be involved in the success of companies whose ideas come from themselves.

    7. Transparency

    According to Forbes, one of the factors that can affect the trust of employees and executives is transparency or openness. When employees believe that a CEO is not hiding any information or failing to act openly, then employees will begin to question the decisions made by the CEO.

    A successful CEO will realize that transparency is very important for employees to see performance and understand the motives for every decision they make.

    8. Have good interpersonal skills

    A CEO must have good interpersonal skills. These interpersonal skills include the ability to communicate with the public, listen to opinions, have high empathy for other people and others.

    This is of course inseparable from the activities of a CEO who will often meet with many and establish relationships so that the company can progress and develop.

    9. Have managerial skills

    This managerial ability is related to the management of all resources and work systems that exist in the company. With good and effective management, the business can run smoothly and increase sales.

    In addition, a CEO must be able to coordinate and mobilize his subordinates. So, employees and themselves are able to achieve the goals set by the company.

    10. Have the ability to analyze

    To be able to make decisions, a CEO must have the skills to be able to analyze a problem. A CEO must be able to see the whole problem, diagnose, analyze and find creative solutions.

    This one skill will help the CEO to predict the obstacles that he might face and be faced by his company.

    CEO salary

    Curious about how much a CEO is paid? The base salary of the CEO and CTO depends on the funding stage of the startup. A CEO’s income will increase in accordance with the funding successfully obtained.

    In Indonesia alone, the average salary per month for a CEO is at the funding stage of around US 0 to US$ 5 billion or around IDR 29 million. The data was released by venture capital firm Monk’s Hill Ventures and employment startup Glints in their report entitled The Southeast Asia Tech Talent Compensation Report.

    Thus the explanation about the Chief Executive Officer (CEO), is Sinaumed’s interested in business and wants to become a Chief Executive Officer (CEO)? If so, then Sinaumed’s can get skills to become a businessman by reading books.

    As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia.com provides various kinds of business books for Sinaumed’s. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Khansa

  • Get to know the characteristics of clean water according to WHO which is safe to use

    Characteristics of Clean Water – We all know that water is one of the most important needs in human life throughout the world. Not only humans, water also determines the life of various creatures on earth, such as animals, plants, and so on.

    As a human being, of course you need water to meet various existing needs. As time goes by and the development of the times, the need for water is also increasing. One category of water that is very important to humans is clean water.

    However, a lot of waste is generated from various human activities in modern times like this, causing the quality of water to decline, so that not all water can be included in the category of clean water. Well, this article will explain the characteristics of clean water that is safe for human consumption.

    A. Definition of Clean Water

    In general, clean water can be understood as a type of natural resource in the form of water that has good quality and can be used by humans in everyday life, for example, for drinking, eating, and sanitation.

    Meanwhile, the World Health Organization or WHO as an international health organization states that clean water is water that can be used by humans to meet domestic needs, starting from consumption, drinking water and of course food preparation.

    Based on these two opinions, clean water can be defined as water that can and is suitable for use by humans to support various daily activities, such as drinking water, consumption, to sanitation. This ultimately results in an opinion that not all types can be used in everyday human life.

    Water that has been contaminated by pollution or a hazardous substance may not be consumed or used by humans. The reason is, water that contains harmful substances can provide losses and will be very harmful to the human body. Moreover, research says that humans who do not consume water for more than 3 days can result in death threats.

    Apart from consumption, humans also need clean water for cooking, washing clothes, bathing, and so on. Therefore, as creatures that need water, humans should maintain the quality of water so that it remains clean and suitable for use. One of the efforts that you can do to participate in maintaining water quality is to conserve nature and maintain a healthy environment.

    B. Characteristics of Clean Water

    As explained in the definition of clean water, clean water is water that meets health requirements. In this section, we will learn about the characteristics of clean water suitable for human consumption and use.

    So, here are seven characteristics of clean water that you need to pay attention to when identifying water, including:

    1. Colorless

    The first characteristic of clean water is that it has no color. one of the signs of proper and safe water for consumption and daily needs is that it looks clear. If water has a cloudy color, such as yellow, orange, or even brown, then it can be ascertained that the water contains harmful substances so that it does not qualify to be included in the category of clean water.

    One of the characteristics that need to be known from clean water, of course, is that it has a stable level of clarity. You can try pouring some water into a container. Furthermore, to see the clarity of the water you can wait for the changes that occur in the water. If the water still has a clear color, then the water can be said to be clean water. However, if sediment is visible or there is color attached to the bottom of the container, then the water is said to be unclean.

    2. It has no taste

    The second characteristic of clean water is that it has no taste. If the water in your house has a salty or metallic taste when you drink it. So we can be sure that the water is not worthy to be called clean water. The taste contained in the water could be due to the impact of rust on the pipes or iron in the waterways. These waterways can release several types of metals such as iron, manganese, zinc, copper, and also lead.

    However, in several types of water that have been studied, water that has a fairly strong metallic taste can also be caused by low pH or acidity levels in the water. Therefore, before consuming or using clean water, you can first identify the water, so that it does not interfere with the health of the body.

    3. Has no odor

    The third characteristic of a water that can be said to be clean is when the water has no odor. Almost the same as the taste, smell or aroma that emerges from a water is a sign of the presence of bacteria or decaying organic matter. In the end, this makes the water indicator to meet sanitation needs relatively low.

    If you find water that has an abnormal odor, it’s a good idea to give it special treatment before using it. One example of water that has an odor is water in a swimming pool. Swimming pools usually have a high chlorine content in the water, which can cause kidney problems or even increase the risk of cancer.

    Apart from water in swimming pools, some water that smells like rotten eggs or sewage is also not allowed to meet daily needs. Because water that smells like this indicates excessive hydrogen sulfide gas content. If this hydrogen sulfide gas has turned into sulfate, then if it is exposed to a bacteria it can cause the potential for dehydration to appear diarrhea.

    Meanwhile, water that has a fishy odor could be due to its high barium content. Barium itself is a chemical substance that naturally appears in water as a result of the drilling process or manufacturing waste.

    For consumption needs, clean water that is suitable for drinking is water that has a normal aroma and does not have an unpleasant odor. Water that already has an unusual and unpleasant odor can be due to mixing with bacteria or Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S). Hydrogen Sulfide itself is basically a colorless gas, but it contains poison and is very risky to burn.

    4. It doesn’t feel sticky after use

    The fourth feature of a water that can meet the clean water indicator is that it doesn’t feel sticky after use. Apart from knowing the indicators of clean water based on color, taste and smell, in this section you can identify water based on its texture.

    The texture of water that is unfit for use is usually different from the texture of clean water. This texture can be caused by the influence of the content of certain substances, such as aluminum, magnesium, manganese, to lead. These marks of unclean water will leave marks that can be seen directly on the faucet, sink or glass.

    When using water that contains some of these substances, your hands can feel sticky after using it to wash your hands with soap. You can also feel the difference when you use this type of water to wash clothes using detergent. Hands will feel sticky and uncomfortable.

    5. It has a neutral ph

    The fifth feature of clean water is that it has a water pH that is not far from the neutral limit. This characteristic is one of the chemical requirements commonly used to measure water. In mineral water itself, the level or pH content in water can be used as a benchmark for the properties of water, starting from alkaline, acidic or normal.

    Chemically, the acid and base scales have a range of numbers between 1 and 14. A water that can be said to be clean and suitable for use is when the water has a neutral pH, which reaches the number 7. Meanwhile, some argue that water that has a pH level of around 6.5 to 8.5 is still safe to use.

    One tool that you can use to find out the pH of a water is a pH meter. You can provide this tool, because it can be very helpful when it is found that there is an abnormality in the water at home.

    6. Contains No Bacteria

    The sixth characteristic of clean water is the absence of bacteria or microorganisms that can harm human health. One of the bacteria that needs to be avoided is the Escherichia Coli bacteria or E. Coli for short. E. Coli itself can live in the intestines of living things, one of which is humans.

    If you drink water that still contains E. Coli bacteria, it might cause mild diarrhea. This is due to disturbances in the human digestive system, especially the intestines. Apart from E. Coli bacteria, there are many types of bacteria that can enter the body unknowingly.

    Therefore, to avoid the entry of bacteria that harm the body, you can treat water for consumption by boiling it first. This method is believed to be one of the best ways to remove bacteria in water.

    If cooking isn’t enough, you can manually check the water in your house. You can bring water samples at home to check the content of the water.

    7. Does Not Contain Dust, Sand, Soil, or Other Sediments

    The seventh feature of water that can be said to be clean is when the water does not contain dust, sand, soil or other types of sediment. As stated above, one of the physical requirements for clean water is that it is not cloudy and not dirty. The discovery of dust, sand, or soil content may result in a blockage in the canal or water source.

    Water that has a blockage in the canal or water source can be said to be water that is unfit for consumption or use in everyday life. Well, to overcome this, you can clean the drains at home. Apart from that, you can also install a special filter or commonly called a filter to separate water from dust, sand, soil, and various other types of sediment.

    C. Benefits of Clean Water

    After knowing the various characteristics of clean water, in this section we will learn about the benefits of clean water. Some of the benefits of clean water that need attention are as follows:

     

     

    1. Can Meet Fluids In The Body

    Basically the human body has a water content of up to about 50% to 80%. This makes humans really need water. When the water content in the human body becomes low or lacking, it can have several impacts on the activity of organs in humans, such as decreased concentration making them susceptible to disease. Therefore, when you are sick, the most effective medicine is to meet the needs of the body’s water content.

    2. Helping Daily Activities

    Furthermore, the benefits of clean water for humans are to assist daily activities or activities, such as washing, cooking, and sanitation. The need for clean water is very important considering that if the water used for daily activities is not clean, then there will be a very high risk of contracting a disease. In addition, unclean water does not provide maximum cleanliness.

    3. Agricultural Irrigation

    The next benefit of clean water for humans is for agricultural irrigation needs. Clean water can be said to be water that has good quality and quality. In the absence of metal or other sediment content, water will greatly support success in agriculture. Water that is dirty and full of harmful substances will certainly greatly interfere with soil fertility. Like humans, plants also cannot grow healthily if they are in infertile soil.

    4. Maintaining the Environmental Ecosystem

    The last benefit of clean water is protecting the environmental ecosystem. As stated above, that water is a source of life for all creatures on earth. By always supporting efforts to preserve nature and maintain environmental health, we can be sure that clean water will continue to meet the needs of humans, animals and plants.

    D. Sources of Clean Water

    After discussing various things about clean water, starting from the definition, characteristics, to its benefits, in this section we will learn about clean water sources. Sources of clean water are available in various places on earth. The following are some sources of clean water that you need to know, including:

     

     

    1. Space Water

    Space water itself is water that comes from the sublimation of clouds or water vapor. One example of space water is snow. Snow itself is basically water, so when the snow melts it can be a source of water. However, of course it needs to be processed first so that the water from the snow can become clean water.

    2. Rainwater

    Almost the same as space water, rainwater is also formed from natural natural processes. Rainwater can be used as drinking water. It’s just that rainwater doesn’t contain enough calcium like drinking water, so you need to add calcium to it first.

    3. Surface Water

    Surface water can be understood as any type of water that is on the surface of the earth. Some examples of surface water are river water, lake water and sea water. For those of you who want to use this water, you need to choose a clean water source. This is because there are several places that naturally or as a result of humans become contaminated and have a cloudy color.

    4. Groundwater

    Groundwater is water that comes from the ground. Groundwater itself is located in two layers of soil, namely deep groundwater and shallow groundwater. Deep groundwater is usually a layer of soil that is impermeable. Meanwhile, shallow groundwater is groundwater that is around the ground surface, so it is quite influenced by the rain cycle.

    5. Spring

    Meanwhile, groundwater that appears naturally is known as spring water. This water comes from water sources such as in the mountains. This water can be drunk directly, but to make it safer, it still has to be identified to ensure its safety.

  • Get to Know the Characteristics and Examples of Personification Figures Clearly and Completely

    Figure of Personification – Hello Sinaumed’s friends, have you ever studied figure of speech? Maybe you have heard the term figurative language. But, do you know, Sinaumed’s, without realizing it, in our daily lives we also use a lot of figures of speech to communicate with other people.

    Figure of speech is often used in everyday life when communicating with people who are close to us. Even though we often use it on a daily basis, many of us are not aware of it. In addition, the Indonesian language does have a lot of figures of speech.

    This figure of speech is included in the comparative figure of speech. Because anthropomorphic figures of speech or what we often call personification figures of speech often use figurative words to compare and enhance the impression of sentences. In spoken or written communication, personification and other rhetorical devices are often used to create an imaginative impression or produce a certain effect.

    There are many figures of speech that can be used to write a literary work, one of which is personification. This figure of speech describes inanimate or non-human objects, being animate objects or having human characteristics.

    Sinaumed’s, before we go any further, we must understand the meaning of the figure of speech itself. After that we also need to understand the meaning of personification figure of speech, its characteristics, and examples. Come on, see the explanation below!

    Definition of Majas

    Figure of speech or figurative language is a form of figurative language to make the atmosphere in a sentence livelier. We can easily understand that figures of speech can be expressions that can bring a sentence to life. Numbers deviate from the general meaning of the word.

    One example of “right hand”. In a real sense, the right hand is a member of the human body. However, in the expression “he belongs to Mr. Buddy’s right hand”, the meaning of these limbs is lost. “Right hand” means confidant.

    Figure of speech which is usually used in writing a literary work, is usually applied in poetry and prose. However, poetry usually uses more figures of speech than prose. Because, figure of speech is a figurative language that is able to animate a literary work and can give rise to certain connotations.

    The use of figures of speech or figures of speech is intended to convey imaginary or figurative information, both written and verbal, to represent the thoughts and feelings of the author. The role of allegory in general is to make a literary work more beautiful in terms of words.

    Definition of Figure of Speech According to Experts

    1. Professor Ph. DHG Tarigan

    According to the professor. PhDs. HG Tarigan, The concept of figure of speech is a way of expressing ideas through a unique style of language that evokes the soul and personality of a writer.

    1. Goris Clough

    According to Gorys Keraf, the concept of figure of speech is a style of language that is conveyed honestly, politely and attractively in literary works.

    1. Aminuddin

    According to Aminuddin, the concept of figure of speech is a style of language used by a writer to describe his ideas in relation to certain goals and effects to be achieved.

    1. Luxembourg, etc.

    According to Luxemburg et al., the concept of figure of speech is a figurative language that characterizes a text. That is, at a certain point, a text can be likened to an individual who is different from other individuals.

    1. Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI)

    According to KBBI, figure of speech is defined as a way of describing something by equating it with something else; or in figurative form.

    Definition of Personification Majas

    A personification figure of speech is a figurative language that creates a metaphor for inanimate objects with human characteristics. An example of personification that is often heard is “Wind, send my greetings to him”. Digging into a figure of speech from a sentence can be started by exploring what anthropomorphic figure of speech is, starting from its meaning, examples of anthropomorphic figures of speech, to the characteristics of the personification figure of speech itself.

    To explore figure of speech in a sentence, you can start by exploring what personification is, starting from its meaning, examples of personification, to the characteristics of the personification style itself.

    According to Harimurti Kridalaksana in his Language Dictionary, there are three functions of speech form or style of language. First, Personification Figure of speech is the use of the richness of language, both spoken and written.

    Secondly, by using variety, visual speech creates an effect. Finally, the third alias, Figure of Personification, can reveal the linguistic characteristics of the author of a literary work. However, verbal figures cannot be used only in written form, they can also be applied orally.

    Using personification figure of speech means using verbal and nonverbal communication simultaneously, because you have to be able to create an imaginative impression. In general, figure of speech is divided into several categories, namely:

    1. Comparison Majas
    2. Majas Satire
    3. Affirmation Majas
    4. Controversy Majas

    In addition to the above understanding, personification is a figure of speech or figure of speech that makes inanimate objects appear alive and have human-like characteristics. For example, dancing, walking, breathing and going beyond. The following is the meaning of personification figure of speech according to some experts.

    Definition of Personification Majas According to Experts

    1. Tarigan (2013)

    Language style that associates people and human nature with objects that have no real abstract ideas in reality. Personification Figures make inanimate objects appear as if they have human traits.

    Personification figurative language will describe inanimate objects as if they have human nature. Objects are often used to give people inanimate objects such as emotions, actions and even human behavior.

    1. Goys Keraf (2013)

    Personification is figurative language that is always used to define inanimate objects or non-human beings as if they have human-like characteristics and characteristics.

    1. Nurgiantoro (2017)

    According to Nurgiantoro (2017), personification is a type of figure of speech that gives humanity to inanimate objects. Human characteristics that are transferred to non-human objects or creatures include traits, behaviors, personality, physical characteristics, feelings, thoughts, speech, nonverbals. , etc.

    In personification, there are similarities between inanimate objects and people. However, this attribute also has a very contrasting comparison. Therefore, this figure can be considered as speech based on the nature of comparison and similarities.

    1. Pitwanto

    In his book Want to be a Best Seller Writer, according to Pitwanto, personification is a speech style used to humanize inanimate objects, or as if they were turned on.

    Characteristics of Personification Figures

    There is a tendency to use personification now because there are barriers or boundaries between people and things that are not. Personification Figure works by removing these boundaries so that people can respect or appreciate them better.

    Human nature is imitative. So the first thing people will do is appreciate the other people around them. Humans are much easier to judge the beauty of nature for humans who are less sensitive to its beauty if we compare nature with humans.

    The whisper of the wind, the waving of hands, the sharp gaze of the camera, give a stronger nuance to our perception as humans to feel and appreciate the existence of things outside of humans.

    The result is a style of language that is able to open our eyes and immerse us in a different beauty that is hidden by our limitations as humans who tend to pay more attention to others.

    The feeling of familiarity will also be felt more when using this personification figure of speech. Everyday objects from which we perceive only benefit appear more clearly than usual.

    Radio seems to make us aware of things that smell nostalgic, once again admiring the sophistication of computers, appreciating the beauty of nature and arousing the desire to continue to protect it.

    Besides that, the characteristics of figure of speech personification This type of speech is one of the most common types of figurative language found in literary works because it is relatively easy to apply, especially for those who are new to writing. To help you understand what personification is, here are its general characteristics:

    people love plants and animals. Using a personification style will provide an explanation of a situation based on a real and more specific picture or illustration to literary readers. Personification style compares inanimate objects and non-human beings as if they can behave and think like humans.

    More Value If Using Personification Figures

    Actually, literary writers can use formal language style without any clues in their writing. However, the application of personification style is considered more beneficial to literary works than the use of ordinary figurative language.

    1. Gives us a greater sense of ownership of inanimate objects or when we see living things other than humans around us. Inanimate or non-human objects will feel more real and not only provide benefits, but provide more functions.
    1. Using personified language can open readers’ eyes and immerse them in the things being presented. In a literary work, its beauty will be seen if it uses personification. The beauty that people may never realize will be increasingly real existence
    1. For those who may be less sensitive to their surroundings, using personified language makes it easier for them to appreciate the objects around them because these objects are equated with people.

    For example, words like whispering wind, red rose will present a stronger timbre for us as humans to appreciate and understand things other than humans.

    Characteristics of Personification

    The characteristics of personification figure of speech are representing human nature as inanimate objects. In addition, it should be noted that sometimes personification figure of speech is very similar to a fable, both of which are figures of personification figure of speech.

    The first feature of personification is the expression of human nature in inanimate objects. This more or less overlaps with anthropometry as it deals with human psychology. Linguistically, anthropomorphism is the imposition of human characteristics on animals, plants or inanimate objects. That is, inanimate objects or non-human beings are endowed with human characteristics. However, the figure that personifies the story is different from the fable.

    Most anthropomorphic drawings can refer to inanimate objects such as rain, wind or even perfume. Fables only show human traits or traits that are only found in animals.

    The purpose of adding human traits here is to give traits such as speaking, thinking, and behaving like humans. Let’s take the example of a personification proverb that says “Or nature is starting to be reluctant to be friends with us, ask the swaying grass.” Lyrics of the song Ebiet G ade.

    The example of the personification figure of speech above is a snippet from the lyrics of the song Berita Untuk Kawan, sung by Ebiet G. Ade. In this personification figure of speech, grass is depicted as a human figure, which can be asked.

    The next personification figure of speech is involving the five senses. The five senses are the five sensory organs that are or are found in humans. The five senses are sight, inspiration or smell, taste, feeling or touch, and hearing. The involvement of the five senses can create an element of closeness or intimacy, even though the personification of speech is completely imaginary.

    Concerning the second feature, the next personification figure of speech is the interpretation of situations or conditions with shadows or imagination. In the speech imagery that personifies the work, the reader will be invited into the shadow or imagination of the author. The personification figure of speech in the song also has the same goal, which is to explain or describe a situation with the image of a lyrical character.

    Consider an example of the personification of the song from the following lyrics, “The wind tells him that I love him. The wind told him I needed him.” An example of the personification of this character is in the lyrics of the Dewa 19 song entitled “Angin”. In this sentence, the listener is invited to imagine that the wind can carry messages.

    The Function of Personification Majas

    1. The use of personification in a literary work serves to beautify the arrangement of sentences in the literary work
    1. Gives a certain meaning and atmosphere based on the arrangement of beautiful words according to what the literary writer wants for the readers and connoisseurs of his work.
    1. Creating or making an imaginative impression on the reader
    1. To make it easier for readers to understand the atmosphere and also the emotions that the characters in the story might be feeling, it is usually used in short stories and novels.
    1. The use of this personification figure of speech can strengthen the sense of connectedness or connection of readers as humans with inanimate objects or living things outside of humans.

    Examples of Personification Majas

    As previously explained, the use of personified language tends to be very easy and straightforward, so literally anyone can do it. It is enough to give “distinctive” characteristics to non-human objects or creatures. Here’s an example:

     

     

    Examples of Personification Majas Sentences with Objects

    1. “The sun is shyly rising on the eastern horizon.”

    The meaning of the personification figure of speech: The sun is shy which means it is about to rise, which means that someone is shy about showing their talent. he just harbored his talent.

    2. “The old car crawled slowly over a sharp incline.”

    The meaning of an example of a personification figure of speech: An old car that runs very slowly when it is moving on the road

    3. The new Honda beat pink is so pretty.

    The meaning of the personification of this saying is as follows: The newly produced Honda Beat motorcycle has a feminine design and color.

    4. Since you left, every night I sit alone on this terrace and only the moon smiles at me.

    The meaning of personification images, for example: the moon smiles as if accompanied by someone even though it’s just a lonely image.

    5. “The wedding dress you finished wearing yesterday afternoon was very elegant and beautiful.”

    The meaning of personification images, for example, graceful and beautiful is a person’s physical characteristics, but pinned on a dress to describe her beauty.

    6. “A flash flood in mid-2017 hit the village where I was born.”

    The meaning of personification figure of speech, for example: banjir bandang here describes the result of an event when people clean up, that is, clean up what they encounter. The meaning of this sentence is that there was a flood that destroyed almost the entire village)

    7. “The food that was brought to the table was delicious.”

    The meaning of the picture symbolizes the speech: the word “try” is a human action. The word is attached to food with the intention that the food when enjoyed will look very beautiful.

    8. The scream of thunder that afternoon was deafening.

    The meaning of the personification image of the speech example: the word “scream” must be a human action. However, in this sentence it is used to describe thunder. The meaning of the word picture is very loud thunder.

    9. This motorcycle from the 2000s has been with me for ten years.

    The meaning of figure of speech personification example of speech: accompaniment words can only be made by humans. The meaning of this outboard motor is that it has been used for ten years.

    10. Santi was amazed to see beautiful clouds racing in the blue sky.

    The meaning of the personification of the image is: clouds leaving here means movement. The word walking in the clouds means to decorate a sentence.

    Examples of Personification Figures with Living Objects

    Examples of personification figure of speech and their meaning can not only be used on objects, but also on animals and humans. The following is an example of a personification figure of speech for animals or plants that can be used as a reference.

    1. “The swaying palm trees enhance the seaside view.”

    The meaning of personification figure of speech, for example: the swaying of palm trees means the movement of palm leaves due to the wind.

    2. “A teak tree stands proudly beside my road.”

    The meaning of personification figure of speech, for example: acacia trees that are large and straight up.

    3. “I hate every middle of the night having to hear the bamboo trees behind the house making noise.”

    Examples of personification figure of speech and their meaning: noise is one of human actions. Basically, bamboo cannot speak, so the meaning contained in this sentence is a bamboo tree being blown by the wind, causing a sound of friction.

    4. “If you have never been there, surely you do not know that behind the neatly arranged banana trees there is a mass grave.”

    The meaning of the image is personification, for example: a banana tree in a straight line means that it is planted at the right distance, so that it looks like a human army marching.

    5. “The wild mosquitoes in this place will sing every night.”

    The meaning of the personified image: singing is the activity of transmitting sound with the laws of beautiful tones. Only humans can sing, not mosquitoes. This expression means the sound of many mosquitoes as if they were singing.

    6. I like to live under a banyan tree like an umbrella now.

    Examples of personifications and their meanings: A banyan tree cannot really give an umbrella. The meaning of this sentence is that the dense leaves of a banyan tree seem to be an umbrella for whoever is under it.

    If Sinaumed’s doesn’t understand the meaning of personification and examples of personification , Sinaumed’s can dig deeper by reading the books available at sinaumedia.com

  • Get to know the Benefits of Collagen for the Human Body

    Getting to Know the Benefits of Collagen for the Human Body – For those of you who like beauty products, of course you are no stranger to the term collagen, right? Today, more and more beauty supplement products mention the presence of collagen in these products. Collagen is usually found in beauty products, such as mask products, moisturizers, and so on.

    In addition, collagen has also begun to penetrate into soap products such as shampoos and conditioners. Lots right? Even so, do you already know what collagen is? What are the benefits so that collagen is added to various types of beauty products?

    For this reason, we will invite you to understand everything about collagen so that you can add to your insight about collagen. This article will contain the meaning of collagen, the benefits of collagen, the benefits of collagen itself, examples of foods that contain collagen, and much more. Therefore, all of you, stay tuned!

    A. Definition of Collagen

    Before knowing more about the benefits of collagen, we will explain the definition of collagen itself.
    Collagen is a type of protein formed from amino acids. Collagen has a hard nature and is difficult to dissolve in water. Collagen is a third of the protein in the human body. not only that, it turns out that collagen is spread throughout the human body and is a protein that forms or forms several parts of the body.

     

     

     

    Some of the main substances of collagen present in parts of the human body, such as the main substance used to build bones, the main substance that builds tendons, and the main substance that builds ligaments. Apart from that, collagen is also found in other parts of the human body such as the corneas of the eyes, teeth, and blood vessels in the body.

    Collagen can be considered as an adhesive that has a role and function as a link between two objects. The word collagen itself comes from the Greek “kólla” with the meaning of glue and the word “collagen” in English.

    Naturally the body can produce its own collagen, but that doesn’t mean you don’t even need to consume synthetic collagen. The fact is that you are highly recommended to consume synthetic collagen, you can consume synthetic collagen either in the form of injections or supplements according to your wishes.

    B. The process of forming collagen in the body

    Inside your body, especially the skin, there is a layer of skin. In this skin layer, there are special cells that can produce pro-collagen with a mini molecular shape. This mini or pro-collagen molecule is formed from protein and vitamin C which your body successfully absorbs its nutrients.

    As long as the body carries out the collagen production process, each of the pro-collagen will automatically stick together from one pro-collagen to another. Pro-collagen that manages to unite will form thin fibers known as fibrils.

    In general, a fibril is a thin fiber consisting of an arrangement of vitamins and minerals that come together and form like fiber threads. The fibrils will grow and develop and will turn into fibers that can attach to your skin cells.

    Fibril itself has a function like an anchor in the skin. After that, the fibers will collect and then form and attach perfectly, so the fibrils will serve as guardians of the structure of the skin and make your skin more flexible.

    Please note that your body can produce and produce collagen automatically and regularly. However, this ability will not be the same forever, as you get older the ability to produce collagen in your body will decrease in performance.

    Apart from being due to age, the ability to produce collagen can also be reduced due to lifestyle, such as smoking. Exposure to light or sunlight directly and continuously accompanied by pollution can also reduce the ability to produce collagen and slow down collagen production.

    It is very easy to recognize people who have a lack of collagen, one of the most visible and common examples is from a person’s lacking appearance that looks relaxed or not tight. Besides that, it can also be seen from the fine lines on the skin or what is commonly called wrinkles.

    The depletion of the amount of collagen in a person’s body can also cause various types of health problems. That is the reason why the stability of the amount of collagen in a person’s body really needs to be considered considering the many benefits that collagen produces.

    There is one way that is considered easy to increase collagen levels in your body. This method is considered easy and very pocket-friendly, you only need to do regular exercise, this will increase the smooth flow of blood in your body. Smooth blood flow can help speed up the production of collagen in your body, of course balanced by eating foods that are nutritious and rich in amino acids.

    It is undeniable that the body really needs collagen, besides due to the various benefits of collagen. If a person experiences a decrease in the amount of collagen, it will immediately have a serious impact on that person. therefore, we strongly recommend that you start a healthy lifestyle, a healthy lifestyle is also done for yourself.

    C. Types and Role of Collagen

    There are 16 types of collagen called the main collagen. All types of collagen are divided into four types, namely type 1, type 2, type 3, and type 4. As we explained earlier that collagen is a very important protein for the body.

    In the following, we will explain some of the roles of the four main types of collagen along with the roles per type.

    1. Type 1

    Type 1 is a type or type of collagen that plays an important role in forming at least 90% of natural collagen, this type of collagen or type 1 is made of fibers that have a dense texture. Collagen type 1 has a role to provide collagen to the structure of bones, tendons, cartilage, skin, connective tissue in the body and teeth.

    2. Type 2

    Type 2 is collagen that is formed or made of fibers that have a looser intensity. Type 2 is always found in the elastic part of the cartilage, which functions as a cushion for the joints.

    3. Type 3

    Type 3 is collagen whose role is to support the fixed structure of muscles, various organs in the body, and parts of blood vessels.

    4.Type 4

    Type 4 is the collagen that is normally found in the layers of the skin and which usually helps the kidneys in the process of filtering toxins.

    D. Benefits of Collagen for the Human Body

    As you know before, that there are many uses and benefits of collagen which are very useful for the human body. Collagen plays an important role in the process of perfecting the structure of human skin, strengthens and hardens human bone muscles, and helps speed up the blood clotting process when an injury occurs in the human body. well now is the time for us to present the various benefits and other functions of collagen which are very useful for the human body.

     

    1. Helps Maintain Skin Health

    The first benefit of collagen that you will get if you can maintain the health of collagen in your body is that the health of your skin will last and be maintained. As we said earlier that collagen can be produced automatically and regularly by the body, this collagen can make your skin healthier and always maintain its flexibility. In addition, collagen can also smooth out all the lines or wrinkles found on your skin. .

    Balanced collagen levels in the body can also help moisturize the skin, tighten the skin, and can help improve blood circulation to the skin in your body. If you already feel that the levels of collagen in your body are not optimal, you can get collagen from soaps that contain collagen, collagen supplements, or foods that contain collagen.

    2. Helping the Healing Process of Injuries and Wounds

    The second benefit that you can get from balanced collagen levels in other bodies is that collagen can help speed up the process of recovery and healing from wounds and injuries that you experience. When you experience an injury or have a wound, the body will automatically respond by carrying out recovery or recovery as an effort to heal the injured or injured body. If you want a fast recovery or healing process, you can use and take advantage of the function of collagen.

    3. Helps Slow Aging and Promotes Skin Rejuvenation

    Collagen types 1 and 3 have benefits that are closely related to slowing the aging process and are considered to be able to help improve the skin’s rejuvenation process. Collagen can help accelerate skin regeneration and replace dead skin cells with new skin cells. That is the reason why many people and experts say that collagen is very good for facial skin.

    4. Helps Reduce Cellulite on the Skin

    Do you know what cellulite is? Cellulite is a condition in which the skin experiences swelling and forms small dimples that have an orange peel-like texture that usually appear on the skin of the abdomen, thighs, waist, hips and buttocks. This annoying condition often and frequently occurs among women. Compared to women, men very, very rarely experience skin conditions like this.

    A big cause of skin cellulite is caused by a person’s weight gain or loss. Skin cellulite can be removed by consuming sufficient levels of collagen for the body, sufficient collagen content to even meet the needs can help reduce the presence of cellulite in the body.

    5. Helps Lose Weight and Burn Fat

    Collagen contains concentrated glycine accompanied by amino acids which have uses as fuel to help strengthen muscles in the body. This fuel can also help eliminate and reduce body fat which is the main cause of obesity.

    If fat has been successfully burned by collagen, then it will not be an obstacle to lowering the scales of your body. Weight will automatically go down on its own if you can meet the needs of collagen in sufficient and appropriate portions.

    5. Increases and Builds Muscle Density

    To be able to shape and build muscle density, you can take advantage of type 3 collagen. This type of collagen has benefits and functions in supporting muscle structure, helping to strengthen the structure of the body’s organs, and the last is the part of the blood vessels.

    Besides being able to help solve skin problems, collagen can also increase muscle mass to help someone who may experience muscle wasting caused by disease. Collagen can also help strengthen and increase the strength of blood vessels, help improve circulation, and reduce the risk of heart attack.

    6. Helps Relieve Joint Pain

    Collagen has many benefits, one of the other benefits of collagen is that it can help improve the health quality of human bones, muscles and joints. Someone who diligently consumes foods that contain lots of collagen and supplements that contain high collagen will be able to easily overcome various problems related to arthritis and so on.

    For this, the role of type 2 collagen can be utilized. Why is that? Because collagen with type 2 has benefits and uses that are very useful for dealing with inflammation in both bones, muscles and joints

    7. Maintaining Self Health, Connective Tissue, and Tendons

    Do you know the part of the body called the tendon? Tendons are one part of the body that has a function or function to connect between bones and muscles. If the tendon is healthy then movement will be free without any obstacles. In this case, type 1 collagen is used with the person providing structure to the tendons and type 2 collagen which provides loose intensity fibers that will serve as cushions for the joints.

    Having a good combination of the roles of type 1 collagen and type 2 collagen will be very good and perfect for maximizing movement and minimizing injury or inflammation caused by unexpected things. A good combination will also produce strong connective tissue and will speed up the healing process if an injury occurs.

    8. Maintain Bone Health

    Collagen can really help problems that occur in the bones. Bone density will decrease with age. Because that’s what makes collagen play an important role in helping to maintain bone health and density so that bones always have density and can function properly.

    Collagen can also easily help prevent bone loss. You must know the fact that when the bones experience loss due to age. For women themselves, if they have experienced menopause, women will be more susceptible to the risk of osteoporosis. But there is no need to worry because collagen can help overcome these problems.
    People can increase the mineral density in their bones by increasing their collagen levels.

    9. Streamlining the Health of the Digestive System

    Collagen which is in the connective tissue in the intestinal organs can help support and provide a layer of strength that is useful for protecting the digestive tract. Gut health will be maintained if the need for collagen in the intestine is guaranteed because collagen in the intestine has other functions that can help absorb water in the intestinal organs.

    10. Strengthens Hair Roots

    Did you know that collagen can also help and provide benefits for health and strength for hair roots. Not only for skin health, collagen is actually able to provide benefits for the hair on the human body. With its various ingredients, collagen is able to prevent the possibility of hair loss and baldness.

    The amino acid content in collagen is what has the greatest influence on maintaining the strength of your hair roots. Amino acids are also very good for helping hair growth and preventing the possibility of hair thinning.

    E. Examples of Foods Containing Collagen

    Indeed, the human body produces its own natural collagen, but isn’t it wrong if we take the initiative to add collagen content to our bodies? You can increase the content or levels of collagen in your body by consuming various foods that contain collagen.

    So, here are some foods that are known to contain high levels of collagen so they are perfect for you, including:

    1. Chicken cartilage

    2. Bone broth

    3. Egg white

    4. Citrus fruit

    5. Nuts

    6. Green vegetables

    So that’s some information about collagen and its various benefits for the human body. As you have read, it turns out that there are many benefits and functions produced by collagen. Don’t forget to always meet your collagen needs!

  • Get to know the Baduy Tribe, the Indigenous Sundanese who are Friendly to Nature

    Baduy tribe – Indonesia is a special country. Unlike most countries which
    only consist of one race or tribe, Indonesia consists of various tribes and races that inhabit Sabang to
    Merauke.

    The majority of tribes in Indonesia are living modern lives in urban areas. However, not a few
    also prefer to maintain the culture of their ancestors and live simply without touching technological
    sophistication.
    Some tribes in Indonesia even choose to live in the wilderness or a place far
    from the hustle and bustle of the city, and the Baduy tribe is one of them.

    The Baduy tribe does not live in the forest like other tribes in Indonesia. Instead of
    forests, they live in villages far from the hustle and bustle of the city.
    The difference is,
    you don’t have to visit where they live just to meet people from Baduy.

    The reason is, unlike most other tribes who refuse to leave the area where they live and refuse migrants,
    the Baduy people often leave the area where they live and walk in urban areas.
    It’s not
    uncommon for those of us who live in the Greater Jakarta area to see them on the streets dressed in black,
    walking barefoot, carrying simple cloth bags and selling honey or visiting relatives.

    Even so, not everyone in Indonesia knows the Baduy Tribe. Many people who live outside the
    Greater Jakarta area or Java Island may be unfamiliar with this tribe.
    If you are one of them,
    let’s get acquainted with this Indonesian tribe.

    The Origins of the Baduy Tribe

    Those of you who live outside the Jabodetabek area may be curious about the Baduy Tribe.
    Considering that you don’t live in the Banten area or around Jabodetabek, you don’t have the
    opportunity to meet them.
    The Baduy tribe is a Sundanese ethnic group that inhabits the Kendeng
    Mountains area, Kanekes Village, Leuwidamar District, Lebak Regency, Banten.

    Just like most other tribes in Indonesia, the Baduy live side by side with the natural surroundings.
    Even though they don’t live in the forest, the Baduy people really appreciate the forest that has
    given life to them.

    The origin of the name ‘Baduy’ itself is still confusing today, considering that there are many versions
    circulating about the naming of the Baduy people.
    It is said that the name ‘Baduy’ was given by
    the Dutch who once colonized Indonesia.

    This story begins when the Dutch met the Baduy people in the Land of Sunda. Because the Baduy
    people at that time lived sedentary lives, the Dutch equated them with the Bedouins in the Arabian Peninsula
    who also liked to move from one place to another.

    Another story says, the name of the Baduy tribe comes from the name of a river north of Kanekes Village.
    This river is named Cibaduy River, and because these people live around the river, outsiders start
    calling them the Baduy Tribe.

    Interestingly, these people never refer to themselves as the Baduy Tribe, but Urang Kanekes alias Orang
    Kanekes.
    The Baduy people believe that they are descendants of Batara Cikal, one of the gods
    sent to Earth to maintain harmony in the world.

    Another story says that the Baduy people are citizens of the Padjadjaran Kingdom who chose to exile
    themselves to the Kendeng Mountains.
    It all started when the son of Sunan Gunung Jati named
    Maulana Hasanuddin founded the Sultanate of Banten in the 16th century. In 1570, the second king of the
    Sultanate of Banten named Maulana Yusuf succeeded in defeating the Padjajaran Kingdom based in Bogor, West
    Java.

    Unfortunately, when the majority of the people of Padjadjaran decided to convert to Islam, some others chose to
    maintain the religion of their ancestors and fled to the Kendeng Mountains and live there to this day.

    The Baduy Tribe

    Unlike most Indonesian tribes, which consist of one group living in the same area, the people of the Baduy
    tribe are different.
    Even though they are both Baduy people and live in the Kendeng Mountains
    area, the Baduy people are divided into two groups, namely the Inner Baduy and the Outer Baduy.

    Differences between the Inner Baduy and Outer
    Baduy Tribes

    1. Clothing color

    For outsiders who are not familiar with them, there might not be a big difference between the two.
    In fact, these two groups have some differences. The first, most striking difference
    can be seen from the color of their clothes.

    Outer Baduy people usually wear black or dark blue clothes. Meanwhile, the Baduy Dalam choose
    white clothes.

    2. The meaning of the color of the shirt

    The difference in the color of these clothes actually also has its own meaning. The clothes of
    the Outer Baduy are often worn in black or blue which means simplicity.

    The white clothing of the Baduy Dalam people symbolizes purity as well as a sign that they still adhere to
    the customs of their ancestors and reject the presence of technology in everyday life.
    The
    Baduy Dalam people are very closed and depend on nature for their lives.

    3. Openness To Foreign Cultures

    Compared to the Inner Baduy people, the Outer Baduy people are more open to outside cultures.
    They began to wash with soap, use electronics, and even gladly welcome foreign tourists who come to
    visit, and allow these tourists to stay at their homes.

    4. Location

    The Outer Baduy people live in fifty villages scattered in various areas at the foot of Mount Kendeng.
    Meanwhile, the Baduy Dalam live in three villages and are led by a traditional leader known as
    Pu’un.
    These villages are Cikeusik, Cikertawana, and Cibeo villages which are separated from
    the Outer Baduy villages.

    Religion Adopted by the Baduy Tribe Society

    Regarding beliefs, you might think that the Baduy people are Muslim. But in reality, they do
    not adhere to any religion that is recognized by the government.

    Just like most other tribes, the Baduy or Kanekes adhere to a religion of ancestral beliefs.
    They worship the forces of nature and also their ancient ancestors, known as the Sunda Wiwitan
    teachings.

    In the teachings of Sunda Wiwitan, there are three realms, two of which are inhabited by humans.
    The first realm is called Buana Nyungcung, namely the realm where Sang Hyang Kersa resides.
    The second realm is Buana Panca Tengah, a realm inhabited by living humans. Finally,
    Buana Larang, aka hell, is a place where bad people are tortured after they die.

    Just like other religions, the Baduy people also have books, places of worship and also chanted prayers.
    To worship, people from the Baduy tribe will go to Pamunjungan which is in a hilly area.
    There, they will sing songs or songs complete with some dance moves.

    The prayers of the Sundanese Wiwitan religion can be found in the book which is their guide in life.
    This book is known as the Book of Sanghyang Siksa Kandang Karesian. The Book of
    Sanghyang Siksa Kandang contains religious teachings adhered to by their ancestors during the Sunda Kingdom
    hundreds of years ago.

    A Closer Look at the Life of the Baduy Tribe

    The majority of Baduy people work as farmers. However, in contrast to most farmers who plow
    their fields using buffaloes and even tractors, the Baduy people, especially the Baduy Dalam, prohibit
    four-legged animals from entering their territory.

    Apart from rice, the Baduy tribe also grows coffee and tubers. Some of the harvest is usually
    used to meet daily needs, some are sold to other people.
    Apart from farming, the Baduy people
    also enter the forest to look for honey.

    Women usually weave cloth to make clothes, headbands, belts, and also typical Baduy bags known as Koja.
    Besides being used for long trips, Koja is also sold to tourists who come to visit.

    In contrast to the majority of people who live in urban areas, who don’t care and even dare to destroy
    nature, the Baduy people actually really appreciate and protect the nature around them where they live.
    Their respect for nature is clearly reflected in how they live their lives, even when they build
    houses.

    The Baduy people do not carelessly build houses. They took everything into account, including
    the direction of the sun’s rays.
    Therefore, the houses of the Baduy tribe always face north or
    south.
    In addition to the direction of the house, they also use natural materials, namely
    bamboo and wood that they get from the forest.

    For the foundation, they used river stones, woven bamboo as floors and walls, and dry coconut tree leaves
    as roofs.
    A typical Baduy house usually consists of three rooms.

    The first room is used as a living room or a weaving place for women. The living room is used
    as a bedroom.
    Finally, the back room serves as a kitchen for cooking and storing crops from the
    fields.

    Abstinence of the Baduy Tribe

    In contrast to most people who live in cities, and choose to live freely without being bound by too many rules,
    the Baduy people still adhere to the rules passed down by their ancestors.

    It doesn’t matter if the rules are very old, they are still carried out to this day. Indeed,
    not all Baduy people are this strict in terms of rules.
    The Outer Baduy people tend to be more
    open, but the story is different from the Inner Baduy people.

    As previously explained, the Baduy Dalam adhere to the customs inherited from their ancestors.
    They also have a set of prohibitions that they are not allowed to do in life. Here are
    some taboos of the Baduy Tribe.

    1. Not using modern transportation

    As modern humans, we are used to using various modes of transportation to go anywhere.
    Starting from public transportation such as buses, trains and public transportation and even buying
    motorbikes and cars for our personal vehicles.

    It is different with the Inner Baduy or Outer Baduy people who are anti-vehicles. In their
    village, no Baduy people have vehicles and no vehicles are allowed to enter.
    Instead, they
    relied on their two legs to get everywhere.

    This also applies when the Baduy people travel outside their territory. If you ever meet Baduy
    people, they are always seen walking somewhere.

    2. Do not use footwear

    Besides being prohibited from using vehicles, Baduy people are also prohibited from using footwear, be it
    sandals or shoes.
    Again, this rule still applies even if they go out of the area where they
    live.

    Imagine, walking everywhere is tiring, especially without shoes. If you do what the Baduy
    people do, your feet will get blisters because it will be difficult to withstand the heat from the
    streets.

    3. The door of the house must face north or
    south

    As previously discussed, the Baduy people are very careful in carrying out various activities, especially if
    those activities are related to nature.

    Apart from using all materials from nature, the Baduy people also always build their houses facing north or
    south.
    This is done so that their homes can be fully exposed to sunlight.

    4. It is forbidden to use electronic goods

    As modern humans, we obviously cannot live without electronics. It’s not just electronics like
    televisions, or fans, we can’t even stay away from
    our smartphones .

    A day without a smartphone will feel like a century. Feeling how important
    a smartphone is , some people are even willing to turn around if they leave their
    smartphone at home.

    The Baduy people are just the opposite. Since childhood, they have never been acquainted with
    electronic goods.
    Instead of having fans or televisions at home, the majority of Baduy people
    also don’t use
    smartphones .

    Nowadays, some outside Baduy people are already acquainted with electronic goods. But still,
    the electronic goods used are also very limited.

    5. You may only wear all black or white
    clothes

    One of the characteristics of the Baduy tribe is that they always wear black clothes. This
    clothing makes them easier to spot on the streets.

    Most people usually wear clothes in a certain color because they like that color. However, for
    the Baduy people, the color of their clothes is part of their identity.

    The all-black clothes show that they are from the Outer Baduy. Meanwhile, the Baduy Dalam
    always wear white clothes.
    Compared to the Outer Baduy people who often travel, the Inner Baduy
    people never use technology in their lives, and never leave their village.

    6. It is forbidden to wear modern clothes

    Clothing trends are one of the fastest changing trends. Every month, there are new clothing
    trends that are interesting to try.
    People who live in cities are usually easily influenced by
    the various types of clothes that are currently trendy.

    However, no matter how cool clothing trends are currently popular, the Baduy people will never be
    interested in wearing them.
    This is because since childhood, they are accustomed to wearing
    black or white clothes that are sewn manually.
    So do all the people who live in their
    village.

    For those of us who are used to living in cities, wearing all black or all white clothes every day might
    seem boring.
    However, for the Baduy people, wearing clothes that are currently in trend is what
    they, especially the Baduy Dalam residents, will see as strange.

    Conclusion

    The life of the Baduy people is indeed much simpler than those of us who live in urban areas and are very
    close to all the advanced technology that is around us.
    But on the one hand, they are also
    worthy of being an example for those of us who live in cities.
    One of their good examples is
    how much they care about nature and really like simplicity.

    They realize that no matter how advanced life is, humans will always depend on nature. The
    destruction of nature, will make humans threatened.
    We who live in cities, are we aware of
    that?
    Instead of protecting it, most people deliberately destroy nature for their own sake.
    Even if nature is damaged, humans will also lose.

    For Sinaumed’s who want to learn about the Baduy Tribe and other tribes in Indonesia, you can really visit
    sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits, we always try to provide the best
    and newest information for you and #MoreWithReading with sinaumedia.

  • Get to know the Backflow Theory in the Entry of Hindu-Buddhist Religion

    The Backflow Theory – The Backflow Theory as one of the theories that explains the process of
    the entry of Hindu-Buddhism into Indonesia due to the back and forth flow of Indian and Indonesian people to
    Indonesia.

    Understanding Backflow Theory

    Backflow Theory as one of the theories put forward to explain the process of the entry of Hindu-Buddhist
    religions into Indonesia.
    This Backflow Theory was put forward by FDK Bosch as a form of
    opposition to the Colonialization Theory which was then deemed inappropriate.

    According to Bosch, the Indonesian people play an active role in spreading this religion.
    According to the Backflow Theory itself, the spread of Hindu-Buddhist religion to Indonesia was
    caused by an interest of the Indonesian people in a teaching brought by intellectuals from India who were
    passionate about teaching Hindu-Buddhism by previously boarding merchant ships.

    The Backflow Theory is also supported by historical evidence from the Nalanda Inscription. In
    this inscription it is mentioned that Balaputradewa is the King of Sriwijaya and then made a request to the
    king in India to build a monastery in Nalanda which was used by Sriwijaya figures in gaining
    knowledge.

    This request was then granted so that students and figures in Sriwijaya could study religion in India and then
    return to Indonesia and spread Hindu-Buddhist religions.

    This Backflow Theory then has its advantages and disadvantages. These advantages include the
    Nalanda Inscription which supports this theory and explains the desire of Sriwijaya figures to study in
    India.

    However, this Backflow Theory also has weaknesses, one of which is the possibility that Indonesian people will
    find it difficult to study religion in India because at that time Indonesian people were considered to be very
    passive.

    Backflow Theory and
    Other Theories about the Entry of Hindu-Buddhism to Indonesia

    The theory of Hindu-Buddhist entry into Indonesia with five theories that developed in the archipelago.
    The development of this religion itself can be seen from its historical heritage, namely Borobudur
    and Prambanan, as well as the Hindu-Buddhist kingdoms in Indonesia.

    There are two opinions that explain how Hindu-Buddhist religion entered Indonesia. First,
    Hindu-Buddhism entered Indonesia starting from the Brahmin theory, the Kshatriya theory, and the Vaishya
    theory.
    In this theory, the Indians then spread Hindu-Buddhist religion and culture to the
    people of the archipelago.

    In the next theory, namely the theory of reverse flow, the people of the Archipelago then went to India and
    studied Hindu-Buddhist teachings which were spread to Indonesia.
    To find out more about the
    theory of the arrival of Hindu-Buddhism in Indonesia, see the full explanation below.

    Brahmin theory

    The “Brahmin” theory states that the entry of Hindu-Buddhism into Indonesia was pioneered by Brahmins who
    came from India.
    Brahmins themselves are religious leaders in the caste system with the highest
    position compared to other groups.

    In the teachings of Hinduism, the group that is then allowed to spread Hinduism is the Brahmins.
    Because this opinion about the background of Hindu-Buddhist entry into Indonesia was then supported
    by these customs.

    Concrete evidence or concrete evidence used as the basis for the Brahman theory includes inscriptions from the
    relics of the Hindu-Buddhist kingdoms that have been found in Indonesia.

    Most of these inscriptions have writing consisting of Pallawa letters and Sanskrit, in India itself these
    languages ​​and letters are only controlled by Brahmins.
    Then the Brahmins also spread this
    religion by coming to the archipelago at the invitation of tribal chiefs and kings.

    The reason for inviting the Brahmins by tribal chiefs and kings in the archipelago was due to their
    interest in the religion adhered to by Indian traders who then arrived in the archipelago.
    Previously, the religion adopted by the community and the kingdom was dynamism and animism.

    Then who are the supporters of the Brahmin theory? The originator of this theory himself was
    named JC Van Leur as a writer from Europe during the Dutch East Indies era or during the Colonial
    era.

    While living in Indonesia, he wrote Indonesian history using a sociological approach. His
    thoughts were heavily influenced by Max Weber and German sociologists.

    The strengths and weaknesses of the Brahmana Theory include the Brahmins as the group who know and understand the
    teachings of Hinduism so that they are the ones who have the right and are able to spread them.

    The weakness of the Brahmin Theory, namely according to the rules or teachings of Ancient Hinduism in India, is
    that it emphasizes that a Brahmin is prohibited from crossing the ocean, if violated then he will lose his caste
    status.

    Knight Theory

    Another theory of Hindu-Buddhist entry into Indonesia is the Vaisya theory. According to the
    contents of the Kshatriya theory, the spread of Hindu-Buddhism in Indonesia was then carried out by a knight
    or group of soldiers who at that time were holding power and government of India.

    Kshatriya is the second caste in the teachings of Hinduism, its position is below the Brahmins.
    According to historical records, in the second century AD there was an upheaval in the kingdoms in
    India which eventually led to their collapse, which was also caused by a power struggle.

    The defeated rulers, especially from the knight class, then fled to other areas, one of which was the
    Archipelago.
    When they arrived in the archipelago, they then established kingdoms with a
    Hindu-Buddhist style.

    Starting from here, they spread the teachings of this religion to the people of the country, who at that
    time still adhered to animism and dynamism.
    Besides religion, culture also developed and mixed
    with the culture that existed at that time.

    The figure supporting the Knight Theory is named Cornelis Christian Berg or abbreviated as CC Berg.
    A writer of Dutch descent born in Bandung on February 7, 1934), Mookerji and Prof. Dr.
    Ir. JL Moens.

    They later became figures who argued that it was the warrior class that brought the Hindu-Buddhist religion
    to the archipelago.
    The strengths and weaknesses of this theory include the spirit of adventure
    to conquer other areas.

    While the drawback of this theory is that there is no written evidence regarding the arrival of the knights from
    India

    Sudra theory

    The fifth theory is the Sudra theory, the opinion of Van Faber. He stated that the spread of Hindu and Buddhist
    religion and culture in the archipelago was carried out by the Sudras or slaves (the lowest strata in Hinduism).

    Initially, these Sudras migrated to the archipelago, they then settled and spread religion to people who still
    adhere to animism and dynamism.

    The advantage of the Sudra Theory is that everyone who belongs to the Sudra caste definitely wants to improve
    their life so that it is better, one way is by leaving or moving to other regions and areas.

    Well, they then went to the archipelago. After arriving, they settled and began to spread
    Hindu-Buddhist religion and culture.
    The weakness of this theory is that the Sudras do not
    master Pallawa letters and Sanskrit and they generally do not have knowledge because they have not received
    an education.
    The possibility of them spreading religion and culture is very small.

    Vaisya theory

    The Vaisya theory is a theory which states that the process of entry and development of Hindu-Buddhist religion
    and culture is under the Vaisya group or traders.

    As we previously knew, during the Hindu-Buddhist kingdoms there were many traders from India who then came to the
    archipelago, so that later there was an interaction of trading activities that developed into a closer
    relationship, namely introducing what religion they professed.

    This ancient trade itself was not as easy as it is now. The traders who came from India could not just come
    and go, but had to wait for the right direction of the wind.
    Because the ships they use still
    rely on the direction of the wind in their journey.

    So we can analyze that their arrival will not last for a short time, but will take months.

    Supporting figures for the Vaisya Theory named Prof. Dr. NJ Krom (Nicholas
    Johannes Krom), born in the Netherlands on March 8, 1945. He is a prominent writer and researcher of early
    history and Indonesian traditional culture.

    The advantages of the Vaisya Theory are based on historical facts, many trade groups (Waisya) interact with
    indigenous people to then carry out buying and selling transactions, they also take advantage of this situation
    to spread Hinduism and Buddhism in Indonesia.

    The weakness or weakness of the Vaisya theory is that the traders who came later mastered the Pallawa letters and
    Sanskrit, because this ability alone was only owned by the Brahmins.

    Backflow Theory

    This reverse flow theory was put forward by FDK Bosch who later said that the spread of Hindu-Buddhist influence
    in Indonesia occurred due to an active role of the Indonesian people themselves.

    The introduction of this Hindu-Buddhist influence was also an initiative by Indians or priests, but it was the
    Indonesians who were sent by the king to the archipelago who spread it to study the religion and culture of
    Indian priests in their home country.

    After this envoy has mastered religious teachings, they will then return to Indonesia and convey it to the
    King.
    Furthermore, the king will ask the envoys to then disseminate and teach the knowledge
    obtained to the residents or people of the kingdom.

    This of course had an effect on the growing development of religious teachings in both Hindu and Buddhist
    religions and the formation of kingdoms with both Hindu and Buddhist styles in the archipelago.

    This reverse flow theory was also put forward by FDK Bosch who later stated that Indonesian people who
    adhere to Hinduism are based on the initiative of their own people.
    There are also many
    Indonesian people who deliberately come to India to study this religion.

    In addition, they also make pilgrimages and travel by establishing an organization called the Sangha.
    When he returned to Indonesia, these teachings were then disseminated to Indonesia.

    According to Prof. Dr. Sutjipto Wirjosuparto, the kings in this inscription are
    not Indians, but Indonesians.

    Books Related to Hindu-Buddhist History in
    Indonesia

    1. From Javanese Shivaism to Balinese Hinduism

    This book contains a collection of articles by Andrea Acri (lecturer and researcher at EPHE, PSL University,
    Paris) that focus on Shivaism (Shiva religion), tantrism, and Yoga in ancient Java and Bali, and its
    continuation (as the “Hindu religion” ) in Bali in modern times.

    Acri underscores the interrelationships of religious practices in Java and Bali with the traditions of Shivaism,
    Brahmanism and Hinduism in India, while also highlighting the transformation and indigenization of these
    traditions in Java and Bali over time with high intellectual and spiritual originality and value.

    It also emphasizes the continuity between ancient traditions and the new discourses that have developed in the
    modern and contemporary periods, both in Java (after the arrival of Islam in the 15th century) and in Bali
    (after the reform of Hinduism in the early 20th century).

    It is hoped that this book will be useful for introducing the specialties of ancient Javanese religion and
    culture to a wide audience in Indonesia, and helping to understand the problems of the nation and state of
    Indonesia today through an understanding of the past.

    2. The Rise and Fall of the
    Hindu-Buddhist Empire and Its Rise

    The first Islamic-style kingdom that emerged in the archipelago was not the Samudera Pasai Sultanate, but
    the Perlak Kingdom.
    Through this book, you will reveal the historical side of the kingdoms in
    the archipelago, especially regarding the causes of the collapse of the Hindu-Buddhist kingdoms and the
    birth of Islamic kingdoms.

    This history book does not only present the factors that caused the collapse of the Hindu-Buddhist kingdoms
    and the emergence of various Islamic empires.
    However, this book is also equipped with a
    detailed and comprehensive historical presentation;
    starting from the history of Hindu-Buddhist
    and Islamic entry into the archipelago, the history of the birth to the glory of each kingdom including the
    list of kings who once ruled, and the remnants of these kingdoms.

    You can also learn about the path of the collapse of the Hindu-Buddhist kingdoms and the birth of Islamic
    empires in the archipelago.
    Moreover, every historical material presented in this book is
    packaged coherently and based on reliable literature review.

    3. Traces of Javanese Hindu Kingdom
    Civilization 1042-1527 AD

    The establishment of the Hindu Dynasty in East Java cannot be separated from the story of the collapse of
    the Ancient Mataram Kingdom which was originally located in Central Java.
    Ancient Mataram had
    developed rapidly and became the center of a large Hindu civilization, but suffered a setback because it was
    triggered by feuds among family members.

    Then, the Isyana dynasty marked the beginning of the rule of Hindu kingdoms in East Java. This
    book discusses the traces of the civilization of the Hindu kingdoms in Java, from 1042 to 1527 AD, starting
    from Medang, Kahuripan, Tumapel, Singasari to Majapahit.
    Presented the history of its founding,
    the conflicts that colored it, important events that occurred, relics to the collapse of the Hindu dynasty
    in Java.

    Reading this book you will find historical facts about the civilization of the Hindu kingdom in Java.

    4. Introducing Hinduism as a
    Culture of Life Attitudes & Behaviors

    Hindu conceptions were once perceived as wrong, manipulated both for internal and external interests which
    were highly discredited.
    Because of that Hindu culture in the past was abandoned and even
    abandoned by the majority of this nation’s children.

    However, Hindu culture, which spanned more than 2000 years before AD to 2000 years after 1 AD (which was
    designated as the beginning of a new human civilization), turned out to be that Hinduism still existed, even
    in the most powerful external attacks.
    Even now there is a tendency for Hindus to
    revive.

    Hinduism is admired, accepted in almost all parts of the world. Hindu culture can even be offered as an
    alternative culture, the advanced culture of the future world, even without having to go through a
    missionary institution though.
    Why? This book introduces Hinduism as one culture,
    one unit and the whole attitude of daily life behavior (a way of life).

    As a culture that is based on the Vedas, on truth (natural/social reality as it really is), on science and on the
    noble values ​​of life as well as on the five beliefs (panca sradha), namely belief in God Almighty, belief in
    atman ( Spirit) that never dies, belief in the law of karma-reward, belief in reincarnation, and belief in
    moksha.

    Thus a review of the Backflow Theory. Sinaumed’s can get all books related to Hindu-Buddhist
    history at
    sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia
    always provides the best products for Sinaumed’s.

  • Get to know the Baby Boomers Generation, X, Y, Z and Alpha

    Getting to know the Baby Boomers Generation, X, Y, Z and Alpha – Sinaumed’s, the older the age, the more cross-generations are created. Have you ever heard the term baby boomers, generations X, Y, Z to alpha? What exactly is the thing that distinguishes these generations so that they are grouped so much? Before discussing the differences, we need to first look at what is meant by the generations above.

    As time goes by, with the birth rate increasing rapidly, new generations are being born rapidly as well. If you used to feel like you were the youngest generation when you were little, maybe now you are not.

    We realize that this rapid development will form a new generation that lives with new environmental conditions, in the sense of a more advanced environment. This clearly affects the pattern of life, the process of growth and even the character of each generation.

    Differences in Baby Boomers, X, Y, Z and Alpha Generations

    These generation terms are used to group people born in close years and in the same environmental conditions. So that it will be much easier for us to understand what human development was like from the past until now.

    1. Baby Boomers Generation (1946-1964)

    This generation is also called baby boomers not without reason, most people born during this period were born after World War II. At that time the increase in the birth rate was so great that it was like a birth explosion. This term began to be used in America and beyond to designate cultural demographics.

    Born after the war and during the reformation era of various countries, these baby boomers experienced many experiences as well as adaptation to unstable environmental conditions. Not infrequently these baby boomers also experience so many changes in education and politics.

    Baby boomers who were raised by disciplined and strict parents generally have high discipline, are mentally strong as steel, have strong principles and hold on to great loyalty and dedication. In contrast, baby boomers, who are now getting older when technology begins to develop, often experience difficulties adapting to technological sophistication. They need to learn how to use technology.

    You may often see grandparents who are diligent and always pursue one thing for a long time. They are also disciplined in getting through the day starting from getting up in the morning on time, and doing simple activities at home which are always the same. That’s because baby boomers are used to instilling discipline since they were small.

    So don’t be surprised to see people who until their old age serve a job for decades in the same field. Because people from that generation also hold fast to a high level of loyalty and dedication.

    At this time, people from this generation are still needed to maintain a stable and disciplined environment, both at home and at work. Ever seen a movie called The Intern? Then you will understand why this baby boomer generation can help stabilize a company, even when they are old.

    2. Generation X (1965-1980)

    In contrast to baby boomers who can have up to a dozen children, in Gen X the tradition of having not too many children has mushroomed. So that the birth rate in any country has also decreased drastically.

    Educated by disciplined parents, generation X generally has the characteristics of being independent, disciplined, logical hard worker and also prioritizing career. This is because baby boomer parents who have experienced an environment with unstable conditions emphasize their children to gain as much knowledge as possible and achieve a career.

    Especially when around the 80s, the world experienced various economic crises which greatly affected the lives of its people. So that the people at that time became more independent and were required to be smart in finding opportunities in order to survive well. These environmental conditions have made most of Generation X grow up with a mindset that is creative, tough, and also smart in finding solutions to every problem.

    Generation X, who grew up in the 70s and 80s, also began to recognize various types of new technology, such as the telephone or TV, which did not exist before their parents. The children of that generation also began to develop various technologies that would later be used by the next generation, such as pagers .

    People from this generation are already the parents of Generation Y, or some even have grandchildren. If you are currently around 25 years old and above, then most likely your parents are from generation X.

    3. Generation Y (1981-1995)

    Millennials can also be said to be the generation that has experienced so many significant changes in technology and the economy. Growing up during the transition from analog to digital technology, the advent of the internet and social media has made these millennial children so sophisticated, creative, free and willing to take risks.

    Millennials are also known to be very expressive and open-minded compared to their predecessors, who were still stiff and firm. People in this generation tend to be braver in terms of expressing opinions, high self-confidence and out of the box .

    So, it’s no wonder that people from baby boomers or generation X often feel that their children tend to break the rules more often, because millennials are so expressive and put themselves first. Compared to previous generations, millennials are much lazier and often change interests and jobs.

    4. Generation Z (1996-2010)

    Technology is increasingly advanced and the internet is so fast, making this generation Z already feel a lot of convenience in terms of facilities, access and also family financial stability. So do not be surprised if this generation is now growing up to be much smarter, more accomplished and healthier children.

    At this time, the internet is so widespread and easily accessible that this makes children in generation Z more proficient and active in interacting in cyberspace. So sometimes this generation is also called igeneration, which is the internet generation. How to use social media? Unlike baby boomers and generation X, Gen Z is already adept at using social media and browsing without anyone teaching them.

    The positive thing is, this generation Z grows to be children who are open-minded, like diversity, like new things, think critically and want to be different or bring about change. Having an environment that has been permeated with technology all the time, they tend to enjoy using technology and the internet.

    In this generation, children have been facilitated with technology such as smartphones, laptops, tablets and others. they are also educated by parents who have an open mind, so it is not uncommon for Gen Z to be able to make decisions and make their choices since childhood.

    On the other hand, there is also a negative side to this easy-going generation. Gen Z tends to be more consumptive and wasteful, this is also supported by the financial ability of their parents so that large facilities make some people so wasteful and like shopping for imported brands.

    Some children in this generation are also more ‘eager’ than the previous generation, because they feel that they don’t need a big effort anymore to get the things they want because anything can be accessed through gadgets . Sometimes, all the conveniences they feel right now are also the mental reason why this generation is not as strong as baby boomers and generation X.

    From the millennial generation to generation X, problems often arise around people’s mental health , because advanced environmental conditions sometimes cause a lot of pressure. For parents who have children in this generation, of course, they need to learn a lot and think broadly so they can monitor their children.

    5. Generation Alpha (2011-present)

    So it’s not a stranger if we see young children who are good at using cellphones or accessing the internet nowadays. The reason is that they were born side by side with technology that continues to advance and develop.

    Today’s children are used to television, gadgets, and are even familiar with various electronic devices at home. They also tend to be more intelligent, quickly understand situations and can recognize things well.

    The positive thing is that many children today are able to read and memorize the alphabet from an early age because they recognize the writing and icons on cellphones or tablets. Today’s children are also much more critical and understand the situation well, so that parents can no longer use lies as an excuse to get their children to eat or study.

    However, today’s parents also need extra abilities to care for the children of this alpha generation, because these children can no longer be educated using the same methods as children of the previous generation. Parents must be more creative and also need to take many approaches to children.

    Gadgets are also a big part of the problem when raising children of this alpha generation. This is because the alpha generation who depend on gadgets makes it difficult for them to let go and tend to be more reluctant to socialize with their friends. This also causes a high risk of mental illness in this generation in the future, because of the great pressure from the environment and also academic demands.

    Today’s parents can overcome this by learning a lot from other people’s experiences and books.

    Educating Generations Z and A

    For young parents, who are having small children or teenagers, it may be difficult to understand children. This is because the large differences across generations do indeed form different traits. So this book will help parents understand their children who are in the Z and Alpha generations.

    Baby boomers are those who grew up in a post-war environment so that they form people who are disciplined, highly dedicated and have a strong leadership spirit. They give birth to Gen X children who are independent, creative, focused on careers, because they did not have economic stability when they were young.

    Gen X who are starting to pursue a career will devote all their efforts to the millennial generation in order to get a much more decent life. On the other hand, millennials also grow with technological changes that are starting to progress, thus forming free, courageous and creative souls. So it is most likely that most millennials have children between generations Z and alpha, which are far more critical and modern.

    Which Generation Are You?

    Are you part of the cross-generation of baby boomers, X, Y, or Z?

    Whatever the generation, it is important for us to respect each other. The magnitude of the character differences across generations sometimes makes people in different generations have a bad view of other generations.

    This often happens and cannot be denied, because everyone from each generation has different characteristics and experiences that are different too.

    Just like in a big family where there are grandparents, fathers, mothers, brothers and sisters, of course, you often feel the difference in character, mindset and experience. But these differences can actually be a beautiful thing.

    The diversity of this generation is always interesting to discuss, if you are one of those who like this review then you can read other books about cross-generations here. Let’s see the recommendations!

    Generations X, Y & Zoomers At Work

    What is the working pattern of generations X, Y, and Z like? are there differences across generations in the world of work? If you are interested in discussing generations, then this book seems to be an interesting read to find out what are the differences between people from generation to generation when working.

    Children nowadays are lazy, they only work on their cellphones! Often hear this saying from parents? Maybe it seems that Generation Z is always playing with cellphones, but from there they are actually all the creativity that is trending in society. In this book you can get to know more about the positive impact that generation Z is able to have when they work.

  • Get to know the Author of the Book of Algebra, Muhammad Bin Musa Al-Khwarizmi

    Author of the Book of Algebra – One of the contributions of Islamic civilization in the field of mathematics is algebraic calculations or Algebra. Algebra is a designation for western nations which is then enshrined in a book. The author of the book of algebra is Abu Ja’far Muhammad bin Musa Al Khawarizmi.

    “Among the famous Islamic mathematicians is Al Khwarizmi. He is the author of the book Algebra Wal Muqabalah (the science of arithmetic) and the inventor of the number zero ,” reads the statement from the book Islamic Religious Education: Based on General Education by Enzus Trianus et al. In the book, Al Khwarizmi introduces starting from natural numbers to solving linear and quadratic equations.

    Not only that, but also introduced simple mathematical calculation methods or algorithmic theories such as addition, subtraction, division and multiplication. Therefore, Al Khawarizmi named his work with the full title Hisab Algebra Wal Muqabalah (The Compendious Book on Calculation by Completion and Balancing) .

    The word Al Jabar refers to the meaning of Completion (completion) and Al Muqabala which means Balancing (balancing) as quoted from the book Locked Mouth: 50 The Haru Story of the Companions of the Prophet by Siti Nurlaela.

    This book also introduced the science of algebra and the name itself on the European continent and also spread Arabic numerals in the western world. Therefore, the book of Algebra was later translated into Latin as well as becoming the standard textbook for mathematics at every leading European university until after the 14th century. In fact, until now, the algebraic theory of Al Khawarizmi is said to be the person who first taught algebra in its basic form and won the title ” Father of Al Jabar “.

    Despite being nicknamed “Father of Al Jabar”, according to history, Al-Khwarizmi was not the only person who became the author of the book of algebra and developed algebra. Quoted from the book History of Islamic Civilization by Prof.Dr. HJ Suyuthi Pulungan, MA., Algebraic concepts have been previously introduced by Diophantus from Greece.

    However. At that time, algebra was still limited to the concept of thinking, not even named algebra as it is known today. Until, the book Al Gebra from Al Khawarizmi covers the development of these thinking concepts and presents them in a new form with complex theorems.

    In addition, Al-Khwarizmi is also known for successfully introducing the Hindu decimal system to Islam and Europe, discovering the quadrans vetus ( horary quadrant ), developing sundials, tables, trigonometry to perfecting Ptolemy’s astronomical and geographical theories.

    It turned out that during his lifetime, Al-Khwarizmi had worked at a magnificent palace of his time, namely The house of Winston in Baghdad. Through this work, Al-Khwarizmi became acquainted with Greek scientific texts and studied and wrote about algebra, geometry and astronomy which supported him to become the author of the book Algebra.

    Profile of Muhammad Bin Musa Al-Khwarizmi

    Muhammad bin Musa Al-Khwarizmi al-majusi al karbalai is a magi, namely an expert in mathematics, astronomy, astrology, and geography who comes from Kufa, Iraq. He was born around 780 in Khwarezmia which is today Khiva, Uzbekistan.

    Khwarezmia which was in the Province of Khurasan during the rule of the Abbasids which is now Xorazm, a province of Uzbekistan. He died around 850 in Baghdad.

    His title was ”Abu ‘Abdullah”. The historian al-Tabari named him Muhammad bin Musa al-Khwārizmī al-Majusi al-Karbalai. About al-Khawārizmī”s religion, Toomer writes: Another name for him was given by al-Tabari, “al-Majusi”, which indicates he was a follower of Zoroastrianism. This may happen to people who come from Iran. However, later in the book Al-Jabar he showed himself as a Muslim.

    For most of his life, he worked as a lecturer at the School of Honor in Baghdad which was founded by the Abbasid Caliph Ma’mun Ar-Rashid. This place was where he studied natural sciences and mathematics, including studying translations of Sanskrit and Greek texts. In the Kitab al-Fihrist Ibn al-Nadim , a brief history is found, along with his writings. Al-Khwarizmi took up most of his work between 813-833.

    After Islam entered Persia, Baghdad became a center of learning and commerce, and scientists from China and India traveled to this city, which he also did. He worked in Baghdad at the School of Honor founded by the Abbasid caliph Al-Ma’mun, where he studied natural sciences and mathematics, including studying translations of Sanskrit and Greek manuscripts.

    His first book is Al-Kitab al-Mukhtashar fil Hisab al jabr w’al Muqabala . This book is the first book that discusses the systematic solution of linear equations and quadratic equations, so he is called the Father of Algebra. Al-Khwarizmi also played an important role in introducing Arabic numerals through the work Kitab al-Jam’u wa-l-tafrīq bi-ḥisāb al-Hind which was later adopted as standard numbers used in various languages ​​and later introduced as the Decimal Position Numbering System in the world. West in the 12th century. He revised and adapted Ptolemy’s Geography as well as working on writings on astronomy and astrology.

    His contribution as the author of the book of algebra has not only had a major impact on mathematics, but also on language. The word “algebra” itself comes from the word al-Jabr, one of two operations in mathematics to solve quadratic notation, which is listed in his book. The word algorithm is taken from the word algorithmi, the Latinization of its name. His name is also absorbed in Spanish, guarismo, and in Portuguese. Algarismo itself has the meaning of “digit”.

    His major works in mathematics, astronomy, astrology, geography, cartography, served as foundational and later innovations in algebra, trigonometry, and in other fields he studied. His logical and systematic approach to solving linear (Linear) and quadratic notation provides accuracy in algebraic disciplines, the name taken from the name of one of his books in 830 AD, al-Kitab al-mukhtasar fi hisab al-jabr wal-muqabala or: ” Summary Book for Calculations by Complementing and Balancing”.

    This book is the first book which was later translated into Latin in the 12th century. His book, Calculations with Hindu numerals, written in 825, sets out the ability of the diffusion of Indian numerals into the Middle East and later Europe. His book translated into Latin, Algorithmi de numero Indorum, shows the word algorithm in Latin.

    Some of his contributions are based on Persian and Babylonian Astronomy, Indian numerals, and Greek sources. His systematic and corrective of Ptolemy’s data on geography is a tribute to Africa and the Middle East. Another of his major books, Kitab al-ard “Views of the Earth”, which shows coordinates and basic locations known to the world, boldly evaluates the length values ​​of the Mediterranean Sea and the locations of cities in Asia and Africa previously given by Ptolemy.

    Later, he chaired the construction of the world map for Caliph Al-Ma’mun and participated in the project of determining the layout on Earth, together with 70 other geographers to create a map that was later called “know the world”. When his work was copied and transferred to European and Latin languages, it had a tremendous impact on the advance of basic mathematics in Europe. He also wrote about the astrolabe and sundials.

    Works of Muhammad Bin Musa Al-Khwarizmi

    The works of Muhammad Bin Musa Al-Khwarizmi are not only in the field of mathematics, but also about astronomy. The following are works from him.

    Book I: Algebra

    Al-Kitab al-mukhtaṣar fī ḥisāb al-jabr wa-l-muqābala or the Book that Summarizes Complementary and Balancing Calculations, is a mathematics book written in 830. This book summarizes algebraic definitions. When translated into Latin it is known as Liber algebrae et almucabala by Robert of Chester (Segovia, 1145) and also by Gerardus of Cremona.

    In the book, solving linear and quadratic equations is given by simplifying the equation to one of the six standard forms (here b and c are positive integers) square equals root (ax2 = bx) square equals constant number (ax2 = c) root equals constants (bx = c)squares and roots equals constants (ax2 + bx = c) squares and constants equals roots (ax2 + c = bx) constants and roots equals squared (bx + c = ax2) by dividing the coefficients of the square and uses two operations: al-jabr or recovery or equipment and al-muqabala or balancing. Al-jabr is the process of removing negative units, roots and squares from notation by using the same values ​​on both sides.

    For example, x2 = 40x – 4×2 simplifies to 5×2= 40x. Al-muqābala is the process of assigning a quantity of the same type to the side of the notation.

    For example, x2 + 14 = x + 5 simplifies to x2 + 9 = x.

    Several authors of algebra have published works under the name Kitāb al-ǧabr wa-l-muqābala , including Abū Ḥanīfa al-Dīnawarī, Abū Kāmil, Abū Muḥammad al-‘Adlī, Abū Yūsuf al-Miṣṣīṣī, Ibnu Turk, Sind bin ‘Alī, Sahl bin Bišr, and Šarafaddīn al-Ṭūsī.

    Book 2: Dixit Algorizmi

    Another book by al-Khawārizmī is on arithmetic, which survives in Latin, but is lost from the original Arabic. The translation was carried out in the 12th century by Adelard of Bath, who also translated the astronomical tables in 1126.

    In Latin manuscripts, it is usually anonymous, but generally begins with the words: Dixit algorizmi ” As al-Khawarizmi said “, or Algoritmi de numero Indorum ” al-Khwarizmi on Hindu artistic figures “, a new name given to his work by Baldassarre Boncompagni in 1857. The original book may have been named Kitāb al-Jam’a wal-tafriq bi-hisab al-Hind “ Book of Addition and Subtraction based on Hindu Calculations ”.

    Book 3: Planetarium Reconstruction

    15th century map based on Ptolemy for comparison. His third well-known book is the Kitab al-Ard “Book of Views of the World” or “Appearance of the Earth” translated by Geography, which was completed in 833 is the revision and refinement of Ptolemy’s Geography, consisting of a list of 2402 coordinates of cities and other geographical places following developments general.

    There is only one copy of the book Surat al-Ard, which is kept in the Strasbourg University Library. The Latin translation is housed in the Biblioteca Nacional de España in Madrid. The full title of the book is The Approach to the World, with Cities, Mountains, Seas, All Islands and Rivers, written by Abu Ja’far Muhammad bin Musa al-Khwarizmi based on the geographical studies written by Ptolemy and Claudius.

    The book begins with a list of latitudes and longitudes, including “Weather Zones”, which lists the effects of latitudes and longitudes on the weather. Paul Gallez, said that it is very useful to determine our position in a bad condition to make a practical approach. In neither the Arabic nor the Latin copies, nothing has survived from this book. Therefore, Hubert Daunicht reconstructed the map from a list of coordinates. He tried to find an approach similar to the map.

    Book 4: Astronomy

    Zij al-Sindhind’s book “Astronomical Tables” is a work consisting of 37 symbols on astronomical calendar calculations and 116 tables with calendarical, astronomical and astrological data as well as currently recognized data. The original Arabic version was lost, but another version by the Spanish astronomer Maslama al-Majriti survived in Latin, translated by Adelard of Bath (26 January 1126). Four other manuscripts in Latin remain in the Bibliothèque publique (Chartres), the Bibliothèque Mazarin (Paris), the Biblioteca Nacional (Madrid) and the Bodleian Library (Oxford).

    Book 5: The Jewish Calendar

    Al-Khwarizmi also wrote about the Jewish Calendar ” Guidelines for the Jewish Calendar “. The calendar describes the 19-year cycle of intercalation, the laws governing what day of the week the month of Tishri begins; takes into account the interval between the Jewish Era (creation of Adam) and the Seleucid era; and gave laws about the longitude of the sun and moon using the Jewish Calendar. This book is the same as that found by al-Biruni and Maimonides.

     

     

    Other Works of Muhammad Bin Al-Khwarizmi

    Several Arabic manuscripts in Berlin, Istanbul, Tashkent, Cairo and Paris contain approaches to material that may have come from al-Khwarizmī. The Istanbul manuscript contains a sundial, which is mentioned in the Fihrist. Other works, such as the determination of the direction of Mecca is one of spherical astronomy.

    Furthermore, two works contain morning ( Ma’rifat sa’at al-mashriq fī kull balad ) and azimuth determination of height ( Ma’rifat al-samt min qibalal-irtifā’ ).

    He also wrote 2 books on using and assembling astrolabes. Ibn al-Nadim in the Kitab al-Fihrist (an index of the Arabic language) also mentions the Kitab art or sundial books and the Kitab al-Tarikh or history books. However, the last 2 mentioned are missing.

    Mathematics

    Mathematics from Ancient Greek means “knowledge, thought, study, study”. Previously it was also stated that arithmetic is a field of science, which includes the study of topics such as number arithmetic and number theory. Formulas and structures related to algebra, figures and spaces in which they are located or geometry and its magnitudes and changes or calculus and analysis. There is no general agreement on its exact scope or epistemological status.

    Mathematics has always flourished, for example in China in 300 BC, in India in 100 AD and in Arabia in 800 AD, until the Renaissance, when new mathematical discoveries interacted with new scientific discoveries leading to a rapid increase in the rate of discovery. mathematics. Continuing today, mathematics is used around the world as an important tool in a variety of fields, including natural sciences, engineering, medicine/medical sciences, and social sciences such as economics, and psychology.

    Applied mathematics, the branch of mathematics concerned with the application of mathematical knowledge to other fields, inspires and makes use of new mathematical discoveries, and sometimes leads to the development of entirely new disciplines, such as statistics and game theory.

    Mathematics is widely used in science for modeling phenomena. This allows the extraction of quantitative estimates from the experimental laws. For example, the motions of planets can be predicted with high accuracy using Newton’s laws of gravity combined with mathematical calculations. The independence of the mathematical truth of any experiment implies that the accuracy of such an estimate depends only on the adequacy of the model to describe reality.

    So, when there are some imprecise estimates, it means that the model has to be corrected or changed, it doesn’t mean that the math is wrong. For example, Mercury’s apse or perihelium precession cannot be explained by Newton’s laws of gravity, but it is accurately described by Einstein’s general relativity. This experimental validation of Einstein’s theory shows that Newton’s law of gravity is only an approximation (which is still very accurate in everyday life).

    Mathematics is important in many fields, including natural sciences, engineering, medicine, finance, computer science, and social sciences. Several areas of mathematics, such as statistics and game theory, were developed in direct correlation with their applications, and are often grouped under the name applied mathematics.

    Other areas of mathematics were developed independently of any application, so they are called pure mathematics, but practical applications are often found later. A good example is the prime factorization problem, which refers to Euclid, but had no practical application prior to its use in the RSA crypto system, namely for computer network security.

    That is the figure of the author of the Book of Algebra . To learn more about Mathematics, Astrology, and others, Sinaumed’s can read books available at sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia always tries to give its best so that you have #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

  • Get to know the Australian Continent and the Causes of Deserts in Australia

    Causes of Deserts in Australia – Australia is the smallest continent in the world. Australia is a country in the southern hemisphere consisting of the mainland of the Australian continent, the island of Tasmania and various small islands in the Indian Ocean and the Pacific Ocean. This country has only one country, namely Australia. The territory of Australia is made up of diverse landscapes ranging from mountains to deserts. Australia is a developed and prosperous country. Australia is the 13th largest economy in the world.

    In addition Australia ranks high in many comparisons of performance across nations such as development, quality of life, health care, life expectancy, general education, civil liberties, and political rights. Australia is a member of the United Nations, major G20 Economies, Commonwealth of Nations, ANZUS, AUKUS, Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development, Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation, Pacific Islands Forum, and the World Trade Organization.

     

    As reported by Geoscience Australia, Australia is the driest continent in the world. About 35 percent of the continent’s total receives little rain. Australia’s deserts are scattered throughout the western highlands and lowlands. Based on sources from a book entitled “World Regional Geography” in 2020 written by Sulistinah and Kuspriyanto, the location of the Australian Continent is in the south of the Asian continent.

    Astronomically this continent is located between approximately 11°S-44°S and approximately 115°E-153°E. Australia’s area reaches about 7,682,300 km² or only about 5.2% of the world’s land area. Australia has a coastline of 34,218 km (excluding islands off the coast of the continent), and a recognized extension of the Exclusive Economic Zone of 8,148,250 km². This exclusive economic zone does not include the Australian Antarctic Territory. Excluding Macquarie Island, Australia is located between 9° S, and 44° S, and 112° E, and 154° E.

    Australia’s climate is strongly influenced by ocean currents, including the Indian Ocean Dipole and the El-Niño Southern Oscillation which are correlated with periodic droughts and the seasonal tropical low pressure system that generates cyclones in northern Australia. The factors that affect rainfall vary from year to year. Most of the north of the country has a predominantly tropical, or monsoon, summer rainy climate.

    Underneath three-quarters of Australia lies a desert or less fertile zone. Western Australia’s Southwest Corner has a Mediterranean climate. Much of the southeast (including Tasmania) has a temperate climate. Although most of Australia is not very fertile and even a desert. But Australia has a wide variety of habitats from alpine meadows to tropical rainforests, and is recognized as a megadiverse country.

    Due to the continent’s ancient age, highly variable weather patterns and geographical remoteness, much of Australia’s biota is unique, and diverse. Approximately 85% of flowering plants, 84% of mammals, more than 45% of birds, and 89% of nearshore, temperate zone fish are endemic. Australia has a large number of reptiles from other countries, as many as 755 species. The forests of Australia have mostly evergreen species, especially eucalyptus in fertile areas, acacia replaces them in drier areas, desert being the predominant species.

    Among Australia’s fauna are the monotremes (platypus and echidna), a number of marsupials, kangaroos, koalas, wombats and birds (emu and kookaburra).

    Australia is home to many dangerous animals including some of the most venomous snakes in the world. The dingo was introduced by Austronesian people who traded with native Australians around 3000 AD. Many species of plants and animals became extinct soon after the first human occupation, including the megafauna of Australia, others disappeared since European colonization, notably the Thylacine.

    Many of Australia’s ecoregions, and species within those areas, are threatened by human activities, and animal or plant species introduced to Australia. The 1999 Federal Act on Environmental Protection and Biodiversity Reserves is a legal framework for the protection of endangered animals. Many protected areas have been created under the “National Strategy for the Protection of Australia’s Biodiversity” to protect, and conserve, a wide variety of unique ecosystems; 65 wetlands are registered under the Ramsar Convention, and 15 natural UNESCO World Heritage Sites have been established. Australia is ranked 51st out of 163 countries in the world on the 2010 Environmental Performance Index.

    Aboriginal food is heavily influenced by the region in which they are located. Most tribal groups depended on a simple Paleolithic diet, hunting land animals or fish, and gathering endemic plants and fruits. The general term for the species of flora and fauna native to Australia and used as a source of food is bushfood . The first settlers from Europe introduced British food to the continent with many of what is now considered Australian fare, based on the Sunday roast, which has become a lasting tradition for many Australians. Since the early 20th century, food in Australia has become increasingly influenced by immigrants, particularly from Southern Europe, and Asian cultures.

    Australian wine is produced in 60 different production areas, which total about 160 thousand hectares , mainly in the southern regions, the coldest parts of the country. The wine regions in each of these states produce different varieties and styles that take advantage of local climates and soil types. The dominant varieties are Syrah, Cabernet, Sauvignon, Chardonnay, Merlot, Sémillon, Pinot noir, Riesling and Sauvignon blanc. In 1995, an Australian red wine, the Penfolds Grange , won the Wine Spectator award for “Wine of the Year”, being the first wine from outside France or California to achieve this award.

    Australian Boundaries

    Australia is bounded by the following territorial boundaries:

    • To the north it is bordered by the Timor Sea (east Leste) and the Arafuru Sea (Indonesia).
    • To the north it is bordered by the Pacific Ocean and the Tasman Sea.
    • To the west and south it is bordered by the Indian Ocean.

    Quoted from the Australian Bureau of Statistics (ABS), Australia is the driest continent in the world and has the largest desert area in the Southern Hemisphere. More than one third of the continent is effectively a desert and more than two thirds of the continent is classified as arid or semiarid. The desert is defined in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) as a barren desert or desert.

    Australian Economy

    Australia follows a market economy system with a high GDP per capita and a low poverty rate. The Australian dollar is the currency of this country, including the islands of Christmas Island, the Cocos (Keeling) Islands and Norfolk Island, as well as the independent Pacific island nations of Kiribati, Nauru and Tuvalu. After in 200y the merger of the Australian Stock Exchange and the Sydney Futures Exchanges, now the Australian Stock Exchange is the 9th largest stock exchange in the world.

    Ranked third in the 2010 Index of Economic Freedom, Australia is the 13th largest economy in the world, and also has the 9th largest per capita GDP in the world, higher than the United Kingdom, Germany, France, Canada, Japan and the United States. Union. Australia is also ranked second in the 2010 UN Human Development Index, and first in Legatum’s 2008 Prosperity Index.

    All major cities in Australia are no longer subject to the world comparative livability survey, because they have exceeded the predetermined requirements; Melbourne reached the second place in The Economist’s 2008 criteria for the most liveable cities in the world, followed by Perth (4th), Adelaide (7th) and Sydney (9th). The total government debt in Australia is of $190 billion. Housing prices in Australia are among the highest, while some levels of household debt are among the highest in the world.

    Strengthening commodity exports, over manufactured goods, has supported a significant increase in Australia’s trade ratio since the start of the century, due to rising commodity prices. Australia has a balance of payments greater than a negative 7% of GDP, and has had a current account deficit for more than 50 years. Australia’s average annual economic growth is 3.6% over 15 years, compared to the OECD’s annual average of 2.5%. Opinions differ as to whether or not Australia was one of the few OECD countries that avoided the slump in the 2008 economic crisis. Six of Australia’s major trading partners have experienced an economic downturn which has in turn affected Australia, and economic growth has constrained the country for several years.

    In the 1980s, the Labor Party, led by Prime Minister Bob Hawke and Treasurer Paul Keating, began the process of modernizing the Australian economy by floating the dollar.

    Australia in 1983, and regulate the financial system. Since 1996 the Howard government has continued a process of microeconomic reform, including deregulation of part of the labor market and the privatization of state-owned enterprises, especially the telecommunications industry. Substantial reform of the indirect tax system was achieved in July 2000 with the introduction of a 10% goods and services tax (GST) which reduced dependence somewhat on the personal and corporate income tax that still characterizes the Australian tax system.

    The Australian economy has not experienced a recession since the early 1990s. In July 2005, unemployment was still around 5%. The service sector, including tourism, education and financial services makes up 69% of GDP. Agriculture, and natural resources make up only 3%, and 5% of GDP, but contribute a lot to Australia’s exports. Australia’s largest export markets include Japan, China, the US, South Korea and New Zealand. Things that concern economists include the budget deficit ( current account deficit ), as well as high levels of net foreign debt ( net foreign debt ).

    In January 2007, the unemployment rate reached 10,033,480 people, at a rate of 5.1%. The youth unemployment rate (15-24) increased from 8.7% to 9.7% in 2008-2009. In the past decade, inflation was in the range of 2–3%, and base interest rates were 5–6%. The service sector economy, including tourism, education, and financial services, accounts for 70% of GDP. Although agriculture and natural resources account for only 3% and 5% of GDP (respectively), they contribute to export performance. Australia’s biggest export markets are Japan, China, the United States, South Korea and New Zealand. Australia is the world’s 4th largest exporter of wine, in an industry that contributes $5.5 billion annually to the national economy.

     

     

    Australian Politics

    Australia is a constitutional monarchy with a federative division of powers. Australia’s government follows a parliamentary system with Queen Elizabeth II at its apex, namely as Queen Australia, a role distinct from her position as queen to the rest of the Commonwealth of Nations. The Queen resides in the United Kingdom, and she is represented by delegates living in Australia, (the Governor-General at the federal level, and by the Governors at the state level), who by convention act on the advice of her ministers.

    Supreme executive authority rests with the Australian Constitution, but the power to exercise it is vested under the constitution to the Governor-General. The exercise of the Governor-General’s reserve powers against the request of the Prime Minister was the dissolution of the Whitlam Government during the 1975 constitutional crisis. In Australia there are three branches of government.

    The Legislature of the Australian Parliament consists of the Governor-General, the Senate and the House of Representatives. Executive; Federal Executive Council; in practice it is the Governor-General who is advised by the Prime Minister and Ministers of State. judicial; Australian Supreme Court, and other federal courts whose judges are appointed by the Governor-General on the advice of the Council.

    Australia has a bicameral parliament, each chamber being the Senate and the House of Representatives. In the Senate (upper house), there are 76 senators: namely from the six states each sent 12 representatives, while from the two territories each sent two representatives. The DPR (lower house of assembly) consists of 150 members who are elected from 150 electors, meaning that only one representative is sent from one electorate. Electorals (or seats as they are also called) are allocated to states on a population basis, provided that each original state is guaranteed a minimum of five seats.

    Elections to each chamber are usually held synchronously every three years, senators have overlapping terms of six years, except for those from the territories, whose terms are not fixed but are tied to the cycle of elections for the lower house; thus only 40 of the 76 seats in the Senate run for election unless the election cycle is interrupted by a twin dissolving.

    There are two main political groups that have traditionally formed government, at the federal and state levels: the Australian Labor Party, and the Coalition which is the official grouping of the Australian Liberal Party, and its minor counterpart, the Australian National Party. Independent members, and several minor parties, including the Australian Green Party, and the Australian Democratic Party, are represented in the Australian parliament, especially in the upper house.

    Following the election for the leadership of the Australian Labor Party, in 2010, Julia Gillard became the first female Prime Minister in June 2010. Federal elections were held on 21 August 2010, and neither party has held an absolute majority in 50 years. Gillard was able to form a minority Labor government with the support of independents.

     

     

    Desert in Australia

    The National Climate Center, Australian Bureau of Meteorology, notes that worldwide, there is a belt of high pressure in the subtropics based on a latitude of about 30° (North and South), which results in dry conditions in areas near these latitudes. Australia’s dry conditions also occur in general eastward to North of this high pressure belt, except near the east coast of mainland Australia where it contains water vapor from the Pacific Ocean.

    The continental interior is also remote, in all directions, from potential sources of moisture. For much of Australia, there is no clear demarcation between arid regions and areas with sufficient moisture. There is no water vapor in the Australian area, causing the area to become dry. Australia’s position is what makes Australia the main location of the desert. The following is a list of deserts in Australia.

    The desert area that dominates the continent of Australia, is estimated to be around 1,492,000 km2 in area. In the middle of the lowland desert includes:

    • Great Victoria Desert (Western Australia, South Australia).
    • Tanami Desert (Western Australia, Northern Territory)
    • Great Sandy Desert (Western Australia)
    • Gibson Desert (Western Australia)
    • Simpson Desert (Northern Territory, Queensland, South Australia)
    • Tirari Desert (South Australia)
    • Strzelecki Desert (South Australia, Queensland, New South Wales)

    The Australian desert is often described as the land of immortals. Over the last 30 years, archaeological research and environmental history of Australia’s Quaternary deserts have revealed, not only their uniqueness but also their rich history. Therefore, it is not surprising that there are many unique plants and animals that only exist in Australia and are not found in other parts of the world.

    Is Sinaumed’s interested in learning more about Australia? If so, Sinaumed’s can read the book as additional information and get the book which is available at www.sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best!

  • Get to know the Amazing and Philosophical Traditional Balinese Houses

    Indonesia is a country that is rich in art and culture. Bali is one of the provinces that has a variety of cultures, even famous to foreign countries. It is this cultural diversity that ultimately makes many tourists visit Indonesia, especially Bali. Not only its cultural arts, Bali is also famous for its exotic and amazing natural attractions. This city is also increasingly famous for the presence of Balinese traditional houses that have been preserved to this day.

    So, for those of you who want to explore Bali further, it is important to know what Balinese traditional houses are and what their philosophy is. For that, see this article to the end to get all the information about Balinese traditional houses.

    Philosophy Attached to Balinese Traditional Houses

    Besides being rich in various buildings and rooms, Balinese traditional houses also have a unique philosophy. So, in every house building there is a belief that accompanies every step. Whether it’s about the shape, size, location, and philosophy that accompanies it. Well, for the people of Bali, there is a philosophy that says that harmony will be created in life.

    The condition is that there are three aspects that are fulfilled, namely Palahan, Pawongan, and Peahyangan. Therefore, when building a house or dwelling, all three must exist, which is commonly referred to as Tri Hita Karana. Pawongan means the occupants of the house, then Pawongan is interpreted as a good relationship between the people who are residents and the environment of the house they live in.

    The traditional architecture of the Balinese house itself has various decorations and carvings, furniture, and coloring. All of them have their own meaning and are not applied haphazardly. There are terms and their own meaning. These decorations are used to express the beauty of symbols and as a means of communication. In addition, the variety of decorations used also uses animals that are applied in the form of statues. These statues will also have symbols in the ritual process.

    So, when you travel to Bali, especially to the houses there, don’t be surprised if there are still many offerings here and there. These offerings will usually be placed in a container in the form of leaves and flowers with burning incense. Likewise with temples, whose buildings can be found anywhere. Even in offices or shops you can see a temple.

    This Balinese traditional house was built according to the Asta Kosala Kosali rules, which have terms of meaning and philosophy, and are almost similar to Chinese culture. Hence, when building a traditional house, the Balinese will pay attention to angles and directions. Because in the beliefs of the Balinese people, direction has an important meaning in the life of the Balinese. As for what is considered the most holy or sacred is when building a house in the direction of a mountain.

    Why? Because the mountain is considered something very sacred. So that the direction is also sacred, which is commonly referred to as Kaja. Well, conversely, things that are considered impure will be faced towards the sea, otherwise known as Kelod. This is also a benchmark when building village temples. Because it is considered sacred, the village temple will face the mountain or Kaja, while the dalem temple or shrine associated with death will face the sea or Kelod.

    These things have indeed been regulated by the Balinese indigenous people. In every life, even in terms of building traditional houses, they will always adhere to their religious and customary life. So it is only natural that every activity they carry out is based on certain rules.

     

    Various Kinds of Balinese Traditional Houses and Their Uniqueness

    Balinese traditional house has a special architecture, where the building has a structure, function, and also ornaments that have been used for generations. In fact, according to the community, their house buildings have been listed in the Vedic scriptures. The dwellings there are also likened to miniatures of the universe. The traditional house there has two parts, namely the Bentar Temple Gate and the residential house.

    The gate of Candi Bentar is a Balinese traditional house. There are specific rules regarding the construction of traditional Balinese traditional houses, which include the direction, location of the building, dimensions of the yard, building construction, and also the structure of the building.

    All of that is adjusted to the provisions of the local religion. This gate is the main characteristic of Balinese traditional houses. This gate is the main entrance to the courtyard and is always present in every Balinese traditional house. Then after passing through the gate, there will be a temple (a place of worship for Hindus), which is located separately from other buildings.

    In addition, there are several important elements that must be considered when building a Balinese traditional house. As there is a benchmark in the division of space. History has stated that land placement rules are governed by the Vedas (Asta Kosala Kosali).

    Where the Balinese traditional house becomes a miniature of the universe, or Bhiana Agung. It means to be a place for human activity or Bhuana Alit. The construction also has angle guidelines, such as the east and north corners which are considered more sacred than the south and west corners.

    To find out more about the exoticism of Bali, you can read sinaumedia’s book entitled Bali the Journey in Heaven on Earth or get it by clicking here .

    Balinese traditional houses also consist of several types of buildings, including the following:

    1. Angkul-Angkul

    These angkul are part of the Balinese traditional house which is the entrance to the main house. The function itself is almost the same as the Bentar Temple Gate. However, Angkul-angkul functions more as an entrance. The difference between the angkul-angkul and the Bentar Temple gate is the roof that connects the two parallel buildings.

    2. Aling-Aling

    The second building is the propeller. As the name implies, this building is a barrier between the angkul and the sacred courtyard. This Balinese traditional house building is believed to have a positive aura, so there is a dividing wall called penyengker. Inside the building will be provided space for the activities of its residents. Some people even use statues to act as a aling-aling, or a propeller.

    3. Family Temple

    The third building is the family temple. Generally, this building functioned as a place of prayer and worship. Every Balinese traditional house must have this building. Apart from being called the Family Temple, this building is also known as the Pamerajan building, or Sanggah. It is located in the northeast corner of the residential house.

    Well, apart from these three buildings, this traditional house also has its own division of rooms. The following are some of the room structures and their functions that you need to know:

    4. Bale Manten Traditional House

    The room in this traditional house building is reserved for the head of the family or girls. It must be located to the north. The shape of the room is rectangular with bale-bale on the left and right. In Balinese families, this Bale Manten is intended for girls in the family as a form of attention.

    5. Bale Dauh

    Apart from Bale Manten, there is Bale Dauh which is used by the Balinese as a special place to receive guests. This room also functions as a bed for teenage boys.

    Bale Dauh has the same shape as Bale Manten, which is a rectangle. However, it’s on the inside of the room, not in a corner. For its own position on the west side and the floor must be lower than Bale Manten. Then another characteristic, the number of pillars in Bale Dauh differs from one house to another.

    6. Bale agreed

    Third, there is Bale Sepat, which is more like a gazebo with four pillars. This place is usually used as a relaxing room for family members. With Bale Sekap it is hoped that every family member will be more familiar with one another. In addition, this place is also expected to make the relationship between family members more harmonious.

    7. Bale Gede

    Next is Bale Gede, which is also rectangular in shape with 12 pillars. This room has a function as a place for traditional ceremonies. So, because its function is quite sacred, its place must be higher than Bale Manten. This part of the traditional house must have a much larger size than other buildings. Because apart from traditional rituals, Bale Gede is also used to gather and serve Balinese specialties, including to burn offerings.

    8. Jineng or Klumpu

    Then there is Jineng or Klumpu, which has a medium size and uses wood as material. Its distinctive feature is in its higher position and is designed like a cave. Then the roof is made of dry straw.

    However, Jineng is now quite rare in Balinese traditional houses with traditional materials. Jineng is currently mostly built using sand, cement and brick materials. The roof is no longer thatched, but tiled.

    The building is made quite high, because it is used to store dry grain. With this room, the grain will also be protected from bird attacks and also the fungus that usually appears in damp places. Then for the bottom is usually used to store grain that has not had time to dry.

    9. Pawaregen

    Furthermore, there is pawaregen, which is the term for the kitchen in a Balinese traditional house. This kitchen or Pawaregen has a medium size, and is located to the northwest or south of the main house. There are two areas in this room, the first is for cooking, and the second is for storing kitchen tools. The cooking method is still traditional, using firewood.

    10. Barns

    Finally, there is a granary, which is a small building made as a place to store staple food. Staple foods that are usually stored for long periods of time are rice and corn.

    Various Carvings and Decorations for Balinese Traditional Houses

    In Hinduism, there is a caste system that accompanies every adherent. Therefore, according to the caste system, house construction cannot be generalized. Apart from caste, different economic factors between families are also taken into consideration.

    For ordinary people, the traditional houses built are usually made of clay or caps. While the nobles will use a pile of bricks as the basic foundation of their house. Then on top of it will use tiles.

    Apart from these rules, in Balinese traditional houses there are also various decorations and carvings. The architecture of the traditional house is indeed made in such a way by using carvings and sculptures as a complement.
    The decorations for this house are usually taken from human life, plants or animals. So, here are the various decorations and carvings that are on every side of the Balinese traditional house:

    grunt

    The first motif is a plant with curved flowers and leaves that are large and wide. Usually keketutan will be placed in a large place, such as the yard or in front of traditional buildings. There are many types of ketusans that are commonly used, such as tuwung flowers, wangsa, bun-buns, and other ketusans.

    rockiness

    Next is the shell, which is a sculpture or decorative motif like a dense plant with leaves falling down like a clump of shrubs. This kind of decoration is usually placed in the corner of the upper boundary or commonly called simbar coral. Then there are also tugek joints called coral suring.

    Pepatran

    Then there is the pepatran, which is a traditional Balinese home decoration with floral motifs. An example is patra sari which is usually found in narrow areas such as pillars and blandar. Other types of patra such as pid-pid, pal patra, tendril patra, ganggong patra, and also samblung patra. All of these ornaments are made with elongated berets.

    In Balinese traditional houses, the decorations used also use original colors, which use natural colors. In addition to using original colors from nature, there are also artificial original colors, such as red, blue and yellow. The overall variety of decoration used in each building is generally in the form of carvings, pepulasan, inlays, lelengisan, and pepalihan.

    Apart from using decorative motifs in the form of flora, there are also decorations with fauna. Usually pictures of fauna will be engraved on the walls or other carving areas. For its kind, it generally uses folklore or legends circulating in Balinese society.

    This fauna ornament can also be applied in the form of sculptures that have abstract, expressionist, or realist patterns. Fauna in buildings is also commonly used as a decoration on baseboard joints, such as using the form of an eagle, or a winged lion and other forms.

    As for Balinese society, decoration in the form of fauna functions as a ritual symbol, which is displayed in the form of a pratima statue. Then for the various animal ornaments they also have their own names, such as flaws, which have the shape of elephants and also primitive imaginary animals.

    The types of decoration include sae coral, goak coral, bentulu coral, boma coral, and tapel coral. There are also statues in the form of imaginary gods, or they can also be in the form of statues of garuda, turtles, oxen, monkeys, lions or dragons.

    So, those were some things about Balinese traditional houses which are rich in art and culture. Apart from that, the traditional houses there also have a very deep philosophy. Every matter related to the construction of traditional houses has been regulated and adapted to the beliefs of the Balinese people, including religious beliefs. So that everything is completely orderly and meaningful. Even down to the variety of decorations in the traditional house also has its own meaning and rules.

    This indicates that Bali has a very diverse cultural wealth. So it is very important for the next generation to continue to preserve it. Well, for those of you who want to learn more about Bali, you can read sinaumedia’s book entitled Mini Encyclopedia of Nusantara Traditional Houses and also Balian Dialogical Construction of Balinese Identity. Get both e-books via this link and this .

  • Get to know the 5 Variety of Riau Traditional Houses that Need to be Preserved

    Riau Traditional House – Sinaumed’s, what do you know about the Riau area? The province on the island of Sumatra is known as the largest oil producer in Indonesia. Not only that, Riau also went viral internationally because the vast forests in the province were on fire. The fog soared high into the neighboring country.

    On this occasion, we will explore more about Riau, specifically regarding Riau traditional houses. Like other traditional houses, the Riau traditional house is unique. What are the uniqueness of this Riau traditional house? Let’s look at Sinaumed’s in the explanation this time.

    As one of the provinces in Indonesia, Riau is located in the middle of the east coast of Sumatra Island. This province also consists of an archipelago which is a large group of small islands. Among the famous ones are Bintan Island and Batam Island which are located south of Singapore and east of Sumatra.

    With an area of ​​87,023.66 square km and a population of 6,493,603 people, Riau has a population density of 75 people per square kilometer. The capital city of Riau is in Pekanbaru as well as being the largest city in this province. The next largest city is Dumai.

    So far, Riau is known as a province that has abundant natural resource wealth. It’s no joke, Riau is the largest oil-producing region in Indonesia with a production of 365 thousand barrels per day. Fantastic isn’t it? In fact, because of the abundance of petroleum products in Riau, it is said that oil in Riau is not only produced from underground, but also from above the ground.

    Apart from petroleum, Riau also produces rubber, natural gas, fiber plantations, and palm oil. However, from time to time, large-scale deforestation occurs in Riau. Forest land was drastically reduced with the aim of opening new plantations for oil palm and paper production. This deforestation has resulted in severe haze and forest fires that have disrupted other areas and even neighboring countries such as Malaysia and Singapore.

    Variety of Riau Traditional Houses

    The native population of Riau comes from the Riau Malay tribe. This tribe has a long history so that this tribe has experienced many cultural adjustments to various places, namely Hinduism, Islam, China, Portugal, the Netherlands and England. Therefore, if Riau’s traditional houses are thick with Malay nuances, Sinaumed’s shouldn’t be surprised.

    Riau traditional houses can be identified by several general characteristics, namely that they generally face the river. Many traditional Riau communities use the river as a means of transportation. This is not surprising because many settlements in Riau are located along the Siak River.

    Another feature is that the majority of Riau traditional houses are in the form of stilt houses, the bottom of which is supported by strong wood at the edges. We need to remember that Riau is an area that has very large forests. Especially before experiencing deforestation.

    The extent of the forest is the habitat of various kinds of animals, ranging from tame to ferocious. To avoid attacks by wild animals, the Malay community designs their houses into stilt houses. But over time, the beasts have begun to decrease. The lower part of the house is mostly used for livestock pens.

    Not only that, the stilt house also serves to protect the house from flooding. Residences that are near the coast and rivers are very at risk of being flooded. Thus, the reason for the design of a stilt house has many functions.

    All right, Sinaumed’s, let’s just review this Riau traditional house.

    1. Malay House with Cut Lime Roof

    As the name suggests, this Rumah Melayu Limas Bambu has a roof in the shape of a three-dimensional pyramid. The word cut implies that the roof of this house is cut off at the ends of the roof. So, this pyramid-cut house is meant to show that the house has a roof like a pyramid but is cut off at the ends.

    Among other Riau traditional houses, maybe the Limas Cut Malay House is one of the types of traditional houses that you most often encounter there. This house is indeed used as the main residence by the local residents.

    The main concept of this traditional house is not much different from other Riau traditional houses. This house is like most Malay traditional houses in general, which is located at an altitude of 1.5 meters from the ground. With such a concept, Riau traditional houses can be said to be stilt houses.

    Why is a stilt house built like that? This is because in ancient times many Riau residents lived on the coast. Houses on stilts like this can ensure that their house will not be hit or drowned if the sea is experiencing high tide.

    This house is mainly made of wood and boards. On the front, provided several steps as the entrance to the main door. This house is dominated by yellow and red.

    For anyone who wants to build this traditional house, they are welcome to determine their own size. Because there are no specific rules that discuss the standard size of this house. Generally, the size of this traditional house indicates the economic and social status of the user. The larger the size of the house, the more financially secure the owner is. This conclusion is based on the large number of boards that are attached to build the house.

    Specifically, this traditional house is a traditional house originating from Batam Island. However, currently the pyramid house is generally used as a tourist destination. To preserve the culture in the form of this traditional house, the local government established a tourist area which contains the Limas Cut Malay house.

    You will find many of these traditional houses in Kampung Teluk, Batu Besar Village, Nongsa District, Batam. The purpose of this tour is to show the existence of historical sites as well as education for Indonesian youth, especially youth from Riau.

    Within the tourist area, you can enjoy a rural feel so that this place can be an alternative for a vacation. This place is also equipped with public facilities such as stalls and mushalla.

    Judging from the history, this house is quite old because it was founded in 1959. Therefore, it is not surprising that this house was made a Malay cultural heritage. The house in this area was built by Haji Abdul Karim.

    2. Twin Falls Selaso House

    Selaso (Malay) in Indonesian means selasar. The Twin Falls Selaso House means a house that has two hallways whose floor is lower than the living room. Thus, the perimeter of the porch is lower.

    The Twin Falls Selaso House is also commonly called the Falls Salaso Hall. This house is not used for the residence of ordinary citizens. Only traditional leaders or datuk are allowed to live in Balasi Salaso Fell. Apart from that, this house is also commonly used as a place for gatherings, traditional events, cooking together, deliberations, as well as a storage place for traditional instruments (including musical instruments). Therefore, it is not surprising that this house is also known as the Density Hall, Sarirung Hall, and Medical Center.

    Inside there are several large rooms that can be used for resting, the pavilion, the cross-legged room, and the kitchen. It’s just that, this traditional house does not have rooms like a house in general. There are only barriers as separators.

    This traditional house is quite unique. If you pay attention, on the roofs, pillars, stairs and attics there are carvings with typical Riau ornaments which make their beauty unquestionable. On the stairs, you will find carvings of waves or hanging bees which mean that people can live as usefully as bees.

    On the wall of the Twin Falls Selaso house, you will find carvings of a flock of ducks or ducks walking hand in hand. This carving symbolizes the advice that humans as social beings should be able to live side by side and in harmony, compact, peaceful and together. Apart from these two types of carvings, there are several other types of carvings such as nails, ants with rings, kite wings, dragons, inscriptions of verses from the Koran, and shoots of bamboo shoots.

    On the roof there is a decoration in the form of wood sticking out criss-crossing. This decorative wood is called Tunjuk Langit. The function of the wood is as a means of acknowledging God Almighty. On the decorative wood there are carvings that symbolize the embodiment of custom. Each type of carving has a specific meaning.

    3. Kajang Folding Malay Shelter

    The next Riau traditional house is the Fold Kajang Malay Residential. This traditional house seems to have become extinct because it is very rarely seen. Even if they still exist, usually the house is a local government building that was renovated so it looks more modern.

    In the past, these traditional houses were mostly built in areas flowed by the Rokan River, the Siak Sri Indrapura area, and the left side of the Kampar river, the Pelalawan area, the downstream area and the mouth of the Indragiri river. In Malay, Fold Kajang can be interpreted as a winding road or river at a sharp angle.

    A journal entitled Roof Architectural Elements in Riau Malay Traditional Houses , explains that the folding roof of the kajang has a steep roof shape. This design was made not only to add to the beauty and aesthetics of the indigo building, but also so that rainwater can flow down easily.

    If the water can easily go down, then the roof will not easily collapse to withstand the heavy weight of the water. Not only that, the design does not allow stagnant water. Please note, stagnant water is a source of disease and mosquito nests.

    This Fold Kajang Malay dwelling is decorated with ornaments in the form of carvings of selo bayuang or selembayung and banished horns, namely ornaments in the form of animals, flowers and plants. The meaning of this ornament is affection, magical elements, home light, safety, compassion, custom, and self-knowledge.

    This house is constructed from natural materials. For the roof, nipa leaves and reeds were chosen. For the walls and floor of the house, they are generally made of woven bamboo so that the inside of the house feels cool because there is air that can go in and out through the small vents between the woven. To strengthen the webbing, some bamboo is tied with palm fiber and rattan.

    To build the Kajang Folded Malay Shelter, we need three peg beams or lower tendrils (padongko) in a transverse position from left to right of the house. The function of this beam is to tie the poles in unity to the top row of the house. In the house there is also a large beam that crosses from left to right.

    4. Lontik Roof Malay House

    The next Riau traditional house is the Lontik Roof Malay House. This traditional house is also called Rumah Lancang or Rumah Pencalang because the roof of this house has a sharp tapered shape and the shape of the legs of the house is shaped like a boat or presumptuous. Meanwhile, the four sides of the Lontik Roof Malay House are tilted outwards.

    As with other traditional Sumatran houses, the roof is designed like a buffalo horn. Many people think that the Lontik Roof Malay House is inspired by the Gadang House, which is a traditional Minangkabau house. When viewed from a geographical location, this assumption is not wrong considering that the regions of Riau and West Sumatra border each other.

    This traditional house is a symbol that signifies the high respect of the people of Riau for God Almighty. The existence of an arch on the roof symbolizes that the beginning and end of human life will return to God. The number of steps leading to the house is five which symbolizes the five pillars of Islam. If there are stairs in the room, the number of steps is odd, namely 3, 5, 7, 9 and 11.

    Not only symbolizing respect for God, this traditional house also symbolizes high affection for fellow human beings. This traditional house also carries the concept of a stilt house to avoid flooding and attacks by wild animals. This is because these houses are generally built near the river. In addition to avoiding attacks by wild animals, the lower part of the house can be used as a cattle pen.

    5. Siak Halfway House

    According to historical records, the Senapelan area (Pekanbaru) was the capital of the Siak Sri Indrapura Kingdom. Before Senapelan, Menpura was the capital of the Kingdom of Siak Sri Indrapura. The reason for choosing Senapelan as the capital is that this region is in a strategic location in trade traffic. Plus, the condition of the Siak River is very calm. Not to mention, at that time Senapel was a village that played an important role in crossing positions with the interior of Tapung, Mingakabau, and Kampar.

    These conditions prompted Sultan Abdul Jalil Alamuddin Syah question to move the royal center from Menpura to Senapelan in 1775. It’s just that this house was only built in 1895. And this Siak Shelter House is the house that the Sultan of Siak and his entourage will visit for the first time. was in Senapelan.

    If you want to visit the house in person, this house is 20 meters from the Siak River. More precisely, on Jalan Panglima Undan, to be precise under the Siak III Bridge in Kampung Bandar, Senapelan, Pekanbaru City, Riau.

    Siak Halfway Houses are generally built with wood as the basic material. But for the part of the stairs which is on the east side of the building, it is made of special brick. When viewed from the ground plan, the building has a length from north to south of 17.52 meters and a width of 8.67 meters from west to east. When viewed from above, this house seems to be divided into three parts, namely two small rectangles and one small rectangle.

    Sinaumed’s, that is the variety of Riau traditional houses that we need to know and preserve. If you want to know more about the various traditional houses in Indonesia, you can read related books by visiting sinaumedia.com so that you have #MoreWithMembaca information.

    Author: Mutiani Eka Astutik

  • Get to know the 5 Types of Malay Traditional Houses in Indonesia

    Malay Traditional Houses – The Malays are an Austronesian ethnic group who inhabit the Malay Peninsula, the coast of the island of Sumatra starting from Jambi, Bangka Belitung, Riau, Riau Islands, North Sumatra and South Sumatra. In addition, the Malays cover the southern part of Thailand, the island of Singapore, the southern coast of Burma, the coast of Borneo, the southern Philippines, and also the small islands around it. Many Malay tribes in Indonesia inhabit the east coast of Sumatra Island and the west coast of Kalimantan Island.

    The Malay traditional house is a wooden house or village house in ancient times as a place to live for the Malay people. Nowadays, not many Malay children know the characteristics of a traditional wooden house. Malay traditional houses are no less unique than today’s modern house buildings.

    With the main material of wood, the house has its own characteristics with various shapes. The following is a complete explanation of the Malay traditional house and its uniqueness.

    The Origins of Malay Traditional Houses

    Long before the existence of external influences and modern concepts, the Malay population and indigenous people in the Malay Peninsula and Sumatra as well as other Bumiputera or Indigenous people in Kalimantan and other parts of the Malay world already had housing systems that were sophisticated, beautiful, and also in accordance with lifestyles and their environment.

    For Malays as well as indigenous people on the Peninsula, Sumatra and other islands, it is common to build one house that is inhabited by one large family. Some tribes in Kalimantan prefer the concept of a long house that can accommodate an entire village.

    In ancient times, each family would live in apartment-like sections that were lined up side by side, with an open front porch or what is commonly known as a “ruai” in the Sarawak language, which connected all the units into one long building.

    Malay Traditional House Structure

    The building materials used will be taken from renewable natural resources, namely various types of wood and bamboo as well as rattan to fronds. The frame or structure of the house uses a punch-through system and also pegs that don’t require nails. That means, the construction of Malay plank houses is actually a ready-made system.

    Therefore, the house can also be disassembled and reassembled elsewhere. In addition, the construction method without using nails also makes the house more flexible. So that it can be lifted and moved by mutual cooperation by the local community.

    Even though traditional houses are built without using any nails, it is acknowledged that for more modern wooden houses, there are non-structural elements such as additional walls using nails. In terms of design, Malay traditional houses can be said to be very sophisticated and contain architectural features. In addition, it is also in accordance with a comfortable lifestyle and according to custom and nature.

    Advantages and Weaknesses of Malay Traditional Houses

    The Malay traditional house is indeed a cultural heritage that we must preserve, especially with its uniqueness. To see what are the advantages and disadvantages of Malay traditional houses, the following is an explanation.

    Excess

    1. Because the house is in the form of stilts and has pillars underneath, this house is very adaptive to the conditions in areas prone to flooding. This house can prevent flood water from entering the room.
    2. Floors and walls made of woven wood or rattan make it easier for hot air to escape from the house. So that the air ventilation in the Malay traditional house is very smooth.
    3. Then the shape of the roof of the house makes it easier for rainwater to fall to the ground more quickly, so there are no standing water around the roof.
    4. Buildings that can be disassembled make it easy to move houses or to be renovated.

    Lack

    Because the building is made of wood, this traditional house cannot last long if it is not cared for properly. Because, this house will be prone to being eaten by termites if not treated.

    Existing Malay Traditional Houses in Indonesia

    The Malay tribe has characteristics other than the style of speech, dance, and traditional houses. Most Malay traditional houses have different functions and models from one another. The following are some of the Malay traditional houses which are well known in Indonesia.

    1. Twin Falls Selaso House

    This Malay traditional house is very unique and magnificent. Selaso Falls Twins has been designated by the Riau Provincial Government as an official traditional house. The shape of the Twin Falls Selaso House is a stilt house. It is about 1.5 meters high and in ancient times was supported by a wooden pillar as a support. However, now many Selaso houses use concrete supports.

    The name Selaso Tutup Kembar is taken from the shape of the hall. Where this part is much wider than the living room and is the center of the residence. This Malay traditional house looks very luxurious and big. It is said that the higher the degree of a person in the community, the bigger the Twin Falls Selaso House will be.

    The distinctive features of the Selaso Falling Twins Malay traditional house are:

    1. On the roof in the form of the letter A 2 levels. There is also a cross section on the roof which is usually called Sulo Bayung.
    2. There are also cross corners that are at the foot of the roof. Malay people usually call it Sayok Layangan. It is said that the cross area on this roof symbolizes closeness to God the Creator.
    3. At first glance, the Selaso Falls Twin House is almost similar to the Selaso Hall, but people must be able to distinguish between the two. Where the Selaso Falls Twin House is used for family residence, while the Selaso Hall is usually used for customary meetings. Rumah Selaso also has a distinctive feature of its shape that extends to the side.
    4. The Selaso Kembar house will generally be decorated with golden yellow ornaments, while the wooden walls are usually painted with dark brown varnish. The tile is usually maroon in color and tends to be dark. This color combination will make Selaso Kembar look very elegant and luxurious.

    2. Lotik Roof House

    The name of this house is taken from the very unique roof model. The Lotik Roof House comes from the Kampar Regency, Riau Province. Where this Malay traditional house is also often called Lancang or Pancalang. The name Pancalang here comes from the decorative ornaments on the front wall of the house.

    The roof of this house is similar to the traditional Minangkabau house, where the roof is shaped like a boat. We can see the shape of the roof which is similar to the crescent moon. Then in the middle it is curved sharply and the 2 ends are towering. This traditional house is also made with a stage model, where the pole height can reach 1.5 to 2 meters.

    For wood used as a pole must be strong and durable. What’s more, many of these traditional houses were built in peat areas. The pillars of this traditional house are quite a lot. So, the larger the roof of the Lotik house, the more poles used. Meanwhile, at the front of the house there are wide steps and a fairly small terrace.

    3. Rumah Limas Slash

    This traditional house is often found in Riau Province. In general, this Rumah Limas Slash is made entirely of wood and the construction is in the form of stilts. The people of Riau in ancient times lived in harmony with nature. They prefer to live beside forests and also by rivers. Therefore, the house they build must also be in accordance with the environment around it.

    Houses built in areas around swamps or close to forests are the most suitable for stilt designs. Because, this design can prevent the house from damage due to flooding. In addition, the occupants of the house also don’t need to be afraid of wild animal attacks when they are staying alone in this stilt house. Houses on stilts can also minimize the entry of mosquitoes into the room.

    The following are some of the characteristics of the Limas Cutting House, including:

    1. Limas Cut houses generally stand with a 1.5 meter high pillar. The pole itself is made of hardwood.
    2. The walls are made of white painted wooden planks.
    3. This one house also has a roof shape that is different from houses in other Sumatran areas. As the name implies, the roof of this traditional house is in the form of a pyramid with a truncated top.

    If we go to the interior of Riau, we can find this model of house. There are still some people who build houses using the Cut Limas model. The shape itself is quite simple with a size that is not too big. The Limas Simpang House has also been heavily modified with the use of concrete pillars.

    We can also see various sizes and ornaments in this traditional house. The bigger the house, this indicates that the economic status of the family is high.

    1. Wealthy people’s homes generally tended to have more elaborate ornamentation. There will be many ornate carvings placed in various parts of the house.
    2. For the middle to lower economic class, we can see they live in a simple house in Limas Tutup. In fact, sometimes the walls of the wooden boards are not painted in any color, the roof can also use low-quality types of tiles or wooden planks.

    4. Balaso House Falls

    Besides being used for housing, the Malay tribe also has a special traditional house that is used for gathering. This house is shared property. If in modern times its function is more similar to a village hall, the Sumatran Malays call it Balai Salaso.

    However, many people also call it the Fallen Balaso or Fallen Salaso. At first glance, this traditional house is similar to the Salaso Kembar traditional house. This traditional house has its own uniqueness, where we can see a stilt house building with the following characteristics:

    1. Has a support pole of about 1.5 meters.
    2. This house is surrounded by a hallway on the front and sides.
    3. The floor in the front room is generally lower than the living room. Because one of the functions of this house is used for tribal members’ meetings, it is certain that the hall and front room are wider.
    4. We can see that the roof of the house is made in a terraced form, the roof consists of 4 levels. If you pay attention, the proportion of the building’s height is lower than the roof.
    5. This one house is also equipped with a staircase in the middle that is wide enough.
    6. Generally, the roof will be covered with bright red tiles, while at the edges it is always given a wooden border that crosses at the ends.
    7. There are two meeting roofs that cross each other on the front. This dividing wood will be painted in a color that contrasts with the roofing material.

    The Salaso traditional house is deliberately made with a large and magnificent shape. In fact, this house became the central point and pride of the tribe. So that the Salaso Falls house can be more magnificent and beautiful, people usually decorate it with various kinds of carvings. On the walls and fences of the hall, for example, we can see various kinds of typical Malay ornaments.

    Balai Salaso was also built by many Malays in Riau. This traditional Malay house has been used for generations for deliberations related to custom. Tribe chiefs generally hold a kind of meeting and decide on various matters at Balai Salaso. It can be said that Balaso Fell became the center of activity for all members of the tribe, while the houses of the residents stood around it.

    5. Traditional Malay Fold Kajang House

    There is another Malay traditional house that we can find in Riau, the name is the Fold Kajang traditional house. The shape itself is quite unique, especially on the roof. The name fold here indicates a folded roof, while the kajang itself means a bend, which can be a road or a river. In this traditional house, the folds are located on the roof. The following are some of the uniqueness of this traditional house, including:

    1. The traditional folding kajang house has a roof shape that resembles a boat. The two ends turn sharply upwards. The Malays usually call this type of roof the term jerambah which comes from the Palembang area.
    2. The kajang folding house has a construction in the form of a stilt house, but at the base of the house it is also used as a room.
    3. The floors and walls of this traditional house are completely made of wood.
    4. The Kajang Folding House is also decorated using carved ornaments.
    5. Then, on the edge of the roof, we will see wooden ornaments that are wavy.
    6. The front and side of this traditional house are filled with wide windows.
    7. At the front there is a passage which is slightly lower than the living room.

    But unfortunately, we will not be able to find people who still use houses like this. Now, whether in urban or rural areas, there are already many people who have switched to more modern forms of housing.

    If we are in the Riau region, don’t miss cultural tourism. Because, we can go around to see the uniqueness of Malay traditional house architecture. The combination of culture from mainland Malays as well as native Indonesian culture makes this traditional house very unique and diverse.

    This is an explanation of the Malay traditional house and its types and uniqueness. For Sinaumed’s who want to know more about traditional houses in Indonesia, you can read related books by visiting sinaumedia.com .

    To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Umm

    Reference:

    • https://ruangarsitek.id/rumah-adat-melayu/
    • https://www.rumah.com/panduan-properti/rumah-adat-melayu-76523
  • Get to know the 5 Theories of the Formation of the Universe

    Theory of the Formation of the Universe  – Many scientists have debated about the existence of the universe. The presence of the universe in question is like where did the universe exist, when did the universe exist, how was the universe created, and so on. Scientists debate how to convey their ideas.

    One of the ideas expressed in the 20th century was the big bang idea. The big bang idea suggests that the universe is infinite in size and that the universe came into being because of the big bang.

    However, scientists with a materialist background do not agree with the existence of a Creator and still believe that the universe is composed of a collection of matter that is constant, stable, and unchanging. Scientists with a materialistic background assume that matter is a creature that really exists and deny the existence of all other creatures, except for matter.

    Based on the idea that the universe has a beginning or not from something that does not exist. In other words, believe that the universe exists because it was created and through a process of creation.

    Because of that belief, indirectly believe in the existence of the Creator. In simple terms, the concept of “exists from nothingness” is something that humans cannot understand or simply can be interpreted as humans cannot understand something because they have not had the opportunity to understand it.

    The existence of the universe out of nothing is one of the greatest proofs of the creation of the universe. With this, it will help people understand and understand the meaning of life.

    Expansion of the Universe

    Edwin Hubble was an American astronomer. He has made historic discoveries in the field of astronomy. The discovery was disclosed in 1929. Hubble’s discovery occurred while he was watching the end of the spectrum of stars’ light turn red with a giant telescope. Because of the changing colors at the ends of the stars, he believed that the stars were moving away from the earth.

    Long before the discovery of stars moving away from the earth, Hubble had made another discovery, namely that galaxies and stars were moving away from each other, not just from the earth. From the discovery of galaxies and stars moving away from each other and stars moving away from the earth, it can be concluded that the universe is constantly expanding.

    An appropriate simile to make this discovery easier to understand is that the universe is likened to the surface of an exploding balloon. Then, every part that is on the surface of the balloon is separated from each other due to inflation. This parable applies to the expanding universe so that all objects in space are separated from each other.

    Increasing or expanding the size of the universe proves that in terms of time, the universe can move backwards. Because it is proven that the universe can move backwards, it can also be interpreted that the universe originated from a “single point”.

    From the calculations that have been done, it can be concluded that the “single point” is all the substance or matter that exists in the universe and has zero volume and unlimited density . The Big Bang was caused by an explosion originating from a “single point” explosion with zero volume. The result of this explosion is what caused the universe to form.

    The theoretical unit used for exposure purposes is zero volume . In science there is such a thing as the concept of nothingness . The concept of nothingness is a concept that only states a point with zero volume. Because of this concept, it can be said that the universe was born from the concept of nothingness . Briefly the universe was created.

    The expansion of the universe is proof that the universe was created from the concept of nothing. However, it was only in the 20th century that there was a scientific theory that stated that the universe was expanding or expanding.

    In space there are various objects such as the sun, planets in the solar system, asteroids, and many more which are explained in the Mini Encyclopedia: The Universe.

     

    Theories of the Formation of Nature

    After various studies have been carried out by experts aiming to find out the formation of the universe, the research produces a theory. These experts have also expressed their opinion with the theories of the formation of the universe. There are various theories of the formation of the universe. Here are some theories of the formation of the universe.

    1. Big Bang Theory

    The expert who first sparked or discovered this theory was Alexandra Friedman in 1922. She is a physicist from Russia. The content of the theory expressed is that the structure of the universe is always changing (dynamic).

    Based on the big bang theory (Big Bang Theory), the universe consists of a very large mass and a very large density as well. Then, the core reaction causes the mass to explode and expand very quickly so that it moves away from the center of the explosion. The big explosion occurred about 13.7 billion years ago. This theory can be studied by Sinaumed’s in the book Big Bang Theory, The: Theory of the Formation of Natural Sutras

    During its development, this theory was developed by an astronomer from the United States, namely Edwin Hubble. According to Hubble, at first the stars gathered in a point mass known as zero volume . However, at one point in time that zero volume exploded and expanded.

    After a massive explosion at zero volume , all galaxies and stars experienced a shift in the light of the stars that approached the red spectrum. In other words, the shift that occurred as a result of the big bang caused the stars to move away from Earth and slowly drift away from each other.

    However, the theory received rejection from one of the experts, namely Sir Fred Hoyle. The rejection of this theory occurred in the mid-20th century when Hoyle came up with the steady state theory. Hoyle through the steady state theory stated that the size of the universe is infinite and the universe has no time limit or will exist forever. It was because of this difference in ideas that the theory of the big bang or big bang was rejected by Sir Fred Hoyle.

    2. Steady State Theory

    Fred Hoyle, Thomas Gold, and Hermann Bondi are three autophysicists who discovered the steady state theory. The three men came from England and were discovered in 1948. According to the steady-state theory, the universe had no beginning and the universe will not end or will exist for all time.

    If the big bang theory states that the universe is moving or always changing (dynamic). This is different from the steady state theory which states that the universe is fixed or unchanging (static).

    When the universe expands there will be new materials that appear. Matter will appear in sufficient quantities to keep the universe in a stable state. After the new matter appears, new galaxies will form and the universe will remain unchanged.

    The steady-state theory was very popular in the early 20th century. However, this theory was rejected by some cosmologists and other scientists. This rejection occurs because there is a truth related to the big bang theory and the universe has an age limit.

    Not only are these two things causing this theory to be rejected, one thing is also causing this theory to be rejected, namely the existence of cosmic microwave radiation which has been predicted by models originating from the Big Bang theory.

    3. Theory of Expanding and Compressing (The Oscillating Theory)

    The expand and float theory was devised by Fred Hoyle. He comes from England and is an expert in the field of astrophysics. In this theory, we must understand that new galaxies will always appear and form to replace galaxies that no longer exist.

    The content of the expanding and compressing theory is the chest of a cycle that occurs in the universe. Every one cycle will experience a mass expansion (expands) and a mass contraction (compresses).

    Each cycle takes a long time, which is around 30 billion years. In this theory, the expansion occurs due to the reaction of the hydrogen nucleus which will eventually build other, more complex elements.

    The way the expanding and compressing theory works is when the expansion process runs, galaxies and stars will form. After experiencing expansion, then the galaxies and stars will be compressed accompanied by the release of very high hot light.

    4. Quantum Universe Theory

    In 1966 the theory of the quantum universe was created by William Lane Craig. In this theory, the universe is stated to have existed from the beginning and will continue to exist throughout time. This theory also states that the universe does not have a vacuum. In other words, in the universe there are only subatomic particles.

    5. Swinging Theory

    The continuation of the big bang or big bang theory is the swing theory. Experts suggest that the motion of galaxies and stars is moving away from each other. After moving away, the galaxies and stars will show a slowing motion and stop until it shrinks under the force of gravity.

    After slowing down to shrinking what will happen next is that the materials will condense and explode. All the processes that take place do not cause matter to be destroyed or created, but matter simply changes order.

    According to this theory, the deceleration process that occurs gives rise to a hypothesis which states that the universe has no edges and no boundaries.

    Get to know the Galaxy

    A collection of stars that make up a star system or order is called a galaxy. Stars, meteors, planets and other celestial bodies that are arranged in groups are part of the galaxy.

    Galaxies are composed of several celestial bodies, and the celestial bodies that make up most of the galaxies are stars. In space galaxies are divided into several types viz. The Milky Way Galaxy, the Ursa Major Galaxy, the Andromeda Galaxy and the Black Eye Galaxy.

    1. The Milky Way Galaxy

    In English the Milky Way Galaxy is called the Milky Way . This term is taken from the Greek “galaxias” and the Latin “via lactea” which means milk. The home for the solar system is the Milky Way galaxy because in the Milky Way galaxy there is the sun and planet earth. The shape of this galaxy is a spiral with a diameter of about 100,000 light years. This galaxy’s closest neighbor is 150,000 light years away in the southern sky and the galaxy’s name is the Magellanic Galaxy.

    2. The Ursa Major Galaxy

    The distance between the Ursa Major galaxy and the Milky Way is about 10,000,000 light years. This galaxy is elliptical in shape and has a large space. The position or location of this galaxy is in the sky in the northern hemisphere and this galaxy is very useful for fishermen because it can provide a benchmark for ships when sailing at night. Dubhe star is the brightest star in the Ursa Major galaxy.

    3. Andromeda Galaxy

    The Andromeda Galaxy has other names, namely Messier 31, M31, or NGC 224. On clear nights, this galaxy can be seen with the naked eye or without tools to see it. When viewed, the galaxy will appear like a thin fog in the northern sky. The shape of this galaxy is a spiral. This galaxy contains about 1 trillion stars that are moving toward the Milky Way galaxy at a speed of 300 km/sec.

    4. The Black Eye Galaxy

    Another name for the Black Eye galaxy is Sleeping Beauty. For some astronauts, this galaxy can be seen using a telescope with a small size. There is a spectacular dark channel in the Black Eye galaxy. The channel can suck up dust from in front of the galactic core.

    Learn interesting information about galaxies and stars and their facts through the book 100 Facts about Stars & Galaxies which is also equipped with the descriptions it has.

     

    Galaxy Shape

    There are two broad categories in the theory of galaxy formation, namely “top down” and “bottom up”. The “top down” theory is the theory of galaxy formation originating from celestial bodies that have protogalaxy elements (celestial body particles), then these celestial bodies group together and form galaxies. While the “bottom up” theory is the formation of galaxies that occur because a number of stars are close together and merge into one.

    In general, the shape of galaxies in space is divided into three types, namely elliptical, spiral and irregular.

    1. Galaxy With an Elliptical Shape

    The shape of an elliptical galaxy is like a round to an oblong ball. While the structure of an elliptical galaxy, when seen, its shape is not very clear. What is contained in elliptical galaxies is interstellar material and its members consist of old stars. Examples of elliptical galaxies are the M87 galaxy (a giant galaxy in the constellation Virgo) and the Messiers 5 galaxy.

    2. Galaxy With Spiral Shape

    A galaxy with a spiral shape is the type of galaxy most people hear about. The beauty that exists in this type of galaxy is extraordinary. Spiral-type galaxies have several parts, namely the halo (the galaxy’s arms) and the bulge (the protruding central part of the galaxy). Members of the spiral galaxy are only young and old stars. An example of a spiral galaxy is

    3. Galaxies with Irregular Shapes

    Galaxies with irregular shapes have a lot of interstellar matter consisting of gas and dust. Members of galaxies with irregular shapes such as spiral galaxies whose members are old and young stars. Examples of irregular galaxies are the Large Magellanic Cloud and the Small Magellanic Cloud.

    Related Books: 

    1. Junior Scientist Encyclopedia: Science

    2. Al Quran and Science

    Conclusion

    There are many theories that explain the formation of the universe. However, there are five theories for the formation of the universe, namely the Big Bang Theory, the Steady State Theory, the Oscillating Theory, the quantum universe theory, and the swinging theory.

    In space there are four types of galaxies namely the Milky Way galaxy, the Ursa Major galaxy, the Andromeda galaxy and the Black Eye galaxy. While the shape of the galaxy is divided into three, namely the shape of a spiral, elliptical shape, and irregular shape.

  • Get to Know the 5 Human Senses and Their Structures and Functions

    5 Human Senses – Humans in carrying out their daily activities need stimulation from their environment. In responding to or responding to stimuli that come from outside, the human body needs tools that can help respond to these stimuli. The organs of the body are called the senses.

    Humans generally have five (five) senses that are very functional in responding to stimuli. The five senses that function properly will make it easier for our body to respond according to desire or instinct.

    Therefore, these five senses can be regarded as organs of the human body that can connect the brain with other members of the body. Members of the human body will respond according to what is ordered by the brain.

    However, do you know what the five senses are in humans and what their functions are? In this article, the discussion of the five senses will be discussed in more depth. So, happy reading and see the explanation of the five senses below.

    1. Sense of Sight (Eyes)

    The first five senses to be discussed are the sense of sight or eyes. This eye is on the part of the human face which is located below the forehead and there is the right and left of the nose. This eye is needed by humans in sending stimuli to be sent by the brain. The stimulus comes from what we see.

    1.1 Functions of the eye

    As we know that the main function is to see, but if discussed more deeply, the function of the eye is quite a lot. This is the function of the eye, apart from seeing.

    1.1.1 Focusing on an object

    When looking at objects that are near or far, you need clear vision in order to be able to represent what object is being seen. For some people to see or focus on objects requires glasses. This is because the person’s eyes are unable to focus on objects that are farther or nearer.

    1.1.2 Adjust the incoming light

    The light entering the eye must be adjusted because excessive light entering the eye can damage the eye. In addition, the adjustment of the light on the eye can be used to see the time, whether it is still morning, afternoon, evening or night.

    1.1.3 Can be used as a medium of communication

    Contact eye maybe you’ve heard that term. Eye contact can be said as a communication made through the eyes. For some people will know other people’s behavior just from eye contact. One behavior that can be seen by eye contact is lying.

    2.1 Structure of the eye

    Do you know what structures are in the eye? If not, this article will discuss eye structures. Following is an explanation of the eye structures that you need to know.

    a) Sclera

    The sclera is the part of the eye that functions to cover the entire eyeball, except for the cornea. The sclera is composed of connective tissue with strong fibers and is slightly opaque white in color. This sclera can be said to be the part of the eye that is not transparent to light.

    b) Choroid

    The choroid is the layer of the eye that is in the middle in which there are blood vessels. Blood vessels function to provide nutrition and oxygen to the eye, especially the eye retina. The choroid is dark in color because it functions to protect the eyeball from various kinds of disturbances, such as excess light.

    c) retina

    The retina is the part of the eye that is in the form of a layer and is very sensitive to light stimuli. All parts of the retina have connections with nerve cells whose fibers can form the optic nerve veins that extend to the brain.

    In the retina there is a bone where the bone functions as a protector for the eyeball as well as a place for the existence of the eye. The bones in the retina are called the orbital bones.

    d) Lens

    The lens is the part of the eye that lies behind the iris and pupil. This part of the eye functions to focus light and objects on the retina. The lens has a flexible and transparent tissue. If you wear glasses, it is certain that your eye condition is nearsighted or farsighted.

    e) Iris and pupil

    The iris is the part of the eye or the lining of the eyeball which is located on the cornea. While the pupils are the muscles of the eye that can shrink and enlarge or close and open when light enters.

    Basically the function of the iris and pupil is the same because the two parts are related to each other. The function of the iris and pupil is to adjust the light that enters the eye. Meanwhile, the pupil serves to

    f) Macula

    The macula is the part of the eye whose center functions as vision to make it clearer. In addition, the macula also functions as a light receiver. Therefore, the condition of the macula must be paid close attention so that vision and control of light entering the eye are not disturbed. The macula itself

    g) Cornea

    Cornea is the part of the eye that is shaped like a transparent dome. In addition, the cornea functions as forming the outermost part of the eye and as a door for light coming in and out from outside.

    2. Hearing Sense (Ear)

    Panda’s second sense that will be discussed is the sense of hearing or commonly called the ear. The ear has a special ability to detect various kinds of sound vibrations as well as to maintain balance.

    2.1 Ear function

    The function of the ear is divided into two, namely listening to sounds and balancing the body.

    a) Listening to sounds

    Serves to hear and recognize sounds. The sound that can be heard by humans is 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz. If humans listen to sounds of more than 20,000 Hz, the eardrum will rupture.

    b) Balance

    In this case, the balance in question is that the information received by the ear can be conveyed to the brain in a balanced way. Thanks to this balance function, changes in the speed of sound can be handled properly.

    c) A place to beautify yourself

    Ears become a place of jewelry by means of piercing. Jewelry that is placed on the ear has been around for a long time, especially in women.

    2.2 Structure of the ear

    The structure of the ear is divided into three parts, namely the outer, middle and inner parts.

    a) The outside

    The outer ear is the part of the ear that functions to receive various kinds of sound vibrations. In this middle part there are two ear organs, namely the auricle and ear canal. The two organs have different functions, but are related to each other.

    The auricles have the function of receiving or responding to sounds in the environment. The shape of this auricle is irregular and in this auricle organ there is cartilage and fibrous tissue.

    The ear canal has the function of conveying sound vibrations so that they reach the tympanic membrane. This ear canal has a size of approximately 2.5 cm and the outer third of the ear canal is cartilage and two thirds is inside in the form of bone.

    b) Middle section

    The middle part of the ear is the part in the form of a small chamber containing air and in it there is the eustachian tube . This part of the middle ear functions to continue sound vibrations that originate from the outer ear to the inner ear.

    The sound vibrations are associated with pharyngeal receptors in the ear. Not only that, the middle ear also has three auditory bones, namely the hammer ( malleus ), anvil ( inclus ) and stirrup ( stapes ). The hammer and anvil move as one bone because they are held together by ligaments.

    c) The inside

    The inner ear is the part in which there are many organs that can help the ear work. The inner ear is composed of the bony labyrinth and the membranous labyrinth.

    This membranous labyrinth has five main parts, namely the three semicircular canals, the utricle, the saccule, the cochlea or cochlea, and the ampulla.

    3. Sense of Touch (Skin)

    The third sense that will be discussed is the sense of touch or skin. It seems you already know that this skin is the outermost part of the human body. With this skin we will feel various things. In fact, the skin can be used as a protector of the human body from various kinds of disorders.

    3.1 Functions of the skin

    Apart from being a touch tool, the skin also has other functions that can be beneficial to the human body. These functions will be explained below.

    a) A place to sweat

    As a place where sweat water comes out. The sweat that comes out of the skin is the result of evaporation taken from the heat that is around the body. With the release of sweat, the heat temperature in the body will decrease.

    Sweat contains water and salts. In addition, sweat has two glands that can help the process of sweat coming out of the skin. First, the eccrine sweat glands, these glands are located all over the body, but are usually most numerous on the palms, soles, and face.

    Second, apocrine sweat glands, these glands are in the armpits and around the genital area. Apocrine sweat glands generally have an unpleasant odor because they come from bacterial activity which is broken down by organic components.

    b) place to store fat

    If you ask where is most of the human body fat stored, then the answer is skin. Fat stored in the skin is in a layer of skin called the hypodermis which is located at the bottom of the dermis layer of skin.

    c) Regulating body temperature

    The hot human body temperature will be lowered by sweating. Vice versa, when the body temperature is cold, the body can feel warmth on the skin.

    d) Where vitamin D is formed

    Sunlight will produce UV A and UV B , both contents are the result of solar radiation. UV A rays are solar radiation that can penetrate the skin to the deepest parts. Meanwhile, UV B rays are solar radiation that cannot penetrate the skin and are very beneficial for the formation of vitamin D.

    3.2 Structure of the skin

    The structure of human skin consists of three parts, namely the epidermis, dermis, and hypodermis. For more details, see the explanation as follows.

    a) Epidermis

    The epidermis is the outermost layer of the skin which is formed from the corneum layer and the malpighian layer . The corneum layer is a layer of skin that is dead and can be peeled off, then replaced with new skin cells.

    Meanwhile, the malpighi layer is a skin layer formed from the spinosum layer and the germinativum layer . In addition, the malpighi layer contains the pigment melanin which gives color to the skin. In other words, human skin color depends on the melanin content .

    b) Dermis

    The middle layer of human skin is called the dermis. Within the dermis layer are blood vessels, nerve endings, hair roots, sweat glands, and oil glands.

    These sweat glands will produce a lot of sweat, even every day the sweat that can be released can reach 2,000 ml. At very high temperatures or heat, these sweat glands will become active and the capillaries in the skin will widen. At the time of the capillaries, the process of removing water and metabolic waste becomes easier.

    c) Hypodermis

    The deepest layer of human skin is called the hypodermis and is under the dermis layer. There is a lot of fat contained in this layer. Stored fats function as food reserves, retain body heat, and protect the body from various kinds of collisions.

    4. Sense of Smell (Nose)

    The fourth sense that will be discussed next is the sense of smell or nose. The nose is located between the senses of sight or eyes. This one sensory organ is very important, especially in smelling aromas.

    2.1 Functions of the nose

    The nose in humans has 3 functions, namely as a respiratory organ, smelling, and filtering air.

    a) Respirator

    As we know that the respiratory system must begin with the nose. After the air enters the nose, it will then enter the lungs. From the lungs, the process of oxygen circulation will occur.

    b) Smell

    You surely already know that you smell an aroma, whether it is pleasant or not, of course, through your nose. Therefore, it can be said that the nose is the five senses that function to smell. The nose can smell odors because it has odor receptors. The location of this receptor is in the nose or more precisely in the olfactory nerve.

    c) Filter the air

    Air that enters the nose if not filtered will be very dirty. Therefore, the nose has hairs that function to filter incoming air. In addition, in the nasal passages there is also a mucous membrane whose function is to moisten the nose.

    2.2 Structure of the nose

    The structure of the nose is divided into two parts, namely the inner nasal cavity and the upper nasal cavity.

    a) The inner cavity

    The inner cavity of the nose has a partition separating the nasal cavity, the partition is divided into two parts, right and left. The inner nasal cavity is also divided into three locations, namely the roof of the nasal cavity, the lower nasal cavity, and the sides of the nose. At the top, covered with a thin plate. Meanwhile, at the bottom is lined with the roof of the nose. For the side of the nose lined with coral nose.

    b) Upper cavity

    The upper nasal cavity has the main function of smelling. In short, the smell that is smelled will then be received by the olfactory mucus that has receptors. From the smelling mucus, it will proceed to the smelling bubbles. From here the smells will be received or responded to by the brain.

    5. Sense of Taste (Tongue)

    The last five senses to be discussed are the sense of taste or the tongue. The tongue is an organ of the human body which is located in the mouth or more precisely at the bottom of the mouth. The tongue is an organ that has bones which only consist of a collection of muscles.

    2.1 Functions of the tongue

    There are three functions of the tongue in humans, namely as a taster, turning food around, and forming letters.

    a) As a taster

    The main function of the tongue is to taste. Try to imagine what it would be like if humans didn’t have a tongue, they certainly wouldn’t know the various kinds of flavors that exist. The tongue can taste five kinds of tastes, salty, spicy, sweet, bitter and sour.

    b) Turning food over

    When you are chewing food, usually the food will be turned back and forth. This is due to facilitate the process of mastication and help to swallow food.

    c) Forming letters

    When someone mentions a letter, it certainly requires the help of the tongue. One letter that definitely needs a tongue is the letter “R”.

    2.2 Structure of the tongue

    These special receptors are closely related to chemical stimuli. These receptors have a surface covered with a layer of epithelium and the specialized receptors contain mucous glands and taste buds.

    There are up to 10,000 taste buds on the tongue, isn’t that a lot? The taste buds on the tongue are made up of groups of sensory cells on which there are protrusions or papillae . This bulge is located on the upper surface.

    These protrusions can be categorized into several forms, namely the shape of the thread ( circumvalata ), the shape of the plains ( foliata ), and the shape of the mushroom ( fungiformis ).

  • Get to Know the 5 Functions of Leaves and Their Structures and Various Kinds!

    Leaf Function   Of course, Sinaumed’s already knows that every plant must have leaves. This is because the leaves become one of the parts or organs of plants that have various important functions for plant life.

    One example is that leaves have the ability to absorb solar energy which is then used as a material for plants to photosynthesize. In other words, leaves have the function of absorbing energy which can be used as a food source for plants.

    Leaves can be grouped based on the bones. Does Sinaumed’s already know what types of leaf bones there are?

    In this article, we will discuss the function, structure, and various types of leaf veins. So, let’s look at the discussion below!

    Definition of Leaf

    Leaves are one part of a plant that is on a branch or stem and can grow in strands and even become dense. The leaves themselves usually have a green color. Many leaves have a green color because the leaves contain chlorophyll.

    Even so, the leaves on some plants have a less green color or not even green at all. Some leaves have a less or less green color or even no green at all because there is not enough chlorophyll in these leaves to affect the color of the leaves.

    Not only that, the leaves also have a function as a breathing area for plants. Inside the leaves are organs called stomata. Stomata are the respiratory organs in plants. So, it can be said that if a plant does not have leaves, then the respiratory system in the plant will be disrupted.

    Leaf Function

    The main function of leaves in plants is as a place for photosynthesis, but did Sinaumed’s know that leaves also have various other functions besides photosynthesis?

    Here are some of the functions of leaves that Sinaumed’s needs to understand.

    1. The function of the leaves as a place to store water and food reserves

    The function of the leaves apart from the first photosynthesis is to store water and food reserves. In general, plants store their food reserves in the roots, but in some plant species, food and water reserves can be stored in the leaves.

    One plant that uses its leaves as a place to store food is aloe vera. If you pay close attention, when opening or peeling the leaves from aloe vera, you will be able to see the flesh which is shaped like jelly.

    2. The function of the leaves as a tool for reproduction

    As Sinaumed’s already knows, reproduction in plants usually occurs in the flowers and rarely occurs in the leaves. However, in some plant species, the leaves function as a means of reproduction, for example in the Cocor Bebek plant.

    In cocoa duck plants, if the quality of the leaves is not maintained properly, it can affect the results of the reproduction of the cocoa duck plant which is also not good.

    3. The function of the leaves as a respiratory tool

    Plants can breathe using leaves because inside the leaves there are organs called stomata. Stomata on leaves can help plants to run the respiratory system. If the growth of leaves on plants is disrupted, for example when attacked by pests or excessively uprooted by humans, the plant will find it difficult to breathe, gradually wither and die.

    4. The function of the leaves as an evaporation device

    Besides having a function as a breathing apparatus, leaves also have a function as an evaporation tool. However, in the process of evaporation, the leaves will be assisted by the cuticle. In fact, in this evaporation process, the cuticle has a bigger role when compared to the stomata. Even so, the leaves still contribute to the evaporation process in plants.

    5. The function of the leaves as a guttation site

    In general, the guttation process that occurs in plants is carried out in the leaves. Guttation itself has a meaning, namely the process of releasing water in liquid form from leaf tissue. The guttation process can occur when soil conditions are in accordance with what is needed by plants so that water absorption is high, but the rate of evaporation or transpiration is low or when water evaporation is difficult due to high levels of air humidity.

    Leaf Structure

    The leaf structure can be divided into two groups, namely the outer leaf structure and the inner leaf structure. In each group of leaf structures there are also other parts. In the following, an explanation of the structure of a leaf complete with its parts.

    1. Outer Leaf Structure

    Sinaumed’s can observe this leaf structure easily because it is located on the outside of the leaf. The outer leaf structure has three parts, namely the leaf sheath, petiole, and also the leaf blade. For further explanation, come on Sinaumed’s, see the following explanation!

    1. Leaf midrib

    The leaf sheath is the part at the base of the leaf that has a widened shape. Leaf sheaths are often known by another name, namely upih daun. Leaf sheaths generally have a function to wrap the stem or as a place to place the leaves on the stem.

    This leaf structure is often found in plants that have one seed (monocots), especially plants that are part of the families Musaceae, Graminae, Cyperaceae, and so on.

    2. Leaf stalks

    The petiole is the part of the leaf that is used to support or hold the leaf blade so it does not fall. In each type of leaf, the petiole has a different location and function.

    1. Complete leaves, the stalks on these leaves can unite the leaf blade with the leaf sheath
    2. Stemmed leaves, the petioles on this type of leaf will be attached to the nodes of the stem.
    3. Single leaf, petiole supports only one leaf.
    4. Compound leaves, leaf stalks can grow and branch to form new leaf stalks or what can be called child stalks. This child stalk has the function of supporting the leaf children.

     

     

    3. Leaves

    Even though they have very diverse forms, all leaf blades become leaf structures on the outside which are very important because it is on the leaf blade that photosynthesis can occur. The shape of the leaf blade itself is thick and thin and also has a very diverse color and size.

    The diversity in the leaf blade can be identified by Sinaumed’s from the various plant species around Sinaumed’s .

    There is a special type of leaf blade, namely the leaf blade in ferns. The leaf blade can be said to be special because it has a function as a spore carrier.

    2. Inner Leaf Structure

    After discussing the structure of the leaves on the outside, the next discussion is the structure of the leaves on the inside. This inner structure consists of two parts, namely the epidermis and mesophyll tissue. Come on, Sinaumed’s, look at the information about the following two sections!

    1. Epidermis

    The epidermis is a layer of tissue that is on the underside of the leaf. The epidermis in higher plants has a different thickness. The epidermis of higher plants is only one layer thick. Meanwhile, in plants at lower levels, the epidermis tends to be thin and generally does not contain chlorophyll in it.

    There are many cells that are located in the epidermis of leaves that are interested in studying them. This is because these epidermal cells have their own characteristics from a physiological point of view. One of the epidermal cells that is often studied is the stomata.

    2. Mesophyll Network

    Mesophyll tissue is a network formed from photosynthetic parenchyma cells and is located on the inside of the leaf. This mesophyll tissue has two parts, namely palisade tissue and also spongy tissue or spongy tissue.

    1. Pole tissue is a network that has many chloroplasts. The function of this network is as a means of making food.
    2. Sponge tissue is a network whose cavity has a function as a place to store food reserves.

    Types of Leaf Bones Based on the Size

    There are 3 types of leaf bones which are grouped based on their size, namely:

    1. Mother of bones or Costa

    The mother bone is the leaf bone which is a continuation of the petiole and is located in the middle which is longitudinal and divides the leaf. This mother bone can be said to be the leaf bone which is the largest in size when compared to the other leaf bones.

    The leaves on the mother of the bones can be divided into two types, namely there are parts that are symmetrical and symmetrical and some are asymmetrical or asymmetrical.

    The symmetrical part is the mother of the bone which is located in the middle of the leaf blade so that the left side of the leaf and also the right side of the leaf become symmetrical or symmetrical. Meanwhile, the parts that are not symmetrical are the mother bones that are not in the middle of the leaf so that the left side of the leaf and the right side of the leaf become asymmetrical or asymmetrical.

    2. Branches or lateral nerves

    The branch bones or lateral nerves are the bones in the leaves and are smaller in size when compared to the main leaf bones. These branch bones are located at the base of the mother bone or are between the branches of other bones.

    The naming of these branch bones is based on the distance or how far the branch bones are from the mother bone.

    Thus, it can be said that each branch bone will be very dependent on the mother bone. If the mother bones are asymmetrical or asymmetrical, then there is a possibility that the bones of this branch will also become asymmetrical.

    3. Leaf veins or veins

    Basically, leaf veins or veins are part of the branch bones, only with a smaller size. Besides that, the leaf veins have a finer texture when compared to the branch bones. This finer texture makes it difficult to see with the Sinaumed’s eye .

    One leaf vein and the other leaf veins will form an arrangement that is shaped like a road or pathway. In the process of this formation, leaf veins are assisted by branch bones that have a larger size.

    Thus, mother bones, branch bones, and leaf veins are interconnected with one another. In fact, it can be said that the growth or formation of these parts is mutually determining one another.

    Kinds of Leaves Based on the Arrangement

    After discussing the bones of the leaves based on their size, the next discussion is about the bones of the leaves based on their arrangement. Tulan – leaf bones which are classified based on their arrangement are divided into four, viz

    1. Bone Leaf Pinnate or Penninervis

    Pinnate leaf bones are leaf bones whose arrangement is shaped like the fins of a fish. The arrangement in the veins of the pinnate leaves can be said to be neat and orderly, even this neat arrangement can be seen from the petiole to the tip of the leaf blade.

    Leaf bones with a pinnate shape can usually be seen by Sinaumed’s in plants that have dicot seed types (dicotyledoneae). As for plants that have dicot seed types, for example rambutan, guava, jackfruit, mango, durian, melinjo, and so on.

    2. Bone Leaves Menjari or Palminervis

    Finger leaf bones are leaf bones that have a fairly large size. Just as the name suggests, this leaf bone has a shape like a stretched finger.

    The number of finger leaf bones is generally odd in number and also the bones in the middle have the longest shape as well as the biggest.

    It is very likely that Sinaumed’s has seen leaf spines on plants because plants with finger bones are often used as a cooking ingredient. Plants that have finger bones, for example, are papaya leaves, cassava leaves, and the like.

    3. Curved Leaf Bones or Cervinervis

    Curved leaf bones are leaf bones which can be said to have several large bones located in the middle of the leaf. The big bone will open and make a path on the edge of the leaf. When viewed at a glance, these leaf bones form like curved lines or the ends of the leaves look like they are fused together.

    If Sinaumed’s wants to see these curved leaf bones, then Sinaumed’s can see them in hibiscus, betel, gadung, genjer and the like.

    4. Parallel Leaf Bones or Rectinervis

    Parallel leaf veins are leaf bones that have a straight shape like parallel. This parallel shape makes the leaf shapes look as if they are blending together. Parallel leaf bones can be said to have a small shape, but long.

    Plants that have parallel leaf veins, for example, corn, sugar cane, coconut, rice, and the like.

    5. Spiny Leaves

    The last leaf bone is the spiny bone. In general, this spiny leaf bone belongs to the type of conifer plant. As for plants that have this type of thorny leaf bone, Sinaumed’s can see on pine, fir, and other similar trees.

  • Get to know the 19 Most Extreme Rain Types in the World

    sinaumedia.com – Rain is a phenomenon that often occurs, especially for those of us who live in this tropical area. Rain that we know in general is rain in the form of water. People especially children usually really like to play in the rain.

    However, what happens if the rain that occurs is actually not water? Surely people will be amazed and excited by this phenomenon. Not only hail, it turns out there are also other strange rains that have ever happened in the world. Here are some of them Sinaumed’s:

    Get to know the 18 Most Extreme Rain Types in the World

    1. RAINING FISH

    Who would have thought that it would rain fish in the desert, considering that deserts are generally located very far from the coast. However, in 2004, residents were shocked by the phenomenon of raining fish on the edge of the Tanami Desert, Australia. Not just once, this rare phenomenon occurred three times, namely in 1974, 2004 and 2010.

    Dozens of fish falling from the sky were reported by local residents. No one knows for sure how these small fish get to their settlement. This phenomenon is also known as Tornadic Waterspouts, is a water-shaped tornado, which usually carries fish to marine plants in it.

    2. RAINING SPIDERS

    On April 6, 2007, spiders in large numbers fell from the sky in the province of Salta, Argentina. At that time Christian Oneto Gaona and his friends decided to travel to Salta Province during the holidays.

    They started climbing Mount San Bernardo and two hours later, they found the ground around them covered in spiders of various colors, about 4 inches long. The higher up to the top of the mountain the more spiders they find.

    They looked for the source of the spiders and how surprised they were to see so many spiders falling from the sky. Not only are the spiders filling the streets, but so are the webs. This phenomenon is often called “spider rain”. There are some people who call it “angel hair” because the web they leave behind is white.

    Reporting from Live Science, this event that has happened several times is one way for spiders to move places. This is not common. The spider rises to a high place, sticks its buttocks in the air and spreads its web. That way they use to be able to “fly”.

    3. RAINING WORMS

    The phenomenon of worm rain has occurred in Norway. Meteorologists and biologists were confused by this miraculous phenomenon. At first the residents thought that these worms came from the ground that was buried in a pile of snow.

    However, this was deemed impossible because at that time the snow thickness reached half a meter. Another theory says that the worms were carried by a tornado and fell somewhere.

    4. RAINING FROGS

    Frog rain is also a strange rain phenomenon that science has yet to explain. The phenomenon of the fall of thousands of frogs from the sky has occurred several times in history.

    The first occurred in 1873 in Kansas, Missouri, United States. Furthermore, frog rains occurred in 1901 (Minneapolis, United States), 1981 (Naphlion, Greece), 1995 (Sheffield, England), and 2009 (Ishikawa, Japan). A number of theories put forward by experts. The most likely is that the frogs were carried away by the storm and fell from the sky or similar to the rain of fish, which entered the Tornadic Waterspouts carrying the frogs from the river and dragging them into the city in a whirlwind circle.

    5. RAIN SNAKES

    Somehow this could happen in Memphis, USA on January 15, 1877. Thousands of snakes were reported falling from the sky and making the people who were at the location of the fall of the snakes shocked and hysterical with fear. Until now, this is still a puzzle. The cause of this rain of snakes is unknown, but there are allegations that the snakes were brought by a storm.

    6. RAIN OF MEAT

    The Kentucky meat shower was a phenomenon that occurred in Kentucky on March 3, 1876. Blobs measuring 5-10 cm resembling meat fell from the sky and scattered to the ground.

    Occurred in the homes of residents of Olympia Springs, United States. Allen Crouch, a father of 3 children who lived in the house, found lumps of flesh falling from the sky around his house.

    According to local newspaper reports, several people tried to cook the meat, but it tasted bitter and was thrown away. The mystery of this strange nature went unanswered for several months until finally a scientist named Dr. LD Kastenbine came to Olympia Springs to explain that the rain of meat was said to have come from the vomit of vultures, a habit the meat-eating fowl takes when its stomach feels heavy while flying.

    According to Scientific American, the meat that fell from the sky is actually a nostoc, a type of bacteria whose body expands many times over when it comes into contact with water.

    However, the validity of this explanation has yet to be proven. Apart from Kentucky, meat showers also occurred in several other areas in the United States, including Tennessee, Simpon County, Los Nietos Township, and Olympian Springs. The Messignadi area in Calabria, Italy has also been hit by similar rains.

    7. RAIN STAR JELLY JELLY

    It rains Star Jelly (Jellyfish) in Scotland In 2009, it rained jelly in Scotland. Scientists belonging to National Geographic conducted tests on the object, but they found no DNA in it. Theories also emerged about the origin of this star jelly, including saying that it was a frog ovary that was vomited by the eagle because it could not be digested, but in very large quantities.

    8. BLOOD RAIN

    ‘blood’ rain or red rain is a natural phenomenon that occurs in the Kerala region of India and Sri Lanka. Red rain occurred on 25 July-23 September 2001, in June 2012, and 15 November-27 December 2012 in Sri Lanka. The people in the area initially thought that the red color of the rainwater was just a coincidence, or indeed a rare phenomenon.

    However, upon examination, it turned out that the water that fell from the sky did indeed contain red blood cells. This rainy moment was also captured by several people and the video has been widely circulated on YouTube. Wow, even the rain water has made us excited because we are worried that there will be a flood.

    The water that falls from the sky is a mixture of Trentepohlia annulata, or a kind of red algae that grows on the sides of Indian rivers and seas. Unfortunately, this scientific explanation came months after the rain of blood ended, so that the people of India already believed that the rainwater was red because it was mixed with blood. Some Indians even see this rare event as a sign of the apocalypse.

    9. THREAD RAIN

    Rain of Threads in Australia In May 2015, residential areas in the Southern Tablelands in New South Wales, Australia were showered with fine threads from a cloudy sky which instantly covered part of the residents’ roofs. As reported by The Sidney Morning Herald, these fine threads also cover plants and trees.

    In fact, for several days, residents in the area had to wear head coverings and eye protection to protect themselves from threads that often got caught in several limbs.

    Investigate a calibaration, these threads are not threads commonly found in the textile industry, but are the work of millions of young spiders who immigrated to the area simultaneously. Young spiders do have a habit of immigrating to certain areas in the spring or after disasters such as heavy rains and flash floods.

    The young spiders will climb tall trees, shoot their webs into the sky which will then fly them towards the area with the help of the blowing wind.

    The difference is, this ballooning action is carried out simultaneously by millions of young spiders. Even though it disturbs residents’ activities, this incident is called “Angel’s Hair” by local residents and will disappear by itself next summer.

    10. GOLF BALL RAIN

    Can you imagine if it rained golf balls in your area or city? It turns out that the golf rain phenomenon actually happened in Florida in September 1969. This strange rain phenomenon could indeed happen, according to meteorologists, the area where golf rain occurs is known for its many golf courses. One time there was a tornado that caused the golf balls to participate in the storm circle. When the storm stopped, the golf balls finally fell like rain.

    11. RAIN OF COFFEE CREAM

    Who would have thought that ingredients like coffee cream could fall from the sky? This unique phenomenon occurs in South Carolina, United States. In 1969, the citizens of South Carolina were confused by a sudden shower of white powder falling from the sky. After trying it, the white powder turned out to be coffee cream! Something’s Happening The day after it rained coffee chips, the city of South Carolina was covered in white dust. Residents can’t even do their usual activities because the roads are covered in fog. Upon investigation, the source of the rain was the explosion of a production tube at a local coffee cream factory.

     

    12. RAINING COW

    In 1997 a Japanese fishing boat was rescued in the Sea of ​​Japan. They claim that a cow fell from the sky and hit their boat causing it to sink. The crew members were immediately imprisoned because they were thought to be making it up. About 2 weeks later, the Russian Air Force informed the Japanese Government that the crew of one of its cargo ships had stolen a cow and placed it in an inappropriate position on the plane. Because of that, the Cow went berserk when the ship was flying, causing the plane to roll uncontrollably. To save the plane and themselves, at an altitude of about 30,000 feet, the crew was forced to push the cow down while crossing the sea of ​​Japan.

    13. TSUNAMI CLOUDS

    Tsunami Clouds in England Hundreds of visitors to Lake Huron in England, in August 2018 joined to watch a rare natural phenomenon, a cloud tsunami, which is occurring in a line of clouds in the sky of the lake. Cloud tsunami, or what is often referred to as a fog bank is a collection of clouds that look like they are rolling up in the sky. According to the National Weather Service, as quoted by Mother Nature Network, fog banks can occur due to hot air condensing on a stretch of cold water. The hotter top of the cloud will sink to the bottom. This will cause the clouds to look like they are rolled up, which many tourists describe as tsunami clouds. Although a little scary, this phenomenon is not harmful at all and is actually a phenomenon that attracts the eye.

    14. FIRE TORNADOS IN JAPAN

    A fire tornado, or what is more commonly called Firenado, is a natural phenomenon that is both rare and dangerous. Fire tornadoes are common in the dry season on peatlands that are currently experiencing major fires.

    Fires that burn peatlands coupled with low air pressure tend to end in the emergence of fire tornadoes which have heat of up to 1,000 degrees Celsius, increasing the destructive power of tornadoes and of course making it difficult to deal with them. Although fire tornadoes are often only within the reach of a small area, in 1923, fire tornadoes became a nightmare for the residents of Yokohama in Japan.

    According to Smithsonian Magazine, the earthquake that history calls the “Great Kanto Earthquake” occurred on September 1, 1923, ravaging Japan in three earthquakes, all of which were over magnitude 7. The earthquake, which was followed by tsunami waves in the Atami area, also destroyed the wooden houses of residents in the Yokohama area.

    The earthquake also caused a large fire in Yokohama, burning the remains of houses made of flammable wood. The fire apparently also resulted in low air pressure in the Yokohama area. It was low enough that a hurricane formed which then grew into a fiery tornado up to 300 feet high. The fire tornado completely devoured the Yokohama area, killing more than 44 thousand victims.

    15. RAINING DIRT

    This highly unwanted rain occurred on May 9 last year in Canada. A witness named Susan Allan was driving a car with her child when suddenly she smelled an unpleasant odor which turned out to be feces. The incident looks like drops of mud falling from the sky. Scientists find it difficult to identify where the dirt comes from. There are some scientists who say that it is bird droppings, but there is still no clear evidence about it.

    16. THE WORLD’S DESTEST RAIN AT UNIONVILLE

    This record is owned by Unionville, Maryland, USA on July 4, 1956, 31.2 millimeters of rain fell per minute. As a comparison in sub-tropical regions, Hong Kong alone, has the heaviest rain of up to 70 millimeters of rain in one hour, not per minute.

    17. TEMPERATURE DOWN TO -89.2 CELCIUS IN ANTARCTICA

    The lowest temperature in the world has ever occurred to -89.2 Celsius. This temperature extreme occurred on July 21, 1983 in Vostok Antarctica, yes, Celsius, not Fahrenheit. The absence of solar radiation, the sky is clean, the air is stable all the time, and the high elevation (3,420 meters) is the main reason for the extreme cold weather in the area.

    18. HARDEST RAIN IN 24 HOURS

    The heaviest rain to fall in 24 hours occurred on Cyclone Denise on Foc-foc, an island in the Indian Ocean. The heavy rain fell as much as 1,825 meters for 24 hours from 7-8 January 1966.

    19. WORST ICE RAIN IN BANGLADESH, 92 PEOPLE KILL

    Worst Hail in Bangladesh. The heaviest hailstorm that ever occurred in the world experienced the city of Gopalganj, Bangladesh on April 14, 1986. Each piece of ice that fell weighed up to 1.02 kg. This terrible natural phenomenon killed 92 people.

    Source: from various sources